Table of Contents

Maryland Stormwater Design Manual

VOLUME ONE

Page
List of Tables ................................................................................................................................... i
List of Figures ................................................................................................................................. ii
Preface.............................................................................................................................................iv

Chapter 1: Introduction to the Manual

1.0 Purpose of Manual ............................................................................................................1.1

1.1 Why Stormwater Matters: Impact of Runoff on Maryland Watersheds...........................1.3
1.1.1 Declining Water Quality .......................................................................................1.5
1.1.2 Diminishing Groundwater Recharge and Quality ................................................1.7
1.1.3 Degradation of Stream Channels ..........................................................................1.8
1.1.4 Increased Overbank Flooding .............................................................................1.10
1.1.5 Floodplain Expansion .........................................................................................1.11
1.2 General Performance Standards for Stormwater Management in Maryland..................1.13
1.3 How to Use the Manual ..................................................................................................1.16
1.3.1 Volume One ........................................................................................................1.16
1.3.2 Volume Two (Appendices) ................................................................................1.17
1.4 Revising the Manual .......................................................................................................1.19
1.5 What’s New ....................................................................................................................1.19
1.6 Symbols and Acronyms ..................................................................................................1.21

Chapter 2: Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria

2.0 Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ..................................................................................2.1

2.1 Water Quality Volume (WQv) ..........................................................................................2.2
2.2 Recharge Volume Requirements (Rev).............................................................................2.5
2.3 Channel Protection Storage Volume Requirements (Cpv)................................................2.8
2.4 Overbank Flood Protection Volume Requirements (Qp2 or Qp10) .................................2.12
2.5 Extreme Flood Volume (Qf ) ..........................................................................................2.13
2.6 Design Examples: Computing Stormwater Storage Requirements ................................2.14

NOTE: The Maryland Stormwater Design Manual has been revised. Changes are identified
as Supplements (e.g., Supp. 1) and occur throughout the design manual. When there are
conflicts between supplemental and original requirements, the newest shall supersede.

TOC-1 Supp. 1
2.7 Acceptable Urban BMP Options ....................................................................................2.37
2.7.1 Urban BMP Groups ............................................................................................2.37
2.7.2 Structural BMPs that do not fully meet the WQv Requirement .........................2.39
2.8 Designation of Stormwater Hotspots .............................................................................2.41

Chapter 3: Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design

3.0 Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ..................................................................3.1

3.1 Stormwater Ponds .............................................................................................................3.2
3.1.1 Pond Feasibility Criteria .......................................................................................3.8
3.1.2 Pond Conveyance Criteria ....................................................................................3.9
3.1.3 Pond Pretreatment Criteria..................................................................................3.10
3.1.4 Pond Treatment Criteria......................................................................................3.10
3.1.5 Pond Landscaping Criteria..................................................................................3.11
3.1.6 Pond Maintenance Criteria .................................................................................3.12
3.2 Stormwater Wetlands......................................................................................................3.16
3.2.1 Wetland Feasibility Criteria................................................................................3.21
3.2.2 Wetland Conveyance Criteria .............................................................................3.21
3.2.3 Wetland Pretreatment Criteria ............................................................................3.21
3.2.4 Wetland Treatment Criteria ................................................................................3.21
3.2.5 Wetland Landscaping Criteria ............................................................................3.22
3.2.6 Wetland Maintenance Criteria ............................................................................3.24
3.3 Stormwater Infiltration ...................................................................................................3.25
3.3.1 Infiltration Feasibility Criteria ............................................................................3.28
3.3.2 Infiltration Conveyance Criteria .........................................................................3.28
3.3.3 Infiltration Pretreatment Criteria ........................................................................3.29
3.3.4 Infiltration Treatment Criteria ............................................................................3.30
3.3.5 Infiltration Landscaping Criteria ........................................................................3.30
3.3.6 Infiltration Maintenance Criteria ........................................................................3.30
3.4 Stormwater Filtering Systems.........................................................................................3.31
3.4.1 Filtering Feasibility Criteria ...............................................................................3.38
3.4.2 Filtering Conveyance Criteria.............................................................................3.38
3.4.3 Filtering Pretreatment Criteria ............................................................................3.38
3.4.4 Filtering Treatment Criteria ................................................................................3.39
3.4.5 Filtering Landscaping Criteria ............................................................................3.40
3.4.6 Filtering Maintenance Criteria............................................................................3.41
3.5 Open Channel Systems ...................................................................................................3.42
3.5.1 Open Channel Feasibility Criteria ......................................................................3.45
3.5.2 Open Channel Conveyance Criteria ...................................................................3.45
3.5.3 Open Channel Pretreatment Criteria...................................................................3.45
3.5.4 Open Channel Treatment Criteria.......................................................................3.46
3.5.5 Open Channel Landscaping Criteria...................................................................3.46

Supp. 1 TOC-2
Table of Contents Maryland Stormwater Design Manual

3.5.6 Open Channel Maintenance Criteria...................................................................3.46

Chapter 4: A Guide to BMP Selection and Location in the State of Maryland

4.0 Selecting the Best BMP at a Site ......................................................................................4.1

4.1 Watershed Factors.............................................................................................................4.3
4.2 Terrain Factors ..................................................................................................................4.6
4.3 Stormwater Treatment Suitability.....................................................................................4.8
4.4 Physical Feasibility Factors ............................................................................................4.10
4.5 Community and Environmental Factors .........................................................................4.12
4.6 Checklist: Location/Permitting Factors ..........................................................................4.14

Chapter 5: Environmental Site Design

5.0 Introduction.......................................................................................................................5.1
5.1 Design Process and Planning Techniques ........................................................................5.4
5.2 Addressing the Unified Sizing Criteria...........................................................................5.17
5.3 Alternative Surfaces........................................................................................................5.41
5.4 Treatment Using Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices ...........................................5.55
5.5 Redevelopment .............................................................................................................5.117
5.6 Special Criteria for Sensitive Waters ...........................................................................5.121

Glossary ..................................................................................................................................... G.1

References...................................................................................................................................R.1

TOC-3 Supp. 1
VOLUME TWO: APPENDICES

Appendix A: Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs

A.1 General Landscaping Guidance for All Stormwater BMPs.............................................A.2

A.2 Specific Landscaping Criteria for BMP Groups..............................................................A.4
A.2.1 Ponds and Wetlands.............................................................................................A.4
A.2.2 Infiltration and Filter Systems ...........................................................................A.12
A.2.3 Bioretention .......................................................................................................A.12
A.2.4 Open Channels ...................................................................................................A.18
A.2.5 Filter Strips and Stream Buffer ..........................................................................A.18
A.3 Plant Selection for Stormwater Facilities ......................................................................A.19
A.3.1 Hardiness Zones.................................................................................................A.19
A.3.2 Physiographic Provinces....................................................................................A.21
A.3.3 Hydrologic Zones ..............................................................................................A.25
A.3.3 Other Considerations in Stormwater BMP Landscaping...................................A.26
A.4 Stormwater Plant List ....................................................................................................A.27
A.5 References......................................................................................................................A.49

Appendix B: BMP Construction Specifications

B.1 NRCS-MD Code No 378 Pond Standards/ Specifications ..............................................B.1

B.1.1 Supplemental Pond and Wetland Stormwater Specifications........................B.1.1.1
B.1.2 MDE Dam Safety Small Pond Review Criteria.............................................B.1.2.1
B.2 Construction Specifications for Infiltration Practices...................................................B.2.1
B.3 Construction Specifications for Bioretention, Sand Filters, and Open Channels.........B.3.1
B.4 Construction Specifications for Environmental Site Design Practices.........................B.4.1

Appendix C: Step-by-Step Design Examples

C.1 Shallow Wetland Design Example ...............................................................................C.1.1

C.2 Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs ...................................................................C.2.1
C.2.1 Design Criteria ..................................................................................................C.2.2
C.2.2 Preliminary Design ...........................................................................................C.2.2
C.2.3 BMP Design Option 1.......................................................................................C.2.8
C-2.3.1 Perimeter Sand Filter (F-3) .............................................................C.2.8
C-2.3.2 Pocket Sand Filter (F-5)................................................................C.2.12
C.2.4 BMP Design Option 2.....................................................................................C.2.16
C.2.4.1 Bioretention System (F-6) ..................................................................C.2.17
C.2.4.2 Infiltration Trench (I-1) ......................................................................C.2.18
C.2.5 BMP Design Option 3.....................................................................................C.2.21
C.2.5.1 Dry Swale (O-1)..................................................................................C.2.21

Supp. 1 TOC-4
Table of Contents Maryland Stormwater Design Manual

Appendix D: Assorted Design Tools

D.1 Testing Requirements for Infiltration, Bioretention, and Sand Filter Subsoils ............D.1.1
D.2 Geotechnical Methods for Karst Feasibility Testing ....................................................D.2.1
D.3 Short Cut Method for a Wetland Drawdown Assessment ............................................D.3.1
D.4 Stormwater Criteria for the Maryland Critical Area IDA Zone ...................................D.4.1
D.5 Documentation of BMP Ability to Meet the 80% TSS Removal Requirement ...........D.5.1
D.6 Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements ...................................................D.6.1
D.7 MDE/WMA Overview of the NPDES Stormwater Program .......................................D.7.1
D.8 Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria ..............................D.8.1
D.9 MD Stream Use Designations.......................................................................................D.9.1
D.10 Method for Computing Peak Discharge for Water Quality Storm .............................D.10.1
D.11 Method for Computing the Channel Protection Storage Volume (Cpv) .....................D.11.1
D.12 Critical Erosive Velocity for Grass and Soil ..............................................................D.12.1
D.13 Method for Designing Infiltration Structures .............................................................D.13.1
D.14 Eastern Shore (Delmarva) Dimensionless Hydrograph..............................................D.14.1
D.15 Miscellaneous MD SHA Design Charts for Determining Pipe Inlet Control.............D.15.1

Appendix E: Archived Material

E.1 Stormwater Credits for Innovative Site Planning ......................................................... E.1.1

TOC-5 Supp. 1
LIST OF TABLES

No. Title Page

1.1 Typical Pollutant Concentrations Found in Urban Stormwater........................................1.6

1.2 NRCS Estimates of Annual Recharge Rates, Based on Soil Type ...................................1.7
1.3 Symbols and Acronyms ..................................................................................................1.21

2.1 Summary of the Statewide Stormwater Criteria ...............................................................2.1

2.2 Rainfall Depths Associated with the 1,2,10, and 100 Year 24-hour Storm Events........2.11
2.3 Summary of General Storage Requirements for Reker Meadows..................................2.19
2.4 Summary of General Design Information for Claytor Community Center ....................2.25
2.5 Summary of General Storage Requirements for Pensyl Pointe ......................................2.34
2.6 Classification of Stormwater Hotspots ...........................................................................2.42

4.1 BMP Selection Matrix No. 1: Watershed Factors ............................................................4.5

4.2 BMP Selection Matrix No. 2: Terrain Factors..................................................................4.7
4.3 BMP Selection Matrix No. 3: Stormwater Treatment Suitability ....................................4.9
4.4 BMP Selection Matrix No. 4: Physical Feasibility.........................................................4.11
4.5 BMP Selection Matrix No. 5: Community and Environmental Factors.........................4.13
4.6 Location and Permitting Factors Checklist.....................................................................4.15

5.1 Natural Resources & Corresponding Regulatory Authorities ..........................................5.7

5.2 Summary of Site Development Strategies ......................................................................5.10
5.3 Rainfall Targets/Runoff Curve Number Reductions Used for ESD...............................5.21
5.4 Effective RCNs for Extensive Green Roofs ...................................................................5.42
5.5 Effective RCNs for Permeable Pavements .....................................................................5.48
5.6 ESD Sizing Factors for Rooftop Disconnection .............................................................5.59
5.7 ESD Sizing Factors for Non-Rooftop Disconnection.....................................................5.62
5.8 Sheetflow to Conservation Area Sizing Factors .............................................................5.67
5.9 Solar Reflectance Indices for Typical Paving & Roofing Materials ............................5.122

i Supp. 1
LIST OF FIGURES

No. Title Page

1.1 Water Balance at a Developed and Undeveloped Site .....................................................1.3

1.2 Relationship between Impervious Cover and the Volumetric Runoff Coefficient...........1.4
1.3 Decline in Stream Flow Due to Diminished Groundwater Recharge...............................1.8
1.4 Increased Frequency of Flows Greater than the Critical Discharge Rate in a Stream
Channel After Development… .........................................................................................1.9
1.5 Change in Hydrograph Following Development............................................................1.11
1.6 Change in Floodplain Elevations....................................................................................1.12

2.1 Location of the Eastern and Western Rainfall Zones in Maryland...................................2.3

2.2 Relationship between Impervious Cover and the Water Quality Volume........................2.3
2.3 Relationship between Rev and Site Impervious Cover .....................................................2.6
2.4 Regions of Maryland Not Subject to the Channel Protection Requirement (Cpv)............2.8
2.5 Example of Conventional Stormwater Detention Pond....................................................2.9
2.6 Reker Meadows ..............................................................................................................2.15
2.7 Reker Meadows: Pre Developed Conditions ..................................................................2.20
2.8 Reker Meadows: Developed Conditions ........................................................................2.21
2.9 Claytor Community Center.............................................................................................2.22
2.10 Claytor Community Center: Pre Developed Conditions ................................................2.26
2.11 Claytor Community Center: Developed Conditions.......................................................2.27
2.12 Pensyl Pointe...................................................................................................................2.29
2.13 Pensyl Pointe: Drainage Area 1-Post Developed Conditions.........................................2.35
2.14 Pensyl Pointe: Drainage Area 2–Post Developed Conditions ........................................2.36

3.1 Example of "Micropool" Extended Detention Pond.........................................................3.3

3.2 Example of Wet Pond .......................................................................................................3.4
3.3 Example of Wet Extended Detention Pond ......................................................................3.5
3.4 Example of Multiple Pond System ...................................................................................3.6
3.5 Example of Pocket Pond...................................................................................................3.7
3.6 Example of Shallow Wetland .........................................................................................3.17
3.7 Example of Extended Detention Shallow Wetland ........................................................3.18
3.8 Example of Pond/Wetland System .................................................................................3.19
3.9 Example of Pocket Wetland............................................................................................3.20
3.10 Example of Infiltration Trench .......................................................................................3.26
3.11 Example of Infiltration Basin .........................................................................................3.27
3.12 Example of Surface Sand Filter ......................................................................................3.32

Supp. 1 ii
No. Title Page

3.13 Example of Underground Sand Filter .............................................................................3.33

3.14 Example of Perimeter Sand Filter...................................................................................3.34
3.15 Example of Organic Filter ..............................................................................................3.35
3.16 Example of Pocket Sand Filter .......................................................................................3.36
3.17 Example of Bioretention .................................................................................................3.37
3.18 Example of Dry Swale ....................................................................................................3.43
3.19 Example of Wet Swale....................................................................................................3.44

4.1 Map of Maryland Showing Key Terrain Factors..............................................................4.6

5.1 Design Process for New Development .............................................................................5.6

5.2 Cutaway of a Typical Green Roof ..................................................................................5.44
5.3 Examples of Permeable Pavements ................................................................................5.49
5.4 Example of Disconnection of Rooftop Runoff ...............................................................5.58
5.5 Example of Non-Rooftop Disconnection........................................................................5.64
5.6 Example of Non-Rooftop Disconnection........................................................................5.65
5.7 Example of Sheetflow to Conservation Area..................................................................5.68
5.8 Example of Rain Barrels.................................................................................................5.74
5.0 Example of Cistern .........................................................................................................5.75
5.10 Example of Submerged Gravel Wetland ........................................................................5.79
5.11 Example of Landscape Infiltration .................................................................................5.85
5.12 Example of Infiltration Berms ........................................................................................5.89
5.13 Example of Dry Wells ....................................................................................................5.93
5.14 Example of Micro-Bioretention (Variation 1) ................................................................5.99
5.15 Example of Micro-Bioretention (Variation 2) ..............................................................5.100
5.16 Example of Micro-Bioretention (Variation 3) ..............................................................5.101
5.17 Example of Rain Garden...............................................................................................5.107
5.18 Example of a Bio-Swale ...............................................................................................5.111
5.19 Example of a Wet Swale...............................................................................................5.112
5.20 Example of Enhanced Filters ........................................................................................5.116
5.21 Design Process for Redevelopment ..............................................................................5.120

iii Supp. 1
MARYLAND STORMWATER DESIGN MANUAL
VOLUMES I AND II

Preface

Stormwater management has evolved dramatically in Maryland since it became the first state to
adopt stormwater quality regulations some fifteen years ago. Much has been learned about what
works in the field and what does not. The goal for this project is to compile this hard-won
knowledge and experience into a single comprehensive design manual that is truly useful to
engineers and plan reviewers who design and construct stormwater practices.

We would like to acknowledge the many people who helped us get to this point. In particular, we
are grateful to the staff at the Water Management Administration of the Maryland Department of
Environment who played an active role in getting the manual to this point. In particular, the
patience and support of Stewart Comstock (Project Manager), Ken Pensyl, Brian Clevenger and
James Tracy is gratefully acknowledged. In addition, the assistance of other MDE staff was most
helpful.

The manual could never have been produced without the talents, experience and hard work of our
project team partners, Environmental Quality Resources, Inc. (EQR), and Loiederman Associates,
Inc (LAI). In particular, we would like to acknowledge the great contributions of Timothy
Schueler, Richard Scafidi, and Joanne Reker of EQR, and Karen Carpenter, Michael Wagner,
Josie Greenberg, and Cliff Deward of LAI.

Thanks are also extended to the members of the Stormwater Management Regulations Committee
(SMRC), whose insightful comments and local perspective in reviewing earlier drafts were most
helpful in improving the manual. SMRC members who graciously gave their time and advice
included: David Bourdon (Prince George’s Soil Conservation District), Richard Brush
(Montgomery County), Michael Clar (Engineering Technology Associates), Andrew Daneker
(Howard County Bureau of Highways), Neal Fitzpatrick (Audubon Naturalist Society), John Galli
(Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments), James Gracie (Brightwater, Inc.), Terrence
McGee (Washington County), John Mickley (Washington County Soil Conservation District),
Joseph Necker (The Rouse Company), Steven Oder (Cavalier Development), Daniel O’Leary
(Parsons Brinkerhoff, Inc), John Redden (Wicomico County), James Slater (Carroll County),
Susan Straus (City of Rockville), William Street (Chesapeake Bay Foundation), Raja
Veeramachaneni (Maryland State Highway Administration) and Tom Vidmar (Baltimore County).

The authors would also like to acknowledge Tom Devilbiss (Carroll County), John Redden
(Wicomico County), and Terrence McGee (Washington County) for their help in providing their
perspectives on stormwater management in unique terrain areas of the State.
A publication of the Maryland Department of the Environment in
cooperation with the Maryland Department of Natural Resources Coastal
Zone Management Program pursuant to National Oceanic and Atmospheric
Administration Award No. NA67OZ0302.
Special thanks are extended to Hye Yeong Kwon of the Center for Watershed Protection (CWP) for
her heroic efforts to assemble and knit together the many pieces of the manual into a final product.
Chris Swann and Deborah Caraco also provided valuable input and review.

This manual was prepared for the Water Management Administration under a cooperative agreement
between that agency and the Maryland Department of Natural Resources pursuant to National
Oceanic and Atmospheric Administration Grant No. NA67OZ0302. Reference to any particular
commercial products and trade names in this manual does not in any way constitute an endorsement
by the State.

Thomas Schueler Richard Claytor

Center for Watershed Protection

v
 +

Introduction
1.0
Chapter
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual..................................................... Introduction and Purpose

1.0 Introduction and Purpose of Manual

Title 4, Subtitle 2 of the Environment Article of Annotated Code of Maryland states that “…the
management of stormwater runoff is necessary to reduce stream channel erosion, pollution, siltation
and sedimentation, and local flooding, all of which have adverse impacts on the water and land
resources of Maryland.” The program designed in the early 1980s to address this finding of the
General Assembly concentrated primarily on controlling runoff increases and mitigating water
quality degradation associated with new development. The counties and municipalities in Maryland
are responsible for administering effective stormwater management programs that “…maintain after
development, as nearly as possible the predevelopment characteristics…” These localities have
performed remarkably in establishing Maryland as a national leader in stormwater management
technology. Over the last 14 years, tens of thousands of best management practices (BMPs) have
been constructed in an attempt to meet program mandates. However, the experience gained since
Maryland’s stormwater statute was enacted has identified necessary improvements and revealed a
need to refocus the approach to fulfill the original intent of this essential water pollution control
program.

Recently, increased emphasis on water quality, resource protection needs, increased BMP
maintenance costs, and identified shortcomings in Maryland’s program have all contributed to basic
philosophical changes regarding stormwater management. The “Maryland Stormwater Design
Manual” is an effort to incorporate the significant experiences gained by the State’s stormwater
community and accommodate much needed improvements for managing urban runoff. It is hoped
that the design standards and environmental incentives provided below will produce better methods
and advance the science of managing stormwater by relying less on single BMPs for all development
projects and more on mimicking existing hydrology through total site design policies. Additionally,
the inherent philosophical change should produce smaller less obtrusive facilities that are more
aesthetic and less burdensome on those responsible for long-term maintenance and performance.

The purpose of this manual is threefold:

to protect the waters of the State from adverse impacts of urban stormwater runoff,

to provide design guidance on the most effective planning techniques, and nonstructural and
structural BMPs for development sites, and

to improve the quality of BMPs that are constructed in the State, specifically with regard to
performance, longevity, safety, ease of maintenance, community acceptance and
environmental benefit.

The BMPs and the required design criteria below represent conventional stormwater
management technology for controlling runoff from new development projects. Based upon
current available research, the Maryland Department of the Environment, Water Management

1.1 Supp. 1
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual..................................................... Introduction and Purpose

Administration (MDE/WMA) has evaluated each BMP group and the associated design variants
and has developed standards for each so that all perform similarly. The “General Performance
Standards” outlined in this manual (see Section 1.2, page 1.13) specify those criteria that were
used to create runoff control options that would perform equally. The BMPs contained in this
manual are by no means exclusive. MDE encourages the development of innovative practices
that meet the intent of Maryland’s stormwater management law and can perform according to the
standards in Section 1.2. In the future, should structural or non-structural practices be developed
that meet the standards specified below, MDE will approve their use for controlling new
development runoff.

MDE encourages wise, environmentally sensitive site designs to reduce the generation of runoff
borne pollution. Additionally, Maryland has adopted “Smart Growth” policies that are geared
toward concentrating development where it currently exists thereby reducing “suburban sprawl.”
Therefore, redevelopment is encouraged. A stormwater management policy for redevelopment
is established in the Code of Maryland Regulations (COMAR 26.17.02). Additionally,
redevelopment is defined in both COMAR and this manual.

The policy required in COMAR for redevelopment basically specifies a 50% reduction in
impervious surface area below existing conditions. Because this may be impractical due to site
constraints, environmental site design (ESD) practices are to be used to the maximum extent
practicable (MEP) to meet the equivalent in water quality control of a 50% decrease in
impervious surface area. Various alternative BMPs that do not necessarily meet the performance
criteria established in this manual may be implemented for redevelopment projects provided that
it is demonstrated that impervious area reduction and ESD have been implemented to the MEP.
These alternative BMPs may also be implemented to satisfy the pretreatment volume
requirements established in Chapter 3 below. Individual project designers should contact the
appropriate approval authority for the specific practices allowed for redevelopment and
pretreatment purposes.

The approval of new control technologies, modifications to the practices contained in this
manual, and alternative policies regarding stormwater management for new development is the
responsibility of MDE. Typically, information is submitted to the WMA that describes the
policy or practice. For new BMPs, monitoring data need to be submitted that demonstrate that
the performance criteria in this manual can be met. WMA then reviews this material to
determine if the proposed practice is appropriate for use on new development projects. Because
of local variations in ownership policies, maintenance abilities, cost, design standards,
hydrology, etc., information on practices to be used for redevelopment and pretreatment should
be submitted to the appropriate authority for approval.

NOTE: The Maryland Stormwater Design Manual has been revised. Changes are identified as
Supplements (e.g., Supp. 1) and occur throughout the design manual. When there are conflicts
between supplemental and original requirements, the newest shall supersede.

Supp. 1 1.2
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff

Section 1.1 Why Stormwater Matters: Impact of Runoff on Maryland’s Watersheds

Urban development has a profound influence on the quality of Maryland’s waters. To start,
development dramatically alters the local hydrologic cycle (see Figure 1.1). The hydrology of a
site changes during the initial clearing and grading that occur during construction. Trees, meadow
grasses, and agricultural crops that had intercepted and absorbed rainfall are removed and natural
depressions that had temporarily ponded water are graded to a uniform slope. Cleared and graded
sites erode, are often severely compacted, and can no longer prevent rainfall from being rapidly
converted into stormwater runoff.

Figure 1.1 Water Balance at a Developed and Undeveloped Site

(Source: Schueler, 1987)

Surface runoff is minimal in an undeveloped site, but dominates the water balance at a
highly impervious site.

1.3
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff

The situation worsens after construction. Roof tops, roads, parking lots, driveways and other
impervious surfaces no longer allow rainfall to soak into the ground. Consequently, most rainfall
is converted directly to stormwater runoff. This phenomenon is illustrated in Figure 1.2, which
shows the increase in the volumetric runoff coefficient (Rv) as a function of site imperviousness.
The runoff coefficient expresses the fraction of rainfall volume that is converted into stormwater
runoff. As can be seen, the volume of stormwater runoff increases sharply with impervious cover.
For example, a one acre parking lot can produce 16 times more stormwater runoff than a one acre
meadow each year (Schueler, 1994).

The increase in stormwater runoff can be too much for the existing natural drainage system to
handle. As a result, the natural drainage system is often “improved” to rapidly collect runoff and
quickly convey it away (using curb and gutter, enclosed storm sewers, and lined channels). The
stormwater runoff is subsequently discharged to downstream waters such as streams, reservoirs,
lakes or estuaries.

Figure 1.2 Relationship between Impervious Cover and the Volumetric Runoff Coefficient
(Source: Schueler, 1987)

The runoff coefficient (Rv) expresses the fraction of rainfall that is converted into runoff.
The data points reflect over 35 monitoring stations in the U.S.

1.4
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff

1.1.1 Declining Water Quality

Impervious surfaces accumulate pollutants deposited from the atmosphere, leaked from vehicles,
or windblown from adjacent areas. During storm events, these pollutants quickly wash off and are
rapidly delivered to downstream waters. Some common pollutants found in urban stormwater
runoff are profiled in Table 1.1 and include:

Nutrients. Urban runoff has elevated concentrations of both phosphorus and nitrogen, which can
enrich streams, lakes, reservoirs and estuaries (known as eutrophication). In particular, excess
nutrients have been documented to be a major factor in the decline of Chesapeake Bay. Excess
nutrients promote algal growth that blocks sunlight from reaching underwater grasses and depletes
oxygen in bottom waters. Urban runoff has been identified as a key and controllable source.
Maryland has committed to reducing tributary nutrient loadings by 40% as part of the Chesapeake
Bay restoration effort.

Suspended solids. Sources of sediment include washoff of particles that are deposited on
impervious surfaces and the erosion of streambanks and construction sites. Both suspended and
deposited sediments can have adverse effects on aquatic life in streams, lakes and estuaries.
Sediments also transport other attached pollutants.

Organic Carbon. Organic matter, washed from impervious surfaces during storms, can present a
problem in slower moving downstream waters. As organic matter decomposes, it can deplete
dissolved oxygen in lakes and tidal waters. Low levels of oxygen in the water can have an adverse
impact on aquatic life.

Bacteria. Bacteria levels in stormwater runoff routinely exceed public health standards for water
contact recreation. Stormwater runoff can also lead to the closure of adjacent shellfish beds and
swimming beaches and may increase the cost of treating drinking water at water supply reservoirs.

Hydrocarbons. Vehicles leak oil and grease that contain a wide array of hydrocarbon compounds,
some of which can be toxic at low concentrations to aquatic life.

Trace Metals. Cadmium, copper, lead and zinc are routinely found in stormwater runoff. These
metals can be toxic to aquatic life at certain concentrations and can also accumulate in the
sediments of streams, lakes and the Chesapeake Bay.

Pesticides. A modest number of currently used and recently banned insecticides and herbicides
have been detected in urban streamflow at concentrations that approach or exceed toxicity
thresholds for aquatic life.

1.5
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff

Chlorides. Salts that are applied to roads and parking lots in the winter months appear in
stormwater runoff and meltwater at much higher concentrations than many freshwater organisms
can tolerate.

Thermal Impacts. Impervious surfaces may increase temperature in receiving waters, adversely
impacting aquatic life that requires cold and cool water conditions (e.g., trout).

Trash and Debris. Considerable quantities of trash and debris are washed through storm drain
networks. The trash and debris accumulate in streams and lakes and detract from their natural
beauty.

Table 1.1 Typical Pollutant Concentrations Found in Urban Stormwater

Typical Pollutants Found in Stormwater Units Average Concentration (1)

Runoff (Data Source)
Total Suspended Solids (a) mg/l 80
Total Phosphorus (b) mg/l 0.30
Total Nitrogen (a) mg/l 2.0
Total Organic Carbon (d) mg/l 12.7
Fecal Coliform Bacteria (c) MPN/100 ml 3600
E. coli Bacteria (c) MPN/100 ml 1450
Petroleum Hydrocarbons (d) mg/l 3.5
Cadmium (e) ug/l 2
Copper (a) ug/l 10
Lead (a) ug/l 18
Zinc (e) ug/l 140
Chlorides (f) (winter only) mg/l 230
Insecticides (g) ug/l 0.1 to 2.0
Herbicides (g) ug/l 1 to 5.0
(1) these concentrations represent mean or median storm concentrations measured at typical sites and may be
greater during individual storms. Also note that mean or median runoff concentrations from stormwater
hotspots are 2 to 10 times higher than those shown here. Units = mg/l = milligrams/liter, µg/l =
micrograms/liter, MPN = Most Probable Number.
Data Sources: (a) Schueler (1987) (b) Schueler (1995), (c) Schueler (1997), (d) Rabanal and Grizzard (1996)
(e) USEPA (1983) (f) Oberts (1995) (g) Schueler, (1996)

1.6
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff

1.1.2 Diminishing Groundwater Recharge and Quality

The slow infiltration of rainfall through the soil layer is essential for replenishing groundwater.
The amount of rainfall that recharges groundwater varies, depending on the slope, soil, and
vegetation. Some indication of the importance of recharge is shown in Table 1.2 which shows
Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) regional estimates of average annual recharge
volume based on soil type.

Table 1.2 NRCS Estimates of Annual Recharge Rates, Based on Soil Type

Hydrologic Soil Average Annual

Group (NRCS) Recharge Volume

“A” Soils 18 inches/year

“B” Soils 12 inches/year

“C” Soils 6 inches/year

“D” Soils 3 inches/year

Average annual rainfall is about 42 inches per year across Maryland.

Groundwater is a critical water resource across the State. Not only do many residents depend on
groundwater for their drinking water, but the health of many aquatic systems is also dependent on
its steady discharge. For example, during periods of dry weather, groundwater sustains flows in
streams and helps to maintain the hydrology of non-tidal wetlands (Figure 1.3). Because
development creates impervious surfaces that prevent natural recharge, a net decrease in
groundwater recharge rates can be expected in urban watersheds. Thus, during prolonged periods
of dry weather, stream flow sharply diminishes. In smaller headwater streams, the decline in
stream flow can cause a perennial stream to become seasonally dry.

1.7
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff

Figure 1.3 Decline in Stream Flow Due to Diminished Groundwater Recharge

After development, stream flow declines during extended periods of dry weather because of
the diminished recharge of groundwater.

Urban land uses and activities can also degrade groundwater quality if stormwater runoff is
directed into the soil without adequate treatment. Certain land uses and activities are known to
produce higher loads of metals and toxic chemicals and are designated as stormwater hotspots.
Soluble pollutants, such as chloride, nitrate, copper, dissolved solids and some polycyclic aromatic
hydrocarbons (PAH’s) can migrate into groundwater and potentially contaminate wells.
Stormwater runoff should never be infiltrated into the soil if a site is a designated hotspot.

1.1.3 Degradation of Stream Channels

Stormwater runoff is a powerful force that influences the geometry of streams. After
development, both the frequency and magnitude of storm flows increase dramatically.
Consequently, urban stream channels experience more bankfull and sub-bankfull flow events each
year than they had prior to development (see Figure 1.4).

1.8
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff

Figure 1.4 Increased Frequency of Flows Greater than the Critical Discharge Rate
in a Stream Channel after Development

Development greatly increases the frequency that a stream exceeds the critical discharge rate
(the discharge rate associated with bankfull flow) that corresponds to the onset of channel
erosion and enlargement.

As a result, the stream bed and banks are exposed to highly erosive flows more frequently and for
longer periods. Streams typically respond to this change by increasing cross-sectional area to
handle the more frequent and erosive flows either by channel widening or down cutting, or both.
This results in a highly unstable phase where the stream experiences severe bank erosion and
habitat degradation. In this phase, the stream often experiences some of the following changes:

rapid stream widening

increased streambank and channel erosion
decline in stream substrate quality (through sediment deposition and embedding of the
substrate)
loss of pool/riffle structure in the stream channel
degradation of stream habitat structure

1.9
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff
The decline in the physical habitat of the stream, coupled with lower base flows and higher
stormwater pollutant loads, has a severe impact on the aquatic community. Recent research has
shown the following changes in stream ecology:

decline in aquatic insect and freshwater mussel diversity

decline in fish diversity
degradation of aquatic habitat

Traditionally, Maryland has attempted to provide some measure of channel protection by imposing
the two-year storm peak discharge control requirement, which requires that the discharge from the
two-year post development peak rates be reduced to pre development levels. However, recent
research and experience indicate that the two-year peak discharge criterion is not capable of
protecting downstream channels from erosion. In some cases, controlling the two-year storm may
actually accelerate streambank erosion because it exposes the channel to a longer duration of
erosive flows than it would have otherwise received.

1.1.4 Increased Overbank Flooding

Flow events that exceed the capacity of the stream channel spill out into adjacent floodplains.
These are termed “overbank” floods and can damage property and downstream drainage
structures.

While some overbank flooding is inevitable and even desirable, the historical goal of drainage
design in most of Maryland has been to maintain pre development peak discharge rates for both
the two and ten-year frequency storms after development, thus keeping the level of overbank
flooding the same over time. This prevents costly damage or maintenance for culverts, drainage
structures, and swales.

Overbank floods are ranked in terms of their statistical return frequency. For example, a flood
that has a 50% chance of occurring in any given year is termed a “two-year” flood. The two-year
storm is also known as the “bankfull flood,” as researchers have demonstrated that most natural
stream channels in the State have just enough capacity to handle the two-year flood before spilling
into the floodplain. In Maryland, about 3.0 to 3.5 inches of rain in a 24-hour period produces a
two-year or bankfull flood. This rainfall depth is termed the two-year design storm.

Similarly, a flood that has a 10% chance of occurring in any given year is termed a “ten-year
flood." A ten-year flood occurs when a storm event produces about 4.5 to 5.5 inches of rain in a
24 hour period. Under traditional engineering practice, most channels and storm drains in
Maryland are designed with enough capacity to safely pass the peak discharge from the ten-year
design storm.

1.10
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff
Urban development increases the peak discharge rate associated with a given design storm because
impervious surfaces generate greater runoff volumes and drainage systems deliver it more rapidly
to a stream. The change in post development peak discharge rates that accompany development is
profiled in Figure 1.5.

Figure 1.5 Change in Hydrograph following Development

(Source: Schueler, 1987)

The impervious surfaces and conveyance systems of developed sites result in an earlier and
higher peak discharge rate.

1.1.5 Floodplain Expansion

The level areas bordering streams and rivers are known as floodplains. Operationally, the
floodplain is usually defined as the land area within the limits of the 100-year storm flow water
elevation. The 100-year storm has a 1% chance of occurring in any given year and typically
serves as the basis for controlling development in the State and establishing insurance rates by the
Federal Emergency Management Agency. In Maryland, a 100-year flood occurs after about 7 to 8
inches of rainfall in a 24 hour period (e.g., the 100-year storm). These floods can be very
destructive and can pose a threat to property and human life. Floodplains are natural flood storage
areas and help to attenuate downstream flooding.

1.11
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual ................................................Impact of Runoff
Floodplains are very important habitat areas, encompassing riparian forests, wetlands, and wildlife
corridors. Consequently, all local jurisdictions in Maryland restrict or even prohibit new
development within the 100-year floodplain to prevent flood hazards and conserve habitats.
Nevertheless, prior development that has occurred in the floodplain remains subject to periodic
flooding during these storms.

As with overbank floods, development sharply increases the peak discharge rate associated with
the 100-year design storm. As a consequence, the elevation of a stream’s 100 year floodplain
becomes higher and the boundaries of its floodplain expand (see Figure 1.6). In some instances,
property and structures that had not previously been subject to flooding are now at risk.
Additionally, such a shift in a floodplain’s hydrology can degrade wetlands and forest habitats.

Figure 1.6 Change in Floodplain Elevations

(Source: Schueler, 1987)

Both the elevation and the lateral boundaries of the 100-year floodplain increase when
development occurs upstream.

1.12
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual...........................................General Performance Standards

Section 1.2 General Performance Standards for Stormwater Management in Maryland

To prevent adverse impacts of stormwater runoff, the State of Maryland has developed fourteen
performance standards that must be met at development sites. These standards apply to any
construction activity disturbing 5,000 or more square feet of earth. The following development
activities are exempt from these performance standards in Maryland:

1. Additions or modifications to existing single family structures;

2. Developments that do not disturb more than 5000 square feet of land; or
3. Agricultural land management activities.

The following performance standards shall be addressed at all sites where stormwater management
is required:

Standard No. 1 Site designs shall minimize the generation of stormwater and maximize
pervious areas for stormwater treatment.

Standard No. 2 Stormwater runoff generated from development and discharged directly into
a jurisdictional wetland or waters of the State of Maryland shall be
adequately treated.

Standard No. 3 Annual groundwater recharge rates shall be maintained by promoting

infiltration through the use of structural and non-structural methods. At a
minimum, the annual recharge from post development site conditions shall
mimic the annual recharge from pre development site conditions.

Standard No. 4 Water quality management shall be provided through the use of
ennvironmental site design practices.

Standard No. 5 Structural BMPs used for new development shall be designed to remove 80%
of the average annual post development total suspended solids load (TSS)
and 40% of the average annual post development total phosphorous load
(TP). It is presumed that a BMP complies with this performance standard if it
is:

 sized to capture the prescribed water quality volume (WQv),

 designed according to the specific performance criteria outlined in
this manual,
 constructed properly, and
 maintained regularly.

1.13 Supp. 1
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual...........................................General Performance Standards

Standard No. 6 Control of the two-year and ten-year frequency storm events is required if
the local authority determines that additional stormwater management is
necessary because historical flooding problems exist and downstream
floodplain development and conveyance system design cannot be controlled.
In addition, safe conveyance of the 100-year storm event through
stormwater management practices shall be provided.

Standard No. 7 To protect stream channels from degradation, the channel protection storage
volume (Cpv) shall be based on the runoff from the one-year frequency storm
event. Environmental site design practices shall be used to the maximum
extent practicable to address Cpv. Any remaining Cpv requirements shall be
addressed using stormwater practices described in Chapter 3.

Standard No. 8 Stormwater discharges to critical areas with sensitive resources [e.g., cold
water fisheries, shellfish beds, swimming beaches, recharge areas, water
supply reservoirs, Chesapeake and Atlantic Coastal Bays Critical Area (see
Appendix D.4)] may be subject to additional performance criteria or may
need to utilize or restrict certain BMPs.

Standard No. 9 All stormwater management practices shall have an enforceable operation
and maintenance agreement to ensure the system functions as designed.

Standard No. 10 Every BMP shall have an acceptable form of water quality pretreatment.

Standard No. 11 Redevelopment, defined as any construction, alteration or improvement on

sites where existing land use is commercial, industrial, institutional or multi-
family residential and site impervious area exceeds 40%, is governed by
special stormwater sizing criteria depending on the amount of increase or
decrease in impervious area created by the redevelopment.

Standard No. 12 Certain industrial sites are required to prepare and implement a stormwater
pollution prevention plan and file a notice of intent (NOI) under the
provisions of Maryland’s Stormwater Industrial National Pollutant
Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) general permit (a list of industrial
categories subject to the pollution prevention requirement can be found in
Appendix D.6). The requirements for preparing and implementing a
stormwater pollution prevention plan are described in the general discharge
permit available from MDE and guidance can be found in the United States
Environmental Protection Agency’s (EPA) document entitled, “Storm Water
Management for Industrial Activities, Developing Pollution Prevention Plans
and Best Management Practices” (1992). The stormwater pollution
prevention plan requirement applies to both existing and new industrial sites.

Supp. 1 1.14
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual...........................................General Performance Standards

Standard No. 13 Stormwater discharges from land uses or activities with higher potential for
pollutant loadings, defined as hotspots in Chapter 2, may require the use of
specific structural BMPs and pollution prevention practices. In addition,
stormwater from a hotspot land use may not be infiltrated without proper
pretreatment.
.
Standard No. 14 In Maryland, local governments are usually responsible for most stormwater
management review authority. Therefore, prior to design, applicants should
always consult with their local reviewing agency to determine if they are
subject to additional stormwater design requirements. In addition, certain
earth disturbances may require NPDES construction general permit
coverage from MDE (see Appendix D.7).

1.15 Supp. 1
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual....................................................... How to Use the Manual

Section 1.3 How to Use the Manual

The Maryland Stormwater Design Manual is provided in two volumes. This first volume provides
designers a general overview on how to size, design, select and locate BMPs at a new development
site to comply with State stormwater performance standards. The second volume contains
appendices with more detailed information on landscaping, BMP construction specifications, step-
by-step BMP design examples and other assorted design tools.

Section 1.3.1 VOLUME ONE: STORMWATER MANAGEMENT CRITERIA

The first volume of the manual is organized as follows:

Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual.

Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria. This chapter explains the five new sizing criteria
for water quality, recharge, channel protection, overbank flood control, and extreme flood
management in the State of Maryland. The chapter also outlines the basis for design calculations.
Three step-by-step design examples are provided to familiarize the reader with the new procedures
for computing storage volumes under the five sizing criteria. The chapter also briefly outlines the
six groups of acceptable BMPs that can be used to meet recharge and water quality volume sizing
criteria. Acceptable BMP groups are:

Stormwater Ponds
Stormwater Wetlands
Infiltration Practices
Filtering Systems
Open Channel Practices
Non-structural Practices

Lastly, the chapter presents a list of land uses or site activities that have been designated as
“stormwater hotspots.” If a development site is considered a “hotspot," it may have special
requirements for pollution prevention and groundwater protection.

Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design. The third chapter presents specific
performance criteria and guidelines for the design of five groups of structural BMPs. The
performance criteria for each group of BMPs are based on six factors:

General Feasibility
Conveyance
Pretreatment
Treatment Geometry
Landscaping
Maintenance

Supp. 1 1.16
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual....................................................... How to Use the Manual

In addition, Chapter 3 presents a series of schematic drawings to illustrate typical BMP designs.

Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in the State of Maryland

This chapter presents guidance on how to select the best BMP or group of practices at a new
development site, as well as environmental and other factors to consider when actually locating each
BMP. The chapter contains six comparative tables that evaluate BMPs from the standpoint of the
following factors:

Watershed Factors
Terrain Factors
Stormwater Treatment Suitability
Physical Feasibility Factors
Community and Environmental Factors
Location and Permitting Factors

Chapter 4 is designed so that the reader can use the tables in a step-wise fashion to identify the most
appropriate BMP or group of practices to use at a site.

Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design

The Stormwater Management Act of 2007 requires establishing a comprehensive process for
stormwater management approval, implementing ESD to the MEP, and ensuring structural practices
(Chapter 3) are used only where absolutely necessary. Implementing ESD not only reduces the
impact of development on the environment, but also reduces the size and cost of stormwater
practices needed at the site. The Chapter includes:

Design Process and Planning Techniques

ESD Sizing Criteria
Alternative Surfaces
Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices
Redevelopment Design Process
Special Criteria for Sensitive Waters

The chapter defines ESD and describes planning techniques and design requirements that are used
to implement ESD and treat runoff at the source.

Section 1.3.2 VOLUME TWO: STORMWATER DESIGN APPENDICES

The second volume is provided separately and contains the technical information needed to actually
design, landscape and construct a BMP. Volume Two is divided into four appendices, including:

1.17 Supp. 1
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual....................................................... How to Use the Manual

Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs. Good landscaping can often be an
important factor in the performance and community acceptance of many stormwater BMPs. The
Landscaping Guide provides general background on how to determine the appropriate landscaping
region and hydrologic zone in Maryland. Appendix A also includes tips on how to establish more
functional landscapes within stormwater BMPs and contains an extensive list of trees, shrubs,
ground covers, and wetland plants that can be used to develop an effective and diverse planting plan.

Appendix B. BMP Construction Specifications. Good designs only work if careful attention is
paid to proper construction techniques and materials. Appendix B contains detailed specifications
for constructing infiltration practices, filters, bioretention areas and open channels. In addition,
Appendix B includes a copy of the NRCS Code 378 Standards and Specifications for Ponds.

Appendix C. Step-by-Step Design Examples. A series of design examples are provided in this
appendix to help designers and plan reviewers better understand the new stormwater sizing criteria
and design procedures. Step-by-step design examples are provided for a pond, a sand filter, an
infiltration trench, a dry swale, and a bioretention area.

Appendix D. Assorted Design Tools. This appendix contains an assortment of design tools for
stormwater management, including guidance on geotechnical testing, calculating water balance,
documenting whether a site complies with the Chesapeake Bay Critical Area “10% Rule,” NPDES
stormwater permits, pollution prevention, design details, State Water Use Designations and other
useful design information.

Appendix E. Archived Material and Supplemental Design Guidance. The last appendix
contains material removed from Volume I of the Design Manual for historical purposes. The
appendix also includes guidance material for associated with Design Manual supplements.

Supp. 1 1.18
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual............................................................ Revising the Manual

Section 1.4 Revising the Design Manual

The Maryland Stormwater Design Manual establishes minimum performance criteria that should be
met by all techniques and devices used for stormwater management in Maryland. On occasion,
variations or other techniques and devices may be found to function better or be more desirable for
stormwater management by plan approval authorities. As stated above, MDE is responsible for
approving the use of new techniques for controlling runoff from new development. If an approval
authority decides it would like to utilize a revised technique or device on a regular basis, it needs to
prepare a Standard and accompanying Specifications with a cover letter to be submitted to the
MDE/WMA.

A subcommittee consisting of MDE technical personnel will review the revised technique or device
and any supporting data submitted. When the technique or device is approved by the technical
subcommittee, an approval authorization from the Director of WMA and the technical representative
of the local approval authority will be issued. Once the revised or new technique or device has
received approval it can be used on a regular basis within the jurisdiction. If other jurisdictions
desire to utilize the same technique or device then they must seek approval from the technical
subcommittee. A great amount of deviation from the methods within this design manual is not
anticipated, but when better stormwater management can be achieved, revisions will generally be
looked upon favorably.

Section 1.5 What’s New?

This section highlights some of the new stormwater design requirements that are being introduced in
the manual. It is provided to help designers understand how the new manual may affect how they
prepare stormwater plans and practices. At most sites, designers shall now:

Measure the amount of impervious cover created by the development.

Determine if the proposed land use or activity at the site is designated as a “stormwater
hotspot.”
Determine the Use Designation of the receiving water and the condition of the watershed.
Provide a volume that mimics the natural rate of groundwater recharge using structural
and/or nonstructural BMPs (Rev).
Implement ESD to the MEP to mimic predevelopment conditions.
Follow a specific design process to implement a comprehensive site development plan.
Provide water quality and recharge volume storage using approved ESD practices.
Use ESD practices to the MEP to provide Cpv storage. Any remaining Cpv storage
requirements must be addressed using approved BMP options that can meet pollutant
removal targets.
Ensure that the BMP selected meets specific performance criteria with respect to feasibility,
conveyance, pretreatment, treatment, landscaping and maintenance.
Follow new geotechnical testing procedures and provide the contractor with formal
construction specifications.

1.19 Supp. 1
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual......................................................................... What’s New

Consider where the BMP is located in relation to natural features and development
infrastructure.
Consider innovative site planning techniques that can reduce both the size and cost of
stormwater practices.
Include operation and maintenance information on approved stormwater management plans.

Supp. 1 1.20
Chapter 1. Introduction to the Manual....................................................... Symbols and Acronyms

Section 1.6 Symbols and Acronyms

As an aid to the reader, the following table outlines the symbols and acronyms that are used
throughout the text. In addition, a glossary is provided at the end of this volume that defines the
terminology used in the text.
Table 1.3 Key Symbols and Acronyms Cited in Manual
A drainage area qi peak inflow discharge
Af filter bed area qo peak outflow discharge
Asf surface area, sedimentation basin Qp overbank flood protection volume
full
Asp surface area, sedimentation basin qu unit peak discharge
partial
BMP best management practice qp water quality peak discharge
cfs cubic feet per second Rev recharge volume
Cpv channel protection storage volume Rv volumetric runoff coefficient
(extended detention of the 1-year
post development runoff)
CMP corrugated metal pipe R/W right of way
CN curve number S soil specific recharge factor
df depth of filter bed SD separation distance
du dwelling units tc time of concentration
ED 24 hour drawdown of the water tf time to drain filter bed
quality volume
ESD environmental site design TP total phosphorous
ESDv environmental site design storage tt time of travel
volume
f soil infiltration rate TR-20 Technical Release No. 20 Project
Formulation-Hydrology, computer
program
fps feet per second TR-55 Technical Release No. 55 Urban Unit
Hydrology for Small Watersheds
hf head above filter bed TSS total suspended solids
HSG hydrologic soil group Vf filter bed volume
Ia initial abstraction Vr volume of runoff
I percent impervious cover Vs volume of storage
k coefficient of permeability Vt total volume
MEP Maximum extent practicable Vv volume of voids
PE ESD rainfall target WQv water quality storage volume
P precipitation depth WSE water surface elevation
Qe ESD runoff depth
Qf extreme flood protection volume

1.21 Supp. 1
Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria
2.0
Chapter
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ............................................Introduction

2.0 Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria

This chapter presents a unified approach for sizing stormwater BMPs in the State of Maryland
to meet pollutant removal goals, maintain groundwater recharge, reduce channel erosion,
prevent overbank flooding, and pass extreme floods. For a summary, please consult Table 2.1
below. The remaining sections describe the five sizing criteria in detail and present guidance
on how to properly compute and apply the required storage volumes.

This chapter also presents a list of acceptable BMP options that can be used to comply with the
sizing criteria. Lastly, the chapter designates certain land uses as “stormwater hotspots” which
restrict the use of certain BMPs and may also require a pollution prevention plan.

Table 2.1 Summary of the Statewide Stormwater Criteria

Sizing Criteria Description of Stormwater Sizing Criteria

Water Quality WQv = [(P )(Rv )(A)] 12

Volume P= rainfall depth in inches and is equal to 1.0” in the Eastern Rainfall
(WQv) (acre-feet) Zone and 0.9” in the Western Rainfall Zone (Fig. 2.1),
Rv = volumetric runoff coefficient, and
A = area in acres.
Recharge Volume Fraction of WQv, depending on pre development soil hydrologic group.
(Rev) (acre-feet) Re v = [(S )(Rv )(A)] 12
S = soil specific recharge factor in inches.
Channel Cpv = 24 hour (12 hour in USE III and IV watersheds) extended detention
Protection of post-developed one-year, 24 hour storm event.
Storage Volume
(Cpv) Not required for direct discharges to tidal waters and the Eastern Shore of
Maryland. (See Figure 2.4.)
Overbank Flood Controlling the peak discharge rate from the ten-year storm event to the
Protection pre development rate (Qp10) is optional; consult the appropriate review
Volume authority.
(Qp)
For Eastern Shore: Provide peak discharge control for the two-year storm
event (Qp2 ). Control of the ten-year storm event is not required (Qp10).
Extreme Flood Consult with the appropriate reviewing authority. Normally, no control is
Volume (Qf) needed if development is excluded from 100-year floodplain and
downstream conveyance is adequate.

2.1
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ...............................Water Quality Volume

Section 2.1 Water Quality Volume (WQv)

The Water Quality Volume (denoted as the WQv) is the storage needed to capture and treat
the runoff from 90% of the average annual rainfall. In numerical terms, it is equivalent to
an inch of rainfall multiplied by the volumetric runoff coefficient (Rv) and site area. The
specific rainfall depth to be used depends on whether the site is located in the Eastern or
Western rainfall zone of Maryland (see Figure 2.1).

The following equations are used to determine the storage volume, WQv (in acre-feet of
storage):

WQv = (1.0) (Rv)(A) Eastern Rainfall Zone P = 1.0 inches of rainfall

12

WQv = (0.9) (Rv)(A) Western Rainfall Zone P = 0.9 inches of rainfall

12

where: WQv = water quality volume (in acre-feet)

Rv = 0.05 + 0.009(I) where I is percent impervious cover
A = area in acres∗

Treatment of the WQv shall be provided at all developments where stormwater

management is required. A minimum WQv of 0.2 inches per acre shall be met at sites or
in drainage areas that have less than 15% impervious cover.

Drainage areas having no impervious cover and no proposed disturbance during

development may be excluded from the WQv calculations. Designers are encouraged to
use these areas as non-structural practices for WQv treatment (see Chapter 5, “Stormwater
Credits for Innovative Site Planning”).

The WQv is directly related to the amount of impervious cover created at a site. The
relationship between WQv and impervious cover is shown in Figure 2.2.

* The water quality volume (WQv) is required to be controlled only for the specific project.
WQv for offsite areas is not required (see page 2.4 “Offsite Drainage Areas”)

2.2
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ...............................Water Quality Volume

Figure 2.1 Location of the Eastern and Western Rainfall Zones in Maryland
(For use in selecting the appropriate WQv equation.)

Figure 2.2 Relationship between Impervious Cover and the Water Quality Volume

0.8
Water Quality Volume Storage
(inches per acre)

0.6

Eastern
Zone
0.4
Western
Zone
0.2

0
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
Site Imperviousness %

2.3
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ...............................Water Quality Volume

Basis for Determining Water Quality Treatment Volume

As a basis for design, the following assumptions may be made:

" Measuring Impervious Cover: the measured area of a site plan that does not have
vegetative or permeable cover shall be considered total impervious cover. Where direct
measurement of impervious cover is impractical, NRCS land use/impervious cover
relationships can be used to estimate impervious cover (see Table 2.2a in TR-55,
NRCS, 1986). Estimates should be based on actual land use and homogeneity.

" Multiple Drainage Areas: When a project contains or is divided by multiple drainage
areas, the WQv volume shall be addressed for each drainage area. See the design
examples in Chapter 2, Section 2.6.

" Offsite Drainage Areas: The WQv shall be based on the impervious cover of the
proposed site. Offsite existing impervious areas may be excluded from the calculation
of the water quality volume requirements.

" Sensitive Streams: Consult with the appropriate local review authority to determine if a
greater WQv is warranted to protect sensitive streams.

" BMP Treatment: The final WQv shall be treated by an acceptable BMP(s) from the list
presented in Chapter 2, Section 2.7, or an equivalent practice allowed by the
appropriate review authority.

" Subtraction for Structural Practices: Where structural practices for treating the Rev
are employed upstream of a BMP, the Rev may be subtracted from the WQv used for
design.

" Subtraction for Non-structural Practices: Where non-structural practices are

employed in the site design, the WQv volume can be reduced in accordance with the
conditions outlined in Chapter 5.

" Determining Peak Discharge for WQv Storm: When designing flow splitters for off-
line practices, consult the small storm hydrology method provided in Appendix D.10.

" Extended Detention for Water Quality Volume: The water quality requirement can
be met by providing a 24 hour drawdown of a portion of the water quality volume
(WQv) in conjunction with a stormwater pond or wetland system as described in
Chapter 3. Referred to as ED, this is different than providing the extended detention of
the one-year storm for the channel protection volume (Cpv). The ED portion of the
WQv may be included when routing the Cpv.

2.4
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria .....................................Recharge Volume

Section 2.2 Recharge Volume Requirements (Rev)

The criteria for maintaining recharge is based on the average annual recharge rate of the
hydrologic soil group(s) (HSG) present at a site as determined from USDA, NRCS Soil
Surveys or from detailed site investigations. More specifically, each specific recharge
factor is based on the USDA average annual recharge volume per soil type divided by the
annual rainfall in Maryland (42 inches per year) and multiplied by 90%. This keeps the
recharge calculation consistent with the WQv methodology. Thus, an annual recharge
volume requirement is specified for a site as follows:

Site Recharge Volume Requirement

Re v = [(S )(Rv )(A)] 12 (percent volume method)

where: Rv = 0.05 + 0.009(I) where I is percent impervious cover
A = site area in acres
Rev = (S)(Ai) (percent area method)
where: Ai = the measured impervious cover

Hydrologic Soil Group Soil Specific Recharge Factor (S)

A 0.38
B 0.26
C 0.13
D 0.07
The recharge volume is considered part of the total WQv that must be provided at a site
and can be achieved either by a structural practice (e.g., infiltration, bioretention), a non-
structural practice (e.g., buffers, disconnection of rooftops), or a combination of both.

Drainage areas having no impervious cover and no proposed disturbance during

development may be excluded from the Rev calculations. Designers are encouraged to use
these areas as non-structural practices for Rev treatment (see Chapter 5, “Stormwater
Credits for Innovative Site Planning”).

Note: Rev and WQv are inclusive. When treated separately, the Rev may be subtracted
from the WQv when sizing the water quality BMP (see page 2.4, ‘Subtraction for
Structural Practices).

The intent of the recharge criteria is to maintain existing groundwater recharge rates at
development sites. This helps to preserve existing water table elevations thereby maintaining
the hydrology of streams and wetlands during dry weather. The volume of recharge that occurs
on a site depends on slope, soil type, vegetative cover, precipitation and evapo-transpiration.
Sites with natural ground cover, such as forest and meadow, have higher recharge rates, less
runoff, and greater transpiration losses under most conditions. Because development increases
impervious surfaces, a net decrease in recharge rates is inevitable.

2.5
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria .....................................Recharge Volume

The relationship between Rev and site imperviousness is shown in graphical form in Figure
2.3.

Figure 2.3 Relationship between Rev and Site Impervious Cover

A Soils
B Soils

C Soils

D Soils

Basis for Determining Recharge Volume

" If more than one HSG is present at a site, a composite soil specific recharge factor shall
be computed based on the proportion of total site area within each HSG. The recharge
volume provided at the site shall be directed to the most permeable HSG available.

" The “percent volume” method is used to determine the Rev treatment requirement when
structural practices are used to provide recharge. These practices must provide seepage
into the ground and may include infiltration and exfiltration structures (e.g., infiltration,
bioretention, dry swales or sand filters with storage below the underdrain). Structures
that require impermeable liners, intercept groundwater, or are designed for trapping
sediment (e.g., forebays) may not be used. In this method, the volume of runoff
treated by structural practices shall meet or exceed the computed recharge volume.

" The “percent area” method is used to determine the Rev treatment requirements when
non-structural practices are used. Under this method, the recharge requirement is
evaluated by mapping the percent of impervious area that is effectively treated by an
acceptable non-structural practice and comparing it to the minimum recharge
requirements.

2.6
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria .....................................Recharge Volume

" Acceptable non-structural practices include filter strips that treat rooftop or parking lot
runoff, sheet flow discharge to stream buffers, and grass channels that treat roadway
runoff (see Chapter 5.)

" The recharge volume criterion does not apply to any portion of a site designated as a
stormwater hotspot nor any project considered as redevelopment. In addition, the
appropriate local review authority may alter or eliminate the recharge volume
requirement if the site is situated on unsuitable soils (e.g., marine clays), karst or in an
urban redevelopment area. In this situation, non-structural practices (percent area
method) should be implemented to the maximum extent practicable and the remaining
or untreated Rev included in the WQv treatment.

" If Rev is treated by structural or non-structural practices separate and upstream of the
WQv treatment, the WQv is adjusted accordingly.

2.7
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ...............Channel Protection Storage Volume

Section 2.3 Channel Protection Storage Volume Requirements (Cpv )

To protect channels from erosion, 24 hour extended detention of the one-year, 24 hour
storm event (MDE, 1987) shall be provided. In Use III and IV watersheds, only 12
hours of extended detention shall be provided. The rationale for this criterion is that
runoff will be stored and released in such a gradual manner that critical erosive velocities
during bankfull and near-bankfull events will seldom be exceeded in downstream
channels.

The Cpv requirement does not apply to direct discharges to tidal water or Maryland’s
Eastern Shore (as defined in Figure 2.4) unless specified by an appropriate review
authority on a case by case basis. Local governments may wish to use alternative
methods to provide equivalent stream channel protection such as the Distributed Runoff
Control method or bankfull capacity/duration criteria (MacRae, 1993).

The method for determining the Cpv requirement is detailed in Appendix D.11. A detention
pond or underground vault is normally needed to meet the Cpv requirement (and subsequent
Qp10 and Qf criteria). Schematics of a typical design are shown in Figures 2.5.

Figure 2.4 Regions of Maryland Not Subject to the Channel Protection Requirement (Cpv)

2.8
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ...............Channel Protection Storage Volume

Figure 2.5 Example of Conventional Stormwater Detention Pond

A typical detention facility provides channel protection control (Cpv) and overbank
flood control (Qp) but not water quality control (WQv).

2.9
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ...............Channel Protection Storage Volume

Basis for Determining Channel Protection Storage Volume

The following represent the minimum basis for design:

" The models TR-55 and TR-20 (or approved equivalent) shall be used for determining
peak discharge rates.

" Rainfall depths for the one-year, 24 hour storm event are provided in Table 2.2.

" Off-site areas should be modeled as present land use in good condition for the one-year
storm event.

" The length of overland flow used in time of concentration (tc) calculations is limited to
no more than 100 feet for post development conditions. On the Eastern Shore, the
maximum distance for tc calculations is 150 feet for the post development conditions.

" The Cpv storage volume shall be computed using the detention lag time between
hydrograph centroids developed in “Design Procedures for Stormwater Management
Extended Detention Structures” (MDE, 1987) and outlined in Appendix D.11. The
detention lag time (T) for the one-year storm is defined as the interval between the
center of mass of the inflow hydrograph and the center of mass of the outflow
hydrograph. Examples of this technique are shown in Appendix C.1 and in the design
example under Section 2.6.

" Cpv is not required at sites where the one-year post development peak discharge (qi) is
less than or equal to 2.0 cfs. A Cpv orifice diameter (do) of less than 3.0” is subject to
approval by the appropriate review authority and is not recommended unless an internal
control for orifice protection is used (see Appendix D.8).

" Cpv shall be addressed for the entire site. If a site consists of multiple drainage areas,
Cpv may be distributed proportionately to each drainage area.

" Extended detention storage provided for the Cpv does not meet the WQv requirement
(that is Cpv and WQv should be treated separately).

" The stormwater storage needed for Cpv may be provided above the WQv storage in
stormwater ponds and wetlands; thereby meeting all storage criteria except Rev in a
single facility with appropriate hydraulic control structures for each storage
requirement.

" Infiltration is not recommended for Cpv control because of large storage requirements.

2.10
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Rainfall Depth Chart

Table 2.2 Rainfall Depths Associated with the 1,2,10 and 100-year, 24-hour Storm Events

Rainfall Depth
County
1 yr - 24 hr 2 yr-24 hr 10 yr-24 hr 100 yr-24 hr
Allegany 2.4 inches 2.9 inches 4.5 inches 6.2 inches
Anne Arundel 2.7 3.3 5.2 7.4
Baltimore 2.6 3.2 5.1 7.1
Calvert 2.8 3.4 5.3 7.6
Caroline 2.8 3.4 5.3 7.6
Carroll 2.5 3.1 5.0 7.1
Cecil 2.7 3.3 5.1 7.3
Charles 2.7 3.3 5.3 7.5
Dorchester 2.8 3.4 5.4 7.8
Frederick 2.5 3.1 5.0 7.0
Garrett 2.4 2.8 4.3 5.9
Harford 2.6 3.2 5.1 7.2
Howard 2.6 3.2 5.1 7.2
Kent 2.7 3.3 5.2 7.4
Montgomery 2.6 3.2 5.1 7.2
Prince George’s 2.7 3.3 5.3 7.4
Queen Anne’s 2.7 3.3 5.3 7.5
St. Mary’s 2.8 3.4 5.4 7.7
Somerset 2.9 3.5 5.6 8.1
Talbot 2.8 3.4 5.3 7.6
Washington 2.5 3.0 4.8 6.7
Wicomico 2.9 3.5 5.6 7.9
Worcester 3.0 3.6 5.6 8.1

2.11
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ...............Overbank Flood Protection Volume

Section 2.4 Overbank Flood Protection Volume Requirements (Qp)

The primary purpose of the overbank flood protection volume sizing criteria is to prevent
an increase in the frequency and magnitude of out-of-bank flooding generated by
development (e.g., flow events that exceed the bankfull capacity of the channel and
therefore must spill over into the floodplain). Overbank flood protection for the ten-year
storm shall only be required if local approval authorities have no control of floodplain
development, no control over infrastructure and conveyance system capacity design, or
determine that downstream flooding will occur as a result of the proposed development.

For most regions of the State, the overbank flood control criteria translates to preventing
the post development ten-year, 24 hour storm peak discharge rate (Qp10) from exceeding the
pre development peak discharge rate.

On the Eastern Shore of Maryland, the overbank flood control criteria is defined as
preventing the post development two-year, 24 hour storm peak discharge rate (Qp2) from
exceeding the pre development peak discharge rate. The rainfall depths associated with the
two and ten-year, 24 hour storm events are shown in Table 2.2.

Basis for Determining Overbank Flood Protection Volume

When addressing the overbank flooding design criteria, the following represent the minimum
basis for design:

" The models TR-55 and TR-20 (or an equivalent approved by the appropriate local
authority) will be used for determining peak discharge rates. The Eastern Shore
Dimensionless Hydrograph may be used for sites where appropriate (see Appendix
D.14). Any adjustments for unique land features such as Karst topography shall be
determined by the local approving authority.

" The standard for characterizing pre development hydrologic land use for non-forested
vegetated areas (including agriculture) shall be meadow in good hydrologic condition.

" Off-site areas should be modeled as "present land use condition" in good hydrologic
condition for both the 2 and 10-year storm events.

" The length of overland flow used in tc calculations is limited to no more than 150 feet
for pre development conditions and 100 feet for post development conditions. On the
Eastern Shore (see Figure 2.4) this maximum distance is extended to 250 feet for pre
development conditions and 150 feet for post development conditions.

" Overbank flood protection does not apply to direct discharges to tidal water.

2.12
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................ Extreme Flood Protection Volume

Section 2.5 Extreme Flood Volume (Qf)

The intent of the extreme flood criteria is to (a) prevent flood damage from large storm
events, (b) maintain the boundaries of the pre development 100-year Federal Emergency
Management Agency (FEMA) and/or locally designated floodplain, and (c) protect the
physical integrity of BMP control structures. This is typically done in two ways:

100-Year Control: requires storage to attenuate the post development 100-year, 24 hour
peak discharge (Qf) to pre development rates. The Qf is the most stringent and expensive
level of flood control and is generally not needed if the downstream development is
located out of the 100-year floodplain. In many cases, the conveyance system leading to a
stormwater structure is designed based on the discharge rate for the ten-year storm (Qp10).
In these situations, the conveyance systems may be the limiting hydrologic control.

Reserve Ultimate 100-Year Floodplain: 100-year storm control may be required by an

appropriate review authority if:

• buildings or development are located within the ultimate 100-year floodplain, or

• the reviewing authority does not completely control the 100-year floodplain.

Hydraulic/hydrologic investigations may be required to demonstrate that downstream

roads, bridges and public utilities are adequately protected from the Qf storm. These
investigations typically extend to the first downstream tributary of equal or greater
drainage area or to any downstream dam, highway, or natural point of restricted stream
flow

Basis for Determining Extreme Flood Criteria

" Consult with the appropriate review authority to determine the analyses required for the
Qf storm.

" The same hydrologic and hydraulic methods used for overbank flood control shall be
used to analyze Qf.

" In addition, off-site areas should be modeled as “ultimate condition” when the 100-year
design storm event is analyzed. Table 2.2 indicates the depth of rainfall (24 hour)
associated with the 100-year storm event for all counties in the State of Maryland

2.13
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Section 2.6 Design Examples: Computing Stormwater Storage Volumes

Design examples are provided only to illustrate how the five stormwater management
sizing criteria are computed for hypothetical development projects. These design
examples are also utilized elsewhere in the manual to illustrate structural and non-
structural BMP design.

Design Example No. 1: Residential Development - Reker Meadows

Site data and the layout of the Reker Meadows subdivision are shown in Figure 2.6.

Step 1. Compute WQv Volume

( P)( Rv )( A)
WQv =
12

Step 1a. Compute Volumetric Runoff Coefficient (Rv)

Rv = 0.05 + (0.009) (I); I = 13.8 acres/38.0 acres = 36.3%

= 0.05 + (0.009) (36.3) = 0.38

Step 1b. Determine Rainfall Zone for WQv Formula

Location Rainfall (P)

Eastern Rainfall Zone 1.0 inches
Western Rainfall Zone 0.9 inches
Minimum WQv ( I ≤ 15%) 0.2 inches

Because this site is located in the Western Rainfall Zone, use 0.9″ of rainfall to
determine WQv.

Step 1c. Compute WQv

WQv = [(0.9″) (Rv ) (A)] 12

= [(0.9″)(0.38)(38.0 ac)] 12
= 1.08 ac-ft

Check Minimum: [(0.2″)(38.0 ac)] 12 = 0.63 ac-ft < 1.08 ac-ft

∴ Use WQv = 1.08 ac-ft

2.14
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure 2.6 Reker Meadows

Base Data Hydrologic Data

Location: Frederick, MD
Site Area = Total Drainage Area (A) = 38.0 ac Pre Post
Measured Impervious Area = 13.8 ac; I=13.8/38 =
36.3% CN 63 78
Soils Types: 60% “B”, 40% “C”
Stream Use Designation – I tc 0.35 hr 0.19 hr
Zoning: Residential (½ acre lots)

2.15
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Step 2. Compute Recharge Volume (Rev)

( S )( Rv )( A) (percent volume method)
Rev =
12
or

Rev = ( S )( Ai ) (percent area method)

Step 2a. Determine Soil Specific Recharge Factor (S) Based on Hydrologic Soil Group

HSG Soil Specific Recharge Factor (S)

A 0.38
B 0.26
C 0.13
D 0.06

Assume imperviousness is located proportionally (60/40) in B and C soils and compute

a composite S:

S = (0.26)(0.60) + (0.13)(0.40) = 0.208; Use 0.208 or 20.8% of site imperviousness

Step 2b. Compute Recharge Using Percent Volume Method

Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)] 12
= [(0.208)(0.38)(38 ac)] 12
= 0.25 ac-ft

or

For “B” soils =[(0.26)(.38)(38 ac)] 12 × 60%= 0.19 ac-ft

For “C” soils =[(0.13)(.38)(38 ac)] 12 × 40% = .06 ac-ft

Add recharge requirement for both soils for a total volume of 0.25 ac-ft

Step 2c. Compute Recharge Using Percent Area Method

Rev = (S)(Ai)
= (0.208)(13.8 ac)
= 2.87 acres

or

2.16
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

For “B” soils = (0.26)(13.8 ac)(60%) = 2.15 acres

For “C” soils = (0.13)(13.8 ac)(40%) = 0.72 acres
Added together = 2.87 acres of the total site impervious area needs to be treated by
non-structural practices.

The Rev requirement may be met by: a) treating 0.25 ac-ft using structural methods, b) treating
2.87 acres using non-structural methods, or c) a combination of both (e.g., 0.12 ac-ft
structurally and 1.44 acres non-structurally).

Step 3. Compute Channel Protection Volume (Cpv): (See Appendix D.11)

Step 3a. Select Cpv Sizing Rule

For channel protection, provide 12 or 24 hours of extended detention time (T) for the one-year
design storm event.

Use Classification Maximum Hours Allowable

Use I (general) 24
Use II (tidal) N/A (if direct discharge)
Use III (reproducing trout) 12
Use IV (recreational trout) 12

Given that our stream is Use I, we will use a T of 24 hours for the one-year design storm
event.

Step 3b. Develop site hydrologic and TR-55 Input Parameters

Per attached TR-55 calculations (see Figures 2.7 and 2.8).

Condition CN tc Runoff (Qa) Q Q Q Q

1 yr storm 1-year 2-year 10-year 100 year
hours inches cfs cfs cfs cfs
pre-developed 63 0.35 0.2 4.62 13.58 50.38 102.6
developed 78 0.19 0.8 35.0 54.94 129.96 216.30

Step 3c. Utilize MDE Method to Compute Storage Volume (Appendix D.11)

Initial abstraction (Ia) for CN of 78 is 0.564: (TR-55) [Ia = (200/CN) - 2]

Ia/P = (0.564)/2.5” = 0.226

tc = 0.19 hours

2.17
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure D.11.1 (App. D.11), qu = 740 csm/in

Knowing qu and T (extended detention time) find qo/qi from Figure D.11.2, “Detention Time
Versus Discharge Ratios.”

Peak outflow discharge/peak inflow discharge (qo/qi) = 0.024

With qo/qi, compute Vs/Vr for a Type II rainfall distribution,

Vs/Vr = 0.683 - 1.43(qo/qi)+1.64(qo/qi) 2 - 0.804(qo/qi) 3 (App. D.11)

Vs/Vr = 0.65

Therefore, Vs = 0.65(0.8″)(1/12)(38 ac) = 1.65 ac-ft

Step 3d. Define the Cpv Release Rate

qi is known (35.0 cfs), therefore,

qo = (qo/qi) qi = .024 (35.0) = .84 cfs

Step 4. Compute Overbank Flood Protection Volume (Qp):

Step 4a. Determine Appropriate Qp Requirement

Location Type of Peak Control

Eastern Shore 2 year/2 year
Western Shore 10 year/10 year

Because this site is located on the Western Shore, ten-year quantity peak control may be
required. Assume ten-year control is needed.

Step 4b. Model Site Using TR-55 for 10 year storm

Per TR-55, Figure 6-1 (Page 6-2 of TR-55) for a Qin of 130.0 cfs, and an allowable Qout
of 50.4 cfs, the Vs necessary for control is 2.83 ac-ft, with a developed CN of 78. (See
TR-55 Worksheet 6a, Page 6-5 of TR-55). Note that there is 5.0 inches of rainfall
during this event, with 2.7 inches of runoff.

Step 5. Extreme Flood Volume (Qf)

For this example, management of Qf is not required. However, at final design the 100-year
event must be conveyed safely through the stormwater management practice. Based on field
observation, downstream conveyance may require analysis for passing the 100-year event
through an existing culvert.

2.18
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Table 2.3 Summary of General Storage Requirements for Reker Meadows

Step Requirement Volume Required Notes

(ac- ft)
1. Water Quality Volume 1.08
(WQv)
2. Recharge Volume (Rev) .25 this volume is included within
(or 2.87 acres) the WQv storage
3. Channel Protection 1.65 Cpv release rate is .84 cfs
Volume (Cpv)
4. Overbank Flood 2.83 10-year, in this case
Protection Volume (Qp)
5. Extreme Flood Volume N/A provide safe passage for the 100-
(Qf) year event in final design

2.19
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure 2.7: Reker Meadows – Pre Developed Conditions

(Source: TR-55 computer printouts)

RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.00

Project : REKER MEADOWS User: SRC Date: 08-01-97
County : FREDERICK State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: PRE-DEVELOPED CONDITIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHER AGRICULTURAL LANDS
Meadow -cont. grass (non grazed) ---- - 22.8(58) 9.2(71) -

Woods good - - 6.0(70) -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) 22.8 15.2

==== ====
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: 38 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 63*

TIME OF CONCENTRATION AND TRAVEL TIME Version 2.00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow Type 2 year Length Slope Surface n Area Wp Velocity Time
rain (ft) (ft/ft) code (sq/ft) (ft) (ft/sec) (hr)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sheet 3.1 150 .025 F 0.306
Shallow Concent'd 500 0.04 U 0.043
Time of Concentration = 0.35*
=====
--- Sheet Flow Surface Codes ---
A Smooth Surface F Grass, Dense --- Shallow Concentrated ---
B Fallow (No Res.) G Grass, Burmuda --- Surface Codes ---
C Cultivated < 20 % Res. H Woods, Light P Paved
D Cultivated > 20 % Res. I Woods, Dense U Unpaved
E Grass-Range, Short J Range, Natural
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.00

Data: Drainage Area : 38 * Acres
Runoff Curve Number : 63 *
Time of Concentration: 0.35 * Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE

=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.5 | 3.1 | 4 | 5 | 5.4 | 6.1 | 7 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.47 | 0.38 | 0.29 | 0.23 | 0.22 | 0.19 | 0.17 |
| Runoff (in) | 0.24 | 0.48 | 0.92 | 1.51 | 1.77 | 2.25 | 2.90 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |0.504 |0.698 |0.834 |0.880 |0.894 |0.913 |0.932 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 5 | 13 | 29 | 50 | 60 | 78 | 103 |
=========================================================================
* - Value(s) provided from TR-55 system routines

2.20
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure 2.8: Reker Meadows –Developed Conditions

(Source: TR-55 Computer Printouts)

RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.00

Project : REKER MEADOWS User: SRC Date: 08-01-97
County : FREDERICK State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: DEVELOPED CONDITIONS
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FULLY DEVELOPED URBAN AREAS (Veg Estab.)
Open space (Lawns,parks etc.)
Good condition; grass cover > 75% - 13.0(61) 5.2(74) -
Impervious Areas
Paved parking lots, roofs, driveways - 7.9(98) 5.9(98) -
OTHER AGRICULTURAL LANDS
Woods good - - 6.0(70) -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) 20.9 17.1

==== ====
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: 38 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 78*

TIME OF CONCENTRATION AND TRAVEL TIME Version 2.00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow Type 2 year Length Slope Surface n Area Wp Velocity Time
rain (ft) (ft/ft) code (sq/ft) (ft) (ft/sec) (hr)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sheet 3.1 100 .025 E 0.152
Shallow Concent'd 300 0.02 P 0.029
Open Channel 600 16.2 0.010
Time of Concentration = 0.19*
=====
--- Sheet Flow Surface Codes ---
A Smooth Surface F Grass, Dense --- Shallow Concentrated ---
B Fallow (No Res.) G Grass, Burmuda --- Surface Codes ---
C Cultivated < 20 % Res. H Woods, Light P Paved
D Cultivated > 20 % Res. I Woods, Dense U Unpaved
E Grass-Range, Short J Range, Natural
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.00

Data: Drainage Area : 38 * Acres
Runoff Curve Number : 78 *
Time of Concentration: 0.19 * Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE
=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.5 | 3.1 | 4 | 5 | 5.4 | 6.1 | 7 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.23 | 0.18 | 0.14 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.09 | 0.08 |
| Used | 0.23 | 0.18 | 0.14 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 |
| Runoff (in) | 0.79 | 1.20 | 1.89 | 2.71 | 3.05 | 3.67 | 4.47 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |1.175 |1.209 |1.242 |1.264 |1.271 |1.275 |1.275 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 35 | 55 | 89 | 130 | 148 | 178 | 217 |
=========================================================================
* - Value(s) provided from TR-55 system routines

2.21
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Design Example No. 2: Commercial Development - Claytor Community Center

Site data and the layout of the Claytor Community Center are shown in Figure 2.9.

Figure 2.9 Claytor Community Center

USE I STREAM

Base Data Hydrologic Data

Location: Easton, MD
Site Area = Total Drainage Area (A) = 3.0 ac Pre Post
Impervious Area = 1.9 ac; I= 1.9/3.0 = 63.3%
Rv = 0.05 + (63.3)(0.009) = 0.62 CN 57 83
Soils Type “B”
Stream Use Designation I tc 0.42 hr 0.16 hr

2.22
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Step 1. Compute Water Quality Volume WQv

( P)( Rv )( A)
WQv =
12

Step 1a. Compute Volumetric Runoff Coefficient (Rv)

Rv = 0.05 + (0.009) (I); I = 1.9 acres/3.0 acres = 63.3%

= 0.05 + (0.009) (63.3) = 0.62

Step 1b. Determine Rainfall Zone for WQv Formula

Location Rainfall (P)

Eastern Rainfall Zone 1.0 inches
Western Rainfall Zone 0.9 inches
Minimum WQv (I ≤ 15%) 0.2 inches

Because this site is located in the Eastern Rainfall Zone, use the 1″ of rainfall to determine
WQv.

Step 1c. Compute WQv

WQv = [(1.0″)(Rv)(A)] 12
= [(1.0″)(0.62)(3.0ac)] 12×(43560ft2 acre)
= 6752 ft3

Check Minimum: [(0.2″)(3.0 ac)] 12×(43560ft2 acre) = 2178 ft3 < 6752 ft3
∴Use WQv=6752 ft3

Step 2. Compute Recharge Volume (Rev)

( S )( Rv )( A)
Rev = (percent volume method)
12
or

Rev = ( S )( Ai ) (percent area method)

2.23
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Step 2a. Determine Soil Specific Recharge Factor (S) Based on Hydrologic Soil Group

HSG Soil Specific Recharge Factor (S)

A 0.38
B 0.26
C 0.13
D 0.06

Site is located within B soils, ∴ S = 0.26; Use 0.26 or 26%

Step 2b. Compute Recharge Using Percent Volume Method

Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)] 12
= [(0.26)(0.62)(3.0 ac)] 12 ×(43560ft2 acre)
= 1,755.5 ft3

Step 2c. Compute Recharge Using Percent Area Method

Rev = (S)(Ai)
= (0.26)(1.9 ac) ×(43560ft2 acre)
= 21,518.6 ft2

The Rev requirement may be met by: a) treating 1,755 ft3 using structural methods, b) treating
21,518.6 ft2 using non-structural methods, or c) a combination of both (e.g., 580 ft3
structurally and 14,200 ft2 non-structurally).

Step 3. Compute Channel Protection Volume (Cpv):

Because this site is located on the Eastern Shore (see Fig. 2.4), Cpv is not required.

Step 4. Compute Overbank Flood Protection Volume (Qp):

Step 4a. Determine Appropriate Qp Requirement

Location Type of Peak Control

Eastern Shore 2-year/2-year
Western Shore 10-year/10-year

2.24
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Per attached TR-55 calculations (Figure 2.10 and 2.11)

Condition CN tc Q Q Q Q
1-year 2-year 10-year 100-year
hours cfs cfs cfs cfs
pre-developed 57 0.42 0.22 0.58 2.91 6.75
developed 83 0.16 5.08 7.11 13.97 22.69

Because this site is located on the Eastern Shore, two-year quantity peak control is required
(Qp2). Per TR-55, Figure 6-1 (Page 6-2 in TR-55), for a Qin of 7.11 cfs, and an allowable Qout
of 0.58 cfs, the Vs necessary for 2-year control is 0.24 ac-ft or 10,630 ft3, under a developed
CN of 83. (See TR-55 Worksheet 6a, Page 6-5 of TR-55.) Note that there is 3.4 inches of
rainfall during this event, with 1.8 inches of runoff.

Step 5. Extreme Flood Volume (Qf):

For this example, management of Qf is not required. However, at final design the 100-year
event must be conveyed safely through the stormwater management practice and to receiving
waters.

Table 2.4 Summary of General Design Information for Claytor Community Center

Step Category Volume Required Notes

(cubic feet)
1 Water Quality Volume 6,752
(WQv)
2 Recharge Volume (Rev) 1,688 this volume can be included
within the WQv storage
3 Channel Protection N/A not required on the Eastern
Volume (Cpv) Shore
4 Overbank Flood 10,630 2-year, in this case
Protection Volume (Qp)
5 Extreme Flood Volume N/A provide safe passage for the
(Qf) 100-year event in final design

2.25
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure 2.10: Claytor Community Center – Pre Developed Conditions

RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.00

Project : CLAYTOR COMMUNITY CENTER User: SRC Date: 07-31-97
County : DORCHESTER State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: PRE-DEVELOPED
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHER AGRICULTURAL LANDS
Meadow -cont. grass (non grazed) ---- - 2.4(58) - -
Woods good - 0.6(55) - -
Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) 3
====
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: 3 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 57*

TIME OF CONCENTRATION AND TRAVEL TIME Version 2.00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow Type 2 year Length Slope Surface n Area Wp Velocity Time
rain (ft) (ft/ft) code (sq/ft) (ft) (ft/sec) (hr)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sheet 3.4 150 0.015 F 0.358
Shallow Concent'd 500 0.02 U 0.061
Time of Concentration = 0.42*
=====
--- Sheet Flow Surface Codes ---
A Smooth Surface F Grass, Dense --- Shallow Concentrated ---
B Fallow (No Res.) G Grass, Burmuda --- Surface Codes ---
C Cultivated < 20 % Res. H Woods, Light P Paved
D Cultivated > 20 % Res. I Woods, Dense U Unpaved
E Grass-Range, Short J Range, Natural

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.00

Data: Drainage Area : 3 * Acres
Runoff Curve Number : 57 *
Time of Concentration: 0.42 * Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE
=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.8 | 3.4 | 4.6 | 5.4 | 6.2 | 6.9 | 7.8 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.54 | 0.44 | 0.33 | 0.28 | 0.24 | 0.22 | 0.19 |
| Used | 0.50 | 0.44 | 0.33 | 0.28 | 0.24 | 0.22 | 0.19 |
| Runoff (in) | 0.19 | 0.38 | 0.90 | 1.32 | 1.80 | 2.25 | 2.86 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |0.392 |0.511 |0.712 |0.769 |0.796 |0.814 |0.833 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 7 |
=========================================================================
* - Value(s) provided from TR-55 system routines

2.26
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure 2.11: Claytor Community Center - Developed Conditions

RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.00

Project : CLAYTOR COMMUNITY CENTER User: SRC Date: 07-31-97
County : DORCHESTER State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: POST-DEVELOPED
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FULLY DEVELOPED URBAN AREAS (Veg Estab.)
Open space (Lawns,parks etc.)
Good condition; grass cover > 75% - 0.5(61) - -
Impervious Areas
Paved parking lots, roofs, driveways - 1.9(98) - -
OTHER AGRICULTURAL LANDS
Woods good - 0.6(55) - -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) 3

====
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: 3 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 83*

TIME OF CONCENTRATION AND TRAVEL TIME Version 2.00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow Type 2 year Length Slope Surface n Area Wp Velocity Time
rain (ft) (ft/ft) code (sq/ft) (ft) (ft/sec) (hr)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sheet 3.4 50 0.015 E 0.102
Shallow Concent'd 600 0.02 P 0.058
Open Channel 50 7.25 0.002
Time of Concentration = 0.16*
=====
--- Sheet Flow Surface Codes ---
A Smooth Surface F Grass, Dense --- Shallow Concentrated ---
B Fallow (No Res.) G Grass, Burmuda --- Surface Codes ---
C Cultivated < 20 % Res. H Woods, Light P Paved
D Cultivated > 20 % Res. I Woods, Dense U Unpaved
E Grass-Range, Short J Range, Natural
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.00

Data: Drainage Area : 3 * Acres
Runoff Curve Number : 83 *
Time of Concentration: 0.16 * Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE
=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.8 | 3.4 | 4.6 | 5.4 | 6.2 | 6.9 | 7.8 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.15 | 0.12 | 0.09 | 0.08 | 0.07 | 0.06 | 0.05 |
| Used | 0.15 | 0.12 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 |
| Runoff (in) | 1.29 | 1.77 | 2.81 | 3.54 | 4.28 | 4.93 | 5.79 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |1.322 |1.342 |1.357 |1.357 |1.357 |1.357 |1.357 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 5 | 7 | 11 | 14 | 17 | 20 | 24 |
=========================================================================
* - Value(s) provided from TR-55 system routines

2.27
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Design Example No. 3: Multiple Drainage Areas – Pensyl Pointe

Site data and the layout of the Pensyl Pointe subdivision are shown in Fig. 2-12.

Step 1. Compute WQv Volume

( P)( Rv )( A)
WQv =
12
Step 1a. Compute Runoff Coefficient

Drainage Area 1
Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 2.25 acres 7.6 acres = 29.6%
= 0.05 + (0.009)(29.6) = 0.32

Drainage Area 2
Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 11.55 acres 30.4 acres = 38.0%
= 0.05 + (0.009)(38.0) = 0.39
or

Total Site
Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 13.8 acres 38.0 acres = 36.3%
= 0.05 + (0.009)(36.3) = 0.38

Step 1b. Determine Rainfall Zone for WQv Formula

Location Formula
Eastern Rainfall Zone 1.0 inches
Western Rainfall Zone 0.9 inches
Minimum WQv (I ≤ 15%) 0.2 inches

Because this site is located in the Eastern Rainfall Zone and imperviousness exceeds
15%, use 1.0” of rainfall to determine WQv.

Step 1c. Compute WQv

Drainage Area 1
WQv = [(1.0”)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(1.0”)(0.32)(7.6 ac)]/12
= 0.20ac-ft

2.28
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure 2.12 Pensyl Pointe

Drainage Area 1

Drainage Area 2
Base Data
Location: Olney, MD Hydrologic Data
Site Area = 38.0 ac
(Post-developed)
Measured Site Impervious Area = 13.8 ac; I = 13.8/38 = 36.3%
Soils Types: 60% “B”, 40% C DA 1 DA 2
Stream Use Designation – III, Zoning: Residential (½ acre lots) CN 76 78
Drainage Area (DA) 1
Area = 7.6 ac.
Measured Impervious Area = 2.25 ac; I = 2.25/7.6 = 30.0%
Drainage Area (DA) 2 tc 0.15 0.19
Area = 30.4 ac.
Measured Impervious Area = 11.55 ac; I = 11.55/30.4 = 38.0%

2.29
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Drainage Area 2
WQv = [(1.0”)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(1.0”)(0.39)(30.4 ac)]/12
= 0.99 ac-ft

or

Total Site
WQv = [(1.0”)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(1.0”)(0.38)(38.0)]/12
= 1.20 ac-ft

Step 2. Compute Recharge Volume

Step 2a. Determine Recharge Equation Based on Hydrologic Soil Group

HSG Soil Specific Recharge Factor (S)

A 0.38
B 0.26
C 0.13
D 0.06

Assume imperviousness is located proportionally (60/40) in B and C soils and compute

a composite S:

S=
(0.26 × 22.8 acres )(0.13 × 15.2 acres ) = 0.208 or 20.8 %
38.0 acres

Step 2b. Compute Recharge Using Percent Volume Method

Drainage Area 1
Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)] 12
= [(0.208)(0.32)(7.6 ac)]/12
= 0.04 ac-ft

Drainage Area 2
Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)] 12
= [(0.208)(0.39)(30.4 ac)]/12
= 0.21 ac-ft

2.30
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

or

Total Site
Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)] 12
= [(0.208)(0.38)(38.0 ac)]/12
= 0.25 ac-ft

Step 2c. Compute Recharge Using Percent Area Method

Drainage Area 1
Rev = (S)(Ai)
= (0.208)(2.25 ac)
= 0.47 acres

Drainage Area 2
Rev = (S)(Ai)
= (0.208)(11.55 ac)
= 2.40 acres

or

Total Site
Rev = (S)(Ai)
= (0.208)(13.8 ac)
= 2.87 acres

The Rev requirement may be met by: a) treating 0.25 ac-ft using structural methods, b) treating
2.87 acres using non-structural methods, or c) a combination of both (e.g., 0.19 ac-ft
structurally and 0.72 acres non-structurally).

Step 3. Compute Channel Protection Volume (Cpv):

Step 3a. Select Cpv Sizing Rule

For channel protection, provide 12 or 24 hours of extended detention time (T) for the one-year
design storm event.

Stream Use Designation Maximum Hours Allowable (T)

Use I (general) 24
Use II (tidal) N/A
Use III (reproducing trout) 12
Use IV (recreational trout) 12

2.31
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Given that our stream is Use III, we will use a T of 12 hours for the one-year design storm
event.

Step 3b. Develop site hydrologic and TR-55 Input Parameters.

Per attached TR-55 calculations (see Figures 2.13 and 2.14)

.
Drainage Area CN tc Runoff (Qa), Discharge (Q)
1 yr storm 1 yr storm
hrs inches cfs
1 76 0.15 0.76 7.40
2 78 0.19 0.85 30.5

Step 3c. Utilize MDE Method to Compute Storage Volume (Appendix D.11)

Drainage Area 1

Initial abstraction (Ia) for CN of 76 is 0.63: (TR-55) [Ia = (200/CN) – 2]

Ia/P = (0.63)/2.6” = 0.24

tc = 0.15 hours

From Figure D.11.1, qu = 840 csm/in

Knowing qu and T, find qo/qi from Figure D.11.2, “Detention Time Versus Discharge Ratios”

Peak outflow discharge/peak inflow discharge (qo/qi) = 0.040

With qo/qi , compute Vs/Vr ; for a Type II rainfall distribution,

Vs/Vr = 0.683-1.43(qo/qi)+1.64(qo/qi)2-0.804(qo/qi)3 (App.D.11)

Vs/Vr = 0.62

Therefore Vs = 0.62(0.76”)(1’/12”)(7.6 ac) = 0.30 ac-ft

Drainage Area 2

Initial abstraction (Ia) for CN of 78 is 0.564: (TR-55) [Ia = (200/CN) – 2]

Ia/P = (0.63)/2.6” = 0.22

tc = 0.19 hours

From Figure D.11.1, qu = 740 csm/in

2.32
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Knowing qu and T, find qo/qi from Figure D.11.2, “Detention Time Versus Discharge Ratios”
Peak outflow discharge/peak inflow discharge (qo/qi) = 0.050

With qo/qi , compute Vs/Vr ; for a Type II rainfall distribution,

Vs/Vr = 0.683-1.43(qo/qi)+1.64(qo/qi)2-0.804(qo/qi)3 (App. D.11)

Vs/Vr = 0.61

Therefore Vs = 0.61(0.85”)(1’/12”)(30.4 ac) = 1.31 ac-ft

Step 3d. Define the Cpv Release Rate

Drainage Area 1

qi is known (7.4 cfs), therefore,

qo = (q0/qi) qi = .040 (7.4 cfs) = 0.30 cfs

Drainage Area 2

qi is known (30.5 cfs), therefore,

qo = (q0/qi) qi = .050 (30.5 cfs) = 1.53 cfs

Step 4. Compute Overbank Flood Protection Volume (Qp):

Step 4a. Determine Appropriate Qp Requirement

Location Type of Peak Control

Eastern Shore 2-year/2-year
All Other Areas 10-year/10-year *
*
Varies according to local approval authority.

Because the site is located on the Western Shore, ten-year peak management for
quantity control may be required. For the purpose of this example, the local approval
authority has not required the ten-year peak management requirement.

Step 5. Extreme Flood Volume (Qf)

For this example, management of Qf is not required. However, at final design the 100-year
event must be conveyed safely through any stormwater management practices. Based on field
observation, downstream conveyance may require analysis for passing the 100-year event
through existing infrastructure.

2.33
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Table 2.5 Summary of General Storage Requirements for Pensyl Pointe

No. Category Volume Required Notes

Drainage Area 1 Drainage Area 2
1 Water Quality Volume 0.20 ac-ft 0.99 ac-ft
(WQv)
2 Recharge Volume 0.04 ac-ft 0.21 ac-ft this volume is
(Rev) included within the
WQv storage
3 Channel Protection 0.30 ac-ft 1.31 ac-ft release rates are 0.30
Volume (Cpv) and 1.53 cfs,
respectively.
4 Overbank Flood N/A N/A 10-year peak
Protection Storage management has been
Volume (Qp) waived.
5 Extreme Flood Volume N/A N/A provide safe passage
(Qf) for the 100-year event
in final design.

2.34
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure 2.13: Pensyl Pointe, Drainage Area 1 – Post Developed Conditions

RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.00

Project : Pensyl Pointe User: SRC Date: 08-31-98

County : Montgomery State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: Design Example 3
Subarea : DRAINAGE AREA 1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FULLY DEVELOPED URBAN AREAS (Veg Estab.)
Open space (Lawns,parks etc.)
Good condition; grass cover > 75% - 2.60(61) 1.04(74) -

Impervious Areas
Paved parking lots, roofs, driveways - 1.35(98) 0.90(98) -

OTHER AGRICULTURAL LANDS

Woods good - - 1.71(70) -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) 3.95 3.65

==== ====
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUBAREA: DA 1 TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: 7.6 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 76
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.00

Project : Comstock Pointe User: SRC Date: 08-31-98

County : Montgomery State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: Design Example 3

Data: Drainage Area : 7.6 * Acres

Runoff Curve Number : 76 *
Time of Concentration: 0.15 Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE
=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.6 | 3.2 | 4.2 | 5.1 | 5.6 | 6.3 | 7.2 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.24 | 0.20 | 0.15 | 0.12 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.09 |
| Used | 0.24 | 0.20 | 0.15 | 0.12 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.10 |
| Runoff (in) | 0.76 | 1.15 | 1.89 | 2.62 | 3.04 | 3.64 | 4.44 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |1.281 |1.315 |1.351 |1.371 |1.379 |1.388 |1.388 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 7 | 12 | 19 | 27 | 32 | 38 | 47 |
=========================================================================

2.35
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Design Examples

Figure 2.14: Pensyl Pointe, Drainage Area 2 – Post Developed Conditions

RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.00

Project : Pensyl Pointe User: SRC Date: 08-31-98

County : Montgomery State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: Design Example 3
Subarea : DRAINAGE AREA 2
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FULLY DEVELOPED URBAN AREAS (Veg Estab.)
Open space (Lawns,parks etc.)
Good condition; grass cover > 75% - 10.4(61) 4.16(74) -

Impervious Areas
Paved parking lots, roofs, driveways - 6.63(98) 4.92(98) -

OTHER AGRICULTURAL LANDS

Woods good - - 4.29(70) -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) 17.0 13.3

==== ====
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
SUBAREA: DA 2 TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: 30.4 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 78

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.00

Data: Drainage Area : 30.4 Acres

Runoff Curve Number : 78
Time of Concentration: 0.19 Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE
=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.6 | 3.2 | 4.2 | 5.1 | 5.6 | 6.3 | 7.2 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.22 | 0.18 | 0.13 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.09 | 0.08 |
| Used | 0.22 | 0.18 | 0.13 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 |
| Runoff (in) | 0.85 | 1.27 | 2.05 | 2.80 | 3.23 | 3.85 | 4.66 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |1.182 |1.214 |1.247 |1.266 |1.274 |1.275 |1.275 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 31 | 47 | 78 | 108 | 125 | 149 | 180 |
=========================================================================

2.36
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................... Acceptable Urban BMP Options

Section 2.7 Acceptable Urban BMP Options

This section sets forth six acceptable groups of BMPs that can be used to meet the water
quality and/or groundwater recharge volume criteria.

2.7.1 Urban BMP Groups

The dozens of different BMP designs currently used in the State of Maryland are assigned into
six general categories for stormwater quality control (WQv and/or Rev):

BMP Group 1 stormwater ponds

BMP Group 2 stormwater wetlands
BMP Group 3 infiltration practices
BMP Group 4 filtering practices
BMP Group 5 open channel practices
BMP Group 6 non-structural practices

Within each BMP group, detailed performance criteria are presented that govern feasibility,
conveyance, pretreatment, treatment, environmental/landscaping and maintenance requirements
(see Chapter 3).

To be considered an effective BMP for stand-alone treatment of WQv, a design shall be capable
of:

1. capturing and treating the required water quality volume (WQv),

2. removing 80% of the TSS,
3. removing 40% of the TP, and
4. having an acceptable longevity rate in the field.

A combination of structural and/or non-structural BMPs are normally required at most

development sites to meet all five stormwater sizing criteria. Documentation of the capability
of the BMPs to remove TSS is provided in Appendix D.5. Guidance on selecting the most
appropriate combination of BMPs is provided in Chapter 4.

BMP Group 1. Stormwater Ponds

Practices that have a combination of a permanent pool, extended detention or shallow wetland
equivalent to the entire WQv include:

P-1 micropool extended detention pond

P-2 wet pond
P-3 wet extended detention pond

2.37
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................... Acceptable Urban BMP Options

P-4 multiple pond system

P-5 pocket pond

BMP Group 2. Stormwater Wetlands

Practices that include significant shallow wetland areas to treat urban stormwater but often may
also incorporate small permanent pools and/or extended detention storage to achieve the full
WQv include:

W-1 shallow wetland

W-2 ED shallow wetland
W-3 pond/wetland system
W-4 pocket wetland

BMP Group 3. Infiltration Practices

Practices that capture and temporarily store the WQv before allowing it to infiltrate into the soil
over a two day period include:

I-1 infiltration trench

I-2 infiltration basin

BMP Group 4. Filtering Practices

Practices that capture and temporarily store the WQv and pass it through a filter bed of sand,
organic matter, soil or other media are considered to be filtering practices. Filtered runoff may
be collected and returned to the conveyance system. Design variants include:

F-1 surface sand filter

F-2 underground sand filter
F-3 perimeter sand filter
F-4 organic filter
F-5 pocket sand filter
F-6 bioretention*

* may also be used for infiltration.

2.38
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................... Acceptable Urban BMP Options

BMP Group 5. Open Channel Practices

Vegetated open channels that are explicitly designed to capture and treat the full WQv within
dry or wet cells formed by checkdams or other means include:

O-1 dry swale

O-2 wet swale

BMP Group 6. Non-structural BMPs

Non-structural BMPs are increasingly recognized as a critical feature of stormwater BMP

plans, particularly with respect to site design. In most cases, non-structural BMPs shall be
combined with structural BMPs to meet all stormwater requirements. The key benefit of non-
structural BMPs is that they can reduce the generation of stormwater from the site; thereby
reducing the size and cost of structural BMPs. In addition, they can provide partial removal of
many pollutants. The non-structural BMPs have been classified into seven broad categories.
To promote greater use of non-structural BMPs, a series of credits and incentives are provided
for developments that use these progressive site planning techniques in Chapter 5.

" natural area conservation

" disconnection of rooftop runoff
" disconnection of non-rooftop impervious area
" sheet flow to buffers
" open channel use
" environmentally sensitive development
" impervious cover reduction

2.7.2 Structural BMPs that do not fully meet the WQv Requirement

Many current and future stormwater management structures may not meet the performance
criteria specified in Section 1.2 above to qualify to be used as “stand-alone” practices for full
WQv treatment. Reasons for this include poor longevity, poor performance, inability to
decrease TSS by 80% and TP by 40%, or inadequate testing. Some of these practices include:

" catch basin inserts

" dry extended detention ponds
" water quality inlets and oil/grit separators
" hydro-dynamic structures
" filter strips
" grass channels
" street sweeping

2.39
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Stormwater Hotspots
" deep sump catch basins
" dry wells
" on-line storage in the storm drain network

In some cases, these practices are appropriately used for pretreatment, to meet recharge
volume (Rev) requirements, as part of an overall BMP system, or may be applied in
redevelopment situations on a case-by-case basis where other practices are not feasible.

New structural BMP designs are continually being developed, including many proprietary
designs. All current and future structural practice design variants should fit in one of the six
BMP groups referenced above if the intent is to use them independently to treat the full WQv.
Current or new BMP design variants cannot be accepted for inclusion on the list until
independent pollutant removal performance and monitoring data determine that they can meet
the 80% TSS and 40% TP removal targets and that the new BMPs conform with local and/or
State criteria for treatment, maintenance, and environmental impact.

Section 2.8 Designation of Stormwater Hotspots

A stormwater hotspot is defined as a land use or activity that generates higher concentrations of
hydrocarbons, trace metals or toxicants than are found in typical stormwater runoff, based on
monitoring studies. Table 2.6 provides a list of designated hotspots for the State of Maryland.
If a site is designated as a hotspot, it has important implications for how stormwater is
managed. First and foremost, untreated stormwater runoff from hotspots cannot be allowed to
infiltrate into groundwater where it may contaminate water supplies. Therefore, the Rev
requirement is NOT applied to development sites that fit into the hotspot category (the entire
WQv must still be treated). Second, a greater level of stormwater treatment is needed at hotspot
sites to prevent pollutant washoff after construction. This typically involves preparing and
implementing a stormwater pollution prevention plan that involves a series of operational
practices at the site that reduces the generation of pollutants by preventing contact with rainfall.

Under EPA’s NPDES stormwater program, some industrial sites are required to prepare and
implement a stormwater pollution prevention plan. A list of industrial categories that are
subject to the pollution prevention requirement can be found in Appendix D.6. In addition,
Maryland’s requirements for preparing and implementing a stormwater pollution prevention
plan are also described in the general discharge permit provided in the same Appendix. The
stormwater pollution prevention plan requirement applies to both existing and new industrial
sites.

In addition, if a site falls into a "hotspot" category outlined in Table 2.6, a pollution prevention
plan may also be required by the appropriate reviewing authority. Golf courses and
commercial nurseries may also be required to implement a plan by the appropriate approval
authority.

2.40
Chapter 2. Unified Stormwater Sizing Criteria ................................. Stormwater Hotspots

Table 2.6 Classification of Stormwater Hotspots

The following land uses and activities are deemed stormwater hotspots:

" vehicle salvage yards and recycling facilities*

" vehicle service and maintenance facilities
" vehicle and equipment cleaning facilities*
" fleet storage areas (bus, truck, etc.)*
" industrial sites (for SIC codes outlined in Appendix D.6)
" marinas (service and maintenance)*
" outdoor liquid container storage
" outdoor loading/unloading facilities
" public works storage areas
" facilities that generate or store hazardous materials*
" commercial container nursery
" other land uses and activities as designated by an appropriate review authority

* stormwater pollution prevention plan implementation is required for these land uses or
activities under the EPA NPDES stormwater program (see Appendix D.6).

The following land uses and activities are not normally considered hotspots:

" residential streets and rural highways

" residential development
" institutional development
" commercial and office developments
" non-industrial rooftops
" pervious areas, except golf courses and nurseries [which may need an Integrated Pest
Management Plan (IPM)].

While large highways [average daily traffic volume (ADT) greater than 30,000] and retail
gasoline outlet facilities are not designated as stormwater hotspots, it is important to ensure that
highway and retail gasoline outlet stormwater management plans adequately protect
groundwater.

2.41
Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design
3.0
Chapter
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ...............................Introduction

3.0 Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design

This chapter outlines performance criteria for five groups of structural water quality
stormwater BMPs that include ponds, wetlands, infiltration practices, filtering systems and
open channels.

Each set of BMP performance criteria, in turn, is based on six factors:

General Feasibility
Conveyance
Pretreatment
Treatment/Geometry
Environmental/Landscaping
Maintenance

One significant caveat applies to all performance criteria. The criteria represent a set of
conditions that ensure an effective and durable BMP. In this chapter, Mandatory performance
criteria are distinguished from suggested design criteria (the former is required at all sites in
Maryland, while the latter are only recommended for most sites and conditions). Thus, in the
text, mandatory performance criteria are indicated by italics, whereas suggested design criteria
are shown in normal typeface.

IMPORTANT NOTES:

1) Any stormwater management BMP that uses an embankment for impounding water is
required to follow the latest version of the NRCS-MD 378 Pond Code Standards And
Specifications For Small Pond Design (Appendix B.1) and obtain approval from the
local Soil Conservation District (SCD) or appropriate review authority.

2) In USE III watersheds, temperature increases caused by development are a primary

impact to the quality of receiving waters. Stormwater BMPs may contribute to this
problem. Therefore, to minimize temperature increases caused by new development in
USE III watersheds, stormwater BMP designs should:
a) Minimize permanent pools,
b) Limit extended detention times for Cpv to 12 hours (see Appendix D.11),
c) Provide shading for pools and channels,
d) Maintain existing forested buffers, and
e) Bypass available baseflow and/or springflow.

3.1
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

Section 3.1 Stormwater Ponds

Definition: Practices that have a permanent pool, or a combination of extended detention or

shallow wetland with a permanent pool equivalent to the entire WQv. Design variants include:

P-1 micropool extended detention pond (Figure 3.1)

P-2 wet pond (Figure 3.2)
P-3 wet extended detention pond (Figure 3.3)
P-4 multiple pond system (Figure 3.4)
P-5 pocket pond (Figure 3.5)

The term "pocket" refers to a pond or wetland that has such a small contributing drainage area
that little or no baseflow is available to sustain water elevations during dry weather. Instead,
water elevations are heavily influenced and, in some cases, maintained by a locally high water
table.

Dry extended detention ponds that have no permanent pool are not considered an acceptable
option for meeting WQv.

Stormwater ponds may also provide storage for the Cpv, Qp and/or Qf above the WQv storage
elevation.

IMPORTANT NOTE: Any stormwater management BMP that uses an embankment for
impounding water is required to follow the latest version of the NRCS-MD 378 Pond Code
Standards And Specifications For Small Pond Design (Appendix B.1) and obtain approval from
the local Soil Conservation District (SCD) or appropriate review authority.

3.2
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

P-1 Figure 3.1 Example of “Micropool” Extended Detention Pond P-1

2

MAXIMUM ELEVATION
OF 100 YEAR STORM

MAXIMUM ELEVATION EMERGENCY

OF ED POOL SPILLWAY
EXISTING
VEGETATION RETAINED

AQUATIC
PILOT CHANNEL BENCH

INFLOW
FOREBAY
OUTFALL

MICROPOOL
SAFETY
BENCH

MA
INT
EN
ANC
EA
CC
ESS
TO
MIC
RO
POO
L

PLAN VIEW

EMBANKMENT

RISER
Qf LEVEL EMERGENCY
SPILLWAY
Qp LEVEL
Cpv LEVEL
ED LEVEL
HOOD

INFLOW STABLE
OUTFALL

FOREBAY MICROPOOL BARREL

ANTI-SEEP COLLAR or
FILTER DIAPHRAGM

PROFILE

A micropool is provided in an extended detention pond to prevent resuspension of previously

settled sediments and prevent clogging of the low flow orifice.

3.3
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

P-2 Figure 3.2 Example of Wet Pond P-2

A wet pond provides all of water quality volume storage in a permanent pool.

3.4
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

P-3 Figure 3.3 Example of Wet Extended Detention Pond P-3

The wet ED pond provides water quality storage through a combination of permanent pool
and extended detention storage.

3.5
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

P-4 Figure 3.4 Example of Multiple Pond System P-4

SAFETY RISER /
BENCH BARREL
LL
TFA
MA OU
INT
EN
AN
CE
ACCESS
RO
AD

CELL 1
(FOREBAY)
CELL 3

INFLOW

EMERGENCY
CELL 2 SPILLWAY

OVERFLOW SPILLWAY
(TYPICAL)

AQUATIC BENCH
SAFETY BENCH CE
AN AD
TEN RO
N
AI SS
M CE
AC

PLAN VIEW

EMBANKMENT

RISER
100 YEAR LEVEL EMERGENCY
SPILLWAY
10 YEAR LEVEL

Cpv or 2 YEAR LEVEL

AQUATIC SAFETY
BENCH BENCH

INFLOW STABLE
OUTFALL
CELL 1
(FOREBAY) CELL 2 BARREL
(WET POOL) CELL 3
(WET POOL)
POND DRAIN
REVERSE PIPE
ANTI-SEEP COLLAR or
FILTER DIAPHRAGM
PROFILE

Multiple pond systems provide WQv storage in two or more cells that create longer pollutant
removal pathways.

3.6
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

P-5 Figure 3.5 Example of Pocket Pond P-5

A high water table or groundwater interception maintains permanent pool level in a pocket
pond. However, excavation to groundwater interception should be avoided where the land
uses draining to the pond may contaminate drinking water supplies.

3.7
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

3.1.1 Pond Feasibility Criteria

Stormwater ponds shall have a minimum contributing drainage area of ten acres or more (25
or more are preferred), unless groundwater is confirmed as the primary water source (e.g.,
pocket pond).

Stormwater ponds cannot be located within jurisdictional waters, including wetlands, without
obtaining a Section 404 permit under the Clean Water Act and a State of Maryland wetlands
and waterway permit (See Chapter 4, Section 4.6.).

Stormwater ponds located within USE III watersheds shall require a small pond review and
approval from the MDE Dam Safety Division.

The use of stormwater ponds on coldwater streams capable of supporting trout (Use III and IV)
may be prohibited. Stormwater ponds located in Use III and IV watersheds should be designed
to significantly reduce and/or eliminate thermal impacts (See Chapter 4, Section 4.1).

The design and construction of stormwater management ponds are required to follow the latest
version of the NRCS-MD 378 Pond Code Standards and Specifications for Small Pond Design
(Appendix B.1) and obtain approval from the local Soil Conservation District (SCD) or
appropriate review authority.

Pages 1 and 2 of the NRCS-MD 378 Pond Code Standards and Specifications for Small Pond
Design (MD-378) describe the conditions for exemption from formal review by the local SCD.
While not required to meet all conditions of MD-378, facilities that are exempt shall be
approved by the appropriate authority and conform to the following minimum design and
construction criteria:

1) design for a stable outfall using the ten year design storm (or two year design storm if
the pond is an off-line structure providing WQv storage only).

2) dams shall meet class A dam safety hazard classification,

3) principal spillway/riser shall provide anti-floatation, anti-vortex, and trash-rack

designs.

4) one (1) foot of freeboard shall be provided above the design high water for the 10 year
storm.

5) material and construction specifications for the principal spillway shall be in

accordance with MD 378 code.

3.8
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

6) material and construction specifications for the embankment shall be in accordance with
MD 378 code, except that fill material for the embankment shall conform to Unified Soil
Classification GC, SC, SM, MH, ML, CH, or CL, and no cutoff trench is required.

7) woody vegetation is prohibited on the embankment.

A pond structure requires review and approval by the MDE Dam Safety Division if any of the
following conditions apply:

a) the proposed embankment is twenty feet or greater in height from the upstream toe to
the top of dam, or

b) the contributing drainage area is a square mile (640 acres) or greater, or

c) the structure is classified as “high” or “intermediate” hazard, according to the MD

Dam Safety Manual, or

d) the proposed pond is in USE III waters.

3.1.2 Pond Conveyance Criteria

When reinforced concrete pipe is used for the principal spillway to increase its longevity, “O-
ring” gaskets (ASTM C-361) should be used to create watertight joints and should be inspected
during installation.

Inlet Protection

Inlet pipes to the pond should not be fully submerged at normal pool elevations.

A forebay shall be provided at each inlet, unless the inlet provides less than 10% of the total
design storm inflow to the pond.

Adequate Outfall Protection

Flared pipe sections that discharge at or near the stream invert or into a step-pool arrangement
should be used at the spillway outlet.

The channel immediately below the pond outfall shall be modified to prevent erosion and
conform to natural dimensions in the shortest possible distance, typically by use of large rip-
rap placed over filter cloth.

3.9
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

A stilling basin or other outlet protection should be used to reduce flow velocities from the
principal spillway to non-erosive velocities (see Appendix D.12 for critical non-erosive
velocities for grass and soil).

If a pond daylights to a channel with dry weather flow, care should be taken to minimize tree
clearing along the downstream channel and to reestablish a forested riparian zone in the
shortest possible distance. Excessive use of rip-rap should be avoided to reduce stream
warming.

Pond Liners

When a pond is located in karst topography, gravelly sands or fractured bedrock, a liner may
be needed to sustain a permanent pool of water. If geotechnical tests confirm the need for a
liner, acceptable options include: (a) 6 to 12 inches of clay soil (minimum 15% passing the
#200 sieve and a maximum permeability of 1 x 10-5 cm/sec), (b) a 30 mil poly-liner, (c)
bentonite, (d) use of chemical additives (see NRCS Agricultural Handbook No. 387, dated
1971, Engineering Field Manual), or (e) other suitable materials approved by the appropriate
review authority.

3.1.3 Pond Pretreatment Criteria

Sediment Forebay

Each pond shall have a sediment forebay or equivalent upstream pretreatment. The forebay
shall consist of a separate cell, formed by an acceptable barrier.

The forebay shall be sized to contain 0.1 inches per impervious acre of contributing drainage.
The forebay storage volume counts toward the total WQv requirement. Exit velocities from the
forebay shall be non-erosive.

Direct maintenance access for appropriate equipment shall be provided to the forebay.

The bottom of the forebay may be hardened (e.g., using concrete, paver blocks, etc.) to make
sediment removal easier.

A fixed vertical sediment depth marker should be installed in the forebay to measure sediment
deposition over time.

3.10
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

3.1.4 Pond Treatment Criteria

Minimum Water Quality Volume (WQv)

Ponds shall be designed to capture and treat the computed WQv through any combination of
permanent pool, extended detention (ED) or wetland. If treated separately, the Rev may be
subtracted from the WQv for pond design.

It is generally desirable to provide water quality treatment off-line when topography, head and
space permit (e.g., apart from stormwater quantity storage).

Water quality storage can be provided in multiple cells. Performance is enhanced when
multiple treatment pathways are provided by using multiple cells, longer flowpaths, high
surface area to volume ratios, complex microtopography, and/or redundant treatment methods
(combinations of pool, ED, and wetland).

If ED is provided in a pond, storage for WQv and Cpv shall be computed and routed separately
(e.g., the WQv requirement cannot be met simply by providing Cpv storage for the one-year
storm).

Minimum Pond Geometry

Flowpaths from inflow points to outlets shall be maximized. Flowpaths of 1.5:1 (length
relative to width) and irregular shapes are recommended.

3.1.5 Pond Landscaping Criteria

Pond Benches

The perimeter of all deep permanent pool areas (four feet or greater in depth) shall be
surrounded by two benches with a combined minimum width of 15 feet:

A safety bench that extends outward from the normal water edge to the toe of the pond
side slope. The maximum slope of the safety bench shall be 6%.

An aquatic bench that extends inward from the normal shoreline and has a maximum
depth of eighteen inches below the normal pool water surface elevation. An aquatic
bench is not required in forebays.

3.11
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

Landscaping Plan

A landscaping plan for a stormwater pond and its buffer shall be prepared to indicate how
aquatic and terrestrial areas will be vegetatively stabilized and established. Landscaping
guidance for stormwater ponds is provided in Appendix A.

Wherever possible, wetland plants should be encouraged in a pond design, either along the
aquatic bench (fringe wetlands), the safety bench and side slopes (emergent wetlands) or within
shallow areas of the pool itself.

The best elevations for establishing wetland plants, either through transplantation or volunteer
colonization, are within six inches (plus or minus) of the normal pool.

The soils of a pond buffer are often severely compacted during the construction process to
ensure stability. The density of these compacted soils is so great that it effectively prevents
root penetration, and therefore, may lead to premature mortality or loss of vigor.
Consequently, it is advisable to excavate large and deep holes around the proposed planting
sites, and backfill these with uncompacted topsoil.

As a rule of thumb, planting holes should be at least six inches larger than the diameter of the
rootball (of balled and burlap stock), and three inches wider for container grown stock. This
practice should enable the stock to develop unconfined root systems. Avoid species that
require full shade, are susceptible to winterkill, or are prone to wind damage. Extra mulching
around the base of the tree or shrub is strongly recommended as a means of conserving
moisture and suppressing weeds.

Pond Buffers and Setbacks

A pond buffer should be provided that extends 25 feet outward from the maximum water
surface elevation of the pond. The pond buffer should be contiguous with other buffer areas
that are required by existing regulations (e.g., stream buffers). An additional setback may be
provided to permanent structures.

Existing trees should be preserved in the buffer area during construction. It is desirable to
locate forest conservation areas adjacent to ponds. To discourage resident geese populations,
the buffer can be planted with trees, shrubs and native ground covers.

Woody vegetation may not be planted on nor allowed to grow within 15 feet of the toe of the
embankment and 25 feet of the principal spillway structure.

Annual mowing of the pond buffer is only required along maintenance rights-of-way and the
embankment. The remaining buffer can be managed as a meadow (mowing every other year)
or forest.

3.12
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

3.1.6 Pond Maintenance Criteria

Maintenance Measures

Maintenance responsibility for a pond and its buffer shall be vested with a responsible party by
means of a legally binding and enforceable maintenance agreement that is executed as a
condition of plan approval or local permitting processes.

The principal spillway shall be equipped with a trash rack that provides access for
maintenance.

Sediment removal in the forebay shall occur when 50% of the total forebay capacity has been
lost.

Sediments excavated from stormwater ponds that do not receive runoff from designated
hotspots are not considered toxic or hazardous material and can be safely disposed by either
land application or land filling. Sediment testing may be required prior to sediment disposal
when a hotspot land use is present.

Sediment removed from stormwater ponds should be disposed of according to current erosion
and sediment control regulations.

Maintenance Access

A maintenance right-of-way or easement shall extend to a pond from a public or private road.

Maintenance access should be at least 12 feet wide; have a maximum slope of no more than
15%; and be appropriately stabilized to withstand maintenance equipment and vehicles.

The maintenance access should extend to the forebay, safety bench, riser, and outlet and be
designed to allow vehicles to turn around.

Non-clogging Low Flow Orifice

The low flow orifice shall have a minimum diameter of 3 inches and shall be adequately
protected from clogging by an acceptable external trash rack. Two examples of approved
external trash racks are provided in Detail No. 1 and 2 of Appendix D.8. The low flow orifice
diameter may be reduced to one inch if an internal orifice is used (e.g., an over-perforated
vertical standpipe that is protected by hardware cloth and a stone filtering jacket). A schematic
design of an acceptable internal orifice protection design is provided in Detail No. 3 of
Appendix D.8.

3.13
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

The preferred method is a submerged reverse-slope pipe that extends downward from the riser
to an inflow point one foot below the normal pool elevation.

Alternative methods are to employ a broad crested rectangular, V-notch, or proportional weir,
protected by a half-round corrugated metal pipe (CMP) or similar device that extends at least
12 inches below the normal pool. (See Detail No. 7 of Appendix D.8.)

The use of horizontal perforated pipe protected by geotextile and gravel is not recommended.

Vertical pipes may be used as an alternative if a permanent pool is present.

Riser

The riser shall be located within the embankment for maintenance access, safety and
aesthetics.

Access to the riser is to be provided by lockable manhole covers and manhole steps within easy
reach of valves and other controls. Riser openings should be fenced with pipe or rebar to
prevent trash accumulation.

Pond Drain

Each pond shall have a drain pipe that can completely or partially drain the pond within 24
hours. This requirement is waived for the Lower Eastern Shore where positive drainage is
difficult to achieve due to very low relief.

Care should be exercised during pond drawdowns to prevent downstream discharge of

sediments or anoxic water and slope instability caused by rapid drawdown.

The approving jurisdiction shall be notified before draining a pond.

Valves

The pond drain shall be equipped with an adjustable valve (typically a handwheel activated
knife or gate valve).

The pond drain should be sized one pipe size greater than the calculated design diameter.

Valve controls shall be located inside of the riser at a point where they (a) will not normally be
inundated and (b) can be operated in a safe manner.

To prevent vandalism, the handwheel should be chained to a ringbolt, manhole step or other
fixed object.

3.14
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ....................... Stormwater Ponds

Safety Features

Fencing of ponds is not generally desirable but may be required by the local review authority.
A preferred method is to manage the contours of the pond to eliminate dropoffs and other
safety hazards.

Internal side slopes to the pond should not exceed 3:1 (h:v) and should terminate on a safety
bench. Both the safety bench and the aquatic bench may be landscaped to prevent access to the
pool. The bench requirement may be waived if slopes are 4:1 or gentler.

Riser openings shall not permit unauthorized access. Riser tops that are four feet or greater
above the ground shall include railings for safety. Endwalls above pipe outfalls greater than 48
inches in diameter shall be fenced to prevent injury.

Warning signs prohibiting swimming and skating should be posted.

3.15
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

Section 3.2 Stormwater Wetlands

Definition: Practices that create shallow wetland areas to treat urban stormwater and often
incorporate small permanent pools and/or extended detention storage to achieve the full
WQv. Design variants include:

W-1 shallow wetland (Figure 3.6)

W-2 ED shallow wetland (Figure 3.7)
W-3 pond/wetland system (Figure 3.8)
W-4 pocket wetland (Figure 3.9)

Stormwater wetlands may also provide Cpv and Qp storage above the WQv storage.

IMPORTANT NOTES:

1) Except for specific minimum contributing drainage area and the use of these practices in
coldwater streams (USE III AND IV), all of the pond performance criteria presented in
section 3.1 also apply to the design of stormwater wetlands. Additional criteria that
govern the geometry and establishment of created wetlands are presented in this section.

2) Any stormwater management BMP that uses an embankment for impounding water is
required to follow the latest version of the NRCS-MD 378 Pond Code Standards And
Specifications For Small Pond Design (Appendix B.1) and obtain approval from the local
SCD or appropriate review authority.

3.16
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

W-1 Figure 3.6 Example of Shallow Wetland W-1

Shallow wetlands provide WQv in a shallow pool that has a large surface area.

3.17
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

W-2 Figure 3.7 Example of Extended Detention Shallow Wetland W-2

ED shallow wetlands provide water quality storage by a combination of shallow wetland

pool and extended detention storage.

3.18
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

W-3 Figure 3.8 Example of Pond/Wetland System W-3

In this BMP, a deep permanent pool is placed before the shallow wetland.

3.19
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

W-4 Figure 3.9 Example of Pocket Wetland W-4

10

MAINTENANCE ACCESS

SWALE

FOREBAY

MICROPOOL

LOW MARSH ZONE

HIGH MARSH WEDGES

SAFETY BENCH BUFFE HALF ROUND BROAD

R
TRASH RACK CRESTED
WEIR
MAXIMUM SAFETY STORM LIMIT

PLAN VIEW

EMBANKMENT

HIGH MARSH
100 YEAR LEVEL

10 YEAR LEVEL

Cpv or 2 YEAR LEVEL

HALF ROUND
SWALE
TRASH RACK
WQv LEVEL

STABLE
OUTFALL
FOREBAY
MICROPOOL
GROUND WATER LOW MARSH POND DRAIN
TABLE BARREL
ANTI-SEEP COLLAR or
FILTER DIAPHRAGM

PROFILE

A high water table or groundwater interception helps maintain the shallow wetland pool in a
pocket wetland.

3.20
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

3.2.1 Wetland Feasibility Criteria

A water balance must be performed to demonstrate that a stormwater wetland can withstand a
thirty day drought at summer evaporation rates without completely drawing down. See
Appendix D.3 for a shortcut assessment method for determining the adequacy of water
balance.

Stormwater wetlands may not be located within jurisdictional waters, including wetlands
without obtaining a Section 404 permit and/or State of Maryland wetlands and waterways
permit (see Chapter 4, Section 4.6.).

In USE III watersheds, stormwater wetlands that include permanent ponds as an integral design
component [e.g., pond/wetland systems (W-3)] may require a small pond review and approval
from the MDE Dam Safety Division (see Appendix B.1.2).

3.2.2 Wetland Conveyance Criteria

Flowpaths from inflow points to outflow points within stormwater wetlands shall be maximized.
Flowpaths of 1.5:1 (length relative to width) and irregular shapes are recommended. These
paths may be achieved by constructing internal berms (e.g., high marsh wedges or rock filter
cells). Microtopography is encouraged to enhance wetland diversity.

3.2.3 Wetland Pretreatment Criteria

Sediment regulation is critical to sustaining stormwater wetlands. Consequently, a forebay

shall be located at the inlet and a micropool shall be located at the outlet. Forebays are
designed in the same manner as ponds (see Section 3.1.3). A micropool is a three to six foot
deep pool used to protect the low flow pipe from clogging and prevent sediment resuspension.
Forebays in Use III watersheds should be designed to drain within 24 hours.

3.2.4 Wetland Treatment Criteria

The surface area of the entire stormwater wetland shall be at least one percent of the total
drainage area to the facility (1.5% for the shallow wetland design).

At least 25% of the total WQv shall be in deepwater zones with a minimum depth of four feet
(the forebay and micropool may meet this criteria). This criteria may be reduced if the
wetland is located where thermal impacts are a primary concern (e.g., Use III watersheds).

A minimum of 35% of the total surface area shall have a depth of six inches or less and at least
65% of the total surface area shall be shallower than 18 inches.

3.21
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

The bed of the wetland should be graded to create a maximum internal flowpath and
microtopography.

If extended detention is utilized in a stormwater wetland, the ED volume shall not comprise
more than 50% of the total wetland design, and the maximum water surface elevation shall not
extend more than three feet above the normal pool. Qp and/or Cpv storage can be provided
above the maximum WQv elevation within the wetland.

To promote greater nitrogen removal, rock beds may be used as a medium for the growth of
wetland plants. The rock should be one to three inches in diameter and placed up to the normal
pool elevation. Rock beds should also be open to flow-through from either direction.

3.2.5 Wetland Landscaping Criteria

A landscaping plan shall be provided that indicates the methods used to establish and maintain
wetland coverage. Minimum elements of a plan include: delineation of pondscaping zones,
selection of corresponding plant species, planting configuration, and sequence for preparing
wetland bed (including soil amendments, if needed).

Landscaping plans for stormwater wetlands located within Use III and IV watersheds should
incorporate features and plant species commonly found in wooded wetlands.

Structures such as fascines, coconut rolls, or straw bales can be used to create shallow marsh
cells in high energy areas of the stormwater wetland.

The landscaping plan should provide elements that promote greater wildlife and waterfowl use
within the wetland and buffers.

A wetland buffer should extend 25 feet outward from the maximum water surface elevation
with an additional 15 foot setback to structures.

Wetland Establishment Guidance

The most common and reliable technique for establishing an emergent wetland community in a
stormwater wetland is to transplant nursery stock obtained from local aquatic plant nurseries.
The following guidance is suggested when transplants are used to establish a wetland.

The transplanting window extends from early April to mid-June. Planting after these dates is
not recommended, as the wetland plants need a full growing season to build the root reserves
needed to get through the winter. If at all possible, the plants should be ordered at least three
months in advance to ensure the availability of the desired species.

3.22
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

The optimal depth requirements for several common species of emergent wetland plants are
often six inches of water or less.

To add diversity to the wetland, 5 to 7 species of emergent wetland plants should be used,
drawn from the suggested species listed in Appendix A. Of these, at least three species should
be selected from the "aggressive colonizer" group (e.g., bulrush, pickerelweed, arrow arum,
three square and rice cutgrass) (MDE, 1986).

The wetland area should be sub-divided into separate planting zones of more or less constant
depth. Approximately half the wetland surface area should be planted. One plant species
should be planted within each flagged planting zone, based on their approximate depth
requirements. Plants should be installed in clumps with individual plants located an average of
18 inches on center within each clump. Individual plants should be spaced 12 inches to 24
inches on center.

Post-nursery care of wetland plants is very important in the interval between delivery of the
plants and their subsequent installation, as they are prone to desiccation. Stock should be
frequently watered and shaded while on-site.

A wet hydroseed mix should be used to establish permanent vegetative cover in the buffer
outside of the permanent pool. For rapid germination, scarify the soil to ½ inch prior to
hydroseeding. Alternatively, red fescue or annual rye can be used as a temporary cover for the
wet species.

Because most stormwater wetlands are excavated to deep sub-soils, they often lack the
nutrients and organic matter needed to support vigorous growth of wetland plants. At these
sites, three to six inches of topsoil or wetland mulch should be added to all depth zones in the
wetland from one foot below the normal pool to six inches above. Wetland mulch is preferable
to topsoil if it is available.

The stormwater wetland should be staked at the onset of the planting season. Depths in the
wetland should be measured to the nearest inch to confirm the original planting zones. At this
time, it may be necessary to modify the pondscape plan to reflect altered depths or the
availability of wetland plant stock. Surveyed planting zones should be marked on an “as-built”
or design plan and located in the field using stakes or flags.

The wetland drain should be fully opened at least three days prior to the planting date (which
should coincide with the delivery date for the wetland plant stock).

Wetland mulch is another technique to establish a plant community that utilizes the seedbank of
wetland soils to provide the propagules for marsh development. The majority of the seedbank

3.23
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................... Stormwater Wetlands

is contained within the upper six inches of the donor soils. The mulch is best collected at the
end of the growing season. Best results are obtained when the mulch is spread 3 to 6 inches
deep over the high marsh and semi-wet zones of the wetland (-6 inches to +6 inches relative to
the normal pool).

Donor soils for wetland mulch shall not be removed from natural wetlands without proper
permits.

3.2.6 Wetland Maintenance Criteria

If a minimum coverage of 50% is not achieved in the planted wetland zones after the second
growing season, a reinforcement planting will be required

Stormwater wetlands that are created in upland areas and away from jurisdictional wetlands are
not regulated under the appropriate federal and State laws as long as they are regularly
maintained.

3.24
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ..................Stormwater Infiltration

Section 3.3 Stormwater Infiltration

Definition: Practices that capture and temporarily store the WQv while allowing infiltration
into the soil over a prescribed period. Design variants include:

I-1 infiltration trench (Figure 3.10)

I-2 infiltration basin (Figure 3.11)

Infiltration practices are an excellent technique for meeting the Rev requirement and may
also provide Cpv and Qp storage in certain limited cases.

IMPORTANT NOTE: Any stormwater management BMP that uses an embankment for
impounding water is required to follow the latest version of the NRCS-MD 378 Pond Code
Standards And Specifications For Small Pond Design (Appendix B.1) and obtain approval from
the local SCD or appropriate review authority.

3.25
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ..................Stormwater Infiltration

I-1 Figure 3.10 Example of Infiltration Trench I-1

PLAN VIEW

PROFILE

The infiltration trench provides Rev and WQv in one location.

3.26
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ..................Stormwater Infiltration

I-2 Figure 3.11 Example of Infiltration Basin I-2

PLAN VIEW

PROFILE

The WQv is retained in an infiltration basin, where it percolates through the floor of the
basin in a two day period.

3.27
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ..................Stormwater Infiltration

3.3.1 Infiltration Feasibility Criteria

To be suitable for infiltration, underlying soils shall have an infiltration rate (f) of 0.52 inches
per hour or greater, as initially determined from NRCS soil textural classification and
subsequently confirmed by field geotechnical tests. Approved geotechnical testing procedures
for feasibility and design are outlined in Appendix D.1. The minimum geotechnical testing is
one test hole per 5000 sf, with a minimum of two borings per facility (taken within the
proposed limits of the facility).

Soils should also have a clay content of less than 20% and a silt/clay content of less than 40%.

Infiltration cannot be located on slopes greater than 15% or within fill soils.

To protect groundwater from possible contamination, runoff from designated hotspot land uses
or activities cannot be infiltrated without proper pretreatment to remove hydrocarbons, trace
metals, or toxicants. A list of designated stormwater hotspots is provided in Section 2.8.

Infiltration may be prohibited within areas of karst topography. If a site overlies karst
geology, the local approval authority should be consulted for specific design requirements.
Recommended procedures for determining whether a site overlies karst are provided in
Appendix D.2.

The bottom of the infiltration facility shall be separated by at least four feet vertically from the
seasonally high water table or bedrock layer, as documented by on-site soil testing. This
distance is reduced to 2 feet on the Lower Eastern Shore (see Figure 4.1).

Infiltration facilities should be located a minimum of 100 feet horizontally from any water
supply well.

The maximum contributing area to an individual infiltration practice should generally be less
than 5 acres.

Infiltration practices should not be placed in locations that cause water problems to downgrade
properties. Infiltration facilities should be setback 25 feet (10 feet for dry wells) down-
gradient from structures.

3.3.2 Infiltration Conveyance Criteria

A conveyance system shall be included in the design of all infiltration practices in order to
ensure that excess flow is discharged at non-erosive velocities.

The overland flow path of surface runoff exceeding the capacity of the infiltration system shall
be evaluated to preclude erosive concentrated flow. If computed flow velocities do not exceed

3.28
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ..................Stormwater Infiltration

the non-erosive threshold, overflow may be accommodated by natural topography (see

Appendix D.12 for the critical erosive velocities for grass and soil).

All infiltration systems shall be designed to fully de-water the entire WQv within 48 hours after
the storm event.

The truncated hydrograph method shall be used if infiltration is used to control Cpv or Q p (see
Appendix D.13 for details on this method).

If runoff is delivered by a storm drain pipe or along the main conveyance system, the
infiltration practice should be designed as an off-line practice. (See Detail No. 5, Appendix
D.8 for example of an off-line infiltration practice.)

Adequate stormwater outfalls shall be provided for the overflow associated with the ten-year
design storm event (non-erosive velocities on the down-slope).

3.3.3 Infiltration Pretreatment Criteria

Pretreatment Volume

A minimum of 25% of the WQv must be pretreated prior to entry to an infiltration facility. If the
f for the underlying soils is greater than 2.00 inches per hour, 50% of the WQv shall be
pretreated prior to entry into an infiltration facility. This can be provided by a sedimentation
basin, stilling basin, sump pit or other acceptable measures. Exit velocities from pretreatment
shall be non-erosive during the two-year design storm.

The Camp-Hazen equation (Chapter 3.4.3) may be used as an acceptable alternative for
determining infiltration pretreatment requirements.

Pretreatment Techniques to Prevent Clogging

Each system shall have redundant methods to protect the long term integrity of the infiltration
rate. The following techniques, at least three per trench (I-1) and two per basin (I-2), must be
installed in every infiltration practice:

grass channel (see Chapter 5 - Credit #5 for example computation and requirements for
use)
grass filter strip (minimum 20 feet and only if sheet flow is established and maintained)
bottom sand layer
upper sand layer (6” minimum) with filter fabric at the sand/gravel interface.
use of washed bank run gravel as aggregate

3.29
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ..................Stormwater Infiltration

The sides of infiltration trenches shall be lined with an acceptable filter fabric that prevents soil
piping but has greater permeability than the parent soil (see Appendix B.2).

3.3.4 Infiltration Treatment Criteria

Infiltration practices shall be designed to exfiltrate the entire WQv less the pretreatment volume
through the floor of each practice using the design methods outlined in Appendix D.13.

Infiltration practices are best used in conjunction with other BMPs and often downstream
detention is still needed to meet the Cpv and Qp sizing criteria.

The construction sequence and specifications for each infiltration practice shall be followed, as
outlined in Appendix B.2. Experience has shown that the longevity of infiltration practices is
strongly influenced by the care taken during construction.

A porosity value “n” (n=Vv/Vt) of 0.40 should be used in the design of stone reservoirs for
infiltration practices.

3.3.5 Infiltration Landscaping Criteria

A dense and vigorous vegetative cover shall be established over the contributing pervious
drainage areas before runoff can be accepted into the facility. Infiltration trenches shall not be
constructed until all of the contributing drainage area has been completely stabilized.

3.3.6 Infiltration Maintenance Criteria

Infiltration practices may not serve as a sediment control device during the site construction
phase. In addition, the erosion and sediment control plan for the site must clearly indicate
how sediment will be prevented from entering the infiltration site.

An observation well shall be installed in every infiltration trench, consisting of an anchored

six-inch diameter perforated PVC pipe with a lockable cap. (See Detail No. 4, Appendix D.8.)

It is recommended that infiltration designs include dewatering methods in the event of failure.
This can be done with underdrain pipe systems that accommodate drawdown.

Direct access shall be provided to all infiltration practices for maintenance and rehabilitation.

Infiltration practices should not be covered by an impermeable surface.

OSHA safety standards should be consulted for trench excavation.

3.30
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

Section 3.4 Stormwater Filtering Systems

Definition: Practices that capture and temporarily store the WQv and pass it through a
filter bed of sand, organic matter, soil or other media. Filtered runoff may be collected
and returned to the conveyance system or allowed to partially exfiltrate into the soil.
Design variants include:

F-1 surface sand filter (Figure 3.12)

F-2 underground sand filter (Figure 3.13)
F-3 perimeter sand filter (Figure 3.14)
F-4 organic filter (Figure 3.15)
F-5 pocket sand filter (Figure 3.16)
F-6 bioretention (Figure 3.17)

Filtering systems shall not be designed to meet Cpv or Qp requirements except under
extremely unusual conditions. Filtering practices shall generally be combined with a
separate facility to provide those controls. Filtering systems may be used to meet the Rev
if designed to exfiltrate into the soil (e.g., if additional storage is provided below the
invert of the underdrain).

IMPORTANT NOTE: Any stormwater management BMP that uses an embankment for
impounding water is required to follow the latest version of the NRCS-MD 378 Pond Code
Standards And Specifications For Small Pond Design (Appendix B.1) and obtain approval from
the local Soil Conservation District (SCD) or appropriate review authority.

3.31
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

F-1 Figure 3.12 Example of Surface Sand Filter F-1

UNDERDRAIN COLLECTION
SYSTEM
BYPASS FLOW DIVERSION FILTER BED

OUTFLOW

OVERFLOW
SPILLWAY

PRETREATMENT
SEDIMENTATION
CHAMBER

PLAN VIEW
PERFORATED
STANDPIPE
OVERFLOW SPILLWAY
INFLOW FILTER BED

PRETREATMENT

OUTFLOW

UNDERDRAIN COLLECTION SYSTEM

PROFILE

3” TOPSOIL

18” CLEAN WASHED GEOTEXTILE

“CONCRETE” SAND ALL SIDES, TOP & BOTTOM

6” PERFORATED PIPE/GRAVEL
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM

TYPICAL SECTION

Surface sand filters can treat the largest drainage area of all the filtering systems.

3.32
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

F-2 Figure 3.13 Example of Underground Sand Filter F-2

PLAN VIEW

PROFILE

TYPICAL SECTION

The underground sand filter is an option for providing WQv where space is limited.

3.33
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

F-3 Figure 3.14 Example of Perimeter Sand Filter F-3

PLAN VIEW

PROFILE

TYPICAL SECTION

The perimeter sand filter is most practical for small sites with flat terrain or a high water
table.

3.34
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

F-4 Figure 3.15 Example of Organic Filter F-4

UNDERDRAIN COLLECTION
SYSTEM
BYPASS FLOW DIVERSION ORGANIC FILTER BED

OUTFLOW

OVERFLOW
SPILLWAY

PRETREATMENT
SEDIMENTATION
CHAMBER

PLAN VIEW
PERFORATED
STANDPIPE
OVERFLOW SPILLWAY
INFLOW FILTER BED

PRETREATMENT

OUTFLOW

UNDERDRAIN COLLECTION SYSTEM

PROFILE

3” TOPSOIL 3” TOPSOIL

18” 50/50 18” TO 24”

PEAT/SAND LEAF
MIXTURE COMPOST
GEOTEXTILE
ALL SIDES,
6” SAND TOP & BOTTOM

6” PERFORATED
PIPE /GRAVEL
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM

TYPICAL SECTIONS

The organic filter is used when maximum nutrient or trace metal removals are desired.

3.35
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

F-5 Figure 3.16 Example of Pocket Sand Filter F-5

PRETREATMENT UNDERDRAIN FILTER BED
COLLECTION SYSTEM

OUTFLOW

FILTER STRIP
OVERFLOW
SPILLWAY
PEA GRAVEL WINDOW
PLAN VIEW

OVERFLOW
INFLOW PRETREATMENT CLEANOUTS FILTER BED SPILLWAY

OVERFLOW
FILTER BED
SPILLWAY
OUTFLOW
UNDERDRAIN
COLLECTION SYSTEM

PROFILE

3” TOPSOIL

18” CLEAN WASHED GEOTEXTILE

“CONCRETE” SAND ALL SIDES,
TOP & BOTTOM

6” PERFORATED PIPE/GRAVEL
UNDERDRAIN SYSTEM

TYPICAL SECTION

The pocket sand filter is applied to small sites where sediment loads are expected to be
moderate to low. The pea gravel windows allow runoff into the filter if the surface becomes
clogged.

3.36
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

F-6 Figure 3.17 Example of Bioretention F-6

PLAN VIEW

PROFILE

TYPICAL SECTION

Bioretention combines open space with stormwater treatment.

3.37
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

3.4.1 Filtering Feasibility Criteria

Most stormwater filters normally require two to six feet of head. However, the perimeter sand
filter (F-3) can be designed to function with as little as one foot of head.

The maximum contributing area to an individual stormwater filtering system is usually less
than 10 acres.

Sand and organic filtering systems are generally applied to land uses with a high percentage of
impervious surfaces. Drainage areas with imperviousness less than 75% discharging to a
filtering practice shall require full sedimentation pretreatment techniques (see Equation
on p. 3.39).

3.4.2 Filtering Conveyance Criteria

If runoff is delivered by a storm drain pipe or is along the main conveyance system, the
filtering practice shall be designed off-line. (See Detail No. 5 in Appendix D.8.)

Overflow for the ten-year storm shall be provided to a non-erosive outlet point (e.g., prevent
downstream slope erosion). See Appendix D.12 for critical non-erosive velocities for grass
and soil.

A flow regulator (or flow splitter diversion structure) shall be provided to divert the WQv to the
filtering practice (see Detail No. 5, Appendix D.8).

Stormwater filters shall be equipped with a minimum 4" perforated pipe underdrain (6" is
preferred) in a gravel layer. A permeable filter fabric (Appendix B.3) shall be placed between
the gravel layer and the filter media.

3.4.3 Filtering Pretreatment Criteria

Dry or wet pretreatment equivalent to at least 25% of the computed WQv shall be provided
prior to filter media. The typical method is a sedimentation basin that has a length to width
ratio of 2:1. The Camp-Hazen equation, which accounts for the effects of turbulent flow, is
used to compute the required minimum surface area for sand and organic filters for
pretreatment (WSDE, 1992).

3.38
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

The required sedimentation basin minimum surface area is computed using the following
equation:
Q
As = o × E ′
W
where:
As = sedimentation basin surface area (ft2)
Qo = discharge rate from basin = (WQv/24 hr)
W = particle settling velocity (ft/sec)
for I ≤ 75%, use 0.0004 ft/sec (particle size=20 microns)
for I >75%use 0.0033 ft/sec (particle size=40 microns) 1
(I = percent impervious)
E′ = sediment trapping efficiency constant; for a sediment trapping
efficiency (E) of 90%, E′ = 2.30 2

1) Sites with greater than 75% imperviousness have a higher percentage of coarse-grained sediments
(Shaver and Baldwin, 1991). Therefore, the target particle size for sedimentation basins may be
increased to 40 microns and the surface area reduced.

2) The sediment trapping efficiency constant (E′) may be calculated from the sediment trapping
efficiency (E) using the following equation: E′ = -ln [1-(E/100)]

The equation reduces to:

Asf = (0.066) (WQv) ft2 for I ≤ 75%
Asp = (0.0081) (WQv) ft2 for I > 75%
where:
Asf = sedimentation basin surface area full
Asp = sedimentation basin surface area partial

Adequate pretreatment for bioretention systems (F-6) is provided when all of the following are
provided: (a) 20’ grass filter strip below a level spreader or optional sand filter layer, (b)
gravel diaphragm and (c) a mulch layer.

3.4.4 Filtering Treatment Criteria

The entire treatment system (including pretreatment) shall temporarily hold at least 75% of the
WQv prior to filtration.

The filter bed typically has a minimum depth of 18". Sand filters shall have a minimum filter
bed depth of 12".

Filtering practices typically cannot provide Cpv or Qp under most site conditions.

The filter media shall conform to the specifications listed in Table B.3.1 (Appendix B.3).

3.39
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

The filter area for filter designs F-1 to F-5 shall be sized based on the principles of Darcy’s
Law. A coefficient of permeability (k) shall be used as follows:

Sand: 3.5 ft/day (City of Austin 1988)

Peat: 2.0 ft/day (Galli 1990)
Leaf compost: 8.7 ft/day (Claytor and Schueler, 1996)
Bioretention Soil: 0.5 ft/day (Claytor and Schueler, 1996)

Bioretention systems (F-6) shall consist of the following treatment components: A 2½ to 4 foot
deep planting soil bed, a surface mulch layer, and a 12" deep surface ponding area.

The required filter bed area (Af) is computed using the following equation:

Af = (WQv) (df) / [ (k) (hf + df) (tf)]

where:
Af = Surface area of filter bed (ft2)
WQv = water quality volume (ft3)
df = filter bed depth (ft)
k = coefficient of permeability of filter media (ft/day)
hf = average height of water above filter bed (ft)
tf = design filter bed drain time (days)*

*1.67 days is recommended maximum for sand filters, 2.0 days for bioretention

3.4.5 Filtering Landscaping Criteria

A dense and vigorous vegetative cover shall be established over the contributing drainage area
before runoff can be accepted into the facility.

Landscaping is critical to the performance and function of bioretention areas. Therefore, a

landscaping plan shall be provided for bioretention areas per the guidance provided in
Appendix-A.

Filters F-1, F-4 and F-5 may have a grass cover to aid in pollutant adsorption. The grass
should be capable of withstanding frequent periods of inundation and drought (see Appendix A
for grass species selection guide).

Planting recommendations for bioretention facilities are as follows:

• Native plant species should be specified over non-native species.
• Vegetation should be selected based on a specified zone of hydric tolerance.
• A selection of trees with an understory of shrubs and herbaceous materials should
be provided.

3.40
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ......... Stormwater Filtering Systems

• Woody vegetation should not be specified at inflow locations.

3.4.6 Filtering Maintenance Criteria

The sediment chamber outlet devices shall be cleaned/repaired when drawdown times within
the chamber exceed 36 hours. Trash and debris shall be removed as necessary.

Sediment should be cleaned out of the sedimentation chamber when it accumulates to a depth
of more than six inches. Vegetation within the sedimentation chamber should be limited to a
height of 18 inches.

When the filtering capacity of the filter diminishes substantially (e.g., when water ponds on the
surface of the filter bed for more than 72 hours), the top few inches of discolored material shall
be removed and shall be replaced with fresh material. The removed sediments should be
disposed in an acceptable manner (e.g., landfill). Silt/sediment should be removed from the
filter bed when the accumulation exceeds one inch.

Organic filters (F-4) or surface sand filters (F-1) that have a grass cover should be mowed a
minimum of 3 times per growing season to maintain maximum grass heights less than 12
inches.

A drop of at least six inches shall be provided at the inlet of bioretention facilities (F-6) (stone
diaphragm). Dead or diseased plant material shall be replaced. Areas devoid of mulch
should be re-mulched on an annual basis.

Direct maintenance access shall be provided to the pretreatment area and the filter bed.

Construction of sand filters and bioretention areas shall conform to the specifications outlined
in Appendix B.3.

3.41
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................. Open Channel Systems

Section 3.5 Open Channel Systems

Definition: Vegetated open channels that are designed to capture and treat the full WQv
within dry or wet cells formed by check dams or other means. Design variants include:

O-1 dry swale (Figure 3.18)

O-2 wet swale (Figure 3.19)

Open channel systems shall not be designed to meet Cpv or Qp requirements except under
extremely unusual conditions. Open channel practices shall generally be combined with a
separate facility to provide those controls. Additionally, these systems may be used to
meet the Rev if designed to exfiltrate through the soil (e.g., if additional storage is
provided below the invert of the underdrain).

Grass channels (also known as biofilters) that are not designed in accordance with Section
3.5 are not considered an acceptable practice to meet the WQv requirements unless
designed according to the criteria in Chapter 5.

IMPORTANT NOTE: Any stormwater management BMP that uses an embankment for
impounding water is required to follow the latest version of the NRCS-MD 378 Pond Code
Standards And Specifications For Small Pond Design (Appendix B.1) and obtain approval from
the local Soil Conservation District (SCD) or appropriate review authority.

3.42
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................. Open Channel Systems

O-1 Figure 3.18 Example of Dry Swale O-1

Dry swales are used at low density residential projects or for very small impervious areas.

3.43
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................. Open Channel Systems

O-2 Figure 3.19 Example of Wet Swale O-2

Wet swales are ideal for treating highway runoff in low lying or flat terrain areas.

3.44
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................. Open Channel Systems

3.5.1 Open Channel Feasibility Criteria

Open channel systems shall have longitudinal slopes less than 4.0% to qualify for WQv
treatment.

Open channel systems, designed for WQv treatment, are primarily applicable for land uses such
as roads, highways, residential development (dry swales only), and pervious areas.

3.5.2 Open Channel Conveyance Criteria

The peak velocity for the ten-year storm shall be non-erosive (see Appendix D.12 for critical
non-erosive velocities for grass and soil) for the soil and vegetative cover provided.

Open channels shall be designed to safely convey the ten-year storm. Three inches of
freeboard should be provided.

Channels should be designed with moderate side slopes (flatter than 3:1) for most conditions.
In no event may side slopes be steeper than 2:1.

The maximum allowable ponding time within a channel shall be less than 48 hours. The
minimum ponding time of 30 minutes is recommended for meeting WQv treatment goals.

Open channel systems which directly receive runoff from impervious surfaces may have a six
inch drop onto a protected shelf (pea gravel diaphragm) to minimize clogging of the inlet.

An underdrain system shall be provided for the dry swale to ensure a maximum ponding time of
48 hours.

3.5.3 Open Channel Pretreatment Criteria

Pretreatment storage of 0.1 inch of runoff per impervious acre storage shall be provided. This
storage is usually obtained by providing check dams at pipe inlets and/or driveway crossings.

A pea gravel diaphragm and gentle side slopes should be provided along the top of channels to
accommodate pretreatment for lateral sheet flows.

Direct discharge of concentrated flow (e.g., by pipe) shall be pretreated.

3.45
Chapter 3. Performance Criteria for Urban BMP Design ................. Open Channel Systems

3.5.4 Open Channel Treatment Criteria

Dry and wet swales shall be designed to temporarily store the WQv within the facility for a
maximum 48 hour period.

Open channels shall have a bottom width no wider than 8 feet or a meandering drainage
pattern shall be established to avoid gullying or channel braiding.

Dry and wet swales should maintain a maximum ponding depth of one foot at the "mid-point"
of the channel profile (longitudinal dimension) and a maximum depth of 18" at the downstream
end point of the channel (for storage of the WQv).

3.5.5 Open Channel Landscaping Criteria

Wet swales are not recommended for residential developments as they can create potential
nuisance or mosquito breeding conditions.

Landscape design should specify proper grass species and wetland plants based on specific site,
soils and hydric conditions present along the channel (see Appendix A).

3.5.6 Open Channel Maintenance Criteria

Open channel systems and grass filter strips should be mowed as required during the growing
season to maintain grass heights in the 4 to 6 inch range. Wet swales, employing wetland
vegetation or other low maintenance ground cover do not require frequent mowing of the
channel.

Sediment build-up within the bottom of the channel or filter strip shall be removed when 25%
of the original WQv has been exceeded.

Construction specifications for open channel systems are specified in Appendix B.3.

3.46
A Guide to BMP Selection and Location
4.0
Chapter

in the State of Maryland

Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland

4.0 Selecting the Best BMP at a Site

This chapter outlines a process for selecting the best BMP or group of BMPs for a development
site and provides guidance on factors to consider when deciding where to locate them. The
process is used to screen which BMPs can meet the pollutant removal targets for the WQv and
guides the designer through six steps that progressively screen:

Watershed Factors
Terrain Factors
Stormwater Treatment Suitability
Physical Feasibility Factors
Community and Environmental Factors
Locational and Permitting Factors

More detail on the step-wise screening process is provided below:

Step ❶ Watershed Factors

Is the project located in a watershed that has special design objectives or constraints that
must be met? Table 4.1 outlines BMP restrictions or additional design requirements that must be
considered if a project lies within the Maryland Critical Area, a cold water watershed, a sensitive
watershed, an aquifer protection area, a water supply reservoir, or a shellfish/beach protection
zone.

Step ❷ Terrain Factors

Is the project located in a portion of the State that has particular design constraints imposed
by local terrain and or underlying geology? Table 4.2 details BMP restrictions for regions of
Maryland that have karst, mountainous terrain, or low relief.

Step ❸ Stormwater Treatment Suitability

Can the BMP meet all five stormwater sizing criteria at the site or are a combination of
BMPs needed? In this step, designers can screen the BMP list using Table 4.3 to determine if a
particular BMP can meet the Rev, Cpv and/or Q p storage requirements. In addition, Table 4.3
indicates whether a BMP is capable of treating hotspot runoff and provides comparative indexes on
land consumption and safety risks that may preclude a BMP. At the end of this step, the designer
can screen the BMP options down to a manageable number and determine if a single BMP or a
group of BMPs is needed to meet stormwater sizing criteria at the site.

4.1
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland

Step ❹ Physical Feasibility Factors

Are there any physical constraints at the project site that may restrict or preclude the use of a
particular BMP? In this step, the designer screens the BMP list using Table 4.4 to determine if
the soils, water table, drainage area, slope or head conditions present at a particular development
site might limit the use of a BMP. In addition, the matrix indicates which BMP options work well
in highly urban areas.

Step ❺ Community and Environmental Factors

Do the remaining BMPs have any important community or environmental benefits or

drawbacks that might influence the selection process? In this step, Table 4.5 is used to compare
BMP options with regard to maintenance, habitat, community acceptance, cost and other
environmental factors.

Step ❻ Locational and Permitting Factors

What environmental features must be avoided or considered when locating the BMP system
at a site to fully comply with local, State and federal regulations? In this step, the designer may
use Table 4.6 as a checklist that asks whether any of the following are present at the site:
wetlands, waters of the United States, stream or shoreline buffers, floodplains, forest conservation
areas, and development infrastructure. Brief guidance is then provided on how to locate BMPs to
avoid impacts to sensitive resources. If a BMP must be located within a sensitive environmental
area, a brief summary of applicable permit requirements is provided.

4.2
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland .........................Watershed Factors

Section 4.1 Watershed Factors

The design of urban BMPs is fundamentally influenced by the nature of the downstream water
body that will be receiving the stormwater discharge. Consequently, designers must determine the
Use Designation of the watershed in which their project is located prior to design (see COMAR
26.08.02.08 and Appendix D.9).

In some cases, higher pollutant removal or environmental performance is needed to fully protect
aquatic resources and/or human health and safety within a particular watershed or receiving water.
Therefore, a shorter list of BMPs may need to be considered for selection within these watersheds
or zones. The areas of concern include:

Maryland Critical Area Intensely Developed Areas. BMPs located within the Intensely
Developed Area (IDA) of the Maryland Critical Area (a zone extending 1000 feet landward from
mean high tide and the landward edge of tidal wetlands) shall demonstrate compliance with the
"10% Rule." The rule mandates that post development stormwater phosphorus loads must be
reduced to 10% below pre development loads, using the methodology developed by Herson et al.
(1994). For a summary review of the 10% Rule and updated estimates of long term phosphorus
pollutant removal rates please consult Appendix D.4.

Coldwater Streams (Use III and IV). Cold and cool water streams have habitat qualities capable
of supporting trout and other sensitive aquatic organisms. Therefore, the design objective for
these streams is to maintain habitat quality by preventing stream warming, maintaining natural
recharge, preventing bank and channel erosion, and preserving the natural riparian corridor.
Techniques for accomplishing these objectives may include:

• Minimizing the creation of impervious surfaces,

• Minimizing surface areas of permanent pools,
• Preserving existing forested areas,
• Bypassing existing baseflow and/or springflow, or
• Providing shade-producing landscaping

Some BMPs can have adverse downstream impacts on cold water streams and their use is highly
restricted.

Sensitive Streams (e.g., streams with a watershed impervious cover less than 15%). These
streams may also possess high quality cool water or warm water aquatic resources. The design
objectives are to maintain habitat quality through the same techniques used for cold water streams,
with the exception that stream warming is not as severe of a design constraint. These streams may
also be specially designated by local authorities.

4.3
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland .........................Watershed Factors

Wellhead Protection. Areas that recharge existing public water supply wells present a unique
management challenge. The key design constraint is to prevent possible groundwater
contamination by preventing infiltration of hotspot runoff. At the same time, recharge of
unpolluted stormwater is needed to maintain flow in streams and wells during dry weather.

Reservoir Protection (Use I-P, III-P and IV-P). Watersheds that deliver surface runoff to a
public water supply reservoir or impoundment are of special concern. Depending on the treatment
available at the water intake, it may be necessary to achieve a greater level of pollutant removal
for the pollutants of concern such as bacteria pathogens, nutrients, sediment or metals. One
particular management concern for reservoirs is ensuring that stormwater hotspots are adequately
treated so that they do not contaminate drinking water.

Shellfish/Beach (Use II). Watersheds that drain to specific shellfish harvesting areas or public
swimming beaches require a higher level of BMP treatment to prevent closings caused by bacterial
contamination from stormwater runoff. In these watersheds, BMPs are explicitly designed to
maximize bacteria removal.

Other Criteria. Designers should consult with the appropriate review authority to determine if
their development project is subject to additional stormwater BMP criteria as a result of an adopted
local watershed plan or protection zone.

4.4
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland .........................Watershed Factors

Table 4.1 BMP Selection - Watershed Factors

BMP CRITICAL COLD WATER SENSITIVE AQUIFER RESERVOIR SHELLFISH

GROUP AREA STREAM PROTECTION PROTECTION BEACH

Ponds Drainage Restricted Require May require Require control Moderate

Area may additional liner if A soils of Cpv bacteria
(see Appendix
limit except storage for are present removal, design
B.1.2)
for P-5, control of to prevent geese
Pretreat
Offline design Cpv problems,
P-1 has hotspots
recommended provide
lower
2-4 ft SD* permanent pools
removal Maximize
rates shading of open
pool areas
Wetlands Drainage May be Require May require Require control Provide 48 hr
area may restricted additional liner if A soils of Cpv ED for max.
limit, W-4 storage for are present bacterial dieoff
(see Appendix
excepted control of
B.1.2) 2-4 ft SD*
Cpv
Infiltration Often OK, if site has OK, if site SD* from wells SD* from OK, but a min. 2
infeasible appropriate has and water table bedrock and to 4 ft SD* is
due to soils soils appropriate water table required
No untreated
or water soils
hotspot runoff
table in
tidal areas. OK to infiltrate
rooftop runoff
Filtering OK OK, but May be OK, if designed May be OK, Moderate to
Systems evaluate for necessary for w/out necessary for high bacterial
stream warming pretreatment exfiltration pretreatment removal
prior to another
BMP
Open OK OK Should be OK, but hotspot OK, but hotspot Poor bacterial
Channels linked runoff must be runoff must be removal for O-2
w/basin to adequately adequately
provide Cpv pretreated pretreated

*SD = Separation Distance or distance from well or water table to BMP.

4.5
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland .............................. Terrain Factors

Section 4.2 Terrain Factors

Three key factors to consider are low-relief, karst and mountainous terrain. In Maryland, Low
Relief Areas are located in the lower Eastern Shore, particularly below the Choptank River (see
Figure 4.1 below). Karst and major carbonaceous rock areas are found in portions of Carroll,
Frederick, Washington, and Garrett Counties. Mountainous areas are found in the Western part of
the State. Special geotechnical testing requirements may be needed in karst areas (see Appendix
D.2). The terrain regions shown on the map are approximate. Please consult with your local
reviewing authority to determine if your project is subject to terrain constraints.

Figure 4.1 Map of Maryland Showing Key Terrain Factors

Lower Eastern Shore

4.6
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland .............................. Terrain Factors

Table 4.2 BMP Selection - Terrain Factors

BMP GROUP LOW RELIEF KARST MOUNTAINOUS

Ponds Maximum normal pool • geotechnical tests Embankment heights

depth of 4 feet (dugout) • max ponding depth restricted
Wetlands OK • Require poly or clay Embankment heights
liner restricted
Infiltration Minimum distance to May be prohibited. Max slope 15%
water table of 2 feet Consult with local trenches must have flat
approval authority. bottom

Filtering Several designs limited Require poly-liner or OK

Systems by low head (F-1 and F- impermeable membrane
2) to seal bottom
Open Channels Generally feasible due OK Often infeasible in
to low slopes steeper slopes

4.7
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland .................. Stormwater Treatment

Section 4.3 Stormwater Treatment Suitability

Table 4.3 examines the capability of each BMP option to meet the five stormwater treatment sizing
criteria outlined in Chapter 2. Thus, it shows whether a BMP has:

Ability to Meet the Rev. It should be noted that other practices, not on the BMP list, are capable
of meeting the Rev requirement (e.g., grass channel, filter, disconnection of rooftop runoff and
other practices outlined in Chapter 5). Thus, if a BMP cannot meet the Rev requirement,
supplemental practices that can provide recharge may be needed.

Ability to Provide Cpv. The table indicates whether the BMP can typically provide the Cpv that is
needed in some watersheds. The finding that a particular BMP cannot meet the Cpv requirement
does not necessarily imply that it should be eliminated from consideration, but is a reminder that
more than one practice may be needed at a site (e.g., a bioretention area and a downstream pond).

Ability to Provide Qp2 and/or Qp10. The table indicates whether the BMP can typically provide the
Qp criteria for the site. Again, the finding that a particular BMP cannot meet the requirement does
not necessarily mean that it should be eliminated from consideration, but rather is a reminder that
more than one practice may be needed at a site (e.g., a dry swale and a downstream pond)

Additional Safety Concerns. A comparative index expresses the potential need for additional
safety features within a BMP. A “no” indicates no additional features are needed while a “yes”
indicates deep pools may create potential safety risks. The safety factor is included at this stage of
the screening process because liability and safety are a prime concern in many residential settings.

Adequate Space. This comparative index expresses how much space a BMP typically consumes at
a site. A “yes” indicates that the BMP consumes a relatively small amount of land, whereas a
“no” indicates the BMP may consume a relatively high fraction of land at the site. Again, this
factor is included in this early screening stage because many BMPs are severely constrained by
land consumption.

Ability to Accept Hotspot Runoff. This last column examines the capability of a BMP to treat
runoff from designated hotspots as defined in Chapter 2. A BMP that receives hotspot runoff may
have design restrictions as noted and may require additional measures to protect downstream
resources from potential spills.

4.8
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland .................. Stormwater Treatment

Table 4.3 BMP Selection - Stormwater Treatment Suitability

Additional ACCEPT
Rev Cpv Qp
CODE BMP List Safety SPACE HOTSPOT
Ability Control Control
Concerns RUNOFF

P-1 Micropool ED No1 Yes Yes No Yes Yes3

P-2 Wet Pond No1 Yes Yes Yes Varies Yes3
P-3 Wet ED Pond No1 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes3
P-4 Multiple Pond No1 Yes Yes Yes No Yes3
P-5 Pocket Pond No1 Yes Yes Varies Yes Yes3
W-1 Shallow Wetland Varies2 Yes Yes No No Yes3
W-2 ED Wetland Varies2 Yes Yes Varies Varies Yes3
W-3 Pond/Wetland Varies2 Yes Yes Yes No Yes3
W-4 Pocket Wetland No Varies Varies No Varies Yes3
I-1 Infiltration Trench Yes Varies Varies No Yes No3
I-2 Infiltration Basin Yes Varies Varies No Varies No3
Surface Sand
F-1 Varies2 Varies Varies No Yes Yes4
Filter
F-2 Underground SF No No No Varies Yes Yes
F-3 Perimeter SF No No No No Yes Yes
2
F-4 Organic Filter Varies Varies Varies No Yes Yes4
F-5 Pocket Sand Filter Varies2 Varies Varies No Yes Yes4
F-6 Bioretention Yes Varies Varies No Varies Yes4
O-1 Dry Swale Yes No No No Varies Yes4
O-2 Wet Swale No No No No Varies No
1 Structures that require impermeable liners or that intercept groundwater may not be used for
groundwater recharge.
2 Rev may be provided by exfiltration (see Chapter 3.4).
3 Not allowed unless pretreatment to remove hydrocarbons, trace metals, and toxicants is provided.
4 Yes, but only if bottom of facility is lined with impermeable filter fabric that prevents leachate
infiltration.

4.9
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland ....................... Physical Feasibility

Section 4.4 Physical Feasibility Factors

At this point, the designer has narrowed the BMP list to a manageable size and can evaluate the
remaining options given the physical conditions at a site. This table cross-references testing
protocols needed to confirm physical conditions at the site. The six primary factors are:

Soils. The key evaluation factors are based on an initial investigation of the USDA hydrologic
soils groups at the site. Note that more detailed geotechnical tests are usually required for
infiltration feasibility and during design to confirm permeability and other factors (see Appendix
D.1).

Water Table. This column indicates the minimum depth to the seasonally high water table from
the bottom or floor of a BMP.

Drainage Area. This column indicates the recommended minimum or maximum drainage area
that is considered suitable for the practice. If the drainage area present at a site is slightly greater
than the maximum allowable drainage area for a practice, some leeway is permitted or more than
one practice can be installed. The minimum drainage areas indicated for ponds and wetlands are
flexible depending on water availability (baseflow or groundwater) or the mechanisms employed to
prevent clogging.

Slope Restriction. This column evaluates the effect of slope on the practice. Specifically, the
slope restrictions refer to how flat the area where the practice may be.

Head. This column provides an estimate of the elevation difference needed at a site (from the
inflow to the outflow) to allow for gravity operation within the practice.

Ultra-Urban Sites. This column identifies BMPs that work well in the ultra-urban environment,
where space is limited and original soils have been disturbed. These BMPs are frequently used at
redevelopment sites.

4.10
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location in Maryland ....................... Physical Feasibility

Table 4.4 BMP Selection - Physical Feasibility

DRAINAGE
WATER SLOPE HEAD ULTRA
CODE BMP LIST SOILS AREA
TABLE RESTRICT. (Ft) URBAN
(Acres)
P-1 Micropool ED "A" Soils May 10 Min2
4 Feet1
P-2 Wet Pond Require Pond
Liner If Hotspot Not
P-3 Wet ED Pond 6 to 8 Ft
"B" Soils May Or 25 Min 2
None Practical
P-4 Multiple Pond Require Aquifer
Testing
P-5 Pocket Pond OK Below WT 5 Max3 4 Ft OK
W-1 Shallow Wetland “A” Soils 4 Feet1
May Not
W-2 ED Wetland If Hotspot 25 Min 3 to 5 Ft
None Practical
W-3 Pond/Wetland Require Liner Or Aquifer
W-4 Pocket Wetland OK Below WT 5 Max 2 To 3 Ft Depends
I-1 Infiltration Trench 5 Max Installed in 1 Ft Depends
f ≥ 0.52 4 Feet1 No More
Inch/Hr Not
I-2 Infiltration Basin 10 Max Than 15% 3 Ft
Practical
Slopes
F-1 Surface Sand Filter 10 Max 3 5 Ft Depends
3
F-2 Underground SF 2 Max 5 to 7ft
F-3 Perimeter SF OK 2 Max 3 2 to 3 Ft
2 Feet None OK
F-4 Organic Filter 5 Max3 2 to 4 Ft
F-5 Pocket SF 2 to 5 Ft
5 Max 3
F-6 Bioretention Made Soil 5 Ft
O-1 Dry Swale Made Soil 2 Feet 5 Max 4% Max 3 to 5 Ft Not
O-2 Wet Swale OK Below WT 5 Max Cross-slope 1 Ft Practical

Notes: OK= not restricted, WT= water table

1 Four foot separation distance is maintained to the seasonally high water table (2 feet on Lower
Eastern Shore).
2 Unless adequate water balance and anti-clogging device installed
3 Drainage area can be larger in some instances

4.11
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location............ Community and Environmental Factors

Section 4.5 Community and Environmental Factors

The fifth step assesses community and environmental factors involved in BMP selection. This table
employs a comparative index approach indicating whether the BMP has a high or low benefit.

Ease of Maintenance. This column assesses the relative maintenance effort needed for a BMP in
terms of three criteria: frequency of scheduled maintenance, chronic maintenance problems (such
as clogging) and reported failure rates. It should be noted that all BMPs require routine inspection
and maintenance.

Community Acceptance. This column assesses community acceptance as measured by three

factors: market and preference surveys, reported nuisance problems, and visual aesthetics. It
should be noted that a low rank can often be improved by a better landscaping plan.

Construction Cost. The BMPs are ranked according to their relative construction cost per
impervious acre treated as determined from cost surveys and local experience.

Habitat Quality. BMPs are evaluated on their ability to provide wildlife or wetland habitat,
assuming that an effort is made to landscape them appropriately. Objective criteria include size,
water features, wetland features and vegetative cover of the BMP and its buffer.

Other Factors. This column indicates other considerations in BMP selection.

4.12
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location............ Community and Environmental Factors

Table 4.5 BMP Selection - Community and Environmental Factors

COST
EASE OF COMMUNITY HABITAT OTHER
CODE BMP LIST (Relative To
MAINTENANCE ACCEPTANCE QUALITY FACTORS
Drainage Area)

P-1 Micropool ED Medium Medium Low Medium Trash/debris

P-2 Wet Pond Easy High Low High

P-3 Wet ED Pond Easy High Low High

P-4 Multiple Pond Easy High Medium High
P-5 Pocket Pond Difficult Medium Low Low Drawdowns

W-1 Shallow Wetland Medium High Medium High

W-2 ED Wetland Medium Medium Medium High Limit ED depth
W-3 Pond/Wetland Difficult High Medium High
W-4 Pocket Wetland Medium Low Low Medium Drawdowns

I-1 Infiltration Trench Difficult High Medium Low Avoid large stone
I-2 Infiltration Basin Medium Low Medium Low Frequent pooling

F-1 Surface SF Medium Medium High Low

Underground
F-2 Underground SF Difficult High High Low
∴Out of sight
F-3 Perimeter SF Difficult High High Low Traffic Bearing

F-4 Organic Filter Medium High High Low Filter Media

Replacement
F-5 Pocket SF Medium Medium Medium Low
F-6 Bioretention Medium Medium Medium Low Landscaping

O-1 Dry Swale Easy High Medium Low

Mosquitoes
O-2 Wet Swale Easy High Low Low
Possible

4.13
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location......... Checklist for Locating Stormwater BMPs

Section 4.6 Checklist: Location and Permitting Factors

In the last step, a designer assesses the physical and environmental features at the site to determine
the optimal location for the selected BMP or group of BMPs. The checklist below provides a
condensed summary of current BMP restrictions as they relate to common site features that may be
regulated under local, State or federal law. These restrictions fall into one of three general
categories:

1. Locating a BMP within an area that is expressly prohibited by law.

2. Locating a BMP within an area that is strongly discouraged and is only allowed on
a case by case basis. Local, State and/or federal permits shall be obtained and the
applicant will need to supply additional documentation to justify locating the BMP
within the regulated area.

3. BMPs must be setback a fixed distance from the site feature.

This checklist is only intended as a general guide to location and permitting requirements as they
relate to siting stormwater BMPs. Consultation with the appropriate regulatory agency is the best
strategy.

The symbol “✔” denotes when an MDE Nontidal Wetland And Waterways Permit shall be
obtained.

4.14
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location......... Checklist for Locating Stormwater BMPs

Table 4.6 Location and Permitting Factors Checklist

SITE FEATURE LOCATION AND PERMITTING GUIDANCE

❑ Jurisdictional Wetland • wetlands should be delineated prior to siting stormwater BMPs.

• use of wetlands for stormwater treatment strongly discouraged and requires
U.S. Army State and federal permit.
Corps of Engineers Section • BMPs are also restricted in the 25 to 100 foot required wetland buffer.
404 Permit
• buffers may be utilized as a non-structural filter strip (e.g., accept
and/or sheetflow).
• must justify that no practical upland treatment alternatives exist.
MDE Wetlands Permit • stormwater must be treated prior to discharge into a wetland.
✔
• where practical, excess stormwater flows should be conveyed away from
jurisdictional wetlands.
❑ Stream Channel • stream channels should be delineated prior to design using MDE criteria.
(Waters of the U.S) • instream ponds require MDE review and permit.
• instream ponds are prohibited in Use III waters.
U.S. Army
Corps of Engineers (COE) • ponds located within USE III watersheds may require small pond review
Section 404 Permit and approval from the MDE Dam Safety Division.
• must justify that no practical upland treatment alternatives exist.
MDE Wetlands and
• Qp and Cpv treatment is preferred over WQv treatment.
Waterways Permit
✔ • implement measures that reduce downstream warming.

❑ 100 Year Floodplain

• grading and fill for BMP construction is strongly discouraged within the
Local Stormwater review ultimate 100 year floodplain, as delineated by FEMA flood insurance
Authority rate, FEMA flood boundary and floodway, or local floodplain maps.
• floodplain fill cannot raise the floodplain water surface elevation by more
MDE Wetlands and
than a tenth of a foot.
Waterways Permit
✔

❑ Stream Buffer • consult local authority for stormwater policy.

• ponds located within 100 feet of a flowing stream in a USE III watershed
Check with appropriate may require a small pond approval by the MDE Dam Safety Division
review authority whether • BMPs are strongly discouraged in the stream-side zone (within 25 feet of
stream buffers are required streambank).
• consider how outfall channel will cross buffer to reach stream.
• BMPs can be located within the outer portion of a buffer.

4.15
Chapter 4. Guide to BMP Selection and Location......... Checklist for Locating Stormwater BMPs

Table 4.6 Location and Permitting Factors Checklist (Continued)

SITE FEATURE LOCATION AND PERMITTING GUIDANCE

• BMPs are strongly discouraged within Priority 1 Forest Retention Areas.
❑ Forest Conservation
• BMPs must be setback at least 25 feet from the critical root zone of
District Forest specimen trees, or
Conservation Review • designers should consider the effect of more frequent inundation for Qp, Cpv
Authority and WQv on existing forest stands.
• BMP buffer areas are acceptable as reforestation sites if they are protected
by a conservation agreement

❑ Critical Area • BMPs w/in the Critical Area shoreline buffer are prohibited unless a
variance is obtained from the local review authority.
Local Critical Area • BMPs are acceptable within mapped buffer exemption areas.
Review Authority • BMPs in the IDA must meet the 10% Rule - see Appendix D.4.
• call Miss Utility to locate existing utilities prior to design.
❑ Utilities
• note the location of proposed utilities to serve development.
Local Review Authority • BMPs are discouraged within utility easements or rights of way for public
or private utilities.

❑ Roads • consult local DOT or DPW for any setback requirement from local roads.
• consult SHA for setbacks from State maintained roads.
Local DOT, DPW, or • approval must also be obtained for any stormwater discharges to a local or
State Highway State-owned conveyance channel.
Administration

❑ Structures • consult local review authority for BMP setbacks from structures.
• recommended setbacks for each BMP group are provided in the performance
Local Review Authority criteria in Chapter 3 of this manual.
• consult local health authority.
❑ Septic Drain fields
• recommended setback is a minimum of 50 feet from drain field edge.

❑ Water Wells • 100 foot setback for stormwater infiltration.

• 50 foot setback for all other BMPs.
• water appropriation permit needed if well water used for water supply to a
Local Health Authority BMP.
• infiltration or pooling of stormwater near sinkholes is prohibited.
❑ Sinkholes
• geotechnical testing may be required within karst areas
(see Appendix D.2).

4.16
Environmental Site Design
5.0
Chapter
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design..........................................................................Introduction

Section 5.0 Introduction

5.0.1 Background

The primary goal of Maryland’s stormwater management program is to maintain after

development, as nearly as possible, the predevelopment runoff characteristics. Traditional
stormwater management strategies treat runoff to mitigate adverse water quality and/or quantity
impacts associated with new development. Designs applying these strategies often combine
centralized structural practices for pollutant removal with channel erosion or flood control
impoundments. These designs are less able to mimic predevelopment conditions because they
focus on managing large volumes of polluted stormwater rather than treating runoff closer to the
source.

A comprehensive design strategy for maintaining predevelopment runoff characteristics and

protecting natural resources is available. This strategy, known as Environmental Site Design or
“ESD,” relies on integrating site design, natural hydrology, and smaller controls to capture and
treat runoff. This chapter provides the foundation to refocus stormwater design from centralized
management to more effective planning and implementation of ESD.

5.0.2 Requirements of the Stormwater Management Act of 2007

The “Stormwater Management Act of 2007” (Act), requires establishing a comprehensive

process for stormwater management approval, implementing ESD to the maximum extent
practicable (MEP), and ensuring that structural practices (see Chapter 3) are used only where
absolutely necessary. The Act also establishes several performance standards for stormwater
management plans. Designers must now ensure that these plans are designed to:

¾ Prevent soil erosion from development projects.

¾ Prevent increases in nonpoint pollution.
¾ Minimize pollutants in stormwater runoff from both new development and redevelopment.
¾ Restore, enhance, and maintain chemical, physical, and biological integrity of receiving
waters to protect public health and enhance domestic, municipal, recreational, industrial and
other uses of water as specified by MDE.
¾ Maintain 100% of the average annual predevelopment groundwater recharge volume.
¾ Capture and treat stormwater runoff to remove pollutants.
¾ Implement a channel protection strategy to protect receiving streams.
¾ Prevent increases in the frequency and magnitude of out-of-bank flooding from large, less
frequent storms.
¾ Protect public safety through the proper design and operation of stormwater management
facilities.

The Act presents a new opportunity to improve Maryland’s stormwater management program.
The original Chapter 5 encouraged ESD through a series of optional credits for the design of
nonstructural practices. Changes in response to the Act not only expand on the ESD practices
first introduced in the Manual but also allow for planning techniques to improve implementation
NOTE: In this chapter, italics indicate mandatory criteria, whereas recommended criteria are
shown in normal typeface.

5.1 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design..........................................................................Introduction

and overall performance. The remaining sections of this chapter will further define ESD, discuss
planning techniques used in its implementation, and provide design requirements for
nonstructural and micro-scale practices used to treat runoff at the source. For reference
purposes, the original Chapter 5 can be found in Appendix E.1.

5.0.3 Environmental Site Design

Definition

There are many stormwater design strategies that seek to replicate natural hydrology. Sometimes
known as better site design, low impact development, green infrastructure, or sustainable site
design, these strategies all espouse similar techniques. In each, a combination of planning
techniques, alternative cover, and small-scale treatment practices is used to address impacts
associated with development. For consistency, the Act adopts ESD as a more generic
classification for use in Maryland.

Title 4, Subtitle 201.1(B) of the Act defines ESD as “…using small-scale stormwater
management practices, nonstructural techniques, and better site planning to mimic natural
hydrologic runoff characteristics and minimize the impact of land development on water
resources.” Under this definition, ESD includes:

¾ Optimizing conservation of natural features (e.g., drainage patterns, soil, vegetation).

¾ Minimizing impervious surfaces (e.g., pavement, concrete channels, roofs).
¾ Slowing down runoff to maintain discharge timing and to increase infiltration and
evapotranspiration.
¾ Using other nonstructural practices or innovative technologies approved by MDE.

Impacts of Imperviousness

The goal of traditional site design strategies is to maximize development potential by focusing on
the layout of buildings, roads, parking, and other features. Conventional development practices
tend to maximize site imperviousness and contribute to many of the impacts discussed in Chapter
1. These include diminished groundwater recharge, increased flows and runoff volumes,
pollutant accumulation, and elevated water temperatures.

Documentation such as the Impacts of Impervious Cover on Aquatic Systems (Center for
Watershed Protection, 2003) and other studies of Eastern Piedmont and Coastal Plain streams in
Maryland (Morgan and Cushman, 2005) and headwater streams in Montgomery County (Moore
and Palmer, 2005) all indicate that stream biodiversity decreases as impervious cover increases.
There is no simple formula, rule, or threshold for determining how much impervious cover may
be sustained in a given watershed. Generally, stream quality and watershed health diminish
when impervious cover exceeds 10% and become severely degraded beyond 25% (Center for
Watershed Protection, 2003). Results from the Maryland Biological Stream Survey (MBSS)
indicated that in surveyed streams, health was never good when watershed imperviousness
exceeded 15%, (Boward, 1999). These studies establish a fundamental connection between
impervious cover and watershed impairment.

Supp. 1 5.2
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design..........................................................................Introduction

Integrating the fundamental principles of ESD during the planning process helps minimize the
adverse impacts of imperviousness. The resulting designs reduce the need for costly
infrastructure and maintenance while providing treatment closer to the source. To accomplish
this, the designer must consider the basic concepts found in Section 5.1, Planning Techniques.

5.3 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

Section 5.1 Design Process and Planning Techniques

5.1.1 Introduction

The design process described in this section will provide guidance for implementing ESD
planning strategies and practices into a comprehensive site development plan. These techniques
involve protecting natural resources, integrating erosion and sediment controls with stormwater
management practices, minimizing site imperviousness, and using natural conveyance and ESD
practices throughout the site. Applying these techniques early in the design process will ensure
that all available resources have been considered in order to protect streams and waterways from
the impact of land development activities. The design process will require the developer to
adhere to the following procedures to achieve ESD to the MEP:

¾ Following the Design Process for New Development as outlined in the step wise procedures
in Figure 5.1.
¾ Developing a map that identifies natural resource areas and drainage patterns and devising
strategies for protection and enhancement.
¾ Minimizing total site imperviousness by implementing clustered development and other better
site design techniques.
¾ Demonstrating that all reasonable opportunities for meeting stormwater requirements using
ESD have been exhausted by using natural areas and landscape features to manage runoff
from impervious surfaces and that structural BMPs have been used only where absolutely
necessary.
¾ Participate in the comprehensive review process for interim plans review and approval at the
conceptual, site development, and final phases of project design.
¾ Integrating strategies for erosion and sediment control and stormwater management into a
comprehensive development plan.

5.1.2 Comprehensive Erosion & Sediment Control and Stormwater Management Review

The Act requires that “a comprehensive process for approving grading and sediment control
plans and stormwater management plans” shall be established. Therefore, county and municipal
stormwater authorities shall establish a coordinated approval process among all appropriate local
agencies. Erosion and sediment control review and approval authorities [e.g., local Soil
Conservation Districts(SCD)] and input from any other local agency deemed appropriate (e.g.,
planning and zoning, public works) shall be included. The process will be tailored to meet local
initiatives and should consider the scope and extent of environmental impacts for individual site
developments. Review agencies involved will provide comments and approval during each of
the following phases of plan development:

1. Concept
2. Site Development
3. Final

At each phase of this review process, the designer will receive feedback provided by the agencies
allowing the developer to incorporate any concerns and recommendations throughout project

Supp. 1 5.4
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

planning and design. The concept plan will include site and resource mapping and protection
and conservation strategies. The designer will also provide preliminary stormwater management
ESD calculations. Review of the concept plan will ensure that all important resources have been
mapped, protected, and all opportunities to enhance natural areas have been explored early in the
design process.

The site development plan will establish the footprint of the proposed project and demonstrate
the relationship between proposed impervious surfaces and the existing natural conditions
identified during concept plan design. This will better protect natural resources and buffers and
allow for using ESD practices throughout the site. Included in this step are the preparation of
detailed designs, computations, and grading plans for a second comprehensive review and
approval. This ensures that all options for implementing ESD have been exhausted. After
approval from the review agencies, the applicant will then proceed with final plan preparation
including the design of any structural practices needed to address remaining channel protection
requirements. Final plans will go to both the stormwater and erosion and sediment control
review agencies for approval.

The design process and planning techniques described in this section provide guidelines for
protecting natural areas, minimizing imperviousness, using available landscaping for ESD
practices, and integrating stormwater and erosion and sediment control strategies. Following this
process will achieve the goal of implementing ESD to the MEP. Involving all review agencies
from the beginning of site planning through the more detailed design will foster feedback and
allow for a more efficient review and approval of final plans.

5.1.3 Design Process for New Development

All new development projects shall be subject to the Design Process for New Development as
outlined in the step wise procedures in Figure 5.1.

As described above, the design process will require review and approval during three different
phases of project planning that include the concept, site development, and final stages.
Approving agencies shall use the process outlined in Figure 5.1 as an enforceable mechanism
during review of the plan. Documentation that all steps were followed during project
development and specific rationale to support the proposed design shall be required.

5.1.3.1 Concept Design Phase

The concept design phase is the first step in project development as shown in Figure 5.1. This
step will include the following:

¾ Site and Resource Mapping

¾ Site Fingerprinting and Development Layout
¾ Locating ESD Practices

5.5 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

Figure 5.1 Design Process for New Development

Supp. 1 5.6
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

Site and Resource Mapping

The resource mapping component will be used as a basis for all subsequent decisions during
project design. During this step, the developer shall identify significant natural resources and
demonstrate that these areas will be protected and preserved. Additionally, options will be
evaluated to enhance important hydrologic functions. Approving authorities may require that
other features be shown depending on site characteristics. This map shall be field verified by the
project designer. Specific areas that should be mapped are organized by government regulatory
authority in Table 5.1 below.

Table 5.1 Natural Resources and the Corresponding Regulatory Authorities:

Federal State Local
• Wetlands • Tidal and nontidal • Steep slopes
• Major waterways wetlands • Highly erodible soils
• Floodplains • Wetlands of Special • Enhanced stream buffers
State Concern • Topography/slopes
• Wetland buffers • Springs
• Stream buffers • Seeps
• Perennial streams • Intermittent streams
• Floodplains • Vegetative cover
• Forests • Soils
• Forest buffers • Bedrock/geology
• Critical Areas • Existing drainage areas

The mapping process will identify important natural resources as well as areas that are highly
susceptible to erosion caused by construction activities. Identifying these important resources
and high risk locations and protecting them from disturbance is the first step in the planning
process. When steep slopes and highly erodible soils are found measures need to be taken to
limit disturbance and minimize impacts. This may be done by using information developed by
the local SCDs. These offices maintain lists that identify highly erodible soil map units for each
county in Maryland. Additionally, steep slopes are defined as those with gradients of 20 percent
or more and moderately steep slopes fall within the range of 10 to 30 percent (USDA NRCS,
Soil Survey Manual, October, 1993). For the purpose of project planning, steep slopes are
considered to be any mapping unit with a slope class of 15 percent or greater.

While it may not be practicable to eliminate earth disturbing activities exclusively on the basis of
soil erodibility or slope alone, constraints are warranted when both steep slopes and highly
erodible soils occupy the same area within the development footprint. Areas with highly
erodible soils and slopes equal to or greater than 25 percent should be incorporated into adjacent
buffers, remain undisturbed, protected during the construction process, and/or preserved as open
space.

5.7 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

Strategies to protect steep slopes and highly erodible soils include:

¾ Identify and map all highly erodible soils and steep slopes; and
¾ Protect areas with highly erodible soils on slopes equal to or greater than 25 percent from
earth disturbing activities.

In addition to preserving sensitive areas during disturbances, the environmental benefits of other
existing natural resources should be maximized by incorporating protection strategies into the
overall goals of the project. Protecting these resources up front in the planning process will
allow their many functions to be utilized for infiltration, flow attenuation, groundwater recharge,
flood storage, runoff reduction, nutrient cycling, air and water pollution reduction, habitat
diversity, and thermal impact reduction. When ESD practices are located later in the planning
process, these protected areas may be further enhanced by using them to meet stormwater
requirements.

Natural resource protection and enhancement strategies include:

¾ Protecting large tracts of contiguous open space, forested areas, and other important
resources through conservation easements.
¾ Identifying afforestation opportunities in open space areas and setting aside land for
natural regeneration.
¾ Identifying important resource areas that may be expanded such as stream buffers and
floodplains.
¾ Minimize disturbance to highly permeable soils.

Site Fingerprinting and Development Layout

After conserving and protecting sensitive resources has been addressed, the next step in the
planning process involves determining the approximate location of buildings, roadways, parking
lots, and other impervious areas. These site improvements should be placed at a sufficient
distance to protect the conservation areas. Protecting these resources will involve enhancing or
expanding forested and stream buffers of adequate widths based on site characteristics.

Minimum buffer widths may be expanded based on receiving stream characteristics, stream
order, adjacent land slopes, 100-year floodplain, wetlands, mature forests, vegetative cover,
depth of the groundwater table, and the presence of spring seeps and other sensitive areas.
Several studies have suggested that minimum buffer widths could be based on site specific
functions (Palone and Todd, 1998) including: bank stability and water temperature moderation
(50 feet), nitrogen removal (100 feet), sediment removal (150 feet), or flood mitigation (200
feet). The approving agency may enhance existing buffer requirements depending upon resource
protection goals identified at the local level.

After the development footprint has been established, consideration should be given to natural
drainage areas and how runoff will travel over and through the site. Sheetflow and existing
drainage patterns should be maintained and discharges from the site should occur at the natural
location wherever possible. New drainage patterns result in concentrated flow leaving the site at

Supp. 1 5.8
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

an inappropriate or unstable location, as well as creating erosion, sediment transport, and stream
channel stability problems. The use of storm drains and engineered conveyance systems should
be minimized by using vegetated swales and other natural systems so that forests, buffers and
overland flow characteristics remain intact. Planning for on-site and off-site drainage patterns
must be done early in the design process to establish a stable outfall for downstream discharges.
Some of the strategies listed below can be used to establish nonstructural practices such as
sheetflow to natural areas. These protection and enhancement tools, can then double as
important strategies for meeting on-site stormwater requirements.

Strategies for site layout and connecting landscape features include:

¾ Plan the building footprint and layout to protect conservation areas.

¾ Evaluate opportunities to enhance/expand forested, wetland, and stream buffers.
¾ Grade the site so that runoff will flow from impervious areas directly to pervious areas or
other natural conveyance systems.
¾ Maintain natural flow paths between the site and upstream and downstream systems.
¾ Maintain sheetflow and natural overland flow processes wherever feasible.
¾ Provide stable conveyance of runoff off-site.

In addition to the site fingerprinting techniques described above, other strategies may be used to
protect important natural resources. One type of practice that encompasses many of these design
techniques in residential developments is clustering. This practice allows for concentrating
development in one area, thereby reducing the distance between individual lots, the length of
subdivision roadways, and overall impervious areas. It will also allow for protecting open space
and buffer areas and reduce clearing and grading in natural areas.

Commercial and industrial developments offer other opportunities to reduce impervious cover.
Because parking lots are the dominant land cover for most commercial and industrial projects,
designers can minimize the surface area dedicated to parking and use ESD practices in
landscaped areas for stormwater treatment. Table 5.2 below provides a list of better site design
techniques that may be used to reduce site imperviousness, protect environmentally sensitive
areas, and provide more open space. More details and information may be found in, Better Site
Design: A Handbook for Changing Development Rules in Your Community (Center for
Watershed Protection, 1998).

Locating ESD Practices

Reducing the impervious area in residential, commercial, and industrial development enhances
the space available for landscaped features (e.g., parking lot islands, medians, plazas). Many of
the micro-scale practices discussed in this chapter are tailored to fit in these smaller landscaped
areas. When strategies for reducing imperviousness and protecting natural resources are
combined with design options that distribute ESD practices throughout a site, the resulting plans
will provide an effective means to address stormwater requirements at the source. After the site
footprint has been established, preliminary calculations for determining stormwater requirements
using ESD can be provided and potential management areas can be identified. The concept plan
shall include a drawing or sketch identifying the preliminary location of ESD practices.

5.9 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

Table 5.2 Summary of Site Development Strategies

Better Site Design Recommendations
Technique
Using narrower, Streets may be as narrow as 22 ft. in neighborhoods serving low traffic
shorter streets, volumes; open space designs and clustering will reduce street lengths;
rights-of-way, and rights-of-way can be reduced by minimizing sidewalk width, providing
sidewalks sidewalks on one side of the road, and reducing the border width
between the street and sidewalks.
Cul-de-sacs Allow smaller radii for turn arounds as low as 33 ft.; use a landscaped
island in the center of the cul-de-sac and design these areas to treat
stormwater runoff.
Open vegetated Allow grass channels or biofilters for residential street drainage and
channels stormwater treatment.
Parking ratios, Parking ratios should be interpreted as maximum number of spaces; use
parking codes, shared parking arrangements; minimum parking stall width should be
parking lots, and less than 9 ft. and stall length less than 18 ft.; parking garages are
structured parking encouraged rather than surface lots.
Parking lot runoff Parking lots are required to be landscaped and setbacks are relaxed to
allow for bioretention islands or other stormwater practices in
landscaped areas.
Open space Flexible design criteria should be provided to developers who wish to
use clustered development and open space designs.
Setbacks and Relax setbacks and allow narrower frontages to reduce total road length;
frontages eliminate long driveways.
Driveways Allow for shared driveways and alternative impervious surfaces.
Rooftop runoff Direct to pervious surfaces.
Buffer systems Designate a minimum buffer width and provide mechanisms for long-
term protection.
Clearing and grading Clearing, grading, and earth disturbance should be limited to that
required to develop the lot.
Tree conservation Provide long-term protection of large tracts of contiguous forested
areas; promote the use of native plantings.
Conservation Provide incentives for conserving natural areas through density
incentives compensation, property tax reduction, and flexibility in the design
process.
(Adapted from Center for Watershed Protection, 1998)

Review of Concept Plans

Concept plans should be submitted to the appropriate review agencies and include the
information discussed above along with a narrative to support the design. The narrative should
describe how important natural areas will be preserved and protected, and show how ESD may
be achieved for meeting on-site stormwater requirements. Review authorities may require
additional information at this phase, however, at a minimum a concept plan should include the
following elements:

Supp. 1 5.10
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

• A map of all site resources shown in Table 5.1.

• Field verification from the project engineer of the natural resource map.
• Proposed limits of clearing and grading.
• Location of proposed impervious areas (buildings, roadways, parking, and sidewalks).
• Location of existing and proposed utilities.
• Preliminary estimates of stormwater requirements.
• Preliminary location of ESD practices.
• Stable conveyance of stormwater at potential outfall locations.
• A narrative that supports the concept and describes how the design will achieve.
o Natural resource protection and enhancement.
o Maintenance of natural flow patterns.
o Reduction of impervious areas through better site design, alternative surfaces, and
nonstructural practices.
o Integration of erosion and sediment controls into the stormwater strategy.
o Implementation of ESD planning techniques and practices to the MEP.

County and municipal stormwater management agencies are required to have a comprehensive
review process in place so that input is provided for all aspects of development project planning,
design, and construction. The review of concept plans begins this process. Stormwater and
erosion and sediment control authorities will collaborate to provide coordinated feedback to the
designer before a project proceeds to the more detailed site development phase. This feedback
will accompany the concept plan approval and should be incorporated into future submissions.

5.1.3.2 Site Development Phase

Preparation of site development plans will include more detailed designs for stormwater
management and erosion and sediment control. During this phase the site footprint will be
finalized with respect to the layout of buildings, roadways, parking, and other structures in order
to develop more detailed design. The following plans will be required for site development
review:

¾ Stormwater Management
¾ Erosion and Sediment Control
¾ An Overlay Showing Stormwater and Erosion and Sediment Control Practices

Stormwater Management Plans

After concept plan approval, the developer should use comments and feedback as a basis for the
next design phase. When the development layout is finalized, the proposed topography may be
determined and final drainage areas established. Natural features and conservation areas can be
utilized to serve stormwater quantity and quality management requirements. Individual ESD
locations will be determined and all alternative surfaces, nonstructural, and micro-scale practices
will be finalized. When locating and sizing ESD practices, the primary objective is to manage
runoff as close to its source as possible by using vegetated buffers, natural flow paths, sheetflow
to natural areas, and landscape features. ESD practices are then designed according to sizing
requirements specified later in this chapter and discharge computations and storage volumes

5.11 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

provided. Calculations and details will be submitted to the review agencies to verify the design
approach. Section 5.2 provides more information on sizing requirements and design
specifications for all ESD practices. A narrative will also be required to justify that the design
will achieve ESD to the MEP.

Erosion and Sediment Control Plans

After concept plan approval, the final grading and proposed drainage areas during construction
will also be established. This is critical to developing erosion and sediment control plans.
Erosion and sediment control plans prepared at this phase will include measures for:

¾ Preservation
¾ Phasing and construction sequencing during each stage of development
¾ Design of sediment controls
¾ Stabilization strategies

Preservation

Comments received during concept plan review should be used as a basis for preparing erosion
and sediment control plans. Strategies to preserve sensitive resources, ensure soil stability, and
prevent erosion begin with protecting those areas during project construction. Erosion and
sediment control plans should identify areas to be protected by marking the limit of disturbance,
sensitive areas, buffers, and forested areas that are to be preserved or protected. In addition,
infiltration and recharge areas that need to be protected from fine sediments and compaction
should be identified. Plans should also note that all protected areas be marked in the field prior
to any land disturbing activity.

Phasing and Sequences of Construction During Each Stage of Development

The site development plan will provide sequences of construction for each stage of development.
These include initial clearing and grubbing, rough grading, site development, and final grading.
Because initial and final flow patterns will not apply to all intermediate phases, these sequences
should consider flow pattern changes, drainage areas, and discharge points at transitional phases
of the construction process. Phased plans need to ensure that erosion and sediment controls
adequately address the changing runoff patterns.

Erosion and sediment control strategies for minimizing erosion during interim grading include:

¾ Interim plans to address grade changes and flow patterns during clearing and grading,
rough grading, site development, and final grading.
¾ Slope length and steepness reductions.
¾ Divert clean water around or through a site and discharge it to a stable outlet.

Supp. 1 5.12
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

Design of Sediment Controls

Water handling practices need to provide erosion protection during site grading operations. This
may be done by diverting runoff away from highly erodible soils, steep slopes, and disturbed
areas by using dikes, swales, or reverse benches. Similarly, runoff can be safely conveyed from
the top of slopes to a stable outfall using pipe slope drains or channels. Check dams may be
needed to reduce velocities and prevent erosion. Runoff from all discharge points shall provide a
stable outlet.

Stabilization Strategies

When vegetation is removed and soil disturbance occurs, the extent and duration of exposure
should be minimized. All efforts should be made to delay grading operations until it is certain
that final grades can be reached in as little time as possible. Where this cannot be
accommodated, soils shall be stabilized within 14 days of disturbance. The extent and duration
of disturbance should be limited (e.g., 72 hours) and enhanced stabilization techniques such as
soil stabilization matting or turf reinforcement used on areas with highly erodible soils and
slopes greater than 15 percent. Soil exposure should be shortened by the local permitting
authority if warranted by site conditions.

Perimeter controls, perimeter slopes, and extreme grade modifications (e.g., slopes greater than
3:1 or where cuts and fills exceed 15 feet) require stabilization within seven days. Mass clearing
and grading should be avoided with larger projects (e.g., 25 acres) being phased so disturbed
areas remain exposed for the shortest time possible. All other areas should have a good cover of
temporary or permanent vegetation or mulch.

Natural vegetation should be retained in an undisturbed state wherever possible. If it is not

possible to retain natural vegetation, the topsoil should be salvaged, stockpiled on-site, protected
from erosion, and replaced at final grade. Topsoil removal, grading, and filling reduce soil
quality resulting in detrimental impacts on plant growth and increase runoff. Additionally, the
removal of topsoil inhibits biological activity and reduces the supply of organic matter and plant
nutrients. Similarly, unrestricted use of construction equipment can result in soil compaction.

Applicable practices include, but are not limited to, temporary and permanent seeding, sodding,
mulching, plastic covering, erosion control fabrics and matting, the early application of gravel
base on areas to be paved, and dust control. Soil stabilization measures should be appropriate for
the time of year, site conditions, and estimated duration of use. Soil stockpiles must be
stabilized, protected with sediment trapping or filtering measures, and be located away from
storm drain inlets, waterways, and drainage channels. Linear construction activities, including
right-of-way and easement clearing, roadway development, pipelines, and trenching for utilities
shall be phased so that soils are stabilized as quickly as possible.

5.13 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

Strategies to limit the extent and duration that soils are exposed may include:

¾ Minimizing disturbed area.

¾ Phasing earth disturbing activities so that the smallest area is exposed for the shortest
possible time.
¾ Salvaging topsoil for later use.
¾ Stabilizing as work progresses.

Overlay Plan

Many of the stormwater ESD practices deal with alternative surfaces or are nonstructural and
promote hydraulic connection of impervious surfaces with natural landscape features. The
practices for stormwater management and erosion and sediment control may share the same
location while serving different functions. For example, swales used initially to convey
sediment-laden runoff to a trap or basin during the sediment control phase could be used for
water quality treatment and flow attenuation of stormwater runoff at final grade. Similarly,
natural berms and vegetative buffers coupled with traditional sediment filtering controls may be
integrated into the site design and meet both sediment control and stormwater management
requirements.

Once the ESD practices have been located and sized appropriately, consideration to how these
areas will function under proposed conditions is needed. The location of any ESD practice that
requires natural infiltration needs to be identified on the plans and in the field. These areas need
to be protected during construction. An overlay plan should include the location of all ESD
practices to allow for efficient sediment control design and the protection of locations that will
be used to treat stormwater.

An overlay plan should include:

¾ The location of ESD practices on the plan and in the field.

¾ The location of areas that must remain undisturbed, protected, or used for erosion and
sediment control.
¾ Identifiable areas where construction equipment may compact soil and will need
rehabilitation after grading operations.
¾ Removal of sediment from the locations of ESD practices.
¾ Stabilization measures needed to enhance stormwater functions.

Review of Site Development Plans

Site development plans should be submitted to the appropriate review agencies and should
include a stormwater plan, erosion and sediment control plan, an overlay plan, and a narrative to
support the design. Review authorities may require additional information at this phase,
however, at a minimum a site development plan shall include the following:

• All of the information provided in the concept review.

• Comments received by review agencies during the concept review.

Supp. 1 5.14
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

• Determination of final site layout and acreage of total impervious area on site.
• Proposed topography.
• Proposed drainage areas at all points of discharge from the site.
• Proposed stormwater volume requirements for ESD targets and quantity control.
• The location and size of ESD practices used to the MEP and all nonstructural, alternative
surfaces, and micro-scale practices used.
• Proposed hydrology analysis for runoff rates, storage volumes, and discharge velocities.
• Stormwater design details and specifications.
• Discharge calculations demonstrating stable conveyance of runoff off site.
• Preliminary erosion and sediment control plans showing limits of disturbance, sensitive
areas, buffers, and forests that are to be preserved, proposed phasing, construction
sequencing, proposed practices, and stabilization techniques.
• An overlay plan showing the location of stormwater ESD practices and proposed erosion
and sediment controls.
• A narrative to support the site development design and demonstrate that ESD will be
achieved to the MEP.

Stormwater and erosion and sediment control authorities will collaborate to provide coordinated
feedback to the designer before a project proceeds to the more detailed final design phase. This
feedback will accompany the site development approval and should be incorporated into future
submission.

5.1.3.3 Final Plan Design and Review

After site development plan approval, the developer may prepare final designs by incorporating
comments from the appropriate review agencies. After all reasonable ESD options have been
exhausted, structural practices may be needed (see Chapter 3) to address additional Cpv
requirements. Final plan approval shall be required for issuing local grading and building
permits. Review authorities may require additional information at this phase, however, at a
minimum final plans shall include the following information and meet the requirements
established in COMAR 26.17.01.05 and 26.17.02 .09:

• All of the information provided in the site development review.

• Comments received by review agencies during the site development review.
• Development details and site data including site area, disturbed area, new impervious
area, and total impervious area.
• Existing and proposed topography.
• Proposed drainage areas.
• Representative cross sections and details (existing and proposed structure elevations and
water surface elevations).
• The location of existing and proposed structures.
• Construction specifications.
• Operation and maintenance plans.
• As-built design certification block.
• Inspection schedule.

5.15 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................................... Design Process and Planning

• Easements and rights-of-way.

• Certification by the owner/developer that all construction will be done according to the
plan.
• Performance bonds.
• Final erosion and sediment control plans.
• Stormwater management report including;
o A narrative to support the final design and demonstrate that ESD will be achieved
to the MEP.
o Table showing the ESD and Unified Sizing Criteria.
o Hydrology and hydraulic analysis of the stormwater management system for all
applicable sizing criteria.
o Final sizing calculations for stormwater controls including drainage area, storage,
and discharge points.
o Final analysis of stable conveyance to downstream discharge points.
o Geotechnical investigations including soil maps, borings, and site-specific
recommendations.

The design process described above is intended to be iterative, as comments from all review
agencies are incorporated during each phase of project design. This will help local jurisdictions
coordinate with other programs requiring environmental review and ensure that development
plans fit priorities for resource protection, enhancement, and restoration. Many counties have
performed restoration assessments on targeted watersheds. The planning process described in
Figure 5.1 and above allows individual site development to be evaluated in the context of these
larger resource protection efforts.

Supp. 1 5.16
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

Section 5.2 Addressing the Unified Sizing Criteria

To accomplish the goal of maintaining predevelopment runoff characteristics, there must be a

reasonable standard that is easily recognized, reproducible, and applied without opportunity for
misrepresentation. The simplest and most effective solution is to eliminate the need for
evaluating predevelopment conditions on a site-by-site basis and apply the same standard to all
sites. For rainfall amounts less than two to three inches, there is little difference in the amount of
runoff from most sites in undeveloped conditions although runoff amounts are lowest for woods.
To best maintain predevelopment runoff characteristics, the target for ESD implementation
should be “woods in good condition”.

The Act requires the implementation of ESD to the MEP to mimic natural hydrologic runoff
characteristics and minimize the impact of land development on water resources. While ESD
may be used to address Rev and WQv, limiting it to these criteria alone may not provide
sufficient treatment to mimic natural hydrology for wooded conditions or address Cpv. It may be
necessary to increase the size of single ESD practices and/or connect them in series to decrease
the volume of runoff to that expected from a naturally forested area. Implementing ESD to that
extent may not be practicable on all projects and a minimum standard is needed. Sizing ESD
practices to capture and treat both Rev and WQv is a practical minimum requirement for all
projects.

5.2.1 Performance Standards for Using Environmental Site Design

¾ The standard for characterizing predevelopment runoff characteristics for new

development projects shall be woods in good hydrologic condition;

¾ ESD shall be implemented to the MEP to mimic predevelopment conditions;

¾ As a minimum, ESD shall be used to address both Rev and WQv requirements; and

¾ Channel protection obligations are met when ESD practices are designed according to
the Reduced Runoff Curve Number Method described below.

5.17 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

5.2.2 Environmental Site Design Sizing Criteria

The criteria for sizing ESD practices are based on capturing and retaining enough rainfall so that
the runoff leaving a site is reduced to a level equivalent to a wooded site in good condition as
determined using United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) Natural Resource
Conservation Service (NRCS) methods (e.g., TR-55). The basic principle is that a reduced
runoff curve number (RCN) may be applied to post-development conditions when ESD practices
are used. The goal is to provide enough treatment using ESD practices to address Cpv
requirements by replicating an RCN for woods in good condition for the 1-year rainfall event.
This eliminates the need for structural practices from Chapter 3. If the design rainfall captured
and treated using ESD is short of the target rainfall, a reduced RCN may be applied to post-
development conditions when addressing stormwater management requirements. The reduced
RCN from Table 5.3 is calculated by subtracting the runoff treated by ESD practices from the
total 1-year 24-hour design storm runoff.

Table 5.3 was developed using the “Change in Runoff Curve Number Method” (McCuen, R.,
MDE, 1983) to determine goals for sizing ESD practices and reducing RCNs if those goals are
not met. During the planning process, site imperviousness and soil conditions are used with
Table 5.3 to determine a target rainfall for sizing ESD practices. Table 5.3 is also used to
determine the reduced RCNs for calculating additional stormwater management requirements if
the targeted rainfall cannot be met using ESD practices.

ESD Sizing Requirements:

PE = Rainfall Target from Table 5.3 used to determine ESD goals and size practices

QE = Runoff depth in inches that must be treated using ESD practices

= PE x Rv; Rv = the dimensionless volumetric runoff coefficient
= 0.05 + 0.009(I) where I is percent impervious cover

ESDv = Runoff volume (in cubic feet or acre-feet) used in the design of specific ESD practices

(P )(Rv )(A) where A is the drainage area (in square feet or acres)
= E
12

5.2.3 Addressing Stormwater Management Requirements Using ESD

¾ Treatment: ESD practices shall be used to treat the runoff from 1 inch of rainfall (i.e.,
PE = 1 inch) on all new developments where stormwater management is required.

ESD practices shall be used to the MEP to address Cpv (e.g., treat the runoff from the 1-
year 24-hour design storm) in accordance with the following conditions:

o Cpv shall be addressed on all sites including those where the 1-year post-
development peak discharge (qi) is less than or equal to 2.0 cfs.

Supp. 1 5.18
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

o Cpv shall be based on the runoff from the 1-year 24-hour design storm calculated
using the reduced RCN (see Table 5.3). If the reduced RCN for a drainage area
reflects “woods in good condition”, then Cpv has been satisfied for that drainage
area.
o When the targeted rainfall is not met, any remaining Cpv requirements shall be
treated using structural practices described in Chapter 3.

The runoff stored in ESD practices may be subtracted from the Overbank Flood
Protection and Extreme Flood Volumes (i.e., Qp2, Qp10, Qf) where these are required.

¾ Practices: The runoff, QE, shall be treated by acceptable practices from the lists
presented in this Chapter (see Sections 5.3 and 5.4). QE may be treated using an
interconnected series or “treatment train” of practices.

¾ Multiple Drainage Areas: ESD requirements shall be addressed for the entire limit of
disturbance. When a project is divided into multiple drainage areas, ESD requirements
should be addressed for each drainage area.

¾ Off-Site Drainage Areas: ESD requirements shall be based on the drainage area to the
practices providing treatment. It is recommended that runoff from off-site areas be
diverted away from or bypass ESD practices. However, if this is not feasible, then ESD
practices should be based on all pervious and impervious areas located both on-site and
off-site draining to them.

¾ Reduced RCNs: When using reduced RCNs, the following conditions apply:

o ESD practices should be distributed uniformly within each drainage area.

o Where multiple ESD practices are used within a drainage area, individual
practices may be oversized on a limited scale to compensate or over manage for
smaller practices. The size of any practice(s) is limited to the runoff from the 1-
year 24-hour storm, QE, draining to it.

5.2.4 Basis for Using Table 5.3 to Determine ESD Sizing Criteria

¾ Application: Table 5.3 shall be used to determine both the rainfall targets for sizing
ESD practices and the additional stormwater management requirements if those targets
are not met.

¾ Hydrologic Soil Groups: Each chart in Table 5.3 reflects a different hydrologic soil
group (HSG). Designers should use the charts that most closely match the project’s soil
conditions. If more than one HSG is present within a drainage area, a composite RCN
may be computed based on the proportion of the drainage area within each HSG (see
examples below).

¾ Measuring Imperviousness: The measured area of a site that does not have vegetative
or permeable cover shall be considered total impervious cover. Estimates of proposed

5.19 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

imperviousness may be used during the planning process where direct measurements of
impervious cover may not be practical. Estimates should be based on actual land use and
homogeneity and may reflect NRCS land use/impervious cover relationships (see Table
2.2a in TR-55, USDA-NRCS, 1986) where appropriate. The percent imperviousness
(%I) may be calculated from measurements of site imperviousness.

¾ RCN*: RCN* is an alternate method to estimate PE when alternative surfaces (e.g.,

permeable pavements, green roofs) are used to reduce runoff. RCN* is a composite value
for the limit of disturbance using the effective RCNs identified in Section 5.3 for each
alternative surface.

¾ Reduced RCNs: Areas shown in green (right hand side) on Table 5.3 show the target
RCN for “woods in good condition” for the respective HSG. Areas shown in yellow (left
hand side) show the reduced RCN for each HSG that is applied to stormwater
management calculations if the design rainfall is below the target.

¾ Rainfall (Inches): Target rainfall (PE) amounts for sizing ESD practices to mimic
wooded conditions for each respective HSG are located across the top of Table 5.3.
These rainfall amounts are also used to determine the reduced RCNs for calculating
additional stormwater management requirements if the targeted amounts cannot be met.

Supp. 1 5.20
 Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

Table 5.3 Rainfall Targets/Runoff Curve Number Reductions used for ESD
Hydrologic Soil Group A
%I RCN* PE = 1" 1.2" 1.4" 1.6" 1.8" 2.0" 2.2" 2.4" 2.6"
0% 40
5% 43
10% 46
15% 48 38
20% 51 40 38 38
25% 54 41 40 39
30% 57 42 41 39 38
35% 60 44 42 40 39
40% 61 44 42 40 39
45% 66 48 46 41 40
50% 69 51 48 42 41 38
55% 72 54 50 42 41 39
60% 74 57 52 44 42 40 38
65% 77 61 55 47 44 42 40
70% 80 66 61 55 50 45 40
75% 84 71 67 62 56 48 40 38
80% 86 73 70 65 60 52 44 40
85% 89 77 74 70 65 58 49 42 38
90% 92 81 78 74 70 65 58 48 42 38
95% 95 85 82 78 75 70 65 57 50 39
100% 98 89 86 83 80 76 72 66 59 40

Hydrologic Soil Group B

%I RCN* PE = 1" 1.2" 1.4" 1.6" 1.8" 2.0" 2.2" 2.4" 2.6"
0% 61
5% 63
10% 65
15% 67 55
20% 68 60 55 55
25% 70 64 61 58
30% 72 65 62 59 55
35% 74 66 63 60 56
40% 75 66 63 60 56
45% 78 68 66 62 58
50% 80 70 67 64 60
55% 81 71 68 65 61 55
60% 83 73 70 67 63 58
65% 85 75 72 69 65 60 55
70% 87 77 74 71 67 62 57
75% 89 79 76 73 69 65 59
80% 91 81 78 75 71 66 61
85% 92 82 79 76 72 67 62 55
90% 94 84 81 78 74 70 65 59 55
95% 96 87 84 81 77 73 69 63 57
100% 98 89 86 83 80 76 72 66 59 55

Cpv Addressed (RCN = Woods in Good Condition)

RCN Applied to Cpv Calculations

5.21 Supp.1
 Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

Table 5.3 Runoff Curve Number Reductions used for Environmental Site Design (continued)
Hydrologic Soil Group C
%I RCN* PE = 1" 1.2" 1.4" 1.6" 1.8" 2.0" 2.2" 2.4" 2.6"
0% 74
5% 75
10% 76
15% 78
20% 79 70
25% 80 72 70 70
30% 81 73 72 71
35% 82 74 73 72 70
40% 84 77 75 73 71
45% 85 78 76 74 71
50% 86 78 76 74 71
55% 86 78 76 74 71 70
60% 88 80 78 76 73 71
65% 90 82 80 77 75 72
70% 91 82 80 78 75 72
75% 92 83 81 79 75 72
80% 93 84 82 79 76 72
85% 94 85 82 79 76 72
90% 95 86 83 80 77 73 70
95% 97 88 85 82 79 75 71
100% 98 89 86 83 80 76 72 70

Hydrologic Soil Group D

%I RCN* PE = 1" 1.2" 1.4" 1.6" 1.8" 2.0" 2.2" 2.4" 2.6"
0% 80
5% 81
10% 82
15% 83
20% 84 77
25% 85 78
30% 85 78 77 77
35% 86 79 78 78
40% 87 82 81 79 77
45% 88 82 81 79 78
50% 89 83 82 80 78
55% 90 84 82 80 78
60% 91 85 83 81 78
65% 92 85 83 81 78
70% 93 86 84 81 78
75% 94 86 84 81 78
80% 94 86 84 82 79
85% 95 86 84 82 79
90% 96 87 84 82 79 77
95% 97 88 85 82 80 78
100% 98 89 86 83 80 78 77

Cpv Addressed (RCN = Woods in Good Condition)

RCN Applied to Cpv Calculations

Supp. 1 5.22
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

5.2.5 Design Examples: Computing ESD Stormwater Criteria

Design examples are provided only to illustrate how ESD stormwater sizing criteria are
computed for hypothetical development projects. These design examples are also utilized
elsewhere in the manual to illustrate design concepts.

Design Example No. 5.1: Residential Development – Reker Meadows

The layout of the Reker Meadows subdivision is shown in Figure 2.6.

Site Data:

Location: Frederick County, MD

Site Area: 38.0 acres
Drainage Area: 38.0 acres
Soils: 60% B, 40% C
Impervious Area: 13.8 acres

Step 1: Determine ESD Implementation Goals

The following basic steps should be followed during the planning phase to develop initial targets
for ESD implementation.

A. Determine Pre-Developed Conditions:

The goal for implementing ESD on all new development projects is to mimic forested runoff
characteristics. The first step in this process is to calculate the RCN for “woods in good
condition” for the project:

• Determine Soil Conditions and RCNs for “woods in good condition”

Soil Conditions
HSG RCN† Area Percent
‡
A 38 0 0%
B 55 22.8 acres 60%
C 70 15.2 acres 40%
D 77 0 0%
†
RCN for “woods in good condition” (Table 2-2, TR-55)
‡
Actual RCN is less than 30, use RCN = 38

• Determine composite RCN for “woods in good condition”

(55 × 22.8 acres) + (70 × 15.2 acres)

RCN woods = = 61
38 acres

The target RCN for “woods in good condition” is 61.

5.23 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

B. Determine Target PE Using Table 5.3:

PE = Rainfall used to size ESD practices

During project planning and preliminary design, site soils and proposed imperviousness are used
to determine the target PE for sizing ESD practices to mimic wooded conditions.

• Determine Proposed Imperviousness (%I)

Proposed Impervious Area (as measured from site plans): 13.8 acres
%I = Impervious Area / Drainage Area
= 13.8 acres / 38 acres
= 36.3%;

Because %I is between 35% and 40%, both values should be checked and the more conservative
result used to determine target PE.

For this example, assume imperviousness is distributed proportionately (60/40) in B and C soils.

• Determine PE from Table

Using %I = 35% & 40% and B Soils:

PE ≥ 1.8 inches will reduce the RCN to reflect “woods in good condition” for %I = 35% & 40%

Using %I = 35% & 40% and C Soils:

Supp. 1 5.24
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

For %I = 35%, PE ≥ 1.6 inches will reduce the RCN to reflect “woods in good condition”
For %I = 40%, PE ≥ 1.8” to achieve the same goal.

For this project, PE happens to be the same for both soil groups, therefore use PE = 1.8 inches of
rainfall as the target for ESD implementation.

C. Compute QE :

QE = Runoff depth used to size ESD practices

QE = PE x Rv, where
PE = 1.8 inches
Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 36.3
= 0.05 + (0.009 x 36.3) = 0.38

QE = 1.8 inches x 0.38

= 0.68 inches

ESD targets for the Reker Meadows project:

PE = 1.8 inches
QE = 0.68 inches

By using ESD practices that meet these targets, Rev, WQv, and Cpv requirements will be
satisfied. Potential practices could include swales or micro-bioretention to capture and treat
runoff from the roads. Likewise, raingardens and disconnection of rooftop runoff could be used
to capture and treat runoff from the houses.

Step 2: Determine Stormwater Management Requirements After Using ESD

For this example, it is assumed that ESD techniques and practices were implemented to treat
only 1.2 inches of rainfall (e.g., PE = 1.2 inches) over the entire project. After all efforts to
implement ESD practices have been exhausted, the following basic steps should be followed to
determine how much additional stormwater management is required.

A. Calculate Reduced RCNs

PE = Rainfall used to size ESD practices

During the planning and design processes, site soils, measured imperviousness, and PE are used
to determine reduced RCNs for calculating Cpv requirements.

• Determine Reduced RCN for PE = 1.2 inches

5.25 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

Using %I = 35% & 40%, B Soils, and PE = 1.2 inches:

For B Soils, PE = 1.2 inches, and %I = 35% & 40%, reduced RCN = 63

Using %I = 35% & 40%, C Soils, and PE = 1.2 inches:

For C Soils, PE = 1.2 inches, and %I = 35% & 40%, reduced RCN = 73 & 75, respectively

Use the more conservative value, 75, for calculating a composite RCN for the site.

A composite RCN may be calculated as follows:

For PE = 1.2 inches:

(63 × 22.8 acres) + (75 × 15.2 acres)

RCN = = 67.8
38 acres

Use 68

B. Calculate Cpv Requirements

The composite RCN for “woods in good condition” is 61 (see Step 1A above).

The design RCN (68) does not reflect the composite RCN for “woods in good condition” (61)
and, therefore Cpv must be addressed. However, PE ≥ 1.0 inches and Cpv requirements are based
on the runoff from the 1-year 24-hour design storm calculated using the reduced RCN (68).

Supp. 1 5.26
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

• Compute Cpv Storage Volume

When PE ≥ 1.0 inches, Cpv shall be the runoff from the 1-year 24-hour design storm calculated
using the reduced RCN. If the reduced RCN for a drainage area reflects “woods in good
condition”, then Cpv has been satisfied for that drainage area.

Calculate Cpv using design PE = 1.2 inches (RCN = 68):

Cpv = Q1 x A

where: Q1 is the runoff from the 1-year 24-hour design storm

(P − 0.2S) 2
Q1 = (Equation 2.3, TR-55, USDA NRCS 1986)
(P + 0.8S)

where: P = 1-year 24-hour design storm

S = (1000/RCN) – 10 (Equation 2-4, TR-55)
= (1000/68) – 10
= 4.7

[2.6 − (0.2 x 4.7)]2 2.76

Q1 = = = 0.43 inches
[2.6 + (0.8x 4.7)] 6.36

Cpv = 0.43 inches x 38 acres

= 1.36 ac. – ft. or 59, 240 cubic feet

Cpv Storage Requirements for Reker Meadows

Rainfall (PE) Additional Cpv Required Notes:
(ac-ft) (cu. ft.)
PE ≥ 1.8 inches NA NA Target PE for RCN = woods
PE = 1.2 inches 1.36 59,240 Design PE
Conventional Design 1.65 71,875 from Chapter 2 (see page 2.18)

Stormwater management requirements for the Reker Meadows project include using ESD
practices to treat 1.2 inches of rainfall and structural practices from Chapter 3 (e.g., shallow
wetland) to treat the Cpv of 59,240 cubic feet.

5.27 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

Design Example No. 5.2: Commercial Development - Claytor Community Center

The layout of the Claytor Community Center is shown in Figure 2.9.

Site Data:

Location: Dorchester County

Site Area: 3.0 acres
Drainage Area: 3.0 acres
Soils: 100% B
Impervious Area: 1.9 acres

Step 1: Determine ESD Implementation Goals

The following basic steps should be followed during the planning phase to develop initial targets
for ESD implementation.

A. Determine Pre-Developed Conditions:

The goal for implementing ESD on all new development projects is to mimic forested runoff
characteristics. The first step in this process is to calculate the RCN for “woods in good
condition” for the project.

• Determine Soil Conditions and RCNs for “woods in good condition”

Soil Conditions
HSG RCN† Area Percent
‡
A 38 0 0%
B 55 3.0 acres 100%
C 70 0 acres 0%
D 77 0 0%
†
RCN for “woods in good condition” (Table 2-2, TR-55)
‡
Actual RCN is less than 30, use RCN = 38

The site is entirely located in HSG B, and the target RCN for “woods in good condition” is 55.

B. Determine Target PE Using Table 5.3

PE = Rainfall used to size ESD practices

During the project planning and preliminary design, site soils and proposed imperviousness are
used to determine target PE for sizing ESD practices to mimic wooded conditions.

Supp. 1 5.28
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

• Determine Proposed Imperviousness (%I)

Proposed Impervious Area (as measured from site plans): 1.9 acres
%I = Impervious Area / Drainage Area
= 1.9 acres / 3.0 acres
= 63.3%

Because %I is closer to 65% than 60%, use the more conservative value, 65%.

• Determine PE from Table

Using %I = 65% & B Soils:

PE ≥ 2.0 inches will reduce the RCN to reflect “woods in good condition” for %I = 65%

For this project, use PE = 2.0 inches

C. Compute QE :

QE = Runoff depth used to size ESD practices

QE = PE x Rv, where
PE = 2.0 inches
Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 63.3%
= 0.05 + (0.009 x 63.3)
= 0.62

QE = 2.0 inches x 0.62

= 1.24 inches

5.29 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

ESD targets for the Claytor Community Center project:

PE = 2.0 inches
QE = 1.24 inches

By using ESD practices that meet these targets, Rev, WQv, and Cpv requirements will be
satisfied. Potential practices could include permeable pavements, micro-bioretention, or
landscape infiltration to capture and treat runoff from the rooftops, parking lots, and drive aisles.

Step 2. Determine Stormwater Management Requirements After Using ESD

For this example, it is assumed that ESD techniques and practices were implemented to treat
only 1.6 inches of rainfall (e.g., PE = 1.6 inches) over the entire project. After all efforts to
implement ESD practices have been exhausted, the following basic steps should be followed to
determine if any additional stormwater management is required.

A. Calculate Reduced RCNs

PE = Rainfall used to size ESD practices

During the design process, site soils, measured imperviousness, and PE are used to determine
reduced RCNs for calculating Cpv requirements.

• Determine Reduced RCN for PE = 1.6 inches

Using %I = 65%, B Soils, and PE = 1.6 inches:

For B Soils, PE = 1.6 inches, and %I = 65%, reduced RCN = 65

B. Calculate Cpv Requirements

The RCN for “woods in good condition” = 55 (see Step 1A above).

Supp. 1 5.30
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

The design RCN (65) does not reflect “woods in good condition” (55) and therefore Cpv must be
addressed. However, PE ≥ 1.0 inches, and Cpv is based on the runoff from the 1-year 24-hour
design storm calculated using the reduced RCN (65).

• Compute Cpv Storage Volume

When PE ≥ 1.0 inches, Cpv shall be the runoff from the 1-year 24-hour design storm calculated
using the reduced RCN. If the reduced RCN for a drainage area reflects “woods in good
condition”, then Cpv has been satisfied for that drainage area.

Calculate Cpv using design PE = 1.6 inches (RCN = 65)

Cpv = Q1 x A

where: Q1 = runoff from the 1-year 24-hour design storm

(P − 0.2S) 2
Q1 = (Equation 2.3, TR-55, USDA NRCS 1986)
(P + 0.8S)

where: P = 1-year 24-hour design storm

S = (1000/RCN) – 10 (Equation 2-4, TR-55)
= (1000/65) – 10
= 5.4

[2.8 − (0.2x 5.4)]2 2.96

Q1 = = = 0.42 inches
[2.8 + (0.8x 5.4)] 7.12

Cpv = 0.42 inches x 3.0 acres

= 0.105 ac. – ft. or 4,574 cubic feet

Cpv Storage Requirements for Claytor Community Center

Rainfall (PE) Additional Cpv Required Notes:
(ac-ft) (cu. ft.)
PE ≥ 2.0 inches NA NA Target PE for RCN = woods
PE = 1.6 inches 0.105 4,574 Design PE
Conventional Design 0.21 9,150 See Note Below*
*NOTE: Prior to 2009, Cpv was not required on the Eastern Shore. However, an estimated 0.21 ac.-ft (9,150
cubic feet) would have been needed to address Cpv in Design Example No. 2 in Chapter 2.

Stormwater management requirements for the Claytor Community Center project include using
ESD practices to treat 1.6 inches of rainfall and structural practices from Chapter 3 (e.g., shallow
wetland) to treat the Cpv of 4,574 cubic feet.

5.31 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

Design Example No. 5.3: Multiple Drainage Areas – Pensyl Pointe

The layout of the Pensyl Pointe subdivision is shown in Figure 2.12.

Site Data:

Location: Montgomery County, MD

Site Area: 38.0 acres
Drainage (DA) 1
Area: 7.6 acres
Soils: 60% B, 40% C
Impervious Area: 2.25 acres

Drainage (DA) 2
Area: 30.4 acres
Soils: 60% B, 40% C
Impervious Area: 11.55 acres

Step 1: Determine ESD Implementation Goals

The following basic steps should be followed during the planning phase to develop initial targets
for ESD implementation.

A. Determine Pre-Developed Conditions:

The goal for implementing ESD on all new development sites is to mimic forested runoff
characteristics. The first step in this process is to calculate the RCNs for “woods in good
condition” for the project.

• Determine Soil Conditions and RCNs for “woods in good condition”

DA 1

Soil Conditions (DA 1)

HSG RCN† Area Percent
‡
A 38 0 0%
B 55 4.6 acres 60%
C 70 3.0 acres 40%
D 77 0 0%
†
RCN for “woods in good condition” (Table 2-2, TR-55)
‡
Actual RCN is less than 30, use RCN = 38

• Determine Composite RCN for “woods in good condition” for DA 1

(55 × 4.6 acres) + (70 × 3.0 acres)

RCN woods = = 61
7.6 acres

Supp. 1 5.32
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

The target RCN for “woods in good condition” is 61

DA 2

Soil Conditions (DA 2)

HSG RCN† Area Percent
A 38‡ 0 0%
B 55 18.2 acres 60%
C 70 12.2 acres 40%
D 77 0 0%
†
RCN for “woods in good condition” (Table 2-2, TR-55)
‡
Actual RCN is less than 30, use RCN = 38

Determine Composite RCN for “woods in good condition” for DA 2

(55 × 18.2 acres) + (70 × 12.2 acres)

RCN woods = = 61
30.4 acres
The target RCN for “woods in good condition” is 61

B. Determine Target PE Using Table 5.3:

PE = Rainfall used to size ESD practices

During the planning and preliminary design processes, site soils and proposed imperviousness
are used to determine target PE for sizing ESD practices to mimic wooded conditions.

• Determine Proposed Imperviousness (%I)

DA 1

Proposed Impervious Area (as measured from site plans): 2.25 acres;
%I = Impervious Area / Drainage Area
= 2.25 acres / 7.6 acres
= 30.0%

DA 2

Proposed Impervious Area (as measured from site plans): 11.55 acres;
%I = Impervious Area / Drainage Area
= 11.55 acres / 30.4 acres
= 38.0%

Because %I is closer to 40% than 35%, use the more conservative value , 40%, to determine
target PE.

5.33 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

For this example, assume imperviousness in DA 1 & DA 2 is distributed proportionately (60/40)

in B and C soils.

• Determine PE from Table

DA 1

Using %I = 30% and B Soils:

P ≥ 1.6 inches will reduce RCN to reflect “woods in good condition”

Using %I = 30% and C Soils:

PE ≥ 1.6 inches will reduce the RCN to reflect “woods in good condition”.

For DA 1, PE happens to be the same for both soil groups, therefore use PE = 1.6 inches of
rainfall.

Supp. 1 5.34
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

DA 2

Using %I = 40% and B Soils:

PE ≥ 1.8 inches will reduce the RCN to reflect “woods in good condition”.

Using %I = 40% and C Soils:

PE ≥ 1.8 inches will reduce the RCN to reflect “woods in good condition”.

For DA 2, PE happens to be the same for both soil groups, therefore use PE = 1.8 inches of
rainfall.

C. Compute QE:

DA 1

QE = Runoff depth used to size ESD practices

QE = PE x Rv, where
PE = 1.6 inches
Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 30.0%
= 0.05 + (0.009 x 30.0)
= 0.32

QE = 1.6 inches x 0.32

= 0.51 inches

5.35 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

DA 2

QE = Runoff depth used to size ESD practices

QE = PE x Rv, where
PE = 1.8 inches
Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 38.0%
= 0.05 + (0.009 x 38.0)
= 0.39

QE = 1.8 inches x 0.39

= 0.70 inches

ESD targets for the Pensyl Pointe project:

DA 1 DA 2

PE = 1.6 inches PE = 1.8 inches

QE = 0.51 inches QE = 0.70 inches

By using ESD practices that meet these targets, Rev, WQv, and Cpv requirements will be
satisfied. Potential practices could include swales or micro-bioretention to capture and treat
runoff from the roads. Likewise, raingardens and disconnection of runoff could be used to
capture and treat runoff from the houses.

Step 2. Determine Stormwater Management Requirements After Using ESD

For this example, it is assumed that ESD techniques and practices were implemented to treat
only 1.6 inches of rainfall (e.g., PE = 1.6 inches) over the entire project. After all efforts to
implement ESD practices have been exhausted, the following basic steps should be followed to
determine if any additional stormwater management is required.

A. Calculate Reduced RCNs

PE = Rainfall used to size ESD practices

During the planning and design processes, site soils, measured imperviousness, and PE are used
to determine reduced RCNs for calculating Cpv requirements.

• Determine Reduced RCNs for PE = 1.6 inches

Supp. 1 5.36
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

DA 1

Using %I = 30%, B Soils, and PE = 1.6 inches:

For B Soils, PE = 1.6 inches, and %I = 30%, reduced RCN = 55 (woods in good condition)

Using %I = 30%, C Soils, and PE = 1.6 inches:

For C Soils, PE = 1.6 inches, and %I = 30%, reduced RCN = 70 (woods in good condition)

Composite RCNs may be calculated as follows:

For PE = 1.6 inches:

(55 × 4.6 acres) + (70 × 3.0 acres)
RCN = = 60.9
7.6 acres
Use 61

5.37 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

DA 2

Using %I = 40%, B Soils, and PE = 1.6 inches:

For B Soils, PE = 1.6 inches, and %I = 40%, reduced RCN = 56

Using %I = 40%, C Soils, and PE = 1.6 inches:

For C Soils, PE = 1.6 inches, and %I = 40%, reduced RCN = 71

Composite RCNs may be calculated as follows:

For PE = 1.6 inches:

(56 × 18.2 acres) + (71 × 12.2 acres)
RCN = = 62
30.4 acres

Reduced RCNs for the Pensyl Pointe project:

DA 1 DA 2

PE = 1.6 inches RCN = 61 RCN = 62

Supp. 1 5.38
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

B. Calculate Cpv Requirements

DA 1

The composite RCN for “woods in good condition” is 61 (see Step 1A above).

The design RCN (61) for PE = 1.6 inches reflects “woods in good condition” and therefore Cpv is
addressed.

Cpv Storage Requirements for Pensyl Pointe - DA 1

Rainfall (PE) Additional Cpv Required Notes:
(ac-ft) (cu. ft.)
PE ≥ 1.6 inches NA NA Target PE for RCN = woods
PE = 1.6 inches NA NA Design PE
Conventional Design 0.30 13,070 From Chapter 2 (see page 2.32)

DA 2

The composite RCN for “woods in good condition” is 61 (see Step 1A above).

The design RCN (62) does not reflect the composite RCN for “woods in good condition” (61)
and Cpv must be addressed. However, PE ≥ 1.0 inches, and Cpv is based on the runoff from the
1-year 24-hour design storm calculated using the reduced RCN (62).

Calculate Cpv using design PE = 1.6 inches (RCN = 62)

Cpv = Q1 x A

Where Q1 is the runoff from the 1-year 24-hour design storm

(P − 0.2S) 2
Q1 = (Equation 2.3, TR-55, USDA NRCS 1986)
(P + 0.8S)

where: P = 1-year 24-hour design storm

S = (1000/RCN) – 10 (Equation 2-4, TR-55)
= (1000/62) – 10
= 6.1

[2.6 − (0.2 x 6.1)]2 1.90

Q1 = = = 0.25 inches
[2.6 + (0.8x 6.1)] 7.48

Cpv = 0.25 inches x 30.4 acres

= 0.63 ac. – ft. or 27,440 cubic feet

5.39 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design...................................................................... Sizing Criteria

Cpv Storage Requirements for Pensyl Pointe – DA 2

Rainfall (PE) Additional Cpv Required Notes:
(ac-ft) (cu. ft.)
PE ≥ 1.8 inches NA NA Target PE for RCN = woods
PE = 1.6 inches 0.63 27,440 Design PE
Conventional Design 1.31 57,065 From Chapter 2 (see page 2.33)

Stormwater management requirements for the Pensyl Pointe project include using ESD practices
to treat 1.6 inches of rainfall and structural practices from Chapter 3 (e.g., shallow wetland) to
treat the Cpv of 27,440 cubic feet.

Supp. 1 5.40
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

Section 5.3 Alternative Surfaces

An effective method to reduce imperviousness in residential, commercial, and industrial

applications is to use more permeable alternatives. Roofs and pavements are often overlooked
areas that may be replaced with more permeable surfaces. Green roofs are particularly useful
alternatives for reducing impervious cover and provide much needed green space in ultra-urban
or high-density developments. Whether made from porous asphalt or concrete, interlocking
pavers, or reinforced turfs, permeable pavements are a cost-effective alternative for parking lot
and roadway surfaces.

Alternative surface variants include:

¾ A-1. Green Roofs

¾ A-2. Permeable Pavements
¾ A-3. Reinforced Turf

5.41 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

A-1. Green Roofs

Green roofs are alternative surfaces that replace conventional construction materials and include
a protective covering of planting media and vegetation. Also known as vegetated roofs, roof
gardens, or eco-roofs, these may be used in place of traditional flat or pitched roofs to reduce
impervious cover and more closely mimic natural hydrology. Green roofs produce less heat than
conventional systems. Therefore, they may be used to help mitigate stormwater impacts and
temperature increases caused by new development.

There are two basic green roof designs that are distinguished by media thickness and the plant
varieties that are used. The more common or “extensive” green roof is a lightweight system
where the media layer is between two and six inches thick. This limits plants to low-growing,
hardy herbaceous varieties. An extensive green roof may be constructed off-site as a modular
system with drainage layers, growing media, and plants installed in interlocking grids.
Conventional construction methods may also be used to install each component separately.

“Intensive” green roofs have thicker soil layers (eight inches or greater) and are capable of
supporting more diverse plant communities including trees and shrubs. A more robust structural
loading capacity is needed to support the additional weight of the media and plants. Intensive
green roofs are more complex and expensive to design, construct, and maintain, are less
commonly used, and are therefore not covered here.

Applications:

Green roofs may be used to replace most conventional roofs in both new and redevelopment
applications in residential, commercial, and industrial projects. Green roofs are particularly
useful for reducing impervious cover in ultra-urban or high-density areas as well. Green roofs
may also mitigate temperature increases on projects located in thermally sensitive watersheds.

Performance:

When designed according to the guidance provided below, the rooftop area covered by a green
roof will have runoff characteristics more closely resembling grassed or open space areas. The
capacity of a green roof to detain runoff is governed by planting media thickness and roof slope
or “pitch.” However, the RCNs shown in Table 5.4 below are used to determine how green roofs
contribute to addressing the ESD Sizing Criteria.

Table 5.4 Effective RCNs for Extensive Green Roofs

Roof Thickness (in.): 2 3 4 6 8
Effective RCN: 94 92 88 85 77

Because impermeable liners are an integral component in all systems, green roofs do not provide
groundwater recharge. Therefore, additional treatment is needed to compensate for the loss of
recharge from rooftop areas. This is equal to Rev for the rooftop area and may be provided in
separate infiltration practices or as additional storage within downstream ESD practices.

Supp. 1 5.42
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of green roofs to treat stormwater
runoff:

¾ Infrastructure: The location of existing and proposed utilities (e.g., HVAC, gutters,
downspouts, electricity) will influence the design and construction of green roofs.

¾ Structure: Green roofs are not suitable for use on steep roofs (> 30% or 4:12). Sloped
roofs may require additional measures to prevent sliding and ensure stability. The structure
must also be capable of supporting the additional weight (live and dead load) of a green roof.
Typical dead load ranges from 8 to 36 lbs/ft2. Live load is a function of rainfall retention
(e.g., 1 inch of rain or 10 inches of snow equals 5.2 lbs/ft2). For redevelopment projects and
existing buildings, additional measures (e.g., trusses, joists, columns) may be needed for
support.

¾ Waterproofing: Materials should be durable under the conditions associated with vegetated
covers. Supplemental barrier layers may be required with waterproofing membranes that
may be damaged by plant roots.

¾ Drainage: Building drainage (e.g., gutters, deck drains, scuppers) must be capable of
managing large rainfall events without inundating the roof.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing green roofs:

¾ Conveyance: Runoff shall flow through and exit green roof systems in a safe and non-
erosive manner. Overflow structures should be capable of passing the 2-year 24-hour design
storm without inundating the roof. A semi-rigid, plastic geocomposite drain or mat layer
should be included to convey runoff to the building drainage system. Flat roof applications
may require a perforated internal network to facilitate drainage of rainfall. Additionally,
roof flashing should extend six inches above the media surface and be protected by counter-
flashing.

Runoff from adjacent roofs should not drain to the green roof. If bypassing a green roof is
impractical, an overflow device (e.g., gutter, deck drain) should be used.

All green roofs shall include a waterproofing system or membrane. Materials used should be
durable under vegetated cover conditions and resistant to biological and root attack. A
supplemental barrier may be needed to protect the waterproofing from plant roots.

5.43 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

¾ Treatment: Green roof systems shall meet the following conditions:

o Planting media shall be non-soil engineered mixes conforming to the specifications

found in Appendix B.4. Media layers should be between two to six inches thick.
Dual media systems may be applied where green roof assemblies are four inches or
thicker.
o Individual layers (e.g., root barriers, drainage mats, separation geotextiles) shall
conform to the specifications found in Appendix B.4.

Figure 5.2 Cutaway of a Typical Green Roof

¾ Structure:

o The roof structure shall be capable of bearing the maximum predicted dead and live
loads associated with green roof systems. Standardized media weights and
procedures (e.g., ASTM E-2397-05, E-2399-05) shall be used to establish the dead
load bearing capacity of the roof.
o Green roofs with pitches steeper than 2:12 shall include supplemental measures (e.g.,
slope bars, rigid stabilization panels, reinforcing mesh) to enhance stability and
prevent media sliding.

¾ Landscaping: Vegetation is critical to the function and appearance of any green roof.
Therefore landscaping plans should be provided according to the guidance in Appendix B.4.

Supp. 1 5.44
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

A vigorous, drought-tolerant vegetative cover should be established using varieties of sedum,

delosperma, or similar varieties native or suitable for growth in Maryland.

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during construction of projects with green roofs:

¾ Waterproofing Installation: Measures shall be taken to prevent membrane damage during

green roof installation. Any flaws, irregularities, or conditions that may cause leaks or roof
damage shall be identified and repaired. The waterproofing membrane should be visually
inspected and tested for water tightness prior to installation of the planting mix.

¾ Slope Stabilization Measures: Where required, slope stabilization measures should be

placed prior to green roof installation. In some situations, slope stabilization may be
integrated into the roof structure.

¾ Green Roof Installation: Green roof systems should be installed according to the
manufacturer’s instructions. Generally, root-barrier layers, walkways, and irrigation systems
should be installed first.

Inspection:

¾ The following certifications shall be required during construction:

o Prior to placement of the waterproofing, drainage, and treatment materials,

certification that the constructed roof meets the load bearing capacity specified on
the approved plans.
o After its installation and prior to placement of the planting media and stock,
certification regarding the water tightness of the waterproofing membrane.

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During placement of the waterproofing membrane.

o During placement of the drainage system.
o During placement of the planting media.
o Upon installation of the plant material.
o Before issuing use and occupancy approvals (new construction only).
o During the second growing season to ensure adequate vegetation survival.

Maintenance Criteria:

Green roofs require annual maintenance to ensure optimum performance. Typically, eighteen
months are needed to establish adequate initial plant growth. Periodic irrigation may be needed
during this time and basic weeding, fertilizing, and in-fill planting may be required as well.
After plants are established, the roof should be inspected and light weeding performed once or
twice per year.

5.45 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

A-2. Permeable Pavements

Permeable pavements are alternatives that may be used to reduce imperviousness. While there
are many different materials commercially available, permeable pavements may be divided into
three basic types: porous bituminous asphalt, pervious concrete, and permeable interlocking
concrete pavements. Permeable pavements typically consist of a porous surface course and open
graded stone base/subbase or sand drainage system. Stormwater drains through the surface
course, is captured in the drainage system, and infiltrates into the surrounding soils. Permeable
pavements significantly reduce the amount of impervious cover, provide water quality and
groundwater recharge benefits, and may help mitigate temperature increases.

Applications:

Permeable pavements are effective for reducing imperviousness in pedestrian pavements,

parking lots, driveways, plazas, and access roads. They may be used in both new and
redevelopment applications in residential, commercial, and industrial projects. Permeable
pavements are particularly useful in high-density areas where space is limited.

Performance:

When designed according to the guidance provided below, areas covered by permeable
pavements will have runoff characteristics more closely resembling vegetated areas. The
capacity of permeable pavements to capture and detain runoff is governed by the storage
capacity, compaction of the soil subgrade, and in-situ soil properties. Consequently, RCN’s
applied to these systems vary with individual design characteristics. The effective RCN’s shown
in Table 5.5 are used when addressing the ESD Sizing Criteria.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of permeable pavements to
capture and treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: The size and distribution of paved surfaces within a project must be considered early
during planning and design. Permeable pavements should not be used in areas where there
are risks for foundation damage, basement flooding, interference with subsurface sewage
disposal systems, or detrimental impacts to other underground structures.

¾ Topography: Runoff should sheetflow across permeable pavements. Pavement surfaces

should be gradual (≤ 5%) to prevent ponding of water on the surface and within the subbase.

¾ Soils: Sandy and silty soils are critical to successful application of permeable pavements.
The HSG should be A, B or C.

Supp. 1 5.46
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

Subsurface water conditions (e.g., water table) will help determine the stone reservoir
thickness used. The probability of practice failure increases if the reservoir intercepts
groundwater. Therefore, subbase inverts should be above local groundwater tables.

¾ Drainage Area: Permeable pavements are an at-source practice for reducing the effects of
impervious cover and addressing ESD criteria. As the impervious area draining to each
practice increases, practice effectiveness weakens. Therefore, runoff from adjacent areas (or
“run-on”) should be limited.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Permeable pavements should not be used to treat hotspots that generate
higher concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are found in typical
stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

¾ Structure: Most permeable alternatives have a lower load bearing capacity than
conventional pavements. Therefore, applications should be limited to locations that do not
receive heavy vehicle traffic and where sub soils are not compacted.

¾ Operation: Permeable pavements are highly susceptible to clogging and subject to owner
neglect. Individual owners need to be educated to ensure that proper maintenance and winter
operation activities will allow the system to function properly.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing permeable pavements:

¾ Conveyance: Runoff shall flow through and exit permeable pavements in a safe and non-
erosive manner. Permeable pavements should be designed off-line whenever possible.
Runoff from adjacent areas should be diverted to a stable conveyance system. If bypassing
these areas is impractical, then runoff should sheetflow onto permeable pavements.

Pavement surfaces shall have a permeability of eight inches per hour or greater to convey
water into the subbase rapidly. The slope of the permeable pavement shall be no greater
than 5%. Any grade adjustments requiring fill should be accomplished using the subbase
material. Permeable pavements may be placed in sloped areas by terracing levels along
existing contours.

Pavement systems should include an alternate mode for runoff to enter the subbase reservoir.
In curbless designs, this may consist of a two-foot wide stone edge drain. Raised inlets may
be required in curbed applications.

The bottom of the subbase shall be level to enhance distribution and reduce ponding within
the reservoir. A network of perforated pipes may be used to uniformly distribute runoff over
the bed bottom. Perforated pipes may also be used to connect structures (e.g., cleanouts,
inlets) located within the permeable pavement section.

5.47 Supp.1
 Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

All permeable pavements shall be designed to ensure that water surface elevations for the
10-year 24 hour design storm do not rise into the pavement to prevent freeze/thaw damage to
the surface. Designs should include overflow structures like overdrains, inlets, edge drains,
or similar devices that will convey excess runoff safely to a stable outfall.

¾ Treatment: All permeable pavement systems shall meet the following conditions:

o Applications that exceed 10,000 ft2 shall be designed as infiltration practices using
the design methods outlined in Appendix D.13 for infiltration trenches. A porosity (n)
of 30% and an effective area of the trench (At) equal to 30% of the pavement surface
area shall be used.
o A subbase layer of a clean, open graded, washed aggregate with a porosity (n) of
30% (1.5” to 2” stone is preferred) shall be used below the pavement surface. The
subbase may be 6”, 9” or 12” thick.
o Filter cloth shall not be used between the subbase and soil subgrade. If needed, a
12” layer of washed concrete sand or pea gravel (⅛” to ⅜” stone) may be used to act
as a bridging layer between the subbase reservoir and subsurface soils.

Table 5.5 Effective RCNs for Permeable Pavements

Hydrologic Soil Group
Subbase
A B C D
6” 761 841 932 ─
9” 623 653 773 ─
12” 40 55 70 ─
1.
Design shall include 1 - 2” min. overdrain (inv. 2” below pavement base) per 750 s.f. of pavement area.
2.
Design shall include 1 - 2” min. overdrain (inv. 2” below pavement base) per 600 s.f. of pavement area
3.
Design shall include 1 - 3” min. overdrain (inv. 3” below pavement base) and a ½” underdrain at subbase
invert.

¾ Soils:

o Permeable pavements shall not be installed in HSG D or on areas of compacted fill.

Underlying soil types and condition shall be field-verified prior to final design.
o For applications that exceed 10,000 ft2, underlying soils shall have an infiltration
rate ( f ) of 0.52 in/hr or greater. This rate may be initially determined from NRCS
soil textural classification and subsequently confirmed by geotechnical tests in the
field as required in Chapter 3.3.1.
o The invert of the subbase reservoir shall be at least four feet above (two feet on the
lower Eastern Shore) the seasonal high water table.

Supp. 1 5.48
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

Figure 5.3 Examples of Permeable Pavements

Typical Section

Typical Section w/Overdrain & Underdrain

Permeable Pavement w/Micro-Bioretention - Plan View

5.49 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

¾ Setbacks:

o Permeable pavements shall be located down gradient of building structures and be

setback at least 10 feet from buildings, 50 feet from confined water supply wells, 100
feet from unconfined water supply wells, and 25 feet from septic systems.
o Permeable pavements should also be sized and located to meet minimum local
requirements for underground utility clearance.

¾ Structure: All permeable pavement systems shall be capable of bearing the anticipated
vehicle and traffic loads. Pavement systems conforming to the specifications found in
Appendix B.4 should be structurally stable for typical (e.g., light duty) applications.

¾ Landscaping: Permeable pavement shall be identified on landscaping plans. Trees and

shrubs should not be located adjacent to asphalt and concrete if damage by root penetration
and clogging from leaves is a concern.

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during construction of projects with permeable
pavement:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Final grading for installation should not take place until
the surrounding site is stabilized. If this cannot be accomplished, runoff from disturbed areas
shall be diverted around proposed pavement locations.

¾ Soil Compaction: Sub soils shall not be compacted. Construction should be performed with
lightweight, wide tracked equipment to minimize compaction. Excavated materials should
be placed in a contained area.

¾ Distribution Systems: Overdrain, underdrain, and distribution pipes shall be checked to

ensure that both the material and perforations meet specifications (see Appendix B.4). The
upstream ends of pipes should be capped prior to installation. All underdrain or distribution
pipes used should be installed flat along the bed bottom.

¾ Subbase Installation: Subbase aggregate shall be clean and free of fines. The subbase
shall be placed in lifts and lightly rolled according to the specifications (see Appendix B.4).

Supp. 1 5.50
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During excavation to subgrade.

o During placement and backfill of any drainage or distribution system(s).
o During placement of the crushed stone subbase material.
o During placement of the surface material.
o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization.

Maintenance Criteria:

The following procedures should be considered essential for maintaining permeable pavement
systems:

¾ Pavements should be used only where regular maintenance can be performed. Maintenance
agreements should clearly specify how to conduct routine tasks to ensure long-term
performance.

¾ Pavement surfaces should be swept and vacuumed to reduce sediment accumulation and
ensure continued surface porosity. Sweeping should be performed at least twice annually
with a commercial cleaning unit. Washing systems and compressed air units should not be
used to perform surface cleaning.

¾ Drainage pipes, inlets, stone edge drains, and other structures within or draining to the
subbase should be cleaned out at regular intervals.

¾ Trucks and other heavy vehicles can grind dirt and grit into the porous surfaces, leading to
clogging and premature failure. These vehicles should be prevented from tracking and
spilling material onto the pavement.

¾ Deicers should be used in moderation. When used, deicers should be non-toxic and organic
and can be applied either as calcium magnesium acetate or as pretreated salt. Snow plowing
should be done carefully with blades set one-inch higher than normal. Plowed snow piles
and snowmelt should not be directed to permeable pavement.

5.51 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

A-3. Reinforced Turf

Reinforced turf consists of interlocking structural units with interstitial areas for placing gravel
or growing grass. These systems are suitable for light traffic loads and are commonly used for
emergency vehicle access roads and overflow or occasionally used parking.

Applications:

Reinforced turf is effective for reducing imperviousness in parking lots, driveways, plazas, and
access roads in both new and redevelopment applications in residential, commercial, and
industrial projects. It is particularly useful in high-density areas where space is limited. Because
reinforced turf is an open load-bearing matrix within a vegetated or gravel surface, runoff
characteristics are similar to open space in good condition or gravel.

Performance:

When designed according to the guidance provided below, reinforced turf areas are considered as
permeable surfaces. Post development RCN’s for reinforced turf applications should reflect the
surfacing material used (e.g., “open space in good condition” for grass).

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of reinforced turf to capture and
treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: Reinforced turf works best when designed as small areas or in a series of narrow
strips. The size and distribution of these surfaces within a project must be considered early
during planning and design.

¾ Topography: Runoff should sheetflow onto and across reinforced turf. Contributing
drainage slopes should be moderate (≤ 5%). If slopes are too steep, then level-spreading
devices may be needed to redistribute flow. Turf surfaces should be gradual (≤ 4%) to
prevent ponding of water within the subbase.

¾ Soils: Reinforced turf may be used in all soils but works best in sandy soils.

¾ Drainage Area: Reinforced turf is an at source practice for reducing impervious cover. As
the impervious area draining to each application increases, effectiveness weakens.
Therefore, runoff from adjacent areas should be limited.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Reinforced turf should not be used to treat hotspots that generate higher
concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are found in typical
stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

Supp. 1 5.52
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

¾ Structure: Most reinforced turf has a lower load bearing capacity than conventional
pavements. Therefore, applications should be limited to locations that do not receive heavy
vehicle traffic and where sub soils are not compacted.

¾ Operation: Reinforced turf is susceptible to owner neglect. Individual owners need to be

educated to ensure that proper maintenance and winter operation activities will allow the
system to function properly.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing reinforced turf:

¾ Conveyance: Runoff shall enter, flow through, and exit reinforced turf in a safe and non-
erosive manner. Reinforced turf should be designed off-line whenever possible.

The slope of reinforced turf shall be at least 1% but no greater than 5%. Reinforced turf
applications may be placed in sloped areas by terracing levels along existing contours.

¾ Treatment: All reinforced turf systems shall meet the following conditions:

o A subbase layer of clean, open graded stone or sand with a porosity (n) of 30% (1.5”
to 2” stone is preferred) shall be used below the turf surface. The subbase may be 6”
to 12” thick.

¾ Soils:

o Reinforced turf shall not be placed on areas of compacted fill.

o Reinforced turf should be installed in HSG A. B, or C for maximum effiectiveness.

¾ Setbacks:

o Reinforced turf should be sized and located to meet minimum local requirements for
underground utility clearance.

¾ Structure: Reinforced turf shall be capable of bearing the anticipated vehicle and traffic
loads. Systems conforming to the specifications found in Appendix B.4 should be
structurally stable for typical (e.g., light duty) applications.

¾ Landscaping: Reinforced turf shall be identified on landscaping plans. Trees and shrubs
should not be located adjacent to reinforced turf where damage by root penetration is a
concern.

5.53 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................................................Alternative Surfaces

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during construction of projects with reinforced turf:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Final grading for installation shall not take place until the
surrounding site is stabilized. If this cannot be accomplished, runoff from disturbed areas
shall be diverted around proposed locations.

¾ Soil Compaction: Sub soils shall not be compacted. Construction should be performed with
lightweight, wide tracked equipment to minimize compaction. Excavated materials should
be placed in a contained area.

¾ Filter Cloth: Filter cloth shall not be used between the subbase and sub soils.

¾ Subbase Installation: The subbase shall be placed in lifts and lightly rolled according to
the specifications (see Appendix B.4). Subbase aggregate should be clean, washed, and free
of fines.

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During excavation to sub grade.

o During placement of the subbase material.
o During placement of the surface material.
o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization.

Maintenance Criteria:

The following procedures should be considered essential for maintaining reinforced turf:

¾ Reinforced turf should be used only where regular maintenance can be performed.
Maintenance agreements should clearly specify how to conduct routine tasks to ensure long-
term performance of these systems.

¾ Drainage pipes, inlets, stone edge drains, and other structures within or draining to the
subbase should be cleaned out at regular intervals.

¾ Trucks and other heavy vehicles can damage the interlocking matrix, leading to premature
failure. These vehicles should be prevented from driving onto the turf.

¾ Reinforced turf should be mown regularly and clippings removed from the application area.

Supp. 1 5.54
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Section 5.4 Treatment Using Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

5.4.1 Introduction

Disconnecting impervious cover and treating urban runoff closer to its source are the next steps
in the design process for implementing ESD. Using nonstructural techniques (e.g., disconnection
of rooftop runoff, sheetflow to conservation areas) and micro-scale practices (e.g., rain gardens,
bio-swales) throughout a development is an effective way to accomplish this goal. Nonstructural
practices may be used to disconnect impervious cover and direct runoff over vegetated areas to
promote overland filtering and infiltration. Micro-scale practices are useful for capturing and
treating runoff near the source. Whether runoff is directed over permeable areas or captured in
small water quality treatment practices, there are reductions in both volume and pollutants
delivered to receiving streams. Accordingly, these practices may be used to address the ESD
sizing criteria when designed and implemented properly.

Nonstructural and micro-scale practices are an integral part of the ESD stormwater management
plans. Therefore, the use of these practices shall be documented at the concept, site
development, and final design stages and verified with “as-built” certification. If practices are
not implemented as planned, then volumes used to design structural practices shall be increased
appropriately to meet the ESD sizing criteria.

5.55 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

5.4.2 Nonstructural Practices

Nonstructural practices combine relatively simple features, grading, and landscaping to divert
runoff into vegetated areas and away from conventional storm drain systems. Runoff flows over
these areas, filters through the vegetation, and soaks into the ground. Runoff should be conveyed
as sheetflow into and through these areas. As depth and velocity of flow increase, runoff
concentrates and the ability of vegetation to filter and detain runoff diminishes rapidly.
Consequently, requirements and conditions for nonstructural practices reflect the need to
maintain sheetflow conditions.

Nonstructural practices include:

¾ N-1. Disconnection of Rooftop Runoff

¾ N-2. Disconnection of Non-Rooftop Runoff
¾ N-3. Sheetflow to Conservation Areas

Supp. 1 5.56
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

N-1. Disconnection of Rooftop Runoff

Rooftop disconnection involves directing flow from downspouts onto vegetated areas where it
can soak into or filter over the ground. This disconnects the rooftop from the storm drain system
and reduces both runoff volume and pollutants delivered to receiving waters. To function well,
rooftop disconnection is dependent on several site conditions (e.g., flow path length, soils,
slopes).

Applications:

There are many opportunities for disconnecting rooftops in both new and redevelopment designs.
Runoff may be directed to undisturbed natural areas (e.g., vegetated buffers) or landscaped areas
(e.g., lawns, grass channels). Rooftop disconnection is possible in commercial, industrial, and
residential settings given the constraints listed below.

Performance:

The PE values shown in Table 5.6 may be applied to the ESD sizing criteria when the
contributing rooftop area is adequately disconnected. Rev requirements (see Chapter 2) are also
addressed when the PE from Table 5.6 meets or exceeds the soil specific recharge factor listed in
Section 2.2.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of rooftop disconnection to
capture and treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: A permeable, vegetated treatment area equal to the flow path length must be
available down gradient from the downspout to effectively disconnect rooftop runoff.
Additional treatment using micro-scale practices may be used to fully meet PE requirements.

¾ Topography: Runoff must be conveyed as sheetflow from the downspout and across open
areas to maintain proper disconnection. Level spreaders may be needed at the downspout to
dissipate flow. Additionally, disconnected downspouts should be located on gradual slopes
(≤ 5%) and directed away from buildings to both maintain sheetflow and prevent water
damage to basements and foundations. If slopes are too steep (> 5%), a series of terraces or
berms may be required to maintain sheetflow. These terraces may be readily constructed of
landscaping stones, timber, or earthen berms.

¾ Soils: Downspout disconnections work best in undisturbed, sandy soils that allow runoff to
infiltrate. Clayey soils or soils that have been compacted by construction equipment greatly
reduce the effectiveness of this practice and soil amendments may be needed.

5.57 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.4 Disconnection of Rooftop Runoff

Plan View

Profile

Supp. 1 5.58
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Drainage Area: The rooftop area to each downspout should be small enough to prevent
concentration of flow within the permeable treatment area. Disconnections may not be
feasible for large rooftops or those with a limited number of downspouts.

¾ Reconnections: Disconnections are ineffective if runoff flows onto impervious areas located
directly below the downspout. This practice may not be feasible if there are large areas of
imperviousness close to downspouts.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing rooftop disconnections:

¾ Conveyance: Runoff from disconnected downspouts shall drain in a safe and non-erosive
manner through vegetated areas to the property line or downstream BMP.

¾ Treatment: Disconnections shall meet the following conditions:

o A pervious area at least 15 feet long (12 feet for Eastern Shore projects) shall be
available down gradient of disconnected downspouts. The length of the
disconnection flow path may be increased up to 75 feet to address larger values of PE
as shown in Table 5.6.
o Disconnections shall be located on an average slope of 5% or less. Terraces, berms,
or similar grade controls may be used where average slopes exceed 5%.
o The drainage area to each disconnected downspout shall be 500 ft2 or less.
o Disconnected downspouts shall be at least 10 ft. from the nearest impervious surface
of similar or lower elevation to prevent reconnection.

Table 5.6. ESD Sizing Factors for Rooftop Disconnection

Disconnection Flow Path Length (ft.)
Western
15 30 45 60 75
Shore
Eastern
12 24 36 48 60
Shore
PE (in.) = 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

¾ Landscaping: Areas receiving disconnected rooftop runoff shall be identified and notations
related to grading and construction operations included on the landscaping plans.

Disconnections should be directed over HSG A, B, or C (e.g., sands, sandy loams, loams).
HSG D or soils that are compacted by construction equipment may need to be tilled and/or
amended to increase permeability. Groundcover should be provided after any soil
amendments are used. Turf grass is the most common groundcover in residential
applications. However, trees and shrubs as well as other herbaceous plants will enhance
infiltration and evapotranspiration of runoff.

5.59 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during the construction of projects with planned
rooftop disconnections:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Erosion and sediment control practices (e.g., sediment
traps) shall not be located in vegetated areas receiving disconnected runoff.

¾ Site Disturbance: Construction vehicles and equipment should avoid areas receiving
disconnected runoff to minimize disturbance and compaction. Should areas receiving
disconnected runoff become compacted, scarifying the surface or rototilling the soil to a
depth of four to six inches shall be performed to ensure permeability. Additionally,
amendments may be needed for tight, clayey soils.

Inspection:

A final inspection shall be conducted before use and occupancy approval to ensure that sizing
for treatment areas have been met and permanent stabilization has been established.

Maintenance Criteria:

Maintenance of areas receiving disconnected runoff is generally no different than that required
for other lawn or landscaped areas. The areas receiving runoff should be protected from future
compaction (e.g., by planting trees or shrubs along the perimeter). In commercial areas, foot
traffic should be discouraged as well.

Supp. 1 5.60
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

N-2. Disconnection of Non-Rooftop Runoff

Non-rooftop disconnection involves directing flow from impervious surfaces onto vegetated
areas where it can soak into or filter over the ground. This disconnects these surfaces from the
storm drain system, reducing both runoff volume and pollutants delivered to receiving waters.
Non-rooftop disconnection is commonly applied to smaller or narrower impervious areas like
driveways, open section roads, and small parking lots and is dependent on several site conditions
(e.g., permeable flow path length, soils, slopes, compaction) to function well.

Applications:

There are many opportunities for disconnecting impervious surfaces in both new and
redevelopment designs. Runoff may be directed as sheetflow to undisturbed natural areas (e.g.,
vegetated buffers) or landscaped areas (e.g., lawns, grass channels). Non-rooftop disconnection
is possible in commercial, industrial, and residential settings given the constraints listed below.

Performance:

The PE values shown in Table 5.7 below may be applied to the ESD sizing criteria when the
contributing developed area is adequately disconnected. Rev requirements (see Chapter 2) are
also met when the PE from Table 5.7 meets or exceeds the soil specific recharge factor listed in
Section 2.2.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of non-rooftop disconnection to
capture and treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: A permeable, vegetated treatment area equal to the minimum flow path length
needed for treatment must be available down gradient of the impervious cover to effectively
disconnect runoff. If the flow path length is insufficient, additional treatment may be
provided using micro-scale practices.

¾ Topography: Runoff must be conveyed as sheetflow onto and across open areas to maintain
proper disconnection. Additionally, disconnections should be located on gradual slopes (≤
5%) and directed away from buildings to both maintain sheetflow and prevent water damage
to basements and foundations. If slopes are too steep (> 5%), a series of terraces or berms
may be required to maintain sheetflow. These terraces may be readily constructed of
landscaping stones or timber.

¾ Soils: Non-rooftop disconnection works best in undisturbed, sandy soils that allow runoff to
infiltrate. Clayey soils or soils that have been compacted by construction greatly reduce the
effectiveness of this practice.

5.61 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Drainage Area: The impervious area to each discharge location should be small enough to
prevent flow concentration onto permeable treatment areas. Disconnections may not be
feasible for large blocks of impervious cover or areas with limited discharge points.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Disconnections should not be used to treat hotspots that generate higher
concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are found in typical
stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing non-rooftop disconnections:

¾ Conveyance: Runoff from disconnected areas shall drain in a safe and non-erosive manner
through vegetated areas to the property line or downstream BMP.

A 1 to 2 foot wide gravel (typ. No. 67 stone) transition strip should be provided from the
disconnected area to the vegetated area to assure that runoff will flow in a safe and non-
erosive manner.

¾ Treatment: Disconnections shall meet the following conditions:

o The flow path or “disconnection” through vegetated areas shall be at least 10 feet
and shall not exceed 75 feet. The flow path may be increased to address larger values
of PE to a maximum of 1 inch as shown in Table 5.7.
o The maximum contributing impervious flow path length shall be 75 feet, and the
maximum contributing pervious flow path shall be 150 feet.
o Disconnections shall be located on an average slope of 5% or less. Terraces, berms,
or similar grade controls may be used where average slopes exceed 5%.
o The drainage area to each disconnection shall be 1,000 ft2 or less.
o Disconnections shall be at least 10 ft. from the nearest impervious surface of similar
or lower elevation to prevent reconnection.

Table 5.7. ESD Sizing Factors for Non-Rooftop Disconnection

Ratio of Disconnection Length to Contributing Length
Impervious
0.2:1 0.4:1 0.6:1 0.8:1 1:1
Ratio
Pervious
0.1:1 0.2:1 0.3:1 0.4:1 0.5:1
Ratio
PE (in.) = 0.2 0.4 0.6 0.8 1.0

¾ Landscaping: Areas receiving disconnected runoff shall be identified and notations related
to grading and construction operations included on the landscaping plans.

Disconnections should be directed over HSG A, B, or C (e.g., sands, sandy loams, loams).
HSG D and soils that are compacted by construction equipment may need to be tilled and/or
amended to increase permeability. Groundcover vegetation should be provided after any soil

Supp. 1 5.62
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

amendments are used. Turf grass is the most common groundcover in residential
applications. Trees and shrubs as well as other herbaceous plants will enhance infiltration
and evapotranspiration of runoff.

Construction Criteria:

The following should be addressed during construction of projects with non-rooftop

disconnections:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Erosion and sediment control practices (e.g., sediment
traps) shall not be located in areas designated for non-rooftop disconnections.

¾ Site Disturbance: To minimize disturbance and compaction, construction vehicles and

equipment should avoid areas receiving disconnected runoff. Should areas receiving
disconnected runoff become compacted, scarifying the surface or rototilling the soil to a
depth of four to six inches shall be performed to ensure permeability. Additionally,
amendments may be needed for tight, clayey soils.

Inspection:

A final inspection shall be conducted before use and occupancy approval to ensure that adequate
treatment areas and permanent stabilization has been established.

Maintenance Criteria:

Maintenance of areas receiving disconnected runoff is generally no different than that required
for other lawn or landscaped areas. The areas receiving runoff should be protected from future
compaction (e.g., by planting trees or shrubs along the perimeter). In commercial areas, high
foot traffic should be discouraged as well.

5.63 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Fig. 5.5 Non-Rooftop Disconnection

Plan View

Profile

Supp. 1 5.64
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.6 Non-Rooftop Disconnection

Plan View

Isometric

5.65 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

N-3. Sheetflow to Conservation Areas

Stormwater runoff is effectively treated when flow from developed land is directed to adjacent
natural areas where it can soak into or filter over the ground. To function well, this practice is
dependent on several site conditions (e.g., buffer size, contributing flow path length, slopes,
compaction).

Applications:

Sheetflow to conservation areas can be used in most development situations provided that site
conditions allow implementation. This practice may be used wherever existing stream buffers
and other natural areas are protected, expanded, or created during project planning and
stormwater runoff may be directed into them, given the constraints listed below.

Performance:

The PE values shown in Table 5.8 may be applied to the ESD sizing criteria when runoff from
developed areas is directed into a conservation area meeting the criteria below. Rev requirements
(see Chapter 2) are also met for the contributing drainage area.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of sheetflow to conservation
areas to treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: Conservation areas need to be wide enough to effectively treat runoff and protect
natural resources. Flow path lengths from impervious and pervious areas should be
minimized to prevent concentration and erosive conditions.

¾ Topography: Runoff should enter conservation areas as sheetflow to enhance performance

and prevent erosion. If slopes are too steep to maintain sheetflow (> 5%), then level-
spreading devices will be needed to redistribute flow prior to entering designated buffers.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Conservation areas should not be used to treat hotspots that generate
higher concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are found in typical
stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

¾ Easements: Public maintenance access and formal, legal protection are essential for long-
term viability of conservation areas. Acceptable conservation easements, vegetation
management plans, or other enforceable instruments are required to prevent encroachment by
surrounding landowners minimize invasive or noxious plant growth, and protect conservation
areas.

Supp. 1 5.66
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing sheetflow to conservation areas:

¾ Conveyance: Runoff from contributing areas shall sheetflow into conservation areas.
Either the average contributing overland slope should be 5% or less or a level-spreading
device must be used. A boundary spreader, gravel diaphragm, or infiltration berm should be
located along the upstream perimeter of the conservation area to diffuse flows from larger
storms.

¾ Treatment: Designs using sheetflow to conservation areas shall meet the following
conditions:

o Conservation areas shall be 20,000 square feet or larger to be accepted for ESD
purposes.
o The minimum effective width for conservation areas shall be 50 feet. Conservation
area widths may be increased to address larger values of PE as shown in Table 5.8.
o The maximum PE applied to conservation areas shall be 1.0 inch.
o Conservation areas may include existing natural resources, created or restored
resources, or a combination of both.

Table 5.8. Sheetflow to Conservation Area Sizing Factors

Min. Width (ft) = 50 75 100
PE (in.) = 0.6 0.8 1.0

Example: An existing wooded area (60 ft. wide by 250 ft. long) is placed in a
conservation easement and identified as a possible area for treating stormwater
runoff. While the effective width (60 ft.) is sufficient to treat the area, 15,000 square
feet is less than the 20,000 square foot minimum.

To meet the minimum area requirement, the conservation area will then be expanded
an additional 20 feet in width through reforestation. This increases the conservation
area to 20,000 square feet. Expanding the width by 20 feet through reforestation also
increases the effective width to 80 feet. Therefore, a PE = 0.8 may be applied to the
contributing drainage area.

¾ Landscaping: Landscaping plans should clearly specify how vegetation within buffers will
be established and managed. These plans should include plants that are native or adapted to
Maryland and procedures for preventing noxious or invasive plants. Managed turf (e.g.,
playgrounds, regularly mown and maintained open areas) is not an acceptable form of
vegetation management.

5.67 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.7 Sheetflow to Conservation Areas

Profile

Plan View

Supp. 1 5.68
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Easements: Conservation areas shall be protected by an acceptable easement or other

enforceable instrument that ensures perpetual protection of the area. The easement must
clearly specify how the natural area vegetation shall be managed and boundaries will be
marked.

Construction Criteria:

The following should be addressed during construction of projects with sheetflow to

conservation areas:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Erosion and sediment control plans shall clearly indicate
where conservation areas are located and what measures will be used for protection during
construction. These areas shall be clearly marked in the field and not receive sediment-
laden runoff prior to project completion. Erosion and sediment control practices shall not be
located within buffers.

¾ Site Disturbance: Buffers shall not be disturbed (i.e., cleared or graded) during
construction except for temporary impacts associated with incidental utility construction or
mitigation and afforestation projects. Any temporary impacts shall be immediately repaired
and stabilized.

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During initial grading operations to ensure that buffers are clearly marked in the
field.
o Before use and occupancy approval to verify area measurements andensure that
permanent stabilization has been established.

Maintenance Criteria:

Conservation areas shall remain unmanaged other than routine debris removal and repairing
areas of concentrated flow. Invasive and noxious plant removal and bi-annual mowing for
meadow areas may be needed. Signs should be maintained and supplemental plantings
performed as needed.

5.69 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

5.4.3 Micro-Scale Practices

Micro-scale practices are small water quality treatment devices used to capture and treat
stormwater runoff from discrete impervious areas (e.g., less than one acre). These practices
typically include natural systems, vegetation, and soils and may be interconnected to create a
more natural drainage system. In many cases, they may resemble the larger structural practices
(e.g., infiltration, filters, dry swales) described in Chapter 3. However, the design variants listed
below can be distributed throughout a project to provide stormwater management at the source
unlike their structural relatives that were typically used as “end-of-pipe” treatment for larger
drainage areas.

Micro-scale practice variants include:

¾ M-1. Rainwater Harvesting

¾ M-2. Submerged Gravel Wetlands
¾ M-3. Landscape Infiltration
¾ M-4. Infiltration Berms
¾ M-5. Dry Wells
¾ M-6. Micro-Bioretention
¾ M-7. Rain Gardens
¾ M-8. Swales
¾ M-9. Enhanced Filters

Performance Standards for Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Micro-scale practices used for new development shall promote runoff reduction and
water quality treatment through infiltration, filtration, evapotranspiration, rainwater
harvesting, or a combination of these techniques.

¾ Micro-scale filters used for new development shall be designed to promote recharge
(e.g., enhanced filter) and be planted as part of the landscaping plans.

Supp. 1 5.70
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-1. Rainwater Harvesting (Cisterns and Rain Barrels)

Rainwater harvesting practices intercept and store rainfall for future use. Stored water may be
used for outdoor landscaping irrigation, car washing, or non-potable water supply. The capture
and re-use of rainwater promotes conservation, as well as reduces runoff volumes and the
discharge of pollutants downstream.

Applications:

Rainwater harvesting can be applied on residential, commercial, municipal, or industrial sites.

For small-scale residential applications, rain barrels are typically used to provide storage of
rooftop runoff. These systems are generally designed for outdoor use. However, because water
demand varies seasonally, other treatment practices may be needed for dewatering during winter
months.

Larger storage tanks or cisterns are used in commercial or industrial applications. These systems
use the captured rainwater for non-potable water supply, providing a year-round source. The
complexity of the sizing, installation, and accessories of this type of application make it more
realistic for commercial operations. Separate plumbing, pressure tanks, pumps, and backflow
preventers are necessary for indoor applications.

Performance:

The pollutant removal capability of rainwater harvesting systems is directly proportional to the
amount of runoff captured, stored, and re-used. Therefore, PE for the contributing drainage area
is based on the volume captured in the rainwater harvesting design. In addition, Rev
requirements may be met only when stored water is used on landscaped areas.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of rainwater harvesting
techniques to capture and re-use stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: Lack of space and the presence of surrounding trees can limit the opportunities for
rain barrels and cisterns. Leaves and woody debris from overhead trees can clog the storage
tanks or attract birds whose droppings may contaminate the tank. Space limitations can be
overcome if storage is provided on the roof or underground. The proximity to building
foundations also needs to be considered for dewatering and overflow conditions.

¾ Topography: Locating storage tanks in low areas may increase the volume of rainwater
stored but will require pumping for distribution. To prevent erosion on steeply sloped
surfaces, a bermed or concave holding area down gradient can store water for landscape
irrigation.

5.71 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Drainage Area: The drainage area to each storage tank needs to consider year-round water
demands. The drainage area to each rain barrel needs to be small enough to prevent
concentrated flow during dewatering operations.

¾ Operation: Rain barrels and other storage tanks must be operated and maintained
throughout the year. This includes any necessary dewatering in between rain events so that
the required storage volume is available. Where freezing and ice formation are concerns,
rainwater harvesting systems should be located underground or indoors.

Rain barrels are subject to elimination and/or neglect by homeowners. Education is needed
to ensure that captured runoff will flow to pervious surfaces and overall system function is
sustained.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing rainwater harvesting systems:

¾ Conveyance: A stable discharge shall be provided to pervious areas for any necessary
dewatering between storm events. An overflow shall be provided to pass larger storm events.
Conveyance to rainwater harvesting storage tanks consists of gutters, downspouts, and pipes.
The overflow should be near the top of the storage unit and may consist of plastic hoses or
similar materials to direct runoff safely to a stable outfall to down gradient properties.

¾ Treatment: Rainwater harvesting systems shall meet the following conditions:

o Screens and filters shall be used to remove sediment, leaves, and other debris from
runoff for pretreatment and can be installed in the gutter or downspout prior to
storage.
o Rain barrels and cisterns shall be designed to capture at least 0.2 inches of rainfall
from the contributing rooftop area. A PE value based on the ESDv captured and
treated shall be applied to the contributing rooftop area.
o Where rainwater harvesting systems are connected to indoor plumbing, the Rev
requirement shall be addressed separately.
o The design shall plan for dewatering to vegetated areas.
o The design of large commercial and industrial storage systems shall be based on
water supply and demand calculations. Stormwater management calculations shall
include the discharge rate for distribution and demonstrate that captured rainwater
will be used prior to the next storm event.
o Large capacity systems shall provide dead storage below the outlet and an air gap at
the top of the tank. Gravity-fed systems should provide a minimum of six inches of
dead storage. For systems using a pump, the dead storage depth will be based on the
pump specifications.

¾ Distribution System: Most outdoor distribution is gravity fed or can be operated with a
pump. For underground tanks or cisterns, a pump, pressure tank, and backflow preventer
will be needed.

Supp. 1 5.72
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Dewatering: During the non-growing season, irrigation systems are typically turned off and
may need to be dewatered.

¾ Observation Wells: An observation well consisting of an anchored, perforated pipe (4”

min.) shall be provided on all below-ground installations. The top of the observation well
shall be at least six inches above grade.

¾ Safety: Above ground home storage tanks shall have secured openings small enough to
prevent child entry. For underground systems, manholes shall be secured to prevent
unauthorized access.

¾ Operation: Rainwater storage designs need to consider the potential for freezing. These
systems may need to be located indoors or underground below the frost line if freezing
conditions are expected.

¾ Mosquitoes: Screens should be provided to prevent mosquitoes and other insects from
entering the tanks.

¾ Setbacks: Overflow devices shall be designed to avoid ponding or soil saturation within 10
ft. of building foundations.

Construction Criteria:

The following should be addressed during construction of projects with rainwater harvesting
systems:

¾ Site Disturbance: Underground storage tanks shall be placed on or in native soils. If

placement on fill material is necessary, a geotechnical analysis may be required by the
approving authority.

¾ Storage Tanks:

o Storage tanks shall be designed to be watertight and all materials should be sealed
with a water safe, non-toxic substance.
o Storage tanks shall be protected from direct sunlight and shall be opaque to prevent
the growth of algae.
o The top of underground tanks shall be beneath the frost line.
o Cisterns may be ordered from a manufacturer or constructed on-site. Typical
materials used to construct cisterns are fiberglass, wood, metal, or reinforced
concrete.
o Rain barrels can be purchased or custom made from large, plastic (e.g., 55-gallon)
drums.

5.73 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.8 Rain Barrels

Supp. 1 5.74
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.9 Cistern – Plan View

5.75 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Pressurization: Depending on the use of stored water, pressurization may be required. To

add pressure, a pump or pressure tank can be used.

Inspection:

Prior to operation, certification shall be required that the constructed system meets the
conditions specified on the approved plans. Additionally, certification regarding the water
tightness of the underground storage tank shall be required after its installation.

Maintenance Criteria:

The following items should be addressed to ensure proper maintenance and long-term
performance of rainwater harvesting systems:

¾ Privately owned practices shall have a maintenance plan and shall be protected by easement,
deed restriction, ordinance, or other legal measures preventing its neglect, adverse
alteration, and removal.

¾ Access shall be provided for cleaning, inspection, and maintenance in all cisterns. A drain
plug shall also be provided to allow the system to be completely emptied if needed.

¾ Leaf screens, gutters, and downspouts should be cleaned to prevent clogging. Built-up debris
can also foster bacterial growth in gutters and downspouts.

¾ Storage tank lids and mosquito screens should be inspected and cleaned.

¾ Damaged components should be replaced as needed.

¾ To avoid freezing of components, above ground systems should be disconnected, drained,

and cleaned at the start of the Winter season.

¾ Underground system connections should be checked for frozen lines and ice blockages
during Winter.

¾ Indoor systems may require more specific maintenance.

Supp. 1 5.76
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-2. Submerged Gravel Wetlands

A submerged gravel wetland is a small-scale filter using wetland plants in a rock media to
provide water quality treatment. Runoff drains into the lowest elevation of the wetland, is
distributed throughout the system, and discharges at the surface. Pollutant removal is achieved
in a submerged gravel wetland through biological uptake from algae and bacteria growing within
the filter media. Wetland plants provide additional nutrient uptake and physical and chemical
treatment processes allow filtering and absorption of organic matter.

Applications:

A submerged gravel wetland can be located in limited spaces, typically set aside for site
landscaping such as traffic islands or roadway medians. These systems are best suited for
Maryland’s Eastern Shore or areas where a high water table or poorly drained soils are present.
This practice is not recommended for individual lots in a residential subdivision. Depending on
individual site soil characteristics, a larger drainage area may be required to maintain saturated
conditions within the wetland.

Performance:

When designed according to the guidance provided below, PE for the contributing drainage area
is based on the volume captured by submerged gravel wetlands.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of submerged gravel wetlands to
capture and treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: Additional space is needed for pretreatment measures to prevent sediment or debris
from entering and clogging the gravel bed.

¾ Topography: While surrounding local slopes should be relatively flat (<2%), there needs to
be sufficient elevation drop to maintain positive drainage to and through the filter media.

¾ Soils: The HSG should be C or D, or a high groundwater table, hard pan, or other confining
layer should be present to maintain submerged flow conditions.

¾ Drainage Area: The drainage area should be large enough (e.g., one acre) to maintain
submerged flow conditions.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Submerged gravel wetlands without a liner should not be used to treat
hotspots that generate higher concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than
are found in typical stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

5.77 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Wetland Vegetation Establishment: Use of native wetland plant stock obtained from a
local aquatic plant nursery is recommended for establishing vegetation. Design variations
may use wetland mulch or topsoil on top of the gravel, which may allow for successful seed
germination. However, use of the rock media for establishing wetland conditions requires
specific planting stock. Frequent inspection and maintenance will be necessary until wetland
plantings are well established.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing submerged gravel wetlands:

¾ Conveyance: Pretreated stormwater enters via piped or overland flow and discharges into
the gravel-filled chamber. A perforated pipe (4 to 6-inch preferred) at the base of the gravel
layer allows for flow-through conditions and maintains a constant water surface elevation.
Discharges that exceed the ESDv exit to a stable outfall at non-erosive velocities. These
systems should be located off-line.

¾ Treatment: Submerged gravel wetlands shall meet the following conditions:

o Pretreatment shall be provided for 10% of the total ESDv. An above ground forebay
area or below ground pretreatment chamber may be used.
o Storage for 75% of ESDv for the entire drainage area contributing to the wetland
shall be provided. A PE value based on the ESDv captured and treated shall be
applied to the contributing drainage area. Temporary ponding depth shall not be
greater than the tolerance levels of the wetland vegetation. Temporary storage of
ESDv may be provided above the gravel bed.
o Storage calculations shall account for the porosity of the gravel media.
o The gravel substrate shall be no deeper than four feet.
o Surface area requirements for stormwater wetlands in Chapter 3 do not apply to this
practice because pollutant removal primarily takes place within the rock media.

¾ Flow Splitter: A flow splitter should be provided to divert the ESDv to the submerged
gravel wetland (see Details No. 5 and No. 6, Appendix D.8).

¾ Treatment Cells: Multiple treatment cells are optional and may be separated by earth
berms.

¾ Observation Wells: An observation well consisting of an anchored, six-inch diameter

perforated pipe shall be required. The top of the observation well shall be at least six inches
above grade.

¾ Landscaping: A minimum of three different types of wetland species shall be provided.

Replacement plantings may be necessary.

Supp. 1 5.78
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.10 Submerged Gravel Wetland

Section

Section

Plan View

5.79 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during the construction of projects with submerged
gravel wetlands:

¾ Site Disturbance: All on-site disturbed areas should be stabilized prior to allowing runoff to
enter the newly constructed wetland.

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: The proposed location of a submerged gravel wetland
shall be protected during construction. Surface runoff shall be diverted away from the
practice during grading operations. Flow splitters and other conveyance infrastructure shall
be blocked.

Wetland construction shall be performed with lightweight, wide-tracked equipment to

minimize disturbance and compaction. Excavated materials shall be placed in a contained
area. Any pumping operations shall discharge filtered water to a stable outlet.

¾ Gravel Media: The aggregate shall be composed of an 18 to 48 inch layer of clean washed,
uniformly graded material with a porosity of 40%. Rounded bank run gravel is
recommended (e.g., ASTM D448 4,5, or 6 stone or equal)..

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During excavation to subgrade.

o During placement of backfill of perforated inlet pipe and observation wells.
o During placement of geotextiles and all filter media.
o During construction of any appurtenant conveyance systems such as diversion
structures, inlets, outlets, and flow distribution structures.
o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization, and
before allowing runoff to enter the wetland.

Maintenance Criteria:

The following items should be addressed to ensure proper maintenance and long-term
performance of submerged gravel wetlands:

¾ Privately owned practices shall have a maintenance plan and shall be protected by easement,
deed restriction, ordinance, or other legal measures preventing its neglect, adverse
alteration, and removal.

¾ During the first year of operation, inspections should be conducted after every major storm
and poorly established areas revegetated.

¾ Sediment accumulation in the pretreatment areas should be removed as necessary.

Supp. 1 5.80
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Signs of uneven flow distribution within the wetland may mean that the gravel or underdrain
is clogged. The gravel and/or underdrain may need to be removed, cleaned, and replaced.

¾ A dense stand of wetland vegetation should be maintained through the life of the facility with
plantings replaced as needed.

¾ Inlets and outlets to each submerged gravel wetland cell should be free from debris to
prevent clogging.

¾ Erosion at inflow points should be repaired. Flow splitters should be functional to prevent
bypassing of the facility.

5.81 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-3. Landscape Infiltration

Landscape infiltration utilizes on-site vegetative planting areas to capture, store, and treat
stormwater runoff. Rainwater is stored initially, filters through the planting soil and gravel
media below, and then infiltrates into native soils. These practices can be integrated within the
overall site design by utilizing a variety of landscape features for storage and treatment of
stormwater runoff. Storage may be provided in constructed planters made of stone, brick,
concrete, or in natural areas excavated and backfilled with stone and topsoil.

Applications:

Landscape infiltration can be best implemented in residential and commercial land uses.
Residential areas with compact housing such as clustered homes and townhouses can utilize
small green spaces for landscape infiltration. Because space in these instances prevents
structural pretreatment, the drainage area to these practices should be limited to less than 10,000
ft2. Larger drainage areas may be allowed where soil testing is performed and pretreatment
forebays can be implemented. Successful application is dependent upon soil type and
groundwater elevation.

Performance:

The PE values determined by Equation 5.1 may be applied to the ESD sizing criteria when
landscape infiltration systems are designed according to the guidance provided below. Rev
requirements are also met when the PE from Equation 5.1 meets or exceeds the soil specific
recharge factor listed in Section 2.2.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of landscape infiltration to
capture and treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: Landscape infiltration should not be used in areas where operation may create a risk
for basement flooding, interfere with subsurface sewage disposal systems, or other
underground structures. The initial site planning process shall consider landscaping
opportunities where these practices may be implemented.

¾ Topography: Steep terrain affects the successful performance of landscape infiltration.

These practices should be constructed without a slope. If slopes entering these practices are
too steep, then level-spreading devices such as check dams, terraces, or berms may be needed
to maintain sheetflow.

¾ Soils: Permeable soils are critical to the successful application of landscape infiltration.
The HSG should be A or B. For HSG C or D, designers should consider using practices with
underdrains like micro-bioretention.

Supp. 1 5.82
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Drainage Area: Drainage areas less than 10,000 ft2 are most appropriate for landscape
infiltration. Larger drainage areas may require pretreatment and soils testing to verify the
infiltration rates.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Landscape infiltration should not be used to treat hotspots that generate
higher concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are found in typical
stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

¾ Infrastructure: Landscape designers should consider overhead electrical and

telecommunication lines when selecting plant materials.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing landscape infiltration:

¾ Conveyance: Stormwater runoff is collected in landscaped areas where water will sheetflow
across the facility, percolate through the planting media, and infiltrate into underlying soils.
A flow splitter should be used to divert runoff in excess of the ESDv away from the facility at
non-erosive velocities to a stable, downstream conveyance system. If bypassing the practice
is not feasible, an internal overflow devise such as an elevated yard inlet may be used.

¾ Treatment: Landscape infiltration shall meet the following design criteria:

o The drainage area to any individual practice shall be 10,000 ft2 or less.
o The surface area (At) of landscape infiltration practices shall be at least 2% of the
contributing drainage area. A PE value based on Equation 5.1 shall be applied to the
contributing drainage area.
Af
PE = 20 " × (Equation 5.1)
DA
o Landscape infiltration facilities located in HSG B (i.e., loams, silt loams) shall not
exceed 5 feet in depth. Facilities located in HSG A (i.e., sand, loamy sand, sandy
loam) shall not exceed 12 feet in depth.
o Landscape infiltration facilities shall be designed to fully dewater the entire ESDv
within 48 hours. Temporary storage of the ESDv may be provided above the facility.
o A 12 to 18-inch layer of planting soil shall be provided as a filtering media at the top
of the facility.
o A minimum 12-inch layer of gravel is required below the planting soil.
o A 12-inch layer of clean sand shall be provided at the bottom to allow for a bridging
medium between the existing soils and stone within the bed.
o The storage volume for the ESDv shall be determined for the entire system and
includes the temporary ponding area, the soil, and the sand and gravel layers in the
bottom of the facility. Storage calculations shall account for the porosity (n=0.40) of
the gravel and soil media.
o Pretreatment measures shall be implemented along the main stormwater runoff
collection system where feasible. These include installing gutter screens, a

5.83 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

removable filter screen on rooftop downspout pipes, a sand layer or pea gravel
diaphragm at the inflow, or a two to three-inch surface mulch layer.

¾ Soils: Landscape infiltration shall be installed in HSG A or B. The depth from the bottom of
the facility to the seasonal high water table, bedrock, hard pan, or other confining layer shall
be greater than or equal to four feet (two feet on the lower Eastern Shore).

¾ Flow Splitter: A flow splitter should be provided to divert excess runoff away from
landscape infiltration. An elevated yard inlet may also be used in the facility for this
purpose.

¾ Setbacks:

o Landscape infiltration shall be located down gradient of building structures and shall
be setback at least 10 feet from buildings, 50 feet from confined water supply wells,
100 feet from unconfined water supply wells, and 25 feet from septic systems.
o Landscape infiltration shall be sized and located to meet minimum local requirements
for clearance from underground utilities.

¾ Observation Wells: An observation well consisting of an anchored, perforated pipe (4” to

6” diameter) shall be provided. The top of the observation well shall be at least six inches
above grade.

¾ Landscaping: Landscaping plans shall be provided according to the guidance in Appendix

A. Plant tolerance to saturated and inundated conditions shall be considered as part of the
design. A dense and diverse planting plan will provide an aesthetically pleasing design,
which will enhance property value and community acceptance.

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during construction of projects with landscape
infiltration:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Final grading for landscape infiltration should not take
place until the surrounding site is stabilized. If this cannot be accomplished, runoff from
disturbed areas shall be diverted around the proposed location of the facility.

¾ Soil Compaction: Sub soils shall not be compacted. Excavation should be conducted in dry
conditions with equipment located outside of the practice to minimize bottom and sidewall
compaction. Cnstruction of the should be performed with lightweight, wide-tracked
equipment to minimize disturbance and compaction. Excavated materials should be placed
in a contained area.

¾ Planter Boxes: Planter boxes may be made of stone, brick, or concrete.

Supp. 1 5.84
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.11 Landscape Infiltration

Section

Plan View

¾ Filter Cloth: Filter cloth shall not be installed on the bottom of any landscape infiltration
practice.

Landscape infiltration may be constructed as an excavated trench in natural ground and

backfilled with sand, gravel, and planting soil. These applications should use non-woven
filter cloth to line the sides of the facility to prevent clogging.

5.85 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Gravel and Filter Media: See Appendix B.4 for material specifications for the sand, gravel,
and planting soil media.

¾ Landscape Installation: The optimum planting time is during the autumn months. Spring
is also acceptable but may require watering.

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During excavation to subgrade.

o During placement of backfill and observation well.
o During placement of filter fabric, soil, and gravel media.
o During construction of appurtenant conveyance structures.
o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization.

Maintenance Criteria:

The following items should be addressed to ensure proper maintenance and long-term
performance of landscape infiltration:

¾ Privately owned practices shall have a maintenance plan and shall be protected by easement,
deed restriction, ordinance, or other legal measures preventing its neglect, adverse
alteration, and removal.

¾ During the first year of operation, inspection frequency should be after every major storm
and poorly established areas revegetated.

¾ Sediment accumulation on the surface of the facility should be removed and the top two to
three inches of surface layer replaced as needed.

¾ The top few inches of the planting soil should be removed and replaced when water ponds
for more than 48 hours or there is algal growth on the surface of the facility.

¾ If standing water persists after filter media has been maintained, the gravel, soil, and sand
may need to be cleaned and/or replaced.

¾ Occasional pruning and replacement of dead vegetation is necessary. If specific plants are
not surviving, more appropriate species should be used. Watering may be required during
prolonged dry periods.

Supp. 1 5.86
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-4. Infiltration Berms

An infiltration berm is a mound of earth composed of soil and stone that is placed along the
contour of a relatively gentle slope. This practice may be constructed by excavating upslope
material to create a depression and storage area above a berm or earth dike. Stormwater runoff
flowing downslope to the depressed area filters through the berm in order to maintain sheetflow.
Infiltration berms should be used in conjunction with practices that require sheetflow (e.g.,
sheetflow to buffers) or in a series on steeper slopes to prevent flow concentration.

Applications:

Infiltration berms may be used on gently sloping areas in residential, commercial, open space, or
wooded land use conditions. They must be installed along the contour in order to perform
effectively. The purpose of this practice is to augment natural stormwater drainage functions in
the landscape by promoting sheetflow and dissipating runoff velocities.

Performance:

Infiltration berms may be incorporated into the design with other practices such as disconnection
of rooftop and non-rooftop runoff, sheetflow to conservation areas, or grass swales to enhance
pollutant removal.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of infiltration berms to treat
stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: The presence of large trees may limit the use of infiltration berms along a hillside.
Berms may be threaded carefully along the contour of wooded slopes in order to avoid
disturbing existing vegetation.

¾ Topography: Infiltration berms should not be installed on slopes greater than 10% to
prevent erosion at the upstream toe of the berm.

¾ Soils: Infiltration berms should not be installed on slopes where soils have low shear
strength (or identified as “slough prone” or “landslide prone”).

¾ Drainage Area: The drainage area should be small enough to prevent flow concentration
upslope of the berm.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: When infiltration berms are designed in conjunction with other infiltration
practices, they should not be used to treat hotspots that generate higher concentrations of
hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than found in typical stormwater runoff and may
contaminate groundwater.

5.87 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Storage Capacity: Infiltration berms have relatively limited capacity to meet ESDv
requirements as a stand-alone practice. They may provide storage for pretreatment, address
Rev, or be incorporated within the design of other practices.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing infiltration berms:

¾ Conveyance: Stormwater discharges greater than the 2-year, 24 hour design storm or other
storm specified by the approval authority shall flow over the berm at non-erosive velocities.
Stormwater runoff from impervious areas is intercepted by infiltration berms that are placed
on the contour to prevent erosive, concentrated runoff patterns. Runoff flows to a depressed
area immediately above the berm where velocities are reduced, stormwater flows through the
berm, and sheetflows downslope.

¾ Treatment: Infiltration berms shall meet the following conditions:

o Berms shall be installed along the contour at a constant elevation and be level.
o When used in a series along a slope, the elevation at the downstream toe of each
berm shall be the same elevation as the crest of the next berm downslope.
o The berm shall be asymmetric in shape. The crest should be two feet wide.
o The berm shall be graded so that a concave shape is provided at the up gradient toe.
o The design shall consider soils suitable to resist slope failure and slumping. Side
slopes should be very shallow and a ratio of 3:1 is recommended for mowed berms.
o A berm will consist of a six-inch layer of compacted topsoil with a gravel or
aggregate interior.
o The storage volume created behind and up to the crest of the berm may be used to
address pretreatment, or Rev, or contribute to ESDv requirements.

¾ Soils: Subsurface soils shall be uncompacted and may need to be scarified in order to
encourage infiltration.

¾ Plant Materials: Berms should be planted with native meadow vegetation and shrubs. Turf
grass may be used on berms that are to be mown.

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during construction of projects with infiltration berms:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Final grading for infiltration berms should not take place
until the surrounding site is stabilized. If this cannot be accomplished, runoff from disturbed
areas shall be diverted around proposed locations.

¾ Soil Compaction: Soils within storage areas shall not be compacted.

Supp. 1 5.88
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.12 Infiltration Berms

Section

Plan View

Soil Compaction: Excavation should be conducted in dry conditions with equipment located
outside of the practice to minimize bottom and sidewall compaction. Construction shall be
performed with lightweight, wide-tracked equipment to minimize disturbance and compaction.
Existing soils in the location of proposed berms should be scarified to maximize infiltration.

¾ Gravel and Soil Media: See Appendix B.4.B for material specification for the gravel and
planting soil media.

¾ Landscape Installation: The optimum planting time is during the Fall. Spring is also
acceptable but may require watering.

5.89 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Implementation with Other Practices: When infiltration berms are incorporated into a
system using other practices (e.g., Disconnection of Non-Rooftop Runoff), the Construction
Criteria for that practice shall also be considered.

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During placement of gravel media, and soil.

o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization.

Maintenance Criteria:

The following items should be addressed to ensure proper maintenance and long-term
performance of infiltration berms:

¾ Berms should be inspected regularly to ensure that ponding water does not create nuisance
conditions.

¾ Signs of concentrated flow and other surface erosion should be repaired to promote
sheetflow.

¾ A dense mat of vegetation should be present at all times. Vegetation should be replaced as
needed.

¾ When infiltration berms are incorporated in a system using other practices, the Maintenance
Criteria for that practice shall also be considered.

Supp. 1 5.90
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-5. Dry Wells

A dry well is an excavated pit or structural chamber filled with gravel or stone that provides
temporary storage of stormwater runoff from rooftops. The storage area may be constructed as a
shallow trench or a deep well. Rooftop runoff is directed to these storage areas and infiltrates
into the surrounding soils prior to the next storm event. The pollutant removal capability of dry
wells is directly proportional to the amount of runoff that is stored and allowed to infiltrate.

Applications:

Dry wells can be used in both residential and commercial sites and are best suited for treating
runoff from small drainage areas such as a single rooftop or downspout. Dry wells are not
appropriate for treating runoff from large impervious areas such as a parking lot. Successful
application is dependent upon soil type and groundwater elevation.

Performance:

When designed according to the guidance provided below, dry wells will provide treatment for
the required ESDv and Rev.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of dry wells to capture and
infiltrate stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: Dry wells should not be used in areas where their operation may create a risk for
basement flooding, interfere with subsurface sewage disposal systems, or affect other
underground structures. There are limited opportunities for dry well implementation in high-
density neighborhoods.

¾ Topography: Steep terrain affects the successful performance of a dry well. Installation on
slopes greater than 20% should be avoided.

¾ Soils: Permeable soils are critical to the successful application of dry wells. The HSG
should be A or B. For HSG C or D or compacted soils, designers should consider using
practices with underdrains like micro-bioretention.

¾ Drainage Area: Small drainage areas (e.g., 500 ft2) are most appropriate for dry well
applications. Larger non-residential areas may be treated provided the dry well is sized
according to the requirements for infiltration practices found in Section 3.3.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Dry wells should not be used to treat hotspots that generate higher
concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are found in typical
stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

5.91 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Operation: Dry wells are subject to neglect by homeowners. Education is needed to ensure
that proper maintenance will allow the system to continue to function properly.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing dry wells:

¾ Conveyance: Discharge from the overflow shall be directed to an above ground splash pad
and conveyed in a non-erosive manner to a stable outfall. Rooftop runoff is collected
through gutters and downspouts and discharged directly into a dry well. The downspout
extends underground and across the entire length of a dry well. An overflow pipe is also
installed to pass excess runoff generated from larger storms.

¾ Treatment: Dry wells shall meet the following conditions:

o Pretreatment measures shall be installed to allow filtering of sediment, leaves, or

other debris. This may be done by providing gutter screens and a removable filter
screen installed within the downspout pipe or other locally-approved method. The
removable filter screen should be installed below the overflow outlet and easily
removed so that homeowners can clean the filter.
o A dry well shall be designed to capture and store the ESDv. A PE value based on the
ESDv captured and treated shall be applied to the contributing drainage area. The
storage area for the ESDv includes the sand and gravel layers in the bottom of the
facility. Storage calculations shall account for the porosity of the gravel and sand
media.
o The drainage area to each dry well shall not exceed 1,000 square feet. Drainage
areas should be small enough to allow infiltration into the ground within 48 hours
(e.g., 500 ft2 to each downspout). Infiltration trenches may be used to treat runoff
from larger drainage areas (see Section 3.3).
o Dry wells located in HSG B (i.e., loams, silt loams) shall not exceed 5 feet in depth.
Dry wells located in HSG A (i.e., sand, loamy sand, sandy loam) shall not exceed 12
feet in depth.
o The length of a dry well should be longer than the width to ensure proper water
distribution and maximize infiltration.
o A one-foot layer of clean sand shall be provided in the bottom of a dry well to allow
for bridging between the existing soils and trench gravel.

¾ Soils: Dry wells shall be installed in HSG A or B. The depth from the bottom of a dry well to
the seasonal high water table, bedrock, hard pan, or other confining layer shall be greater
than or equal to four feet (two feet on the lower Eastern Shore).

Supp. 1 5.92
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.13 Dry Well

Section

Gutter Drain Filter (Typical)

5.93 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Setbacks:

o Dry wells shall be located down gradient of building structures and shall be setback
at least 10 feet from buildings, 50 feet from confined water supply wells, 100 feet
from unconfined water supply wells, and 25 feet from septic systems.
o Dry wells shall be setback a minimum of 100 feet from fill slopes of 15% and 200 feet
from fill slopes of 25%.

¾ Observation Wells: An observation well consisting of an anchored, 4 to 6-inch diameter

perforated pipe shall be required. The top of the observation well shall be at least six inches
above grade.

¾ Underground Distribution Pipe: This pipe (4 to 6 inch diameter) will be perforated to fill
the trench along its entire length.

¾ Landscaping: A minimum one-foot of soil cover shall be provided from the top of the trench
to the ground surface elevation. The soil should be stabilized with a dense cover of
vegetation. In areas where frost heave is a concern, soil cover may need to be as much as
four feet. In these cases, a geotechnical engineer should be consulted.

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during construction of projects with dry wells:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Final grading for proposed dry wells should not take place
until the surrounding site is completely stabilized. If this cannot be accomplished, runoff
from disturbed areas shall be diverted.

¾ Soil Compaction: Excavation should be conducted in dry conditions with equipment located
outside of the practice to minimize bottom and sidewall compaction. Construction of a dry
well shall be performed with lightweight, wide-tracked equipment to minimize disturbance
and compaction. Excavated materials shall be placed in a contained area.

¾ Underground Chamber: A subsurface prefabricated chamber may be used.

¾ Dry Well Bottom: The bottom shall be as level as possible to minimize pooled water in
small areas that may reduce overall infiltration and longevity.

¾ Filter Cloth: Filter cloth shall not be installed on the bottom of the well. Non-woven filter
cloth should be used to line the top and sides of the dry well to prevent the pore space
between the stones from being blocked by the surrounding native material.

¾ Gravel Media: The aggregate shall be composed of an 18 to 48-inch layer of clean washed,
open graded material with 40% porosity (e.g., ASTM D448 4,5, or 6 stone or equal).

Supp. 1 5.94
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During excavation to subgrade.

o During placement of backfill and perforated inlet pipe and observation well.
o During placement of geotextiles and all filter media.
o During construction of the appurtenant conveyance.
o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization.

Maintenance Criteria:

The following items should be addressed to ensure proper maintenance and long-term
performance of dry wells:

¾ Privately owned practices shall have a maintenance plan and shall be protected by easement,
deed restriction, ordinance, or other legal measures preventing its neglect, adverse
alteration, and removal.

¾ Dry wells shall be inspected and cleaned annually. This includes pipes, gutters, downspouts,
and all filters.

¾ Ponding, standing water, or algal growth on the top of a dry well may indicate failure due to
sedimentation in the gravel media. If water ponds for more than 48 hours after a major storm
or more than six inches of sediment has accumulated, the gravel media should be excavated
and replaced.

5.95 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-6. Micro-Bioretention

Micro-bioretention practices capture and treat runoff from discrete impervious areas by passing it
through a filter bed mixture of sand, soil, and organic matter. Filtered stormwater is either
returned to the conveyance system or partially infiltrated into the soil. Micro-bioretention
practices are versatile and may be adapted for use anywhere there is landscaping.

Applications:

Micro-bioretention is a multi-functional practice that can be easily adapted for new and
redevelopment applications in commercial and industrial projects. Stormwater runoff is stored
temporarily and filtered in landscaped facilities shaped to take runoff from various sized
impervious areas. Micro-bioretention provides water quality treatment, aesthetic value, and can
be applied as concave parking lot islands, linear roadway or median filters, terraced slope
facilities, residential cul-de-sac islands, and ultra-urban planter boxes.

Performance:

The PE values determined by Equation 5.2 may be applied to the ESD sizing criteria when micro-
bioretention systems are designed according to the guidance provided below. Rev requirements
are also met when the PE from Equation 5.2 meets or exceeds the soil specific recharge factor
listed in Section 2.2.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of micro-bioretention to capture
and treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: The surface area of a typical micro-bioretention filter is dependent on the area of the
contributing imperviousness. The size and distribution of open areas within a project (e.g.,
parking lot islands, landscaped areas) must be considered early during a project’s planning
and design if these practices are considered.

¾ Topography: Slopes of contributing areas and filter beds should be gradual (< 5%). If
slopes are too steep, then level-spreading devices may be needed to redistribute flow prior to
filtering. If slopes within micro-bioretention practice are too steep, then a series of check
dams, terraces, or berms may be needed to maintain sheetflow internally.

There should also be an elevation difference between the inflow and outflow of a micro-
bioretention practice to allow flow through the filter. This difference is critical when
designing downstream conveyance systems (e.g., grass channels, storm drains).

¾ Soils: Soil conditions are a crucial determining factor for micro-bioretention because
specific applications will be affected. When located in sandier soils, these practices may be
used to promote recharge (see M-3, Landscape Infiltration). If clayey soils are encountered,

Supp. 1 5.96
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

an underdrain system may be needed to convey water downstream. Also, elevated

groundwater may limit filter bed thickness and excavated applications.

Subsurface water conditions (e.g., water table) will help determine the thickness of filter beds
used. The probability of practice failure increases if the filter bed intercepts groundwater.
Therefore, micro-bioretention practice inverts should be above local groundwater tables.

¾ Drainage Area: The drainage area to micro-bioretention practices should be limited. As the
impervious area draining to each practice exceeds ½ acre, practice effectiveness weakens and
larger systems designed according to Chapter 3 should be considered.

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Micro-bioretention practices that are designed to promote infiltration of

runoff into the ground should not be used to treat hotspots that generate higher concentrations
of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are typically found in stormwater runoff and
may contaminate groundwater.

¾ Infrastructure: The location of existing and proposed buildings and utilities (e.g., water
supply wells, sewer, storm drains, electricity) will influence the design and construction of
micro-bioretention. Landscape designers should also consider overhead electrical and
telecommunication lines when selecting trees to be planted.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing micro-bioretention practices:

¾ Conveyance: Micro-bioretention systems should be designed off-line whenever possible. A

flow splitter should be used to divert excess runoff away from the filter media to a stable,
downstream conveyance system. If bypassing a micro-bioretention practice is impractical,
an internal overflow device (e.g., elevated yard inlet) may be used.

Runoff shall enter, flow through, and exit micro-bioretention practices in a safe and non-
erosive manner. Inflow may be through depressed curbs with wheel stops, curb cuts, or
conveyed directly using downspouts, covered drains, or catch basins. Depending on site
layout and the size and shape of the impervious area being treated, overflow structures
should be located to maximize internal flow paths through the filter media. An underdrain
system may be necessary to discharge treated stormwater safely downstream. Underdrains
may be interconnected to other micro-scale practices as part of a treatment system or directly
to the storm drain.

5.97 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Treatment: Micro-bioretention practices shall meet the following conditions:

o The drainage area to any individual practice shall be 20,000 ft2 or less.
o Micro-bioretention practices shall capture and store at least 75% of the ESDv.
o The surface area (Af) of micro-bioretention practices shall be at least 2% of the
contributing drainage area. A PE value based on Equation 5.2 shall be applied to the
contributing drainage area. Temporary storage of the ESDv may be provided above
the facility with a surface ponding depth of 12 inches or less.

Af
PE = 15 " × (Equation 5.2)
DA
o Filter beds shall be between 24 and 48 inches deep.
o Filter beds shall not intercept groundwater. If designed as infiltration practices,
filter bed inverts shall be separated at least four feet vertically (two feet on the lower
Eastern shore) from the seasonal high water table.
o A surface mulch layer (maximum 2 to 3 inches thick) should be provided to enhance
plant survival and inhibit weed growth.
o The filtering media or planting soil, mulch, and underdrain systems shall conform to
the specifications found in Appendix B.4.

¾ Setbacks:

o Micro-bioretention practices should be located down gradient and setback at least 10

feet from structures. Micro-bioretention variants (e.g., planter boxes) that must be
located adjacent to structures should include an impermeable liner.
o Micro-bioretention practices shall be located at least 30 feet from water supply wells
and 25 feet from septic systems. If designed to infiltrate, then the practice shall be
located at least 50 feet from confined water supply wells and 100 feet from
unconfined water supply wells.
o Micro-bioretention practices shall be sized and located to meet minimum local
requirements for clearance from underground utilities.
o Any trees planted in micro-bioretention practices shall be located to avoid future
problems with overhead electrical and telecommunication lines.

¾ Landscaping: Landscaping plans shall be provided according to the guidance in Appendix

A. Vegetation is critical to the function and appearance of any micro-bioretention system.
Native and adapted plants are preferred, hardier, and usually require minimal nutrient or
pesticide application. Also, aesthetically pleasing landscape designs generally enhance
property value and community acceptance.

Supp. 1 5.98
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.14 Micro-Bioretention (Variation 1 - Parking Lot)

Plan View

Section

5.99 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.15 Micro-Bioretention (Variation 2 - Parking Lot)

Plan View

Section

Supp. 1 5.100
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.16 Micro-Bioretention (Variation 3)

Profile

Plan View

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during construction of projects with micro-
bioretention:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Micro-bioretention practices should not be constructed

until the contributing drainage area is stabilized. If this is impractical, runoff from disturbed

5.101 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

areas shall be diverted away and no sediment control practices shall be used near the
proposed location.

¾ Soil Compaction: Excavation should be conducted in dry conditions with equipment

located outside of the practice to minimize bottom and sidewall compaction. Only
lightweight, low ground-contact equipment should be used within micro-bioretention
practices and the bottom scarified before installing underdrains and filtering media.

¾ Underdrain Installation: Gravel for the underdrain system should be clean, washed, and
free of fines. Underdrain pipes should be checked to ensure that both the material and
perforations meet specifications. The upstream ends of the underdrain pipe should be capped
prior to installation.

¾ Filter Media Installation: Bioretention soils may be mixed on-site before placement.
However, soils should not be placed under saturated conditions. The filter media should be
placed and graded using excavators or backhoes operating adjacent to the practice and be
placed in horizontal layers (12 inches per lift maximum). Proper compaction of the media
will occur naturally. Spraying or sprinkling water on each lift until saturated may quicken
settling times.

¾ Landscape Installation: The optimum planting time is during the Fall. Spring planting is
also acceptable but may require watering.

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During excavation to subgrade and placement and backfill of underdrain systems.

o During placement of filter media.
o During construction of appurtenant conveyance.
o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization.

Maintenance Criteria:

The following items should be addressed to ensure proper maintenance and long-term
performance of micro-bioretention practices:

¾ Privately owned practices shall have a maintenance plan and shall be protected by easement,
deed restriction, ordinance, or other legal measures preventing its neglect, adverse
alteration, and removal.

¾ The top few inches of filter media should be removed and replaced when water ponds for
more than 48 hours. Silts and sediment should be removed from the surface of the filter bed
when accumulation exceeds one inch.

Supp. 1 5.102
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Where practices are used to treat areas with higher concentrations of heavy metals (e.g.,
parking lots, roads), mulch should be replaced annually. Otherwise, the top two to three
inches should be replaced as necessary.

¾ Occasional pruning and replacement of dead vegetation is necessary. If specific plants are
not surviving, more appropriate species should be used. Watering may be required during
prolonged dry periods.

5.103 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-7. Rain Gardens

A rain garden is a shallow, excavated landscape feature or a saucer-shaped depression that

temporarily holds runoff for a short period of time. Rain gardens typically consist of an
absorbent-planted soil bed, a mulch layer, and planting materials such as shrubs, grasses, and
flowers. An overflow conveyance system is included to pass larger storms. Captured runoff
from downspouts, roof drains, pipes, swales, or curb openings temporarily ponds and slowly
filters into the soil over 24 to 48 hours.

Applications:

Rain gardens can be primary or secondary practices on residential, commercial, industrial, or

institutional sites. This practice is typically used to treat runoff from small impervious areas like
rooftops, driveways, and sidewalks. Rain gardens can also be used in retrofitting and
redevelopment applications and in series where existing slopes require energy dissipation.

Performance:

The PE values determined by Equation 5.3 may be applied to the ESD sizing criteria when rain
gardens are designed according to the guidance provided below. Rev requirements are also met
when the PE from Equation 5.3 meets or exceeds the soil specific recharge factor listed in Section
2.2.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of rain gardens to capture and
treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Topography: Rain gardens require relatively flat slopes (< 5%) to accommodate runoff
filtering through the system. Some design modifications can address this constraint through
the use of infiltration berms, terracing, and timber or block retaining walls on moderate
slopes.

¾ Soils: Clayey soils or soils that have been compacted by construction equipment greatly
reduce the effectiveness of this practice. Loosening of compacted soils may improve
drainage capability.

¾ Drainage Area: The drainage area to a rain garden should be relatively small, typically less
than 2,000 square feet.

¾ Infrastructure: The location of existing and proposed buildings and utilities (e.g., water
supply wells, sewer, storm drains, electricity) will influence rain garden design and
construction. Landscape designers should also consider overhead electrical and
telecommunication lines when selecting trees to be planted.

Supp. 1 5.104
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Location:

o Lot-by-lot use of rain gardens is not recommended in residential subdivisions due to

removal by homeowners. If used on a lot-by-lot basis, educating the homeowners
will be needed to prevent removal.
o Rain garden excavation in areas with heavy tree cover may damage adjacent tree root
systems.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing rain gardens:

¾ Conveyance: Runoff shall enter, flow through, and exit rain gardens in a safe and non-
erosive manner. Energy dissipation shall be provided for downspout discharges using a
plunge area, rocks, splash blocks, stone dams, etc. Runoff shall enter a rain garden at the
surface through grass swales and/or a gravel bed. A minimum internal slope of one percent
should be maintained and a shallow berm surrounding the rain garden is recommended to
avoid short-circuiting. For sloped applications, a series of rain gardens can be used as
“scalloped” terraces to convey water non-erosively.

¾ Treatment: Rain gardens shall meet the following conditions:

o The drainage area to a rain garden serving a single lot in a residential subdivision
shall be 2,000 ft² or less. The maximum drainage area to a rain garden for all other
applications shall be 10,000 ft2. Micro-bioretention (M-6) or bioretention (F-6)
should be considered when these requirements are exceeded.
o The surface area (Af) of rain gardens shall be at least 2% of the contributing
drainage area. A PE value based on Equation 5.3 shall be applied to the contributing
drainage area. Temporary storage of the ESDv may be provided above the facility
with a surface ponding depth of 6 inches or less.

Af
PE = 10 " × (Equation 5.3)
DA
o Excavated rain gardens work best where HSG A and B are prevalent. In areas of
HSG C and D, at-grade applications or soil amendments should be considered.
o A minimum six to twelve-inch layer of planting soil shall be provided.
o A mulch layer two to three inches deep shall be applied to the planting soil to
maintain soil moisture and to prevent premature clogging.
o The planting soil and mulch shall conform to the specifications found in Appendix
B.4.

¾ Landscaping: Landscaping plans shall clearly specify how vegetation will be established
and managed. A rain garden should be located in full to partial sun, at least two feet above
the seasonal high water table and be 12 to 18 inches deep. Plants selected for use in a rain
garden should tolerate both saturated and dry conditions and be native or adapted to

5.105 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Maryland. Neatly trimmed shrubs, a crisp lawn edge, stone retaining walls, and other
devices can be used to keep a rain garden neat and visually appealing.

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during the construction of projects with rain gardens:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Rain gardens shall not be constructed until the
contributing drainage area is stabilized. During construction, runoff should be diverted and
the use of heavy equipment avoided to minimize compaction.

¾ Planting Soil: Planting soil should be mixed on-site prior to installation. If poor soils are
encountered beneath the rain garden, a four-inch layer of washed gravel (⅛ to ⅜ inch gravel
preferred) may be used below the planting soil mix.

¾ Landscape Installation: The optimum planting time is during the Fall. Spring planting is
also acceptable but may require watering.

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During excavation to subgrade and placement of planting soil.

o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization.

Maintenance Criteria: The following items should be addressed to ensure proper maintenance
and long-term performance of rain gardens:

¾ Privately owned practices shall have a maintenance plan and be protected by easement, deed
restriction, ordinance, or other legal measures preventing its neglect, adverse alteration, and
removal.

¾ Rain garden maintenance is generally no different than that required of other landscaped
areas.

¾ The top few inches of the planting soil should be removed and replaced when water ponds
for more than 48 hours. Silts and sediment should be removed from the surface of the bed as
needed.

¾ Where practices are used to treat areas with higher concentrations of heavy metals (e.g.,
parking lots, roads), mulch should be replaced annually. Otherwise, the top two to three
inches should be replaced as necessary.

¾ Occasional pruning and replacement of dead vegetation is necessary. If specific plants are
not surviving, more appropriate species should be used. Watering may be required during
prolonged dry periods.

Supp. 1 5.106
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.17 Rain Garden

Section

Plan View

Section

5.107 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-8. Swales

Swales are channels that provide conveyance, water quality treatment, and flow attenuation of
stormwater runoff. Swales provide pollutant removal through vegetative filtering,
sedimentation, biological uptake, and infiltration into the underlying soil media. Three design
variants covered in this section include grass swales, wet swales, and bio-swales.
Implementation of each is dependent upon site soils, topography, and drainage characteristics.

Applications:

Swales can be used for primary or secondary treatment on residential, commercial, industrial, or
institutional sites. Swales can also be used for retrofitting and redevelopment. The linear
structure allows use in place of curb and gutter along highways, residential roadways, and along
property boundaries. Wet swales are ideal for treating highway runoff in low-lying or flat terrain
with high groundwater. Bio-swales can be used in all soil types due to the use of an underdrain.
Grass swales are best suited along highway and roadway projects.

Performance:

The PE values determined by the equations 5.2 and 5.3 (reprinted below) may be applied to the
ESD sizing criteria when grass swales and bio-swales are designed according to the guidance
provided below. For wet swales, PE for the contributing drainage area is based on the volume
captured. Rev requirements are also met when the applicable PE meets or exceeds the soil
specific recharge factor listed in Section 2.2.

Swales should not be designed to meet Qp or Qf requirements except under extremely unusual
conditions. Swales may be used to convey runoff for these larger storm events however, the
ESDv should be treated separately. This can be accomplished with a flow splitter or diversion so
that the entire design storm is passed safely.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of swales to capture and treat
stormwater runoff:

¾ Topography: Steep slopes will increase velocity, erosion, and sediment deposition thus
shortening the design life of the swale.

¾ Soils: Design variants are dependent upon soil types. Grass swales work best in HSG A, B,
or C and wet swales are best suited for HSG C or D. Bio-swales typically include an
underdrain and may be installed in all soil types. Extreme temperatures and frozen ground
need to be considered when calculating design volumes.

¾ Drainage Area: The drainage area contributing to all design variants should be less than
one acre. Practices in Chapter 3 should be considered for larger drainage areas.

Supp. 1 5.108
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Swales should not be used to treat hotspots that generate higher
concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are found in typical
stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

¾ Location: The location of swales needs to be considered carefully. Wet swales are not
recommended for residential developments due to the potential nuisance or mosquito
breeding conditions. Swales along roadways can be damaged by off-street parking and are
susceptible to winter salt applications. Also, the choice of vegetation and landscaping can be
limited in adjacent areas.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing swales:

¾ Conveyance: Stormwater discharged into and through swales needs to be non-erosive.

Sheetflow should be promoted wherever possible using precise grading, level earthen weirs,
or pea gravel diaphragms. If concentrated flow is delivered from curb cuts or storm drain
pipes, some form of energy dissipation (e.g., plunge pools or rip-rap) is needed.

¾ Treatment: All swales shall meet the following criteria:

o Swales shall have a bottom width between two and eight feet.
o The channel slope shall be less than or equal to 4.0%.
o The maximum flow velocity for the ESDv shall be less than or equal to 1.0 fps.
o Swales shall be designed to safely convey the 10-year, 24-hour storm at a non-erosive
velocity with at least six inches of freeboard.
o Channel side slopes shall be 3:1 or flatter.
o A thick vegetative cover shall be provided for proper function.

The following criteria apply to each specific design variant:

Grass swales: Grass swales shall be used for linear applications (e.g., roadways) only, and
shall be as long as the treated surface. The surface area (Af) of the swale bottom shall be at
least 2% of the contributing drainage area, and a PE value based on Equation 5.3 shall be
applied to the contributing drainage area. The maximum flow depth for ESDv treatment
should be 4 inches, and the channel should have a roughness coefficient (Manning’s n) value
of 0.15. This can be accomplished by either maintaining vegetation height equal to the flow
depth or using energy dissipaters like check dams, infiltration berms, or riffle/pool
combinations.
Af
PE = 10 " × (Equation 5.3)
DA

Bio-swales: The surface area (Af) of the bio-swale bottom shall be at least 2% of the
contributing impervious area and a PE value based on Equation 5.2 shall be applied to the
contributing drainage area. Bio-swales shall be designed to temporarily store at least 75%

5.109 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

of the ESDv. A two to four-foot deep layer of filter media shall be provided in the swale
bottom. Underdrains shall be provided in HSG C or D and shall conform to the
specifications found in Appendix B.4. The use of underdrains is recommended for all
applications.
Af
PE = 15 " × (Equation 5.2)
DA
Wet swales: Wet swales shall be designed to store at least 75% of the ESDv. A PE value
equivalent to the volume captured and treated shall be applied to the contributing drainage
area. Wet swales should be installed in areas with a high groundwater table and check dams
or weirs may be used to enhance storage.

¾ Check Dams: Check dams or weirs may be used to enhance storage and channel roughness
or provide grade control in steeper applications. Where used, these structures should be
anchored into the swale wall and notched to allow passage of larger design storms with a
minimum six-inch freeboard. Plunge pools or other energy dissipation may be required
where the elevation difference between the tops of weirs to the downstream channel invert is
a concern.

¾ Landscaping: Landscaping plans shall specify proper grass or wetland plantings based on
the design variant chosen and anticipated hydrologic conditions along the channel (see
Appendix A). Native species are best for survival and enhancing bio-diversity and wildlife.

Construction Criteria:

Construction specifications for swales can be found in Appendix B.3. In addition, the following
items should be addressed during the construction of projects with swales:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Swales are often used for conveying runoff to sediment
trapping devices during site construction. Care should be taken to ensure proper construction
where stormwater management swales are used for this purpose. After the drainage area is
completely stabilized, accumulated sediment should be removed and the swale excavated to
the required dimensions. Any required infrastructure (e.g., check dams, underdrains) may
then be installed, the bottom and side slopes scarified, and a good stand of vegetation
established.

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During placement and backfill of underdrains and the installation of diaphragms,

forebays, check dams, or weirs.
o Upon completion of final grading and establishment of permanent stabilization.

Supp. 1 5.110
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.18 Bio-Swale

Section

Plan View

Maintenance Criteria:

The following items should be addressed to ensure proper maintenance and long-term
performance of swales:

¾ For grassed swales, regular mowing (at least bi-annually) is critical in order to reduce
competition from weeds and irrigation may be needed during dry weather to establish
vegetation. Sparsely vegetated areas need to be re-seeded to maintain dense coverage.

¾ If water does not drain within 48 hours, the bottom soil should be tilled and revegetated.

¾ Inspections should be performed once a year to assess slope integrity, vegetative health, soil
stability, compaction, erosion, ponding, and sedimentation. Periodic removal of sediment,
litter, or obstructions should be done as needed. Eroded side slopes and the swale bottom
should be repaired and stabilized where needed.

5.111 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.19 Wet Swale

Profile

Plan View

Section

Supp. 1 5.112
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

M-9. Enhanced Filters

An enhanced filter is a modification applied to specific practices (e.g., micro-bioretention) to

provide water quality treatment and groundwater recharge in a single facility. This design
variant uses a stone reservoir under a conventional filtering device to collect runoff, remove
nutrients, and allow infiltration into the surrounding soil.

Applications:

The structural stormwater filtering systems in Chapter 3 and the micro-filtering structures above
can be modified relatively easily for most development projects. Depending on soil conditions, a
stone reservoir can be sized appropriately to provide Rev for the drainage area to the system.
These practices are subject to the same constraints and design requirements as conventional and
micro-scale filters.

Performance:

When designed according to the guidance provided below, enhanced filters may be used to
address Rev for the contributing impervious area using the percent volume method. When
coupled with other properly designed structural or micro-scale practices, the combined system
will address the ESD sizing criteria.

Constraints:

The following constraints are critical when considering the use of enhanced filters to capture and
treat stormwater runoff:

¾ Space: The surface area of a typical enhanced filter is dependent on the design of the
practice above. Similarly, the size and distribution of open areas within a project (e.g.,
parking lot islands, landscaped areas) must be considered early during a project’s planning
and design if these practices are used.

Enhanced filters should not be used in areas where their operation may create a risk for
basement flooding, interfere with subsurface sewage disposal systems, or affect other
underground structures.

¾ Soils: Soil conditions are important when designing enhanced filters. Local soil type is a
primary factor for determining Rev and in sizing the stone reservoir.

Subsurface water conditions (e.g., water table) will help determine the stone reservoir
thickness used. The probability of practice failure increases if the reservoir intercepts
groundwater. Therefore, enhanced filter practice inverts should be above local groundwater
tables.

5.113 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Hotspot Runoff: Enhanced filters should not be used to treat hotspots that generate higher
concentrations of hydrocarbons, trace metals, or toxicants than are found in typical
stormwater runoff and may contaminate groundwater.

¾ Infrastructure: The location of existing and proposed buildings and utilities (e.g., water
supply wells, sewer, storm drains, electricity) will influence the design and construction of
enhanced filters.

Design Guidance:

The following conditions should be considered when designing enhanced filters:

¾ Conveyance: Runoff shall enter the stone reservoir in a safe and non-erosive manner.
Typically, runoff flows through the upper scale practice, into the stone reservoir and
infiltrates into the ground. As the reservoir fills, an underdrain system is used to discharge
treated stormwater safely downstream. Underdrains may be connected to other micro-scale
practices or open or closed storm drain systems.

All structural and micro-scale filters should be designed off-line whenever possible. A flow
splitter should be used to divert excess runoff away from the filter media to a stable,
downstream conveyance system. If bypassing these practices is impractical, internal
overflow devices (e.g., elevated yard inlet) may be used.

¾ Treatment: Enhanced filters shall meet the following conditions:

o Enhanced filters shall be coupled with properly designed filters to address both ESD
and Rev requirements.
o At a minimum, enhanced filter reservoirs shall be designed to store the Rev. The
stone reservoir volume is equal to the surface area multiplied by depth divided by the
porosity (n) of the stone [Volume = Surface Area (ft2) x Depth (ft) x 0.4].
o When using Variation A, the stone reservoir (#57 stone preferred) shall be at least 12
inches thick below the underdrain.
o A 12-inch layer of sand or pea gravel (⅛ to ⅜ inch stone) may be used to act as a
bridging layer between the stone reservoir and subsurface soils.
o The invert of the stone reservoir shall be separated at least four feet (two feet on the
lower Eastern Shore) from the seasonal high water table.

¾ Setbacks:

o Enhanced filters shall be located at least 25 feet from septic systems, 100 feet from
unconfined water supply wells, and 50 feet from confined water supply wells.

o Enhanced filters shall be sized and located to meet minimum local requirements for
clearance (both vertical and horizontal) from sewer and water lines. Designs may
need to include special protection if underground utilities cross through enhanced
filters.

Supp. 1 5.114
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

¾ Observation Wells: An observation well consisting of an anchored, 4 to 6-inch diameter

perforated pipe shall be provided. The top of the observation well shall be at least six inches
above grade.

Construction Criteria:

The following items should be addressed during the construction of projects with enhanced
filtering practices:

¾ Erosion and Sediment Control: Enhanced filters shall not be used as sediment control
practices (e.g., sediment traps). Enhanced filters should not be constructed until the
contributing drainage area is stabilized. Construction runoff shall be directed away after
initial rough grading.

¾ Soil Compaction: Existing soils in the location of enhanced filters should be scarified to
maximize infiltration. Construction shall be performed with lightweight, wide-tracked
equipment to minimize disturbance and compaction.

¾ Reservoir Installation: Stone for the reservoir system should be clean, washed, and free of
fines. Stone should be placed in horizontal layers (six inches per lift maximum) over the
entire area of the practice using excavators or backhoes operating adjacent to the practice.

Inspection:

¾ Regular inspections shall be made during the following stages of construction:

o During excavation to subgrade.

o During placement of gravel, and installation of underdrain systems and observation
wells.
o At all stages required for the ESD practice located above the enhanced filter.

Maintenance Criteria:

Enhanced filters require minimal maintenance in addition to that needed for the practice above to
ensure optimum performance. Generally, maintenance is the same as that used to keep the
primary practice in good condition. Additional measures include making sure there is no water
in the observation well. The presence of water 48 hours after a rain event indicates that the
enhanced filter may be clogged and need replacement.

5.115 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design............................Nonstructural and Micro-Scale Practices

Figure 5.20 Enhanced Filters

Section -Variation 1

Section – Variation 2

Supp. 1 5.116
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Redevelopment

Section 5.5 Redevelopment

5.5.1 Introduction

Redevelopment is defined as any construction, alteration, or improvement performed on sites

where the existing land use is commercial, industrial, institutional, or multifamily residential and
existing site impervious area exceeds 40%. The term “site” is defined as a single tract, lot,
parcel of land, or combination of tracts, lots, parcels of land that are in one ownership, or are
contiguous and in diverse ownership where development is to be performed as part of a unit,
subdivision or project. Therefore, when the total site impervious area under existing conditions
exceeds the 40% threshold, redevelopment requirements will apply. When calculating site
imperviousness, the local approving agency may allow lands protected by forest preservation,
conservation easements, or other mechanism to be subtracted from the total site area. This will
create incentive to preserve and protect natural resources in redevelopment projects.

5.5.2 Redevelopment Policy

As described above, the 40% site impervious area threshold will determine whether a project will
be regulated as new development or redevelopment. When redevelopment requirements apply,
all existing impervious areas located within a project’s limit of disturbance (LOD) are required
for management. Because redevelopment projects present a wide range of constraints and
limitations, the policy below allows for flexibility and an evaluation of options that can work in
conjunction with broader watershed goals and local initiatives.

1. Stormwater management shall be addressed for redevelopment according to the following

criteria:

a. Reduce existing impervious area within the LOD by at least 50%; or

b. Implement ESD practices to the MEP to provide water quality treatment for at
least 50% of existing impervious area within the LOD; or
c. Use a combination of impervious area reduction and ESD implementation for at
least 50% of existing impervious areas.

2. Alternative stormwater management measures may be used to meet the requirements

above provided that the developer satisfactorily demonstrates to the approving authority
that impervious area reduction and ESD have been implemented to the MEP. Alternative
stormwater management measures include but are not limited to:

a. An on-site structural BMP; or

b. An off-site structural BMP to provide water quality treatment for an area equal to
or greater than 50% of existing impervious areas; or
c. A combination of impervious area reduction, ESD implementation, and on-site or
off-site structural BMP for an area equal to or greater than 50% of existing
impervious area within the LOD.

5.117 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Redevelopment

3. An approving agency may develop separate programmatic policies for providing water
quality treatment for redevelopment projects when the above requirements cannot be met.
These policies shall be reviewed and approved by MDE and may include but are not
limited to:

a. Retrofitting existing structural BMPs;

b. Stream restoration;
c. Trading policies that involve other pollution control programs; or
d. Watershed management plans.

4. Stormwater management shall be addressed according to new development requirements

for any net increase in impervious area.

5.5.3 Management Considerations

Stormwater management requirements for redevelopment will apply to existing impervious areas
within the project LOD. Impervious area is defined as any surface that does not allow
stormwater to infiltrate into the ground. As a matter of policy, if gravel is compacted to the point
where it will no longer infiltrate, then it is impervious. Any gravel driveway or parking area that
is regularly used is likely to become impervious over time. However, a gravel road that is
infrequently used may be considered pervious. These determinations should be done on a case-
by-case basis.

Alternative surfaces may be used to meet redevelopment requirements. However, when

designing to meet runoff reduction requirements the appropriate curve number should be used
according to the design specifications in this Chapter. These practices however, are not
considered permeable surfaces, and may be regulated differently by other State and local
programs.

Redevelopment activities may occur on a site where a BMP is providing treatment for existing
impervious areas. These BMPs shall be inspected and their performance verified. The
requirements described in 5.5.2 apply to existing impervious areas that are not treated by BMPs
meeting current design standards. Existing BMPs may be retrofitted to current standards and
treat additional impervious areas to meet redevelopment requirements.

5.5.4 Design Process for Redevelopment

All redevelopment projects shall be subject to the Design process for Redevelopment as outlined
in the step wise procedures in Figure 5.21.

Section 5.1 of this chapter describes the design process for all development in Maryland that
includes a comprehensive review and approval of concept, site development, and final plans by
the local review agencies. These procedures will also apply to redevelopment projects and the
guidance provided in Section 5.1 of this chapter should be referenced for more specific detail at
each step and for a check list of items required for interim reviews. The process described below
outlines the steps in Figure 5.21 and will highlight considerations specific to the design of a

Supp. 1 5.118
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Redevelopment

redevelopment project. Approving agencies shall use the process outlined in Figure 5.21 as an
enforceable mechanism during review of the plan. Documentation that all steps were followed
during project development and specific rationale to support the proposed design shall be
required.

Step 1. Concept Phase: Develop a site map and assess existing natural resources as described
in Section 5.1.3.1. Existing buildings, impervious areas, utilities, storm drain systems,
neighboring properties, and all environmental and infrastructure constraints are identified.
Opportunities to reduce existing and proposed impervious cover by using site design techniques
and alternative surfaces are evaluated. The approximate locations of proposed impervious areas
are identified and opportunities for using ESD practices are evaluated. Additionally the
developer shall provide a narrative to the appropriate review agencies to support the design for
concept approval.

Step 2. Submit Concept Plan: Approval agencies provide review and comment back to the
developer. Concept plan approval must be given by the appropriate review agencies before
proceeding to the site development phase.

Step 3. Site Development Phase: Incorporate comments from review agencies and finalize
proposed site layout indicating how existing and proposed impervious areas are hydrologically
connected to landscaped features (e.g., islands, vegetated planters, and green spaces). Evaluate
opportunities for implementing ESD practices on open space and landscaped areas for storage,
filtration, infiltration, and water quality treatment of stormwater runoff. Develop an erosion and
sediment control plan and an overlay plan. Provide a narrative to the appropriate review
agencies to support the design for site development approval.

Step 4. Submit Site Development Plan: Approval agencies provide review and comment on
the site development plan back to the developer. All reasonable options for meeting stormwater
management requirements using ESD planning techniques and practices have been exhausted.
Approval agencies will provide comments and suggestions for final design. These may include
potential management strategies in the event that stormwater requirements cannot be met using
ESD. Site development plan approval must be given by the appropriate review agencies before
proceeding to final design.

Step 5A. Final Design Phase – A: After all reasonable ESD options have been exhausted,
evaluate alternative management strategies including on-site and off-site structural BMPs and
design according to Chapter 3. Review agencies should provide guidance on acceptable
stormwater treatment measures that may include retrofit projects, stream restoration, pollution
trading, watershed management plans, or other approved practices.

Step 5B. Final Design Phase – B: Finalize plans and address any remaining comments from
the appropriate review agencies.

Step 6. Submit Final Plans: Final stormwater management and erosion and sediment control
plans are submitted for approval. The designer needs to demonstrate that on-site ESD practices
have been implemented to the MEP.

5.119 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Redevelopment

Figure 5.21 Design Process for Redevelopment

Supp. 1 5.120
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Special Criteria

Section 5.6 Special Criteria for Sensitive Waters

5.6.1 Introduction

In Maryland, there are several different types of sensitive watersheds, each with unique features
or regulatory requirements. In some watersheds, enhanced pollutant removal may be needed to
protect drinking water supply or shellfish harvesting. In others, temperature increases caused by
new development may need to be mitigated to preserve coldwater habitat. In addition to these
special needs, there are numerous State programs (e.g., Critical Areas, Wetlands and Waterways,
Forest Conservation) that regulate activities within receiving waters. This section presents
additional criteria that should be considered when designing projects in sensitive watersheds.
This section also identifies requirements from other State regulatory programs that will influence
ESD implementation.

5.6.2 Water Quality Standards

The purpose of Maryland’s water quality standards is to protect, maintain, and improve surface
water quality. Two of the components of these standards are the Designated Uses and water
quality criteria to protect them. Each major stream segment in Maryland is assigned one of the
following Designated Uses:

• USE I & I-P: Water Contact Recreation and Protection of Nontidal Warmwater Aquatic Life
where P indicates public water supply or reservoir protection areas.
• USE II & II-P: Support of Estuarine and Marine Aquatic Life and Shellfish Harvesting
• USE III & III-P: Nontidal Cold Water
• USE IV & IV-P: Recreational Trout Waters

For each designated use, specific water quality criteria are designed to protect aquatic life and
human health. Typically, there are numeric criteria for toxics, dissolved oxygen, bacteria, and
temperature (e.g., 5 mg/l for dissolved oxygen). There are also narrative standards that are used
for other pollutants (e.g., oil, grease, odor) where specific values are impractical. For the
majority of Maryland’s waters, these criteria represent minimum standards for the support of
balanced indigenous populations and contact recreation commonly known as
"fishable/swimmable." For higher quality waters that exceed fishable/swimmable standards, the
existing water quality conditions must be maintained.

5.6.3 ESD Implementation and Watershed Use

Stormwater management decisions are influenced by the nature and quality of the receiving
waters. Therefore, Designated Uses should be identified during the initial site and resource
mapping steps. In most cases, the majority of water quality concerns in a given watershed can be
addressed through the use of ESD to the MEP. For example, maximizing the use of ESD is a
critical component of any approval for additional discharges to higher quality waters identified in
Maryland’s Tier II Antidegradation Policy. However, in Use III and IV, ESD implementation
alone may not be sufficient to maintain critical in-stream temperatures.

5.121 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Special Criteria

5.6.4 At-Source Techniques for Mitigating Thermal Impacts

Temperature increases caused by development impact the quality of coldwater streams.

Temperatures should not exceed 68º F in Use III and 75º F in Use IV streams or the ambient
water temperature, whichever is greater. The lethal temperatures for brook, and brown and
rainbow trout are 72º and 82º F, respectively. Therefore, one of the primary design objectives is
to prevent stream warming and maintain habitat quality for coldwater aquatic life. Implementing
ESD to the MEP, including using infiltration where appropriate, will help mitigate many of the
thermal impacts associated with development. However, additional techniques may be needed to
limit thermal impacts at the source.

In a study prepared for MDE in 1990 by the Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments,
it was determined that “[i]mperviousness together with local meteorological conditions had the
largest influence on urban stream temperatures” (Thermal Impacts Associated with Urbanism
and Stormwater Best Management Practices, John Galli, 1990). This study reported that as
watershed imperviousness increased, progressively smaller rainfall depths were needed to
produce large stream temperature fluctuations. Clearly, reducing imperviousness will help
reduce thermal impacts and techniques for accomplishing this are listed in Section 5.1.

The color of impervious surfaces also affects temperature increases. Darker surfaces like asphalt
pavement or shingles absorb solar radiation, elevating temperatures as this energy is transferred
as heat to surrounding areas, including stormwater runoff. Lighter colored materials like grey or
white concrete reflect solar radiation resulting in less elevated temperatures. A material’s ability
to reflect solar heat is measured as its Solar Reflectance Index or “SRI” and varies from 0 (a
black surface) to 100 (a white surface) and above. In thermally-sensitive watersheds, designers
should consider using materials with SRI values greater than 29 (see Table 5.9) for paving and
steep-sloped (≥2:12) roofing, and materials with SRI values greater than 78 for low-sloped
(≤2:12) roofing.

Table 5.9 Solar Reflectance Indices (SRI) for Typical Paving & Roofing Materials
Paving Materials: Condition SRI
Asphalt New 0
Weathered 6
Gray Concrete New 35
Weathered 29
White Concrete New 86
Weathered 45
Roofing Materials:
Gray Asphalt Shingles 22
Gray EPDM (Rubber) 21
Light Gravel on Built-Up Roof 37
White-Coated Gravel on a Built-Up Roof 79
White EPDM (Rubber) 84
White PVC 104
Source: LEED®-NC for New Construction Reference Guide Ver. 2.2 (USGBC, October 2005)

Supp. 1 5.122
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Special Criteria

Another option for mitigating thermal impacts at the source is to shade buildings and paved areas
from the sun. Trees, large shrubs, and non-invasive vines on trellises can be used to screen these
areas from the sun and cool the air through evapotranspiration. The full benefits of shading may
not be realized until the trees and shrubs mature. Depending on the age and type of plants used,
this may be several years. In the interim, any receiving waters may be degraded and resources
lost as a result of temperature increases. When using this technique, designers should strive to
provide shade within five years of project completion.

5.6.5 Additional Techniques for Mitigating Thermal Impacts

While thermal impacts are primarily caused by increases in impervious area, stormwater
management practices, including ESD techniques, may contribute to the problem. When
designing these techniques for use in coldwater areas, minimizing temperature increases is a
primary concern. The following techniques will help reduce thermal impacts associated with
ESD practices:

¾ Maximize the infiltration capacity of each practice. Increasing infiltration reduces the
amount of surface runoff and lowers the thermal energy flowing into coldwater streams.

¾ Design filtering practices (e.g., micro-bioretention) so that underdrains are at least four feet
below the surface. Soil temperatures at this depth are cooler and fluctuate little in response
to surface weather conditions. As runoff flows through, thermal energy is dissipated and
effluent temperatures are decreased.

If overflow and conveyance connection constraints limit underdrain depth, use the enhanced
filter option 2 (see M-9, Section 5.4.3). In this variant, the perforated underdrain is located at
the bottom of a stone reservoir and below the outlet pipe. As the water surface elevation
within the reservoir rises above the invert of the outlet pipe, cooler water is siphoned from
the bottom.

¾ Use shade-producing plants in landscaped practices. As discussed above, trees, shrubs, and
non-invasive vines on trellises can be used to screen impervious areas from the sun.

5.6.6 Other Resources

In addition to the various Designated Uses, designers must also consider sensitive conditions and
design requirements associated with other programs that regulate development activities related
to critical resources. Similar to water quality concerns, most of these may also be addressed
through the use of ESD to the MEP. However, there are additional concerns like buffer widths,
construction materials used, or wetland types that may need to be considered. This section
identifies some of these program-specific requirements.

5.123 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Special Criteria

Wetlands & Waterways

Wetlands are essential natural resources that provide fish and wildlife habitat, flood protection,
and water quality enhancement. These sensitive areas are impacted by even the smallest of
changes in hydrology or water quality. For this reason, stormwater management measures
should not be located within nontidal wetlands and their buffers, tidal wetlands, and 100-year
floodplains. This includes many of the ESD techniques listed in this Chapter. If stormwater
management facilities must be located within these areas, State and federal permits are required.

In addition to the above restrictions, runoff from new development and redevelopment must be
treated prior to discharging directly into jurisdictional wetlands or waters of the State. In most
cases, using ESD to MEP will provide adequate treatment and meet this requirement. Where
discharges are permitted, there are additional concerns. When implementing ESD within areas
of sensitive wetlands with unusual or unique plant communities like bogs, Delmarva bays, or
Wetlands of Special State Concern, designers should incorporate features and materials that
complement or mimic local natural conditions. For example, bogs are nutrient-deficient, acidic
environments where runoff pH is critical. In these areas, designers should specify the use of
native or locally available materials that are acidic (pH < 7) like granite or sandstone instead of
limestone or marble (pH > 7) for riprap in conveyance channels and energy dissipaters.
Likewise, landscaping should promote native plants that match both the conditions found within
ESD practices and local wetland communities.

In addition to using local or native materials and plants, designers should consider how runoff is
conveyed to wetlands. Storm drainage systems are usually designed to discharge directly into
wetlands and/or floodplains. This approach minimizes the ecological interaction that occurs
between wetland areas and adjacent buffers. Using more natural channel designs (e.g., coastal
plains outfalls, step/pool systems, bioswales) or promoting sheetflow to convey runoff from ESD
practices into wetlands connects and promotes interaction within these areas

Maryland’s Critical Areas

Maryland’s Critical Area Act recognizes that the land immediately surrounding the Chesapeake
and Atlantic Coastal Bays and their tributaries has the greatest potential to affect water quality
and wildlife habitat. Therefore, all land within 1,000 feet of tidal waters or adjacent tidal
wetlands is designated as the “Critical Area.” While the State Critical Area Commission
provides oversight and reviews some development projects, each appropriate County and
municipality enforces this law.

All development located within the Critical Area must address additional criteria. Some
provisions of these criteria, like those relating to the protection of habitat, are applied uniformly
throughout the Critical Area. Others provisions that may impact ESD implementation are related
to water quality and site imperviousness and are specific to land classifications discussed below.

Supp. 1 5.124
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Special Criteria

Within the Critical Area, land is designated as either Intensely Developed Area, Limited
Development Area, or Resource Conservation Area (IDA, LDA, & RCA, respectively) based on
uses that existed at the time the local programs were adopted. The IDAs are those areas of
concentrated development where there is little natural habitat. Any new development and
redevelopment projects within the IDA must include stormwater management practices to reduce
post-development phosphorus loads to at least 10% below pre-developed levels. Commonly
known as the 10% Rule, this requirement may be addressed using many of the ESD practices
described in this Chapter or by using structural practices found in Chapter 3. While
implementing ESD to the MEP should meet or exceed phosphorus reduction requirements in
most cases, applicants may be required to use the Critical Areas methodology to demonstrate
compliance with the 10% Rule as part of the plan approval process. Additional guidance for
addressing the 10% Rule within the IDA may be found in the Critical Area 10% Rule
Guidance Manual (MDNR, 2003).

LDAs are those regions where development density is low to moderate and wildlife habitat is not
dominated by agriculture, wetlands, forests, or other natural areas. Similarly, RCAs are
characterized by the dominance of agriculture or protected resources like forests or wetlands.
Within these areas, new development or redevelopment must address standard water quality
requirements, conserve natural areas, and incorporate corridors to connect wildlife and plant
habitat. To accomplish these goals, imperviousness, alternative surfaces, or “lot coverage” is
generally limited to 15% of the property or project area. There are also strict limits on clearing
of existing woodland or forests. All clearing of these areas requires at least a 1:1 replacement.

To protect habitat, a forested buffer is required on all new development in all three land
designations. Extending a minimum of 100 feet from the Mean High Water Line of tidal waters
or the landward edge of tidal wetlands and tributary streams, this buffer acts as a water quality
filter and protects important riparian habitat within the Critical Area. This distance may be
expanded to include adjacent sensitive areas like hydric or highly erodible soils or steep slopes.
If it is within a subdivision in the RCA, the minimum width of the buffer is 200 feet.
Disturbance associated with new development is generally prohibited within the buffer, and,
accordingly, stormwater practices (e.g., micro-scale practices, structural facilities) cannot be
located within it.

Forest Conservation Act

The Maryland Forest Conservation Act (FCA) was enacted in 1991 to minimize the loss of
forests during land development. As a result, identifying and protecting forests is an integral part
of the development process. The primary areas targeted for protection include forests adjacent to
streams or wetlands, located on steep slopes, or within or adjacent to forest blocks or wildlife
corridors. Any activity requiring a subdivision application, grading permit, or erosion and
sediment control plan approval on areas exceeding 40,000 square feet is subject to the FCA and a
Forest Conservation Plan may be required. The Forest Conservation Plan includes a map and
narrative that describes how existing forested and sensitive areas will be protected, if
afforestation will be required, and how any replanted trees will be protected. While
implementation is not directly affected by the FCA, trees may be planted within ESD practices
and associated buffers located adjacent to critical habitat, steeply sloping ground and highly

5.125 Supp.1
Chapter 5. Environmental Site Design.................................................................... Special Criteria

erodible soils, large forest tracts, 50-foot stream buffers, or similar areas. Additionally,
landscaping within ESD practices may be used to meet afforestation requirements when it
exceeds 2,500 square feet, is at least 35 feet wide and protected by an approved landscape
management plan.

Supp. 1 5.126
Glossary

Glossary
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary

G.1 Glossary

Portions of this glossary were adapted from the “1994 Maryland Standards and Specifications
for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control” produced by the Maryland Department of the
Environment, Water Management Administration.

ANTI-SEEP COLLAR - An impermeable diaphragm usually of sheet metal or concrete constructed

at intervals within the zone of saturation along the conduit of a principal spillway to increase the
seepage length along the conduit and thereby prevent piping or seepage.
ANTI-VORTEX DEVICE - A device designed and placed on the top of a riser or the entrance of a
pipe to prevent the formation of a vortex in the water at the entrance.
AQUATIC BENCH - A bench which is located around the inside perimeter of a permanent pool and
is normally vegetated with aquatic plants; the goal is to provide pollutant removal and enhance
safety in areas using stormwater pond BMP’s.
AQUIFER – A porous water bearing geologic formation generally restricted to materials capable of
yielding an appreciable supply of water
“AS-BUILT” - Drawing or certification of conditions as they were actually constructed.
BAFFLES - Guides, grids, grating or similar devices placed in a pond to deflect or regulate flow and
create a longer flow path.
BANKFULL FLOW - The condition where streamflow fills a stream channel to the top of the bank
and at a point where the water begins to overflow onto a floodplain.
BARREL - The closed conduit used to convey water under or through an embankment; part of the
principal spillway.
BASE FLOW - The stream discharge from groundwater.
BERM - A shelf that breaks the continuity of a slope; a linear embankment or dike.
BEST MANAGEMENT PRACTICE (BMP) - A structural or non-structural device designed to
temporarily store or treat stormwater runoff in order to mitigate flooding, reduce pollution and
provide other amenities.
BIORETENTION - A water quality practice that utilizes landscaping and soils to treat urban
stormwater runoff by collecting it in shallow depressions before filtering through a fabricated
planting soil media.
BUFFER – Zone of variable width located along both sides of a natural feature (e.g., stream or
forested area) and designed to provide a protective area along a corridor.
CHANNEL - A natural stream that conveys water; a ditch or channel excavated for the flow of
water.

G.1
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
CHANNEL PROTECTION VOLUME (CpV) - A design criteria which requires 24 hour detention of
the one year post-developed, 24 hour storm event for the control of stream channel erosion and is
calculated according to Appendix D.11.
CHANNEL STABILIZATION - Erosion prevention and stabilization of velocity distribution in a
channel using jetties, drops, revetments, structural linings, vegetation and other measures.
CHECK DAM - A small dam constructed in a gully or other small watercourse to decrease flow
velocity (by reducing the channel gradient), minimize scour, and promote deposition of sediment.
CHUTE - A high velocity, open channel for conveying water to a lower level without erosion.
CLAY (SOILS) - 1. A mineral soil separate consisting of particles less than 0.002 millimeter in
equivalent diameter. 2. A soil texture class. 3. (Engineering) A fine grained soil (more than 50
percent passing the No. 200 sieve) that has a high plasticity index in relation to the liquid limit.
(Unified Soil Classification System)
COCONUT ROLLS - Also known as coir rolls, these are rolls of natural coconut fiber designed to
be used for streambank stabilization.
COMPACTION (SOILS) - Any process by which the soil grains are rearranged to decrease void
space and bring them in closer contact with one another, thereby increasing the weight of solid
material per unit of volume, increasing the shear and bearing strength and reducing permeability.
CONDUIT - Any channel intended for the conveyance of water, whether open or closed.
CONTOUR - 1. An imaginary line on the surface of the earth connecting points of the same
elevation. 2. A line drawn on a map connecting points of the same elevation.
CORE TRENCH - A trench, filled with relatively impervious material intended to reduce seepage of
water through porous strata.
CRADLE - A structure usually of concrete shaped to fit around the bottom and sides of a conduit to
support the conduit, increase its strength and, in dams, to fill all voids between the underside of the
conduit and the soil.
CREST - 1. The top of a dam, dike, spillway or weir, frequently restricted to the overflow portion. 2.
The summit of a wave or peak of a flood.
CRUSHED STONE - Aggregate consisting of angular particles produced by mechanically crushing
rock.
CURVE NUMBER (CN) - A numerical representation of a given area’s hydrologic soil group, plant
cover, impervious cover, interception and surface storage derived in accordance with Natural
Resources Conservation Service methods. This number is used to convert rainfall depth into runoff
volume.
CUT - Portion of land surface or area from which earth has been removed or will be removed by
excavation; the depth below original ground surface to excavated surface.
CUT-AND-FILL - Process of earth moving by excavating part of an area and using the excavated
material for adjacent embankments or fill areas.
CUTOFF - A wall or other structure, such as a trench, filled with relatively impervious material

G.2
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
intended to reduce seepage of water through porous strata.
CZARA - Acronym used for the Coastal Zone Act Reauthorization Amendments of 1990. These
amendments sought to address the nonpoint source pollution issue by requiring states to develop
coastal nonpoint pollution control programs in order to receive federal funds.
DAM - A barrier to confine or raise water for storage or diversion, to create a hydraulic head, to
prevent gully erosion, or for retention of soil, sediment or other debris.
DETENTION - The temporary storage of stormwater runoff in a BMP with the goals of controlling
peak discharge rates and providing gravity settling of pollutants.
DETENTION STRUCTURE – A permanent structure for the temporary storage of runoff that is
designed to not create a permanent pool of water.
DIKE - An embankment to confine or control water, for example, one built along the banks of a
river to prevent overflow to lowlands; a levee.
DISTRIBUTED RUNOFF CONTROL (DRC) - A stream channel protection criteria which utilizes a
non-uniform distribution of the storage-stage-discharge relationship within a BMP to minimize the
change in channel erosion potential from pre-developed to developed conditions.
DISTURBED AREA - An area in which the natural vegetative soil cover has been removed or
altered and, therefore, is susceptible to erosion.
DIVERSION - A channel with a supporting ridge on the lower side constructed across the slope to
divert water to areas where it can be used or disposed of safely. Diversions differ from terraces in
that they are individually designed.
DRAINAGE - 1. The removal of excess surface water or ground water from land by means of
surface or subsurface drains. 2. Soil characteristics that affect natural drainage.
DRAINAGE AREA (WATERSHED) – That area contributing runoff to a single point measured in a
horizontal plane, which is enclosed by a ridge line.
DROP STRUCTURE - A structure for dropping water to a lower level and dissipating surplus
energy; a fall.
DRY SWALE - An open drainage channel explicitly designed to detain and promote the filtration of
stormwater runoff through an underlying fabricated soil media.
EMERGENCY SPILLWAY - A dam spillway, constructed in natural ground, that is to discharge
flow in excess of the principal spillway design discharge.
ENERGY DISSIPATOR - A designed device such as an apron of rip-rap or a concrete structure
placed at the end of a conduit for the purpose of reducing the velocity, energy and turbulence of the
discharged water.
EROSION - 1. The process by which the land surface is worn away by the action of water, wind, ice,
or gravity. 2. Detachment and movement of soil or rock fragments by water, wind, ice or gravity.
The following terms are used to describe different types of water erosion:

G.3
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
Accelerated erosion - Erosion much more rapid than normal, natural or geologic erosion,
primarily as a result of the influence of the activities of man or, in some cases, of other
animals or natural catastrophes that expose base surfaces.
Gully erosion - The erosion process whereby water accumulates in narrow channels and
removes the soil from this narrow area to considerable depths ranging from 1 or 2 feet to as
much as 75 to 100 feet.
Rill erosion - An erosion process in which numerous small channels only several inches deep
are formed. See rill.
Sheet erosion - The spattering of small soil particles caused by the impact of raindrops on
wet soils. The loosened and spattered particles may or may not subsequently be removed by
surface runoff.
EROSIVE VELOCITIES - Velocities of water that are high enough to wear away the land surface.
Exposed soil will generally erode faster than stabilized soils. Erosive velocities will vary according
to the soil type, slope, structural, or vegetative stabilization used to protect the soil.
EXFILTRATION - The downward movement of water through the soil; the downward flow of
runoff from the bottom of an infiltration BMP into the soil.
EXTENDED DETENTION - A stormwater design feature that provides for the gradual release of a
volume of water in order to increase settling of pollutants and protect downstream channels from
frequent storm events.
EXTREME FLOOD VOLUME (Qf) - The storage volume required to control those infrequent but
large storm events in which overbank flows reach or exceed the boundaries of the 100-year
floodplain.
FILTER BED - The section of a constructed filtration device that houses the filter media and the
outflow pipe.
FILTER FENCE - A geotextile fabric designed to trap sediment and filter runoff.
FILTER MEDIA - The sand, soil, or other organic material in a filtration device used to provide a
permeable surface for pollutant and sediment removal.
FILTER STRIP - A strip of permanent vegetation above ponds, diversions and other structures to
retard the flow of runoff, causing deposition of transported material, thereby reducing sedimentation.
FINES (SOIL) - Generally refers to the silt and clay size particles in soil.
FLOODPLAIN - Areas adjacent to a stream or river that are subject to flooding or inundation during
a storm event that occurs, on average, once every 100 years (or has a likelihood of occurrence of
1/100 in any given year).
FLOW SPLITTER - An engineered, hydraulic structure designed to divert a percentage of storm
flow to a BMP located out of the primary channel, or to direct stormwater to a parallel pipe system
or to bypass a portion of baseflow around a BMP.
FOREBAY - Storage space located near a stormwater BMP inlet that serves to trap incoming coarse
sediments before they accumulate in the main treatment area.

G.4
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
FREEBOARD (HYDRAULICS) - The distance between the maximum water surface elevation
anticipated in design and the top of retaining banks or structures. Freeboard is provided to prevent
overtopping due to unforeseen conditions.
FRENCH DRAIN - A type of drain consisting of an excavated trench filled with pervious material,
such as coarse sand, gravel or crushed stone; water percolates through the voids in this material and
flows to an outlet.
GABION - A flexible woven wire basket composed of rectangular cells filled with small stones.
Gabions may be assembled into many types of structures such as revetments, retaining walls,
channel liners, drop structures and groins.
GABION MATTRESS - A thin gabion, usually six or nine inches thick, used to line channels for
erosion control.
GRADE - 1. The slope or finished surface of a road, channel, canal bed, roadbed, top of
embankment, bottom of excavation, or natural ground; any surface prepared for the support of
construction, like paving or laying a conduit. 2. To finish the surface of a canal bed, roadbed, top of
embankment or bottom of excavation.
GRASS CHANNEL - An open vegetated channel used to convey runoff and to provide treatment by
filtering pollutants and sediments.
GRAVEL - 1. Aggregate consisting of mixed sizes of 1/4 inch to 3 inches which normally occur in
or near old streambeds and have been worn smooth by the action of water. 2. A soil having particle
sizes, according to the Unified Soil Classification System, ranging from the No. 4 sieve size, angular
in shape, as produced by mechanical crushing.
GRAVEL DIAPHRAGM - A stone trench filled with small, river-run gravel used as pretreatment
and inflow regulation in stormwater filtering systems.
GRAVEL FILTER - Washed and graded sand and gravel aggregate placed around a drain or well
screen to prevent the movement of fine materials from the aquifer into the drain or well.
GRAVEL TRENCH - A shallow excavated channel backfilled with gravel and designed to provide
temporary storage and permit percolation of runoff into the soil substrate.
GROUND COVER - Plants which are low-growing and provide a thick growth which protects the
soil as well as providing some beautification of the area occupied.
GULLY - A channel or miniature valley cut by concentrated runoff through which water commonly
flows during and immediately after heavy rains or snow melt. The distinction between gully and rill
is one of depth. A gully is sufficiently deep such that it would not be obliterated by normal tillage
operations, whereas a rill is of lesser depth and would be smoothed by ordinary farm tillage or
grading activities.
HEAD (HYDRAULICS) - 1. The height of water above any plane of reference. 2. The energy, either
kinetic or potential, possessed by each unit weight of a liquid expressed as the vertical height
through which a unit weight would have to fall to release the average energy possessed. Used in
various terms such as pressure head, velocity head, and head loss.
HERBACEOUS PERENNIAL (PLANTS) - A plant whose stems die back to the ground each year.

G.5
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
HIGH MARSH - A pondscaping zone within a stormwater wetland that exists from the surface of
the normal pool to a six inch depth and typically contains the greatest density and diversity of
emergent wetland plants.
HIGH MARSH WEDGES - Slices of shallow wetland (less than or equal to 6 inches) dividing a
stormwater wetland.
HOTSPOT - Area where land use or activities generate highly contaminated runoff, with
concentrations of pollutants in excess of those typically found in stormwater.
HYDRAULIC GRADIENT - The slope of the hydraulic grade line. That includes static and
potential head.
HYDRODYNAMIC STRUCTURE – An engineered structure to separate sediments and oils from
stormwater runoff using gravitational separation and/or hydraulic flow.
HYDROGRAPH - A graph showing variation in stage (depth) or discharge of a stream of water
over a period of time.
HYDROLOGIC SOIL GROUP (HSG) - A Natural Resource Conservation Service classification
system in which soils are categorized into four runoff potential groups. The groups range from A
soils, with high permeability and little runoff production, to D soils, which have low permeability
rates and produce much more runoff.
HYDROSEED – An application of seed or other material applied with forced water in order to
revegetate.
IMPERVIOUS COVER (I) - Those surfaces in the landscape that cannot infiltrate rainfall consisting
of building rooftops, pavement, sidewalks, driveways, etc..
INDUSTRIAL STORMWATER PERMIT - An NPDES permit issued to an identified land use that
regulates the pollutant levels associated with industrial stormwater discharges or specifies on-site
pollution control strategies.
INFILTRATION RATE ( f ) - The rate at which stormwater percolates into the subsoil measured in
inches per hour.
INFLOW PROTECTION - A water handling device used to protect the transition area between any
water conveyance (dike, swale, or swale dike) and a sediment trapping device.
KARST GEOLOGY - Regions that are characterized by formations underlain by carbonate rock and
typified by the presence of limestone caverns and sinkholes.
LEVEL SPREADER - A device for distributing stormwater uniformly over the ground surface as
sheet flow to prevent concentrated, erosive flows and promote infiltration.
MANNING’S FORMULA (HYDRAULICS) - A formula used to predict the velocity of water flow
in an open channel or pipeline:
1. 486 2 / 3 1 / 2
V = r s
n

G.6
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
Where V is the mean velocity of flow in feet per second; r is the hydraulic radius; s is the slope of
the energy gradient or for assumed uniform flow the slope of the channel, in feet per foot; and n is
the roughness coefficient or retardance factor of the channel lining.
MICROPOOL - A smaller permanent pool which is incorporated into the design of larger
stormwater ponds to avoid resuspension of particles and minimize impacts to adjacent natural
features.
MICROTOPOGRAPHY - The complex contours along the bottom of a shallow wetland system,
providing greater depth variation that increases the wetland plant diversity and increases the surface
area to volume ratio.
MULCH - Covering on the soil surface to protect and enhance certain characteristics, such as water
retention qualities.
MUNICIPAL STORMWATER PERMIT - An NPDES permit issued to municipalities to regulate
discharges from municipal separate storm sewers for compliance with EPA regulations.
NPDES - Acronym for the National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System, which regulates point
source discharges.
NON-STRUCTURAL BMPs - Stormwater runoff treatment techniques which use natural measures
to reduce pollution levels, do not require extensive construction efforts and/or promote pollutant
reduction by eliminating the pollutant source.
NITROGEN-FIXING (BACTERIA) - Bacteria having the ability to fix atmospheric nitrogen,
making it available for use by plants.
NORMAL DEPTH - Depth of flow in an open conduit during uniform flow for any given
conditions.
OUTFALL - The point where water discharges from a conduit, stream, or drain.
OFF-LINE - A management system designed to control a storm event by diverting a percentage of
stormwater events from a stream or storm drainage system.
ON-LINE - A management system designed to control stormwater in its original stream or drainage
channel.
ONE YEAR STORM - A stormwater event which occurs on average once every year or statistically
has a 100% chance on average of occurring in a given year.
ONE HUNDRED YEAR STORM - An extreme flood event which occurs on average once every
100 years or statistically has a 1% chance on average of occurring in a given year.
OPEN CHANNEL - Also known as swale, grass channel, and biofilter. This system is used for the
conveyance, retention, infiltration and filtration of stormwater runoff.
OUTLET - The point at which water discharges from such things as a stream, river, lake, tidal basin,
pipe, channel or drainage area.
OUTLET CHANNEL - A waterway constructed or altered primarily to carry water from man-made
structures such as terraces, subsurface drains, diversions and impoundments.

G.7
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
OVERBANK FLOOD PROTECTION VOLUME (Qp) – The volume controlled by structural
practices to prevent an increase in the frequency of out of bank flooding generated by development.
PEAK DISCHARGE RATE - The maximum instantaneous rate of flow during a storm, usually in
reference to a specific design storm event.
PERCENT AREA METHOD - Technique used to evaluate the compliance of a non-structural BMP
for meeting recharge requirements by calculating the percent of impervious area effectively treated
and comparing to a minimum recharge target percentage for the various soil groups.
PERCENT VOLUME METHOD - Procedure used with structural BMPs to evaluate compliance
with recharge requirements by assuring that the volume of runoff treated by the practice exceeds the
computed recharge volume.
PERMANENT SEEDING - The establishment of perennial vegetation which may remain for many
years.
PERMEABILITY - The rate of water movement through a soil column under saturated conditions.
PERMEABLE COVER – Those surfaces in the landscape consisting of open space, forested areas,
meadows, etc. that infiltrate rainfall.
PERMISSIBLE VELOCITY (HYDRAULICS) - The highest average velocity at which water may
be carried safely in a channel or other conduit. The highest velocity that can exist through a
substantial length of a conduit and not cause scour of the channel. A safe, non-eroding or allowable
velocity
pH - A number denoting the common logarithm of the reciprocal of the hydrogen ion concentration.
A pH of 7.0 denotes neutrality, higher values indicate alkalinity, and lower values indicate acidity.
PIPING - Removal of soil material through subsurface flow channels.
PLUGS - Pieces of turf or sod, usually cut with a round tube, which can be used to propagate the turf
or sod by vegetative means.
POCKET POND - A stormwater pond designed for treatment of small drainage area (< 5 acres)
runoff and which has little or no baseflow available to maintain water elevations and relies on
groundwater to maintain a permanent pool.
POCKET WETLAND - A stormwater wetland design adapted for the treatment of runoff from small
drainage areas (< 5 acres) and which has little or no baseflow available to maintain water elevations
and relies on groundwater to maintain a permanent pool.
POND BUFFER - The area immediately surrounding a pond which acts as a filter to remove
pollutants and provide infiltration of stormwater prior to reaching the pond. Provides a separation
barrier to adjacent development.
POND DRAIN - A pipe or other structure used to drain a permanent pool within a specified time
period.
PONDSCAPING - Landscaping around stormwater ponds which emphasizes using native vegetative
species to meet specific design intentions. Species are selected for up to six zones in the pond and its
surrounding buffer based on their ability to tolerate inundation and/ or soil saturation.

G.8
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
POROSITY (n) - Ratio of pore volume to total volume.
PRETREATMENT - Techniques employed in stormwater BMPs to provide storage or filtering to
help trap coarse materials and other pollutants before they enter the system.
PRINCIPAL SPILLWAY - The primary pipe or weir which carries baseflow and storm flow through
a dam embankment.
RECHARGE RATE - Annual amount of rainfall which contributes to groundwater as a function of
hydrologic soil group.
RECHARGE VOLUME (Rev) – The portion of the water quality volume (WQv) used to maintain
groundwater recharge rates at development sites.
REDEVELOPMENT - Any construction, alteration, or improvement exceeding five thousand square
feet of land disturbance performed on sites where existing land use is commercial, industrial,
institutional, or multifamily residential.
RETENTION - The amount of precipitation on a drainage area that does not escape as runoff. It is
the difference between total precipitation and total runoff.
REVERSE-SLOPE PIPE - A pipe which draws from below a permanent pool extending in a reverse
angle up to the riser and determines the water elevation of the permanent pool.
RIGHT-OF-WAY - Right of passage, as over another’s property. A route that is lawful to use. A
strip of land acquired for transport, conveyance or utility construction.
RIP-RAP - Broken rock, cobbles, or boulders placed on earth surfaces, such as the face of a dam or
the bank of a stream, for protection against the action of water (waves); also applies to brush or pole
mattresses or brush and stone, or similar materials used for soil erosion control.
RISER - A vertical pipe or structure which extends from the bottom of a pond and houses the control
devices (weirs/orifices) to achieve the discharge rates for specified designs.
ROUGHNESS COEFFICIENT (HYDRAULICS) - A factor in velocity and discharge formulas
representing the effect of channel roughness on energy losses in flowing water. Manning’s “n” is a
commonly used roughness coefficient.
RUNOFF (HYDRAULICS) - That portion of the precipitation on a drainage area that is discharged
from the area in the stream channels. Types include surface runoff, groundwater runoff or seepage.
SAFETY BENCH - A relatively flat area above the permanent pool and surrounding a stormwater
pond designed to provide a separation to adjacent slopes.
SAND - 1. (Agronomy) A soil particle between 0.05 and 2.0 millimeters in diameter. 2. A soil
textural class. 3. (Engineering) According to the Unified Soil Classification System, a soil particle
larger than the No. 200 sieve (0.074mm) and passing the No. 4 sieve (approximately 1/4 inch).
SEDIMENT – Soils or other surficial materials transported or deposited by the action of wind,
water, ice, or gravity as a product of erosion.
SEEPAGE - 1. Water escaping through or emerging from the ground. 2. The process by which
water percolates through soil.

G.9
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
SEEPAGE LENGTH - In sediment basins or ponds, the length along the pipe and around the anti-
seep collars that is within the zone of saturation through an embankment.
SETBACKS - The minimum distance requirements for locating certain structures in relation to
roads, wells, septic fields, or other structures.
SHEET FLOW - Water, usually storm runoff, flowing in a thin layer over the ground surface.
SIDE SLOPES (ENGINEERING) - The slope of the sides of a channel, dam or embankment. It is
customary to name the horizontal distance first, as 1.5 to 1, or frequently, 1 ½: 1, meaning a
horizontal distance of 1.5 feet to 1 foot vertical.
SILT - 1. (Agronomy) A soil separate consisting of particles between 0.05 and 0.002 millimeter in
equivalent diameter. 2. A soil textural class. 3. (Engineering) According to the Unified Soil
Classification System a fine grained soil (more than 50 percent passing the No. 200 sieve) that has a
low plasticity index in relation to the liquid limit.
SOIL TEST – 1. Physical analysis of soil properties such as grain size, plasticity, or texture.
2. Chemical analysis of soil to determine the need for fertilizers or amendments for species of plant
being grown.
SPILLWAY - An open or closed channel, or both, used to convey excess water from a reservoir. It
may contain gates, either manually or automatically controlled to regulate the discharge of excess
water.
STABILIZATION - Providing vegetative and/or structural measures that will reduce or prevent
erosion.
STAGE (HYDRAULICS) - The variable water surface or the water surface elevation above any
chosen datum.
STILLING BASIN - An open structure or excavation at the foot of an outfall, conduit, chute, drop,
or spillway to reduce the energy of the descending stream of water.
STORMWATER FILTERING - Stormwater treatment methods which utilize an artificial media to
filter out pollutants entrained in urban runoff.
STORMWATER PONDS - A land depression or impoundment created for the detention or retention
of stormwater runoff.
STORMWATER WETLANDS - Shallow, constructed pools that capture stormwater and allow for
the growth of characteristic wetland vegetation.
STREAM BUFFERS - Zones of variable width which are located along both sides of a stream and
are designed to provided a protective natural area along a stream corridor.
STRUCTURAL BMPs - Devices which are constructed to provide temporary storage and treatment
of stormwater runoff.
SUBGRADE - The soil prepared and compacted to support a structure or a pavement system.
TAILWATER - Water, in a river or channel, immediately downstream from a structure.

G.10
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
TECHNICAL RELEASE No. 20 (TR-20) - A Soil Conservation Service (now NRCS) watershed
hydrology computer model that is used to compute runoff volumes and provide routing of storm
events through stream valleys and/or ponds.
TECHNICAL RELEASE No. 55 (TR-55) - A watershed hydrology model developed by the Soil
Conservation Service (now NRCS) used to calculate runoff volumes and provide a simplified
routing for storm events through stream valleys and/or ponds.
TEMPORARY SEEDING - A seeding which is made to provide temporary cover for the soil while
waiting for further construction or other activity to take place.
TEN-YEAR STORM - The 24 hour storm event which exceeds bankfull capacity and occurs on
average once every ten years (or has a likelihood of occurrence of 1/10 in a given year).
TIME OF CONCENTRATION (tc) - Time required for water to flow from the most remote point of
a watershed, in a hydraulic sense, to the outlet.
TOE (OF SLOPE) - Where the slope stops or levels out. Bottom of the slope.
TOE WALL - Downstream wall of a structure, usually to prevent flowing water from eroding under
the structure.
TOPSOIL - Fertile or desirable soil material used for the preparation of a seedbed.
TOTAL PHOSPHORUS (TP) – The total amount of phosphorus that is contained within the water
column.
TOTAL SUSPENDED SOLIDS (TSS) - The total amount of particulate matter that is suspended in
the water column.
TRASH RACK - Grill, grate or other device installed at the intake of a channel, pipe, drain or
spillway for the purpose of preventing oversized debris from entering the structure.
TRUNCATED HYDROGRAPH - A method of computing the required design infiltration storage
volume utilizing the differences from post-developed and pre-developed hydrograph volumes over a
specific time frame.
TWO-YEAR STORM - The 24 hour storm event which exceeds bankfull capacity and occurs on
average once every two years (or has a likelihood of occurrence of 1/2 in a given year).
ULTIMATE CONDITION - Full watershed build-out based on existing zoning.
ULTRA-URBAN - Densely developed urban areas in which little pervious surface exists.
VELOCITY HEAD - Head due to the velocity of a moving fluid, equal to the square of the mean
velocity divided by twice the acceleration due to gravity (32.16 feet per second per second)[v2/2g].
VOLUMETRIC RUNOFF COEFFICIENT (Rv) - The value that is applied to a given rainfall volume
to yield a corresponding runoff volume based on the percent impervious cover in a drainage basin.
WATER QUALITY VOLUME (WQV) - The volume needed to capture and treat 90% of the average
annual stormwater runoff volume equal to 1" (or 0.9" in Western Rainfall Zone) times the
volumetric runoff coefficient (Rv) times the site area.

G.11
............................................................................................................................................. Glossary
WATER SURFACE PROFILE - The longitudinal profile assumed by the surface of a stream
flowing in an open channel; the hydraulic grade line.
WATER USE DESIGNATION - State of Maryland water use classification for the protection of
resources (i.e., Use I-contact recreational use, Use II-shellfish harvest waters, Use III-natural trout
waters, Use IV-recreational trout waters).
WEDGES - Design feature in stormwater wetlands that increases flow path length to provide for
extended detention and treatment of runoff.
WET SWALE - An open drainage channel or depression, explicitly designed to retain water or
intercept groundwater for water quality treatment.
WETTED PERIMETER - The length of the wetted surface of the channel.
WING WALL – Side wall extensions of a structure used to prevent sloughing of banks or channels.

G.12
References

References
..........................................................................................................................................References

R. References

Brown, W. and T. Schueler. 1997. National Pollutant Removal Performance Database for
Stormwater BMPs. Center for Watershed Protection. Chesapeake Research Consortium. 220 pp.

City of Austin, TX. 1988. Water Quality Management. Environmental Criteria Manual.
Environmental and Conservation Services. Austin, TX.

Claytor, R. and T. Schueler. 1996. Design of Stormwater Filtering Systems. Center for Watershed
Protection. Chesapeake Research Consortium. Silver Spring, MD.

Chang, G., J. Parish and C. Sober 1990. The First Flush Of Runoff And Its Effect On Control
Structure Design. Environmental Resource Management Division. City of Austin, Texas.

Driscoll, G. 1983. Rainfall/Runoff Relationships for Sizing Urban Best Management Practices.
US EPA.

Environmental Quality Resources (EQR). 1996. Unpublished data on Maryland Rainfall Analysis
and Storage Volume Scenarios. Silver Spring, MD.

Galli, J. 1997. Montgomery County Stormwater Management Manual. Montgomery County

Department of Environmental Protection. Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments
(MWCOG). Washington, DC.

Galli, J. 1990. Peat-Sand Filters: A Proposed Stormwater Management Practice for Urbanized
Areas. MWCOG. Washington, DC.

Horsley, S. 1996. Memorandum dated July 10, 1996. Methods for Calculating Pre and Post
Development Recharge Rates. Prepared for State of Massachusetts Stormwater Technical Advisory
Group.

Laughland, J.C. 1996. Adjusting Hydrology Models for Karst Hydrology. Public Works (8): 41-42.

MDE, 1987. Design Procedures For Stormwater Management Extended Detention Structures.
Report To Water Resources Administration. Maryland Department of Natural Resources.
Annapolis, MD, 11 pp.

MDE, 1986. Feasibility And Design Of Wet Ponds To Achieve Water Quality Control. Sediment
And Stormwater Division. Maryland Water Management Administration. Annapolis, MD. 52 pp.

MDE, 1994. Stormwater Management Regulations Update. Nonpoint Source Program. Water
Management Administration. Baltimore, MD.

MDE, 1986. Wetland Basins For Stormwater Treatment: Analysis And Guidelines. Report to Water

R.1
..........................................................................................................................................References
Resources Administration. Maryland Department of Natural Resources. Annapolis, MD, 146 pp.

MacRae, C.R. 1993. An Alternate Design Approach For The Control Of In Stream Erosion Potential
In Urbanizing Watersheds. pp. 1086-1091. in proceedings of the Sixth International Conference on
Urban Storm Drainage. Niagara Falls, Ontario. Marsalek and Torno (eds.)

MacRae, C.R. 1996. Experience From Morphological Research On Canadian Streams: Is Control Of
The Two Year Frequency Runoff Event The Best Basis For Stream Channel Protection? pp. 144-
162 in Effects of Watershed Development and Management on Aquatic Ecosystems. Engineering
Foundation. New York, NY.

Oberts, G, 1994. Influence of Snowmelt Dynamics on Stormwater Runoff Quality. Watershed

Protection Techniques 1(2): 55-61

Schueler, T. 1987. Controlling Urban Runoff: A Practical Manual For Planning And Designing
Urban BMPs. MWCOG. Washington, DC.

Schueler, T. 1992. Design of Stormwater Wetland Systems. MWCOG. Anacostia Restoration Team.
Washington, D.C. 116 pp.

Schueler, T. 1995a Nutrient Movement From Urban Lawns. Watershed Protection Techniques.
2(1): 239-246.

Schueler, T. 1995b. Urban Pesticides: From The Lawn To The Stream. Watershed Protection
Techniques. 2(1): 247-253.

Schueler, 1997. Bacterial Levels in Urban Stormwater. Watershed Protection Techniques 3(1): in
press.

Tapley, T, W. Jenkins and R. Gardner. 1996. Managing Stormwater Runoff: A New Direction. pp.
864-866. Proceedings of Watershed '96. Water Environment Federation.

U.S. Environmental Protection Agency. 1983 Results of the Nationwide Urban Runoff Program
(Volume 1)--Final Report. Office of Water. Washington, DC. 159 pp.

Washington State Department of Ecology. 1992. Stormwater Management Manual for the Puget
Sound Basin (Volumes I-IV). Olympia, Washington.

R.2
Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs
A
Appendix
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.......... General Landscaping Guidance

Introduction

Landscaping is a critical element to improve both the function and appearance of stormwater best
management practices (BMPs). This Appendix provides landscaping criteria and plant selection
guidance for effective stormwater BMPs. It is organized as follows:

The first section, A.1, outlines general guidance that should be considered when landscaping any
stormwater practice. Section A.2 then presents more specific guidance on landscaping criteria and
plant selection for individual BMP designs. These include:

• Stormwater ponds and wetlands

• Infiltration and sand filter practices
• Bioretention
• Open Channels
• Filter Strips and Buffers

In Section A.3, key factors in selecting plant material for stormwater landscaping are reviewed,
including hardiness zones, physiographic regions, hydrologic zones, and cultural factors. Section
A.4 contains a detailed plant list of native woody and herbaceous species that can be used when
preparing a stormwater planting plan.

Native Species

This manual encourages the use of native plants in stormwater management facilities. Native plants
are defined as those species which evolved naturally to live in this region. Practically speaking, this
refers to those species which lived in Maryland before Europeans explored and settled in America.
Many introduced species were weeds brought in by accident; others were intentionally introduced
and cultivated for use as medicinal herbs, spices, dyes, fiber plants, and ornamentals.

Introduced species can often escape cultivation and begin reproducing in the wild. This is
significant ecologically because many introduced species out-compete indigenous species and begin
to replace them in the wild. Some introduced species like kudzu, phragmites, and dandelions are
invasive, have few predators, and can take over naturally occurring species at an alarming rate. By
planting native species in stormwater management facilities, we can protect Maryland’s natural
heritage and provide a legacy for future generations.

Native species also have distinct genetic advantages over non-native species for planting in
Maryland. Because they have evolved to live here naturally, indigenous plants are best suited for
our local climate. This translates into greater survivorship when planted and less replacement and
maintenance during the life of a stormwater management facility. Both of these attributes provide
cost savings for the facility owner.

Finally, people often plant exotic species for their ornamental value. While it is important to have

A.1
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.......... General Landscaping Guidance
aesthetic stormwater management facilities for public acceptance and the maintenance of property
value, it is not necessary to introduce foreign species for this purpose. Many native species are
aesthetically pleasing and can be used as ornamentals. For example, the following species are part
of Maryland’s natural heritage and provide high aesthetic value throughout the year: rhododendron,
pink azalea, red maple, pin oak, sycamore, flowering dogwood, mountain laurel, willow, hemlock,
white pine, bald cypress, atlantic cedar, american holly, black-eyed susan, sunflower, lobelia,
pickerel weed, marsh hibiscus, and yellow pond lily. When selecting ornamentals for stormwater
management facilities, planting preference should be given to native ornamentals. Please refer to the
plant list in Section A.4 for a comprehensive list of native species available for stormwater
management facility planting.

A.1 General Landscaping Guidance for All Stormwater BMPs

¾ Trees, shrubs, and/or any type of woody vegetation are not allowed on the
embankment.
¾ Plant trees and shrubs at least 15 feet away from the toe of slope of a dam.
¾ Trees or shrubs known to have long taproots should not be within the vicinity of the
earth dam or subsurface drainage facilities.
¾ Plant trees and shrubs at least 25 feet away from perforated pipes.
¾ Plant trees and shrubs at least 25 feet away from a principal spillway structures.
¾ Provide 15 foot clearance from a non-clogging, low flow orifice.
¾ Herbaceous embankment plantings should be limited to 10 inches in height.
¾ Use erosion control mats and fabrics in channels to reduce the potential for erosion.
¾ Stabilize all emergency spillways with plant material that can withstand strong flows.
Root material should be fibrous and substantial but lacking a taproot.
¾ Sod channels that are not stabilized with erosion control mats.
¾ Divert flows temporarily from seeded areas until stabilized.
¾ Check water tolerances of existing plant materials prior to inundation of area.
¾ Stabilize aquatic and safety benches with emergent wetland plants and wet seed
mixes.
¾ Do not block maintenance access to structures with trees or shrubs.
¾ To reduce thermal warming, shade inflow and outflow channels as well as southern
exposures of ponds.
¾ Avoid plantings that will require routine or intensive chemical applications (i.e. turf
area).
¾ Have soil tested to determine if there is a need for amendments.
¾ Native plant species should be specified over exotic or foreign species because they
are well adapted to local on-site soil conditions and require little or no additional
amendments.
¾ Decrease the areas where turf is used. Use low maintenance ground cover to absorb
run-off.

¾ Plant stream and water buffers with trees, shrubs, ornamental grasses, and
herbaceous materials where possible, to stabilize banks and provide shade.

A.2
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.......... General Landscaping Guidance
¾ Maintain and frame desirable views. Be careful not to block views at entrances,
exits, or difficult road curves. Screen unattractive views into the site. Aesthetics and
visual characteristics should be a prime consideration.
¾ Use plants to prohibit pedestrian access to pools or steeper slopes.
¾ The designer should carefully consider the long-term vegetation management
strategy for the BMP, keeping in mind the “maintenance” legacy for the future
owners. Provide a planting surface that can withstand the compaction of vehicles
using maintenance access roads. Make sure the facility maintenance agreement
includes requirements to ensure vegetation cover in perpetuity.
¾ If a BMP is likely to receive excessive amounts of deicing salt, salt tolerant plants
should be used.
¾ Provide signage for:
 Stormwater Management Areas to help educate the public.
 Wildflower areas, when possible, to designate limits of mowing.
¾ Avoid the overuse of any plant materials.
¾ Preserve existing natural vegetation when possible.

It is necessary to test the soil in which you are about to plant in order to determine the following:

¾ pH; whether acid, neutral, or alkaline

¾ major soil nutrients; Nitrogen, Phosphorus, Potassium
¾ minerals; such as chelated iron, lime

Have soil samples analyzed by experienced and qualified individuals, such as those at the
Agricultural Extension Office, who will explain in writing the results, what they mean, as well as
what soil amendments would be required. Certain soil conditions, such as marine clays, can present
serious constraints to the growth of plant materials and may require the guidance of qualified
professionals. When poor soils can not be amended, seed mixes and plant material must be selected
to establish ground cover as quickly as possible.

Areas that recently have been involved in construction can become compacted so that plant roots
cannot penetrate the soil. Also seeds will lie on the surface of compacted soils and are often washed
away or eaten by birds. For planting success, soils should be loosened to a depth of three to five
inches. Hard soils may require disking to a deeper depth. The soil should be loosened regardless of
the ground cover. This will improve seed contact with the soil, increase germination rates, and allow
the roots to penetrate the soil. For areas to be sodded, disking is necessary so that the roots can
penetrate the soil. Providing good growing conditions can prevent poor vegetative cover. This saves
money because vegetation will not need to be replanted.

A.3
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.......... General Landscaping Guidance
Whenever possible, topsoil should be spread to a depth of four to eight inches and lightly compacted
to minimum thickness of four inches. This provides organic matter and important nutrients for the
plant material. The use of topsoil allows vegetation to become established faster and roots to
penetrate deeper. This ensures quicker and more complete stabilization, making it less likely that
the plants will wash out during a heavy storm.

If topsoil has been stockpiled in deep mounds for a long period of time, it is necessary to test the soil
for pH as well as microbial activity. If the microbial activity has been destroyed, it is necessary to
inoculate the soil after application.

Remember that newly installed plant material requires water in order to recover from the shock of
being transplanted. Be sure that some source of water is provided, especially during dry periods.
This will reduce plant loss and provide the new plant materials with a chance to establish root
growth.

A.2 Specific Landscaping Criteria for BMP Groups

A.2.1 Ponds and Wetlands

For planting within a stormwater management facility, it is necessary to determine what hydrologic
zones will be created. Hydrologic zones describe the degree to which an area is inundated by water.
Plants have differing tolerances to inundation and the six zones described in this section will dictate
which plants will survive where. Every facility does not necessarily exhibit all of these zones.

Table A.1 Hydrologic Zones

Zone # Zone Description Hydrologic Conditions

Zone 1 Deep Water Pool 1-6 foot deep permanent pool

Zone 2 Shallow Water Bench (low marsh) 6 inches to 1 foot deep
Zone 3 Shoreline Fringe (high marsh) Regularly inundated
Zone 4 Riparian Fringe Periodically inundated
Zone 5 Floodplain Terrace Infrequently inundated
Zone 6 Upland Slopes Seldom or never inundated

A.4
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

Zone 1: Deep Water Area (1 to 6 feet)

Ponds and wetlands both have deep pool areas that comprise Zone 1. These pools range from one to
six feet in depth, and are best colonized by submergent plants, if at all. This pondscaping zone has
not been routinely planted for several reasons. First, the availability of plant materials that can
survive and grow in this zone is limited, and it is also feared that plants could clog the stormwater
facility outlet structure. In many cases, these plants will gradually become established through
natural recolonization (e.g., transport of plant fragments from other ponds by waterfowl). If
submerged plant material becomes more commercially available and clogging concerns are
addressed, this area can be planted. The function of the planting is to reduce sedimentation and
improve oxidation while creating a greater aquatic habitat.

¾ Plant material must be able to withstand constant inundation of water of one foot or
greater in depth.
¾ Plants may be submerged partially or entirely.
¾ Plants should be able to enhance pollutant uptake.
¾ Plants may provide food and cover for waterfowl, desirable insects, and other aquatic
life.

Some suggested emergent or submergent species include, but are not limited to lotus, wild celery,
and redhead grass.

Zone 2: Shallow Water Bench/Low Marsh (6 inches to 1 foot)

Zone 2 includes all areas that are inundated below the normal pool to a depth of one foot, and is the
primary area where emergent plants will grow in stormwater wetlands. Zone 2 also coincides with
the aquatic bench found in stormwater ponds. This zone offers ideal conditions for the growth of
many emergent wetland species. These areas may be located at the edge of the pond or on low
mounds of earth located below the surface of the water within the pond. When planted, Zone 2 can
be an important habitat for many aquatic and nonaquatic animals, creating a diverse food chain.
This food chain includes predators, allowing a natural regulation of mosquito populations, thereby
reducing the need for insecticide applications.

¾ Plant material must be able to withstand constant inundation of water to depths

between six inches and one foot deep.
¾ Plants will be partially submerged.
¾ Plants should be able to enhance pollutant uptake.
¾ Plants may provide food and cover for waterfowl, desirable insects and other aquatic
life.

Plants will stabilize the bottom of the pond, as well as the edge of the pond, absorbing wave impacts
and reducing erosion, when water level fluctuates. In addition to slowing water velocities and
increasing sediment deposition rates, plants can also reduce resuspension of sediments caused

A.5
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria
by the wind. Plants can also soften the engineered contours of the pond, and can conceal drawdowns
during dry weather.

Some suggested species for Zone 2 include lobelia, bayberry, many asters, turtlehead, pond cypress,
iris, and blue flag. It is important to recognize that a plant typically found in wetlands may be
cultivated in nonwetland conditions. Hence the importance of obtaining plant stock which is
cultivated in similar hydrologic and soil conditions as those present in the stormwater management
facility. A plant typically found in wetlands, but cultivated in nonwetland conditions, may not
survive if installed in wetland conditions. A nonwetland plant cultivated in wetland conditions
should thrive when introduced to wetland conditions.

Table A.2 Common Emergent Wetland Plant Species Used for Stormwater Wetlands
and on Aquatic Benches of Stormwater Ponds

Common Name Scientific Name Inundation Tolerance

Arrow Arum Peltandra virginica up to 12 inches
Arrowhead/Duck Potato Saggitaria latifolia up to 12 inches
Broomsedge Andropogon virginicus up to 3 inches
Broad Water Weed Elodea canadensis at least 12 inches
Bushy Beardgrass Andropogon glomeratus up to 12 inches
Common Three-square Scirpus pungens up to 6 inches
Marsh Hibiscus Hibiscus moscheutos up to 3 inches
Spatterdock Nuphar luteum up to 3 inches
Rice Cutgrass Leersia oryzoides up to 3 inches
Sedges Carex spp. up to 3 inches
Soft Rush Juncus effusus up to 3 inches
Switchgrass Panicum virgatum up to 3 inches
Note 1: Inundation tolerance is maximum inches below the normal pool; most plants prefer
shallower depths than the maximum indicated.
Note 2: for additional plant options, consult the stormwater planting list at the end of this
appendix. Other good sources include the 1994 Maryland Standards and Specifications for
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control (MDE, 1994), Design of Stormwater Wetland Systems
(Schueler, 1992) and Planting Guide for the Northeastern United States (Environmental
Concern, 1993).

A.6
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

Zone 3: Shoreline Fringe/High Marsh (regularly inundated)

Zone 3 encompasses the shoreline of a pond or wetland, and extends vertically about one foot in
elevation from the normal pool. This zone includes the safety bench of a pond, and may also be
periodically inundated if storm events are subject to extended detention. This zone occurs in a wet
pond or shallow marsh and can be the most difficult to establish since plants must be able to
withstand inundation of water during storms, when wind might blow water into the area, or the
occasional drought during the summer. In order to stabilize the soil in this zone, Zone 3 must have a
vigorous cover.

¾ Plants should stabilize the shoreline to minimize erosion caused by wave and wind
action or water fluctuation.
¾ Plant material must be able to withstand occasional inundation of water. Plants will
be partially submerged at this time.
¾ Plant material should, whenever possible, shade the shoreline, especially the
southern exposure. This will help to reduce water temperature.
¾ Plants should enhance pollutant uptake.
¾ Plants may provide food and cover for waterfowl, songbirds, and wildlife. Large
plants could also be selected and located to control overpopulation of waterfowl.
¾ Plants should be located to reduce human access where there are potential hazards,
but should not block the maintenance access.
¾ Plants should have very low maintenance requirements, because they may be
difficult or impossible to reach.
¾ Plants should be resistant to disease and other problems which require chemical
applications (since chemical application is not advised in stormwater ponds).
¾ Native plants are preferred because they are low maintenance and disease resistant.

Many of the emergent wetlands plants outline in Table A.2 also thrive in Zone 3. Some other
species that do well include bentgrass, foxtail, panic grass, and hawthorn. If shading is needed along
the shoreline, the following tree species are suggested— river birch, ash, willow, red maple and
willow oak.

Zone 4: Riparian Fringe (periodically inundated)

Zone 4 extends from one to four feet in elevation above the normal pool. Plants in this zone are
subject to periodic inundation after storms, and may experience saturated or partly saturated soil.
Nearly all of the temporary ED area is included within this zone.

¾ Plants must be able to withstand periodic inundation of water after storms, as well as
occasional drought during the warm summer months.
¾ Plants should stabilize the ground from erosion caused by run-off.

A.7
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria
¾ Plants should shade the low flow channel to reduce pool warming whenever possible.
¾ Plants should enhance pollutant uptake.
¾ Plant material should have very low maintenance, since they may be difficult or
impossible to access.
¾ Plants may provide food and cover for waterfowl, songbirds and wildlife. Plants
may also be selected and located to control overpopulation of waterfowl.
¾ Plants should be located to reduce pedestrian access to the deeper pools.
¾ Native plants are preferred because they are low maintenance and disease resistant.

Some frequently used plant species in Zone 4 include coneflower, violets, primrose, milkwort,
nannyberry, lespedeza, lilies, flatsedge, hollies, horsythia, lovegrass, hawthorn, spiraea, birch, and
sugar maple.

Zone 5: Floodplain Terrace (infrequently inundated)

Zone 5 is periodically inundated by floodwaters that quickly recede in a day or less. Operationally,
Zone 5 extends from the maximum two year or Cpv water surface elevation up to the 10 or 100 year
maximum water surface elevation. Key landscaping objectives for Zone 5 are to stabilize the steep
slopes characteristic of this zone and establish low maintenance natural vegetation.

¾ Plant material should be able to withstand occasional but brief inundation during
storms. In between storms, typical moisture conditions may be moist, slightly wet, or
even swing entirely to drought conditions during the dry weather periods.
¾ Plants should stabilize the basin slopes from erosion.
¾ Ground cover should be very low maintenance, since they may be difficult to access
on steep slopes or if frequency of mowing is limited. A dense tree cover may help
reduce maintenance and discourage resident geese.
¾ Plants may provide food and cover for waterfowl, songbirds, and wildlife.
¾ Placement of plant material in Zone 5 is often critical, as it often creates a visual
focal point and provides structure and shade for a greater variety of plants.

Some commonly planted species in Zone 5 include solomon’s seal, nannyberry, many fescues, many
viburnums, cherries, chestnut oak, post oak, and phlox.

Zone 6: Upland Slopes/Pond Buffer (seldom or never inundated)

The last zone extends above the maximum 100 year water surface elevation, and often includes the
outer buffer of a pond or wetland. Unlike other zones, this upland area may have sidewalks, bike
paths, retaining walls, and maintenance access roads. Care should be taken to locate plants so they
will not overgrow these routes or create hiding places that might make the area unsafe.

¾ Plant selections should be made based on soil condition, light, and function within
the landscape because little or no water inundation will occur.
¾ Ground covers should require infrequent mowing to reduce the cost of maintaining

A.8
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria
this landscape.
¾ Placement of plants in Zone 6 is important since they are often used to create a visual
focal point, frame a desirable view, screen undesirable views, serve as a buffer, or
provide shade to allow a greater variety of plant materials. Particular attention
should be paid to seasonal color and texture of these plantings.

Some frequently used plant species in Zone 6 include eastern cottonwood, american yew, linden,
bald cypress, magnolia, and mountain ash.

Figure A.1 Hydrologic Zones Around Stormwater Facilities – Legend

12”-36” depth below normal pool elevation

Water Lily, Deep Water Duck Potato, Sago Pond Plant, Wild Celery,
Redhead Grass

0”-12” depth below normal pool elevation

Blue Flag Iris, Duck Potato, Flowering Bulrush, Softrush, Sedges, Lobelia,
Pond Cypress, various asters

0” to 12” elevation above normal pool elevation

New England Aster, Marsh Aster, Marsh Marigold (Appalachian Plateau), Tussock Sedge,
Spotted Joe Pye Weed, Forget Me Nots, Inkberry, Purple Osier Dogwood, Pin Oak, River
Birch, Sycamore, Swamp White Oak (Coastal Plain), Weeping Willow, Dawn Redwood

1’ to 4’ elevation above normal pool elevation

Purple Cone Flower, Birds Foot Trefoil, Slender Rush, Deer Tongue Grass,
Lespedeza, Switch Grass, Serviceberry, Gray Birch, Hackberry, Sweet Pepper
Bush (Coastal Plain, Gray stem Dogwood, Red Osier Dogwood, Green Ash,

Qp2 or Cpv to Qp10 or Qf water surface elevation

(Many Wildflowers and native grasses) American Holly, Witch Hazel,
Ninebark, Red Oak, American Elderberry, American Hemlock, Lowbush
Blueberry, Maple Leaf Viburnum, Nannyberry, Blackhaw Viburnum

Qf water surface elevation and above (Floodplain)

Mostly ornamentals as long as soils drains well. Many natives. All
species must be able to tolerate flood plain conditions. Hackberry, Pitch
Pine, Sheep Fescue, Wildflowers, many Native Grasses.

A.9
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

Figure A.2 Hydrologic Zones Around Stormwater Facilities

A.10
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

Figure A.3 Section of Typical Stormwater Management Detention Pond

Figure A.4 Section of Typical Shallow Extended Detention Wetland System

A.11
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

A.2.2 Infiltration and Filter Systems

Infiltration and filter systems either take advantage of existing permeable soils or create a permeable
medium such as sand for WQv and Re v. In some instances where permeability is great, these
facilities may be used for Qp as well. The most common systems include infiltration trenches,
infiltration basins, sand filters, and organic filters.

When properly planted, vegetation will thrive and enhance the functioning of these systems. For
example, pre-treatment buffers will trap sediments that often are bound with phosphorous and
metals. Vegetation planted in the facility will aid in nutrient uptake and water storage.
Additionally, plant roots will provide arteries for stormwater to permeate soil for groundwater
recharge. Finally, successful plantings provide aesthetic value and wildlife habitat making these
facilities more desirable to the public.

Design Constraints:

¾ Planting buffer strips of at least 20 feet will cause sediments to settle out before
reaching the facility, thereby reducing the possibility of clogging.
¾ Determine areas that will be saturated with water and water table depth so that
appropriate plants may be selected (hydrology will be similar to bioretention
facilities, see figure A.5 and Table A.4 for planting material guidance).
¾ Plants known to send down deep taproots should be avoided in systems where filter
fabric is used as part of facility design.
¾ Test soil conditions to determine if soil amendments are necessary.
¾ Plants shall be located so that access is possible for structure maintenance.
¾ Stabilize heavy flow areas with erosion control mats or sod.
¾ Temporarily divert flows from seeded areas until vegetation is established.
¾ See Table A.5 for additional design considerations.

A.2.3 Bioretention

Soil Bed Characteristics

The characteristics of the soil for the bioretention facility are perhaps as important as the facility
location, size, and treatment volume. The soil must be permeable enough to allow runoff to filter
through the media, while having characteristics suitable to promote and sustain a robust vegetative
cover crop. In addition, much of the nutrient pollutant uptake (nitrogen and phosphorus) is
accomplished through absorption and microbial activity within the soil profile. Therefore, soils must
balance their chemical and physical properties to support biotic communities above and below
ground.

A.12
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

The planting soil should be a sandy loam, loamy sand, loam (USDA), or a loam/sand mix (should
contain a minimum 35 to 60% sand, by volume). The clay content for these soils should be less than
25% by volume [Environmental Quality Resources (EQR), 1996; Engineering Technology Inc. and
Biohabitats, Inc. (ETAB), 1993]. Soils should fall within the SM, ML, SC classifications or the
Unified Soil Classification System (USCS). A permeability of at least 1.0 feet per day (0.5"/hr) is
required (a conservative value of 0.5 feet per day is used for design). The soil should be free of
stones, stumps, roots, or other woody material over 1" in diameter. Brush or seeds from noxious
weeds (e.g., Johnson Grass, Mugwort, Nutsedge, and Canada Thistle or other noxious weeds as
specified under COMAR 15.08.01.05.) should not be present in the soils. Placement of the planting
soil should be in 12” to 18” lifts that are loosely compacted (tamped lightly with a backhoe bucket
or traversed by dozer tracks). The specific characteristics are presented in Table A.3.

Table A.3 Planting Soil Characteristics

(Adapted from EQR, 1996; ETAB, 1993)

Parameter Value
pH range 5.2 to 7.00
Organic matter 1.5 to 4.0% (by weight)
Magnesium 35 lbs. per acre, minimum
Phosphorus (phosphate - P2O5) 75 lbs. per acre, minimum
Potassium (potash - K2O) 85 lbs. per acre, minimum
Soluble salts 500 ppm
Clay 10 to 25%
Silt 30 to 55%
Sand 35 to 60%

Mulch Layer

The mulch layer plays an important role in the performance of the bioretention system. The mulch
layer helps maintain soil moisture and avoids surface sealing which reduces permeability. Mulch
helps prevent erosion, and provides a microenvironment suitable for soil biota at the mulch/soil
interface. It also serves as a pretreatment layer, trapping the finer sediments which remain suspended
after the primary pretreatment.

The mulch layer should be standard landscape style, single or double shredded hardwood mulch or

A.13
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria
chips. The mulch layer should be well aged (stockpiled or stored for at least 12 months), uniform in
color, and free of other materials, such as weed seeds, soil, roots, etc. The mulch should be applied
to a maximum depth of three inches. Grass clippings should not be used as a mulch material.

Planting Guidance

Plant material selection should be based on the goal of simulating a terrestrial forested community of
native species. Bioretention simulates an upland-species ecosystem. The community should be
dominated by trees, but have a distinct community of understory trees, shrubs and herbaceous
materials. By creating a diverse, dense plant cover, a bioretention facility will be able to treat
stormwater runoff and withstand urban stresses from insects, disease, drought, temperature, wind,
and exposure.

The proper selection and installation of plant materials is key to a successful system. There are
essentially three zones within a bioretention facility (Figure A.5). The lowest elevation supports
plant species adapted to standing and fluctuating water levels. The middle elevation supports plants
that like drier soil conditions, but can still tolerate occasional inundation by water. The outer edge is
the highest elevation and generally supports plants adapted to dryer conditions. A sample of
appropriate plant materials for bioretention facilities are included in Table A.4. The layout of plant
material should be flexible, but should follow the general principals described in Table A.5. The
objective is to have a system which resembles a random and natural plant layout, while maintaining
optimal conditions for plant establishment and growth. For a more extensive bioretention plan,
consult ETA&B, 1993 or Claytor and Schueler, 1997.

A.14
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

Figure A.5 Planting Zones for a Bioretention Facilities

Optional Curtain Drain

A.15
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

Table A.4 Commonly Used Species for Bioretention Areas

Trees Shrubs Herbaceous Species

Acer rubrum Aesculus pariviflora Andropogon virginicus

Red Maple Bottlebrush Buckeye Broomsedge
Betula nigra Cephalanthus occidentalis Eupatorium perpurea
River Birch Buttonbush Joe Pye Weed
Juniperus virginiana Hamemelis virginiana Scirpus pungens
Eastern Red Cedar Witch Hazel Three Square Bulrush
Chionanthus virginicus Vaccinium corymbosum Iris versicolor
Fringe-tree Highbush Blueberry Blue Flag
Nyssa sylvatica Ilex glabra Lobelia cardinalis
Black Gum Inkberry Cardinal Flower
Diospyros virginiana Ilex verticillata Panicum virgatum
Persimmon Winterberry Switchgrass
Platanus occidentalis Viburnum dentatum Dichanthelium scoparium
Sycamore Arrowwood Broom Panic Grass
Quercus palustris Lindera benzoin Rudbeckia laciniata
Pin Oak Spicebush Tall Coneflower
Quercus phellos Myrica pennsylvanica Scirpus cyperinus
Willow Oak Bayberry Woolgrass
Salix nigra Vernonia noveboracensis
Black willow New York Ironweed
Note 1: For more options on plant selection for bioretention, consult Bioretention Manual
(ETAB, 1993) or the Design of Stormwater Filtering Systems (Claytor and Schueler, 1997).

A.16
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.............Specific Landscaping Criteria

Table A.5 Planting Plan Design Considerations

¾ Native plant species should be specified over exotic or foreign species.
¾ Appropriate vegetation should be selected based on the zone of hydric tolerance.
¾ Species layout should generally be random and natural.
¾ A canopy should be established with an understory of shrubs and herbaceous materials.
¾ Woody vegetation should not be specified in the vicinity of inflow locations.
¾ Trees should be planted primarily along the perimeter of the bioretention area.
¾ Stressors (e.g., wind, sun, exposure, insect and disease infestation, and drought) should be
considered when laying out the planting plan.
¾ Noxious weeds shall not be specified or used.
¾ Aesthetics and visual characteristics should be a prime consideration.
¾ Traffic and safety issues must be considered.
¾ Existing and proposed utilities must be identified and considered.

Plant Material Guidance

Plant materials should conform to the American Association of Nurserymen’s publication, the
American Standard Nursery Stock. The planting plan shall include a sequence of construction; a
description of the contractor's responsibilities; a planting schedule and installation specifications;
initial maintenance requirements; and a warranty period stipulating requirements for plant survival.
Table A.6 presents some typical issues for planting specifications.

A.17
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection

Table A.6 Planting Specification Issues

Specification Element Elements

Sequence of Construction Describe site preparation activities, soil amendments, etc.; address
erosion and sediment control procedures; specify step-by-step
procedure for plant installation through site clean-up.

Contractor's Responsibilities Specify the contractor's responsibilities, such as watering, care of

plant material during transport, timeliness of installation, repairs due
to vandalism, etc.

Planting Schedule Specify the plants to be installed, the type of materials (e.g., balled
and Specifications and burlap, bare root, containerized); time of year of installations,
sequence of installation of types of plants; fertilization, stabilization
seeding, if required; watering and general care.

Maintenance Specify inspection periods; mulching frequency (annual mulching is

most common); removal and replacement of dead and diseased
vegetation; treatment of diseased trees; watering schedule after
initial installation (once per day for 14 days is common); repair and
replacement of staking and wires.

Warranty Specify the warranty period, the required survival rate, and expected
condition of plant species at the end of the warranty period.

A.2.4 Open Channels

Consult Table A.7 for grass species that perform well in the stressful environment of an open
channel. For more detailed information, please consult the 1994 Maryland Standards and
Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control. If a BMP is likely to receive excessive
amounts of deicing salt, salt tolerant plants should be used.

A.2.5 Filter Strips and Stream Buffer

For design and plant selection of filter strips and stream buffers, please consult the USDA Natural
Resources Conservation Service Maryland Conservation Practice Standard No. 391 “Riparian
Stream Buffers.”

A.18
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection

Table A.7 Common Grass Species for Open Channels

Common Name Scientific Name Notes

Big Bluestem Andropogon gerardii Warm, not for Wet Swale

Creeping Bentgrass Agrostis palustris Cool,
Red Fescue Festuca rubra Cool, not for Wet Swale
Reed Canary grass Phalaris arundinacea Cool, Wet Swale
Redtop Agrostis alba Cool,
Smooth Brome Bromus inermis Cool, not for Wet Swale
Switch grass Panicum virgatum Warm
Note 1: These grasses are sod-forming and can withstand frequent inundation, and are thus
ideal for the swale or grass channel environment. Most are salt-tolerant, as well. Cool refers
to cool season grasses that do well in the western part of the State, Warm refers to warm
season grasses that work well in the eastern part of the State (see Table A.8).

Note 2: Where possible, one or more of these grasses should be in the seed mixes. For a more
thorough listing of seed mixes, consult the 1994 Maryland Standard and Specifications for
Soil Erosion and Sediment Control (MDE, 1994) or the MD NRCS Code 391 Riparian Forest
Buffer Standard, Table 2 (Zone 3).

A.3 Plant Selection for Stormwater Facilities

A.3.1 Hardiness Zones

Hardiness zones are based on historical annual minimum temperatures recorded in an area. A
BMPs location in relation to plant hardiness zones is important to consider first because plants differ
in their ability to withstand very cold winters. This does not imply that plants are not affected by
summer temperatures. Given that Maryland summers can be very hot, heat tolerance is also a
characteristic that should be considered in plant selection.

A.19
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection

Table A.8 Average Annual Minimum Temperature

Zone USDA Minimum

Temperature (oF)

Temperate Zone 1 below -50o

Temperate Zone 2 -50o to -40o
Temperate Zone 3 -40o to -30o
Temperate Zone 4 -30o to -20o
Temperate Zone 5 a -20o to -15o
b -15° to -10°
Temperate Zone 6 a -10o to -5o
b -5° to 0°
Temperate Zone 7 a 0o to 5o
b 5° to 10°
Temperate Zone 8 10o to 20o

It is best to recommend plants known to thrive in specific hardiness zones. The plant list included at
the end of this appendix identifies the hardiness zones for each species listed as a general planting
guide. It should be noted, however, that certain site factors can create microclimates or
environmental conditions which permit the growth of plants not listed as hardy for that zone. By
investigating numerous references and based on personal experience, a designer should be able to
confidently recommend plants that will survive in microclimates.

A.20
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection

Figure A.6 USDA Plant Hardiness Zones in Maryland

A.3.2 Physiographic Provinces

There are five physiographic provinces in Maryland that describe distinct geographic regions in the
State with similar physical and environmental conditions (Figure A.7). These physiographic
provinces include, from west to east, the Appalachian Plateau, Valley and Ridge, Blue Ridge,
Piedmont, and Coastal Plain. Each physiographic region is defined by unique geological strata, soil
type, drainage patterns, moisture content, temperature and degree of slope which often dictate the
predominant vegetation. Because the predominant vegetation has evolved to live in these specific
conditions, a successful stormwater management facility planting design can be achieved through
mimicking these natural associations. The five physiographic regions are described below with
associated vegetation listed as general planting guidance. For more detailed information and plant
listings please refer to Woody Plants of Maryland (Brown and Brown, 1992).

A.21
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection

Figure A.7 Physiographic Provinces and Forest Types of Maryland

Appalachian Plateau
Piedmont

Valley & Ridge

Blue Ridge
Coastal Plain

Appalachian Plateau Province

The Appalachian Plateau Province is where Maryland’s highest elevations occur with Backbone
Mountain being the greatest at 3,360 feet above sea level. In the higher elevations of the
Appalachian Plateau, the climate becomes similar to that of the northern states and Canada.
Slopes in the Appalachian Plateau are often steep and deeply carved by winding streams. This
province has mountainous soils composed of clay and clay loams. The predominant forest types
in this province are the Northern Hardwood and Oak-Hickory.

Common Species of the Appalachian Plateau Province

Tree Species Understory
eastern hemlock, white pine, mountain pine, pitch pine, red hydrangea, flowering dogwood, pink azaleas, greenbriers,
spruce, sugar maple, white basswood, american basswood, witch hazel, iron wood, hazelnut, blueberries, huckleberries,
beech, yellow birch, sweet birch, cucumber tree, tulip tree, dewberries, dockmackie, deerberry, great laurel, hobble
white oak, chestnut oak, scarlet oak, red oak, white ash, bush, mountain maple, striped maple, red-berried elder,
black walnut, and white walnut bush honeysuckle, canadian yew, mountain holly, red
raspberry, allegheny menziesia, and dwarf cornel

ateau Province

A.22
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection

Within the Appalachian Plateau are bog and swamp areas which support unique vegetation. For
stormwater management facilities that will remain wet year-round, many species found in these
bog and swamp areas will likely do well. Around the edges of these bogs, red spruce, white
pine, hemlock, black gum, red maple, large and small toothed aspen, and pussy willow are
common. Interior bog species include tamarack or larch, alders, swamp rose, winter berry, wild
raisin, arrowwood, mountain holly, great laurel, smooth service berry, high bush blueberry,
swamp dewberries, and cranberries.

Valley and Ridge, Blue Ridge, and Piedmont Provinces

The Valley and Ridge Province is where parallel ridges and valleys of the Appalachian
Mountains create an alternating pattern. This province has mountainous soils composed of clay
and clay loams, as well as sandy or stony loams. Often, the soils are shallow, and shale barrens
may be found. The climate is dry. Most of the precipitation from the west is blocked by the
Allegheny Mountain range, and precipitation from the east is blocked by the Blue Ridge
Mountains.

The Blue Ridge Province is on the eastern edge of the Appalachian Mountains. This province has
mountainous soils composed of sandy or stony loams. The climate is similar to that in the Piedmont
Province, but somewhat cooler and moister.

The Piedmont Province is an area of rolling uplands with elevations ranging from 100 to 500 feet
above sea level. Soils of the Piedmont are derived from granite rock and consist of loams and clays
with rock fragments and gravel. The climate is moderate throughout this central Maryland province.

Common Species of the Valley and Ridge, Blue Ridge. and Piedmont Provinces
Tree Species Understory

hickory, chestnut oak, scarlet oak, scrub oak, white oak, red Sweet fern, flowering dogwood, black haw, chinquapin,
oak, black oak, scrub pine, pitch pine, short leaf pine, white sassafras, redbud, mountain laurel, blueberry, fringe tree, pink
pine, hemlocks, beech, black jack oak, shingle oak, fringe azalea, hydrangea, spicebush, and maple-leaved arrowwood
tree, and chinquapin

In the Hagerstown region of the Ridge and Valley Province, limestone outcrops produce alkaline
soils which are conducive to red cedar communities. Other common species include oaks, black
locust, redbud, fragrant sumac, hop hornbeam, hackberry, and slippery elm. Between Cumberland
and Flintstone a series of shale barrens occur. These areas have a low water holding capacity and
surfaces can get hot on sunny days. Common species associated with the shale barrens include scrub
pine, scrub oak, post oak, yellow oak, fragrant sumac, dwarf sumac, single-flowered hawthorn,
dwarf hackberry, New Jersey tea, Allegheny plum and pasture rose.

Coastal Plain Province

A.23
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection
The Coastal Plain Province is recognized by flat or gently rolling topography and elevations rising
from sea level to about 100 feet. Coastal Plain marshes and swampy tidal flats surround the
Chesapeake Bay. Sands, sandy loams, and silt loams make up the soils of the Coastal Plain. The
climate is mild and sometimes rainy, similar to that found further south.

Common Species of the Coastal Plain Province

Forest Species Understory

loblolly pine, virginia pine, pitch pine, pond pine, sweet gum, blueberry, huckleberry, greenbier, sand blackberry, beach
willow oak, water oak, basket oak, pin oak, post oak, spanish plum, beach heather, bay berry, sweet pepper bush, azalea,
oak, black cottonwood, pale hickory, bitternut hickory, sweet maleberry, stagger bush, fetter bush, inkberry, and alder
bay, american holly, beech, tulip tree, and river birch

Because of low topographic relief and proximity to sea level, extensive swamp areas are common to
the Coastal Plain Province. Most notable are the cypress swamps found on both the Eastern and
Western Shores. As with the bogs of the Appalachian Province, species common to Coastal Plain
swamps will grow well in wet stormwater management facilities because of the similar hydrology.
In addition to bald cypress, other common species to these swamps are southern white cedar, black
gum, red maple, and swamp bay. Common understory include evergreen laurel-leaved greenbrier,
red-berried greenbrier, red choke berry, swamp haw, smooth winterberry, virginia willow, bay berry,
inkberry, and swamp rose.

Floodplain Regions in Maryland

Floodplains occur across Maryland’s physiographic provinces as low-lying areas adjacent to streams
and rivers. Floodplain plant communities are similar across most of the State because of common
soil characteristics governed by occasional flooding and high groundwater. Because stormwater
management facilities are often located in floodplains, plant associations in these areas can provide
valuable information for successful BMP plantings.

A.24
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection

Common Species of Floodplain Regions

Forest Species Understory

river birch, willows, silver maple, sweet gum, sycamore, box shrub willows, ninebark, silkey cornel, buttonbush, spicebush,
elder, green ash, american elm, swamp white oak, bur oak, black alder, winterberry, black elderberry, and alders
honeylocust, and hackberry

A.3.3 Hydrologic Zones

For planting within a stormwater management facility, it is necessary to determine what hydrologic
zones will be created. Hydrologic zones describe the degree to which an area is inundated by water.
Plants have differing tolerances to inundation and as an aid to landscape designers, these tolerance
levels have been divided into six zones and corresponding plant species have been identified.

Section A.4 includes a native plant list with appropriate hydrologic zones designated for each
species. The hydrologic zones which are bracketed [ ] are where the plants tend to occur. There
may be other zones listed outside of these brackets. The plants may occur in these zones, but are not
typically found in them. Just as plants may, on occasion, be found outside of their hardiness zone,
they may also be found outside of their hydrologic zone. They tend to grow where they can compete
and survive. Additionally, hydrologic conditions in a stormwater management facility may fluctuate
in unpredictable ways; thus the use of plants capable of tolerating wide varieties of hydrologic
conditions greatly increases a successful planting. Conversely, plants suited for specific hydrologic
conditions may perish when hydrologic conditions fluctuate, expose the soil, and increase the chance
for erosion.

Table A.9 Hydrologic Zones

Zone # Zone Description Hydrologic Conditions

Zone 1 Deep Water Pool 1-6 foot deep permanent pool

Zone 2 Shallow Water Bench (low marsh) 6 inches to 1 foot deep
Zone 3 Shoreline Fringe (high marsh) Regularly inundated
Zone 4 Riparian Fringe Periodically inundated
Zone 5 Floodplain Terrace Infrequently inundated
Zone 6 Upland Slopes Seldom or never inundated

A.3.4 Other Considerations in Stormwater BMP Landscaping

A.25
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection

Use or Function

In selecting plants, consider their desired function in the landscape. Is the plant needed as ground
cover, soil stabilizer, or a source of shade? Will the plant be placed to frame a view, create focus, or
provide an accent? Does the location require that you provide seasonal interest to neighboring
properties? Does the adjacent use provide conflicts or potential problems and require a barrier,
screen, or buffer? Nearly every plant and plant location should be provided to serve some function
in addition to any aesthetic appeal.

Plant Characteristics

Certain plant characteristics are so obvious, they may actually be overlooked in the plant selection.
These are:

¾ Size
¾ Shape

For example, tree limbs, after several years, can grow into power lines. A wide growing shrub may
block an important line of sight to oncoming vehicular traffic. A small tree, when full grown, could
block the view from a second story window. Consider how these characteristics can work for you or
against you, today and in the future.

Other plant characteristics must be considered to determine how the plant provides seasonal interest
and whether the plant will fit with the landscape today and through the seasons and years to come.
Some of these characteristics are:

¾ Color
¾ Texture
¾ Seasonal Interest (e.g., flowers, fruit, leaves, stems/bark)
¾ Growth Rate

If shade is required in large amounts, quickly, a sycamore might be chosen over an oak. In urban or
suburban settings, a plant's seasonal interest may be of greater importance. Residents living next to
a stormwater system may desire that the facility be appealing or interesting to look at throughout the
year. For example, willows are usually the first trees to grow leaves signaling the coming of spring.
Pink and white dogwoods bloom in mid-spring to early summer, while witch hazel has a yellow
bloom every fall which can be contrasted with the red fall foliage of a sugar maple. Careful
attention to the design and planting of a facility can result in greater public acceptance and increased
property value.

Availability and Cost

A.26
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection
Often overlooked in plant selection is the availability from wholesalers and the cost of the plant
material. There are many plants listed in landscape books that are not readily available from local
nurseries. Without knowledge of what is available, time spent researching and finding the one plant
that meets all the needs will be wasted. It may require shipping, therefore, making it more costly
than the budget may allow. Some planting requirements may require a special effort to find the
specific plant that fulfills the needs of the site and the function of the plant in the landscape.

In some cases, it may be cost effective to investigate nursery suppliers for the availability of wetland
seed mixtures. Specifications of the seed mix shall include wetland seed types and the relative
proportion of each species. Some suppliers provide seed mixtures suitable for specific wetland,
upland, or riparian habitat conditions. This option may best be employed in small stormwater
facilities such as pocket wetlands and open swales, or to complement woody vegetation plantings in
larger facilities.

A.4 Stormwater Plant List

The pages at the end of this appendix present a list of herbaceous, tree and shrub plants native to
Maryland and suitable for planting in stormwater management facilities. The list is intended as a
guide for general planting purposes and planning considerations. Knowledgeable landscape
designers and nursery suppliers may provide additional information for considering specific
conditions for successful plant establishment and accounting for the variable nature of
stormwater hydrology.

The planting list is in alphabetical order according to the common name, with the scientific name
also provided. Life forms indicate whether a plant species is an “annual,” “perennial,” “grass,”
“fern,” “shrub,” or “tree”.

Each plant species has a corresponding hydrologic zone provided to indicate the most suitable
planting location for successful establishment. While the most common zones for planting are
listed in parenthesis, the listing of additional zones indicates that a plant may survive over a
broad range of hydrologic conditions.

The wetland indicator status (from Region 1, Reed, 1988) has been included to show “the
estimated probability of a species occurring in wetlands versus nonwetlands” (Reed, 1988).
Reed defines the indicator categories as follows:

Obligate wetland (OBL): Plants, which nearly always (more than 99% of the time) occur
in wetlands under natural conditions.

Facultative Wetland (FACW): Plants, which usually occur in wetlands (from 67 to 99%
of the time), but occasionally found in non wetlands.

A.27
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs.................................... Plant Selection
Facultative (FAC): Plants, which are equally likely to occur in wetlands and non
wetlands and are found in wetlands from 34 to 66% of the time.

Facultative Upland (FACU): Plants, which usually occur in non wetlands (from 67 to
99% of the time), but occasionally found in wetlands (from 1 to 33% of the time).

Upland (UPL): Plants, which almost always (more than 99% of the time) under natural
conditions occur in non wetlands.

A given indicator status shown with a “+” or a “-“ means that the species is more (+) or
less (-) often found in wetlands than other plants with the same indicator status without
the “+” or “-“ designation.

Since the wetland indicator status alone does not provide an indication of the depth or duration
of flooding that a plant will tolerate, the “Inundation Tolerance” section is designed to provide
further guidance. Where a plant species is capable of surviving in standing water, a “yes” is
designated in this column. Additional information is provided for depth of inundation for
aquatic vegetation and tolerance for seasonal inundation or saturated soil conditions. Because
individual plants often have unique life requirements difficult to convey in a general listing, it
will be necessary to research specific information on the plant species proposed in order to
ensure successful plant establishment.

Pollution tolerance and salt tolerance information are indicated to identify plantings that would
be most appropriate in pollution hot spots.

Hardiness zones are provided for the U.S.D.A. hardiness zones. The herbaceous plant list
identifies the range of zones the plant may survive in, while the tree and shrub list shows the
coldest zone where the plant may naturally occur.

A.28
 Table A.4.1 Stormwater Plant List - Woody Vegetation

COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS

INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

ALDER,BROOK-SIDE Alnus serrulata Tree [1,2],3 OBL 0-3"

ALDER,SEASIDE Alnus maritima Tree [1,2],3 OBL YES

ALDER,SPECKLED Alnus rugosa Tree 1[2,3] FACW+ YES 2

ARROW-WOOD Viburnum dentatum Shrub [3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL 2

ASH,BLACK Fraxinus nigra Tree [2,3],4 FACW SATURATED 2

ASH,GREEN Fraxinus pennsylvanica Tree [2,3],4 FACW SEASONAL 2

ASH,WHITE Fraxinus americana Tree [4,5],6 FACU NO 3

ASPEN,BIG-TOOTH Populus grandidentata Tree [4,5,6] FACU NO 3

ASPEN,QUAKING Populus tremuloides Tree [4,5],6 FACU YES 1

AZALEA,DWARF Rhododendron atlanticum Shrub [2,3,4],5 FAC,FAC+ YES

AZALEA,EARLY Rhododendron prinophyllum Shrub [2,3,4],5 FAC,FAC+ YES 3

AZALEA,HOARY Rhododendron canescens Shrub [2,3],4 FACW YES

AZALEA,PINK Rhododendron periclymenoides Shrub 2,[3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL 3

AZALEA,SMOOTH Rhododendron arborescens Shrub [3,4],5 FAC YES 4

AZALEA,SWAMP Rhododendron viscosum Shrub [1,2,3],4 FACW+,OBL SEASONAL 3

BASSWOOD,AMERICAN Tilia americana Tree 3,[4,5],6 FACU NO 2

BAYBERRY,NORTHERN Myrica pennsylvanica Shrub [3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL 2

BAYBERRY,SOUTHERN Myrica cerifera Shrub [2,3,4],5 FAC,FAC+ REG.INUNDA

BEECH,AMERICAN Fagus grandifolia Tree [4,5],6 FACU NO 3

BIRCH,GRAY Betula populifolia Tree [3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL 5

BIRCH,RIVER Betula nigra Tree [2,3],4 FACW SEASONAL 4

BIRCH,YELLOW Betula alleghaniensis Tree [3,4],5 FAC YES 3

BLACK GUM, SWAMP TUPELO Nyssa sylvatica Tree 1,[2,3] FACW+ SEASONAL 4

Stormwater Plant List - Woody Vegetation

A.29
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

BLACK-HAW Viburnum prunifolium Shrub [3,4,5],6 FACU,FACU+ YES 3

BLACK-HAW,RUSTY Viburnum rufidulum Shrub 3,[4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO 5

BLADDERNUT, AMERICAN Staphylea trifolia Shrub-Tree [3,4],5 FAC YES 3

BLUEBERRY,BOG Vaccinium uliginosum Shrub 2,3,4,5,6 FACU+,FACW+ YES

BLUEBERRY,CREEPING Vaccinium crassifolium Shrub [2,3,4],5 FAC,FAC+ YES

BLUEBERRY,HIGHBUSH Vaccinium atrococcum Shrub [2,3] FACW SEASONAL 3

BLUEBERRY,LOWBUSH Vaccinium angustifolium Shrub 3,[4,5,6] FACU-,FACU NO 2

BLUEBERRY,VELVET-LEAF Vaccinium myrtilloides Shrub 1,2,[3,4,5], FACU,FACW- YES 2

BOX-ELDER Acer negundo Tree 2,[3,4] FAC+ SEASONAL 2

BUCKTHORN,CAROLINA Rhamnus caroliniana Shrub 2,[3,4,5,6] FACU-,FAC YES 5-6

BUCKTHORN,LANCE-LEAF Rhamnus lanceolata Shrub 6 NI NO 5

BUFFALO-BERRY,CANADA Shepherdia canadensis Shrub 6 NI NO

BURNING-BUSH,EASTERN Euonymus atropurpureus Shrub [2,3,4,5],6 FACU,FAC+ YES 4

BUTTERNUT Juglans cinerea Tree [3,4,5,6] FACU-,FACU+ YES 3

BUTTONBUSH,COMMON Cephalanthus occidentalis Shrub [1,2],3 OBL 0-3'

CEDAR,ATLANTIC WHITE Chamaecyparis thyoides Tree [1,2],3 OBL SATURATE 3

CEDAR,EASTERN RED Juniperus virginiana Shrub 4,5,6 FACU NO 2

CEDAR,NORTHERN WHITE Thuja occidentalis Tree [2,3],4 FACW SEASONAL 2

CHERRY,BLACK Prunus serotina Tree [4,5],6 FACU NO 3

CHERRY,CHOKE Prunus virginiana Tree 4,5,6 FACU YES 5,6

CHERRY,FIRE Prunus pensylvanica Tree 4,5,6 FACU NO 2

COTTON-WOOD,EASTERN Populus deltoides Tree [3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL 2

COTTON-WOOD,SWAMP Populus heterophylla Tree [2,3] FACW+ YES

CRANBERRY,MOUNTAIN Vaccinium vitis-idaea Shrub 2,[3,4],5 FAC YES 2

CRANBERRY,SMALL Vaccinium oxycoccos Shrub [1,2],3 OBL YES 2

Stormwater Plant List - Woody Vegetation

A.30
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

CRANBERRY,SOUTHERN MOUNTAIN Vaccinium erythrocarpum Shrub 2,[3,4],5 FAC YES 5

CYPRESS,BALD Taxodium distichum Tree [1,2],3 OBL SATURATED 4

DANGLE-BERRY Gaylussacia frondosa Shrub 2,[3,4],5 FAC YES

DEERBERRY Vaccinium stamineum Shrub [3,4,5,6] FACU-,FACU+ YES 5

DOG-HOBBLE,COASTAL Leucothoe axillaris Shrub [1,2,3,4],5 FACW,FACW+ YES 6

DOG-HOBBLE,RED-TWIG Leucothoe recurva Shrub 3,[4,5],6 FACU NO 5

DOGWOOD, GRAY Cornus racemosa Shrub 2[3,4] FAC+ SEASONAL

DOGWOOD,FLOWERING Cornus florida Shrub-Tree 4,5,6 FACU- NO 4

DOGWOOD,ROUGH-LEAF Cornus asperifolia Shrub 1,2,[3,4,5] FAC-,FACW- YES

DOGWOOD,ROUGH-LEAF Cornus drummondii Shrub 2,[3,4],5 FAC YES 4

DOGWOOD,SILKY Cornus amomum Shrub [2,3],4 FACW SEASONAL 5

ELDER,EUROPEAN RED Sambucus racemosa Shrub [3,4,5],6 FACU,FACU+ YES 4

ELM,SLIPPERY Ulmus rubra Tree [3,4],5 FAC YES 3

FALSE-WILLOW,EASTERN Baccharis halimifolia Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FAC,FACW 0-6"

FARKLEBERRY Vaccinium arboreum Shrub 3,[4,5],6 FACU NO 7

FETTER-BUSH Leucothoe racemosa Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FACW SEASONAL 5

FETTER-BUSH Lyonia lucida Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FACW YES

GERMANDER,AMERICAN Teucrium canadense Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FAC+,FACW YES

GROUNDSEL TREE Baccheris halimifolia Shrub [2,3]4 FACW

GUM,SWEET Liquidambar styraciflua Tree [3,4],5 FAC YES 4

HACKBERRY,COMMON Celtis occidentalis Shrub-Tree 4,5,6 FACU SEASONAL 5

HAWTHORN,BEAUTIFUL Crataegus pulcherrima Tree 2,[3,4],5 FAC YES 4

HAWTHORN,COCKSPUR Crataegus crus-galli Tree 2,[3,4,5],6 FACU,FAC YES 4

HAWTHORN,DOWNY Crataegus mollis Tree 1,2,[3,4,5], FACU,FACW- YES 4

HAWTHORN,GREEN Crataegus viridis Tree 1,[2,3,4],5 FAC,FACW YES 4

Stormwater Plant List - Woody Vegetation

A.31
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

HAWTHORN,LITTLE-HIP Crataegus spathulata Tree 1,[2,3,4],5 FAC,FACW YES 4

HAWTHORN,PARSLEY Crataegus marshallii Tree [1,2,3,4],5, FACU+,FACW YES 4

HAWTHORN,WASHINGTON Crataegus phaenopyrum Tree 2,[3,4,5] FAC-,FAC YES 4

HAZEL-NUT,AMERICAN Corylus americana Shrub 3,[4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO 4

HAZEL-NUT,BEAKED Corylus cornuta Shrub 3,[4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO 4

HEATHER Calluna vulgaris Shrub 2,[3,4],5 FAC YES 4

HEMLOCK,EASTERN Tsuga canadensis Tree 4,5,6 FACU NO 3

HICKORY,BIG SHELLBARK Carya laciniosa Tree 1,[2,3,4],5 FAC,FACW YES 5

HICKORY,BITTER-NUT Carya cordiformis Tree 4,5,6 FACU+ NO 4

HICKORY,PECAN Carya illinoensis Tree 1,[2,3,4,5], FACU,FACW YES 5

HICKORY,RED Carya ovalis Tree 3,[4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO 4

HICKORY,SHAG-BARK Carya ovata Tree [3,4,5,6] FACU-,FACU+ YES 4

HICKORY,SWEET PIGNUT Carya glabra Tree 3,[4,5,6] FACU-,FACU NO 4

HOLLY, WINTERBERRY Ilex laevigata Shrub [1,2],3 OBL YES 4

HOLLY,AMERICAN Ilex opaca Shrub 4,5,6 FACU LIMITED 5

HOLLY,BAY-GALL Ilex coriacea Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FACW YES

HOLLY,DECIDUOUS Ilex decidua Shrub 1,[2,3,4,5] FACW-,FACW SEASONAL

HOLLY,GEORGIA Ilex longipes Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FAC,FACW YES

HOLLY,SARVIS Ilex amelanchier Shrub [1,2],3 OBL YES

HOP-HORNBEAM,EASTERN Ostrya virginiana Shrub-Tree [3,4,5,6] FACU-,FACU+ YES 4

HORNBEAM,AMERICAN Carpinus caroliniana Tree [3,4],5 FAC SOME 2

HUCKLEBERRY,BLACK Gaylussacia baccata Shrub 3,[4,5],6 FACU NO 2

HUCKLEBERRY,DWARF Gaylussacia dumosa Shrub 2,[3,4],5 FAC YES 2

HYDRANGEA,PANICLE Hydrangea paniculata Shrub 2,[3,4],5 FAC YES 4

HYDRANGEA,WILD Hydrangea arborescens Shrub 3,[4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO 4

Stormwater Plant List - Woody Vegetation

A.32
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

INK-BERRY Ilex glabra Shrub [2,3],4 FACW- SEASONAL 3

LAUREL,MOUNTAIN Kalmia latifolia Shrub 4,5,6 FACU NO 4

LOCUST,BLACK Robinia pseudoacacia Tree 4,5,6 FACU YES 5

MAGNOLIA,UMBRELLA Magnolia tripetala Tree 2,[3,4,5],6 FACU,FAC YES 4

MALEBERRY Lyonia ligustrina Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FACW YES 3

MAPLE,MOUNTAIN Acer spicatum Tree 4,5,6 FACU NO 2

MAPLE,RED Acer rubrum Tree [3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL 3

MAPLE,SILVER Acer saccharinum Tree [2,3],4 FACW SEASONAL 3

MAPLE,STRIPED Acer pensylvanicum Shrub-Tree 3,[4,5,6] FACU-,FACU NO 3

MARSH ELDER Iva frutescens Shrub 1[2,3] FACW+

MEADOW-SWEET,BROAD-LEAF Spiraea latifolia Shrub [2,3,4] FAC+,FACW YES 2

MEADOW-SWEET,NARROW-LEAF Spiraea alba Shrub [1,2,3,4],5 FACW,FACW+ YES 4

MEADOW-SWEET,VIRGINIA Spiraea virginiana Shrub 1,[2,3,4,5], FACU,FACW YES 5

MEADOW-SWEET,WILLOW-LEAF Spiraea salicifolia Shrub 1,[2,3] FACW+ YES 4

NANNYBERRY Viburnum lentago Shrub [3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL 2

NINEBARK,EASTERN Physocarpus opulifolius Shrub [2,3],4 FACW- YES 2

OAK, PIN Quercus palustris Tree [2,3],4 FACW SEASONAL 4

OAK, SCARLET Quercus coccinea Tree 6 NO

OAK,BUR Quercus macrocarpa Tree 3,[4,5],6 FAC- YES 2

OAK,CHERRY-BARK Quercus falcata var. pagodafolia Tree 1,[2,3,4],5 FAC+,FACW YES 5-6

OAK,CHESTNUT Quercus prinus Tree 4,5,6 FACU NO 5,6

OAK,CHINKAPIN Quercus muhlenbergii Tree [3,4],5 FAC YES 5

OAK,LAUREL Quercus laurifolia Tree 1,[2,3,4,5] FACW-,FACW YES

OAK,LIVE Quercus virginiana Tree 4,5,6 FACU YES 7

OAK,OVERCUP Quercus lyrata Tree [1,2],3 OBL YES 5

Stormwater Plant List - Woody Vegetation

A.33
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

OAK,POST Quercus stellata Tree 3,[4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO 5

OAK,RED Quercus rubra Tree 6 NO

OAK,SHINGLE Quercus imbricaria Tree [3,4],5 FAC YES 5

OAK,SHUMARD Quercus shumardii Tree 2,[3,4] FAC+ YES 5

OAK,SWAMP CHESTNUT Quercus michauxii Tree 1,[2,3,4,5] FACW-,FACW YES

OAK,SWAMP WHITE Quercus bicolor Tree 1,[2,3] FACW+ SEASONAL 3

OAK,WATER Quercus nigra Tree [3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL 6

OAK,WHITE Quercus alba Tree [4,5,6] FACU YES 4

OAK,WILLOW Quercus phellos Tree 2,[3,4] FAC+ SEASONAL 5

PEPPER-BUSH,SWEET Clethra alnifolia Shrub 2,[3,4] FAC+ SEASONAL 3

PINE,EASTERN WHITE Pinus strobus Tree 4,5,6 FACU NO 3

PINE,JERSEY Pinus viginiana Tree 6 NO

PINE,LOBLOLLY Pinus taeda Tree 3,[4,5],6 FAC- SEASONAL

PINE,PITCH Pinus rigida Tree 4,5,6 FACU SEASONAL 4

PINE,POND Pinus serotina Tree [1,2],3 OBL YES

REDBUD,EASTERN Cercis canadensis Shrub-Tree 3,[4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO 4

RHODODENDRON Rhododendron canadense Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FACW YES 2

RHODODENDRON,ROSEBAY Rhododendron maximum Shrub [3,4],5 FAC YES 3

ROSEMARY,BOG Andromeda polifolia Shrub [1,2],3 OBL YES

SAND-MYRTLE Leiophyllum buxifolium Shrub 3,4,[5,6] FACU- NO

SASSAFRAS Sassafras albidum Tree 3,[4,5,6] FACU-,FACU NO 4

SERVICE-BERRY,DOWNY Amelanchier arborea Shrub-Tree 2,[3,4,5],6 FAC- YES

SHEEP-LAUREL Kalmia angustifolia Shrub 3,[4,5],6 FAC YES 2

SILVER-BERRY,AMERICAN Elaeagnus commutata Shrub [6] UPL NO

SNOWBELL,BIG-LEAF Styrax grandifolia Shrub 3,[4,5,6] FACU-,FACU NO 5

Stormwater Plant List - Woody Vegetation

A.34
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

SPICEBUSH,NORTHERN Lindera benzoin Shrub [2,3],4 FACW- SEASONAL 3-5

STAGGER-BUSH,PIEDMONT Lyonia mariana Shrub 2,[3,4,5,6] FACU-,FAC YES 5

STEEPLE-BUSH Spiraea tomentosa Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FACW YES 4

STRAWBERRY-BUSH,AMERICAN Euonymus americanus Shrub 1,[2,3,4,5], FACU,FACW YES 5

SUGAR-BERRY Celtis laevigata Shrub 1,[2,3,4,5,6 UPL,FACW YES

SWEETSHRUB Calycanthus fertilis Shrub [3,4,5],6 FACU,FACU+ YES 5

SYCAMORE,AMERICAN Platanus occidentalis Tree [2,3],4 FACW- SATURATED

TEABERRY Gaultheria procumbens Shrub 3,[4,5],6 FACU NO 3

TREE,TULIP Liriodendron tulipifera Tree 2,[3,4,5],6 FACU,FAC YES 4

VIBURNUM,MAPLE-LEAF Viburnum acerifolium Shrub 3,[4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO 3

VIBURNUM,POSSUM-HAW Viburnum nudum Shrub [1,2],3 OBL YES 6

WILLOW,BLACK Salix nigra Tree [2,3] FACW+ SEASONAL 3

WILLOW,HEART-LEAF Salix cordata Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FAC,FACW YES 3

WILLOW,SILKY Salix sericea Shrub [1,2],3 OBL YES 3

WILLOW,TALL PRAIRIE Salix humilis Shrub 3,[4,5],6 FACU NO 3

WILLOW,VIRGINIA Itea virginica Shrub [1,2],3 OBL 0-6" 5

WINTERBERRY,COMMON Ilex verticillata Shrub 1,[2,3] FACW+ SEASONAL 3

WITCH-ALDER,DWARF Fothergilla gardenii Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FACW YES

WITCH-HAZEL, AMERICAN Hamamelis virginiana Shrub-Tree 3,[4,5],6 FAC- NO 4

WITCH-HAZEL,AMERICAN Hamamelis virginiana Shrub-Tree 2,3,[4,5],6 FACU,FAC- NO 4

WITHE-ROD Viburnum cassinoides Shrub 1,[2,3,4],5 FACW YES 3

YAUPON Ilex vomitoria Shrub 3,[4,5],6 FAC- YES

YEW,AMERICAN Taxus canadensis Shrub 2,[3,4,5],6 FACU,FAC YES 2

Stormwater Plant List - Woody Vegetation

A.35
 Appendix A.4.2 Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS

INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

ARROW-GRASS,MARSH Triglochin palustre Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

ARROW-HEAD,BROAD-LEAF Sagittaria latifolia Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 0-2'

ARROW-HEAD,COASTAL Sagittaria falcata Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

ARROW-HEAD,GRASS-LEAF Sagittaria graminea Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 0-1'

ARROW-HEAD,NORTHERN Sagittaria cuneata Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

ARROW-HEAD,SHORT-BEAK Sagittaria brevirostra Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

ARROW-HEAD,WAPATO DUCK POTATO Sagittaria latifolia Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 0-2' 3-8

ASTER,ANNUAL SALTMARSH Aster subulatus Annual [1,2],4 OBL YES

ASTER,BOG Aster nemoralis Perennial [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

ASTER,BUSH Aster dumosus Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

ASTER,CALICO Aster lateriflorus Perennial [2,3,4] FACW- SEASONAL

ASTER,CROOKED-STEM Aster prenanthoides Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

ASTER,FLAT-TOP WHITE Aster umbellatus Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

ASTER,NEW ENGLAND Aster novae-angliae Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

ASTER,NEW YORK Aster novi-belgii Perennial [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

ASTER,ONTARIO Aster ontarionis Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

ASTER,PANICLED Aster simplex Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

ASTER,PERENNIAL SALTMARSH Aster tenuifolius Perennial 1,[2,3] OBL YES

ASTER,SMALL WHITE Aster vimineus Perennial [3,4,5] FAC NO

ASTER,SWAMP Aster puniceus Perennial 1,[2,3] OBL YES

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.36
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

ASTER,TRADESCANT Aster tradescanti Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

ASTER,WHITE HEATH Aster ericoides Perennial 3,[4,5,6] FACU NO

ASTER,WILLOW-LEAF Aster praealtus Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

BABY-BLUE-EYES,SMALL-FLOWER Nemophila aphylla Annual [2,3],4 FACW YES

BEACHGRASS,AMERICAN Ammophila breviligulata Grass 4,[5,6] FACU- NO

BEAKRUSH,FASCICULATE Rhynchospora fascicularis Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

BEAKRUSH,GRAY'S Rhynchospora grayi Grass 2,3,4,5,6 FAC NO

BEAKRUSH,PINELAND Rhynchospora perplexa Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

BEAKRUSH,TALL Rhynchospora macrostachya Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

BEARDTONGUE Penstemon digitalis Perennial 3,4,5 FAC NO 3-8

BEARDTONGUE,LONG-SEPAL Penstemon calycosus Perennial [4,5,6] UPL,FACU NO

BEARDTONGUE,LOWLAND Penstemon alluviorum Perennial [2,3,4] FACW YES

BEEBALM Monarda didyma Perennial 3,4,5 FAC+ SATURATED 4-8

BENTGRASS,BROWN Agrostis canina Grass [4,5,6] FACU NO

BENTGRASS,PERENNIAL Agrostis perennans Grass [4,5],6 FACU YES

BENTGRASS,SPREADING Agrostis stolonifera Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

BENTGRASS,WINTER Agrostis hyemalis Grass [3,4],5 FAC NO

BERGAMOT,WILD Monarda fistulosa Perennial [4,5,6] UPL NO

BLACK-EYED SUSAN Rudbeckia hirta (yellow) Perennial 4,5,6 FACU- NO 3-7

BLADDERWORT,COMMON Utricularia macrorhiza Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

BLOODROOT Sanguinaria canadensis Perennial 4,[5,6] UPL,FACU- NO

BLUEBELLS,VIRGINIA Mertensia virginica Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.37
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

BLUE-EYE-GRASS Sisyrinchium capillare Grass [2,3]4 FACW+ YES

BLUEFLAG,SOUTHERN Iris shrevei Perennial 1,[2],3 OBL YES

BLUEFLAG,VIRGINIA Iris virginica Perennial 1,[2],3 OBL YES

BLUEGRASS,BOG Poa paludigena Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

BLUEGRASS,GROVE Poa alsodes Grass 2,[3,4],5 FACW- SEASONAL

BLUEGRASS,LOW Poa alpigena Grass 2,[3,4],5 FACW- SEASONAL

BLUESTEM,BIG Andropogon gerardii Grass [4,5],6 FAC NO

BLUESTEM,BUSHY Andropogon glomeratus Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

BROOM-SEDGE Andropogon virginicus Grass [4,5],6 FACU NO

BULRUSH, HARDSTEMMED Scirpus acutus Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 0-3' 8

BULRUSH, SOFTSTEM Scirpus validus Perennial [1,2,],3 OBL 0-1' 8

BULRUSH,ALKALI Scirpus robustus Grass 1,[2],3 OBL SALT, EDGE

BULRUSH,CLINTON'S Scirpus clintonii Grass [4,5,6] FACU NO

BULRUSH,OLNEY'S Scirpus americanus Grass [1,2],3 OBL 0-6"

BULRUSH,RIVER Scirpus fluviatilis Grass [1,2],3 OBL 0-1'

BULRUSH,SPREADING Scirpus divaricatus Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

BULRUSH,THREE-SQUARE Scirpus pungens Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ 0-6"

BURREED,AMERICAN Sparganium americanum Grass [1,2],3 OBL 0-1'

BURREED,GIANT Sparganium eurycarpum Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

BUSHCLOVER,NARROW-LEAF Lespedeza angustifolia Groundcover 4,5,6 FACU NO

BUTTER-CUP,ALLEGHENY MOUNTAIN Ranunculus allegheniensis Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

BUTTER-CUP,POND Ranunculus subrigidus Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.38
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

BUTTER-CUP,SEASIDE Ranunculus cymbalaria Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

CAMPION, SNOWY Silene nivea Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO 4-8

CARDINAL FLOWER Lobelia cardinalis Perennial 1,[2,3],4 FACW+ YES 2-8

CHICORY Cichorium intybus Perennial 5,6 UPL NO 3-8

CLUB,GOLDEN Orontium aquaticum Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

COLTSFOOT,SWEET Petasites palmatus Perennial 1,[2,3],4 FACW+ YES

COLUMBINE,WILD Aquilegia canadensis Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

CONEFLOWER,CUT-LEAF Rudbeckia laciniata Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

CONEFLOWER,ORANGE Rudbeckia fulgida Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

CONEFLOWER,SWEET Rudbeckia subtomentosa Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

CORDGRASS,BIG Spartina cynosuroides Grass [1,2],3 OBL SALT, EDGE

CORDGRASS,PRAIRIE Spartina pectinata Grass [1,2],3 OBL SALT, EDGE

CORDGRASS,SALTMARSH Spartina alterniflora Grass [1,2],3 OBL SALT, EDGE

CORDGRASS,SALTMEADOW Spartina patens Grass 1,[2,3],4 FACW+ SALT, EDGE

CORNFLOWER Centaurea cyanus Perennial 5,6 UPL NO

CUTGRASS,RICE Leersia oryzoides Grass [1,2],3 OBL 0-6"

DAISY, OXEYE Chrysanthemum levcanthemum Perennial 5,6 UPL NO

DRAGON-HEAD,FALSE Physostegia virginiana Perennial 2,[3,4],5 FAC+ SATURATED

DRAGON-HEAD,PURPLE Physostegia purpurea Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

DRAGON-HEAD,SLENDER Physostegia intermedia Perennial [2,[3,4] FACW- SEASONAL

DRAGON-HEAD,SLENDER-LEAF Physostegia leptophylla Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

DROPSEED,SEASHORE Sporobolus virginicus Grass 1,[2,3],4 FACW+ YES

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.39
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

DUCKWEED Lemna trinervis Perennial [1,2],3 OBL Fre Float

DUCKWEED,LEAST Lemna minima Perennial [1,2],3 OBL Free Float

DUCKWEED,LESSER Lemna minor Perennial [1,2],3 OBL Free Float

DUCKWEED,MINUTE Lemna perpusilla Perennial [1,2],3 OBL Free Float

DUCKWEED,PALE Lemna valdiviana Perennial [1,2],3 OBL Free Float

DWARF PLAINS COREOPSIS Coreopsis tinctoria (dwarf) Annual 3,[4,5],6 FAC- NO

EELGRASS Zostera marina Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 2-6' 3-8

FALSE-HELLEBORE,AMERICAN Veratrum viride Perennial [2,3,4] FACW+ YES

FALSE-SOLOMON'S-SEAL,FEATHER Smilacina racemosa Perennial [4,5],6 FACU- NO

FERN,CINNAMON Osmunda cinnamomea Fern [2,3],4 FACW SATURATE

FERN,NEW YORK Thelypteris noveboracensis Fern [3,4],5 FAC SATURATE

FERN,ROYAL Osmunda regalis Fern [1,2],3 OBL SATURATE

FERN,SENSITIVE Onoclea sensibilis Fern [2,3],4 FACW SATURATE

FESCUE,MEADOW Festuca pratensis Grass [3,4,5,6] FACU- NO

FESCUE,NODDING Festuca obtusa Grass [4,5],6 FACU NO

FESCUE,RED Festuca rubra Groundcover [4,5] FACU NO

FLATSEDGE,MARSH Cyperus pseudovegetus Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

FLATSEDGE,POORLAND Cyperus compressus Grass [3,4],5 FAC+ SATURATE

FLATSEDGE,RUSTY Cyperus odoratus Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

FLATSEDGE,SHORT-LEAF Cyperus brevifolius Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

FLATSEDGE,SLENDER Cyperus filicinus Grass 2,[3,4,5,6] UPL,FAC YES

FLAX, VIRGINIA Linum virginianum Perennial 5,6 FACU NO 1-8

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.40
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

FLOATING-HEART,YELLOW Nymphoides peltata Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

FORGET-ME-NOT,FIELD Myosotis arvensis Perennial [3,4,5,6] UPL NO

FOUR-O'CLOCK,HEART-LEAF Mirabilis nyctaginea Perennial [4,5,6] FACU NO

FOXTAIL,MEADOW Alopecurus geniculatus Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

FOXTAIL,MEADOW Alopecurus pratensis Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

FOXTAIL,MOUSE Alopecurus myosuroides Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

FOXTAIL,SHORT-AWN Alopecurus aequalis Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

FOXTAIL,TUFTED Alopecurus carolinianus Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

GLASSWORT,VIRGINIA Salicornia virginica Perennial [1,2],3 OBL SALT,EDGE

GOLDEN-ROD Solidago austrina Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

GOLDEN-ROD,COAST Solidago spathulata Perennial 4,[5,6] FACU- NO

GOLDEN-ROD,SEASIDE Solidago sempervirens Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

GOLDEN-ROD,STIFF Solidago rigida Perennial 1,2,3 OBL NO

GRASS,BROOM PANIC Dichanthelium scoparium Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

GRASS,CANADA MANNA Glyceria canadensis Grass [1,2],3 OBL 0-1'

GRASS,EASTERN MANNA Glyceria septentrionalis Grass [1,2],3 OBL 0-1'

GRASS,FOWL MANNA Glyceria striata Grass [1,2],3 OBL SEASONAL

GRASS,PANIC Dichanthelium acuminatum Grass [2,3],4 FAC NO

GRASS,PANIC Panicum longifolium Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

GRASS,ROUGH BARNYARD Echinochloa muricata Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

GRASS,SALTMARSH ALKALI Puccinellia fasciculata Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

GRASS,SALTMEADOW Spartina caespitosa Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.41
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

HORNWORT,COMMON Ceratophyllum demersum Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 1-5'

HORSETAIL,ROUGH Equisetum hyemale Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

INDIAN-TOBACCO Lobelia inflata Perennial [4,5,6] FACU NO

IRIS, BLUE WATER Iris versicolor Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 0-6" 2-7

IRIS,BEACH-HEAD Iris hookeri Perennial 4,[5,6] FACU- NO

IRIS,BEACH-HEAD Iris setosa Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

IRIS,COPPER Iris fulva Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

IRIS,LAMANCE Iris brevicaulis Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

JACK-IN-THE-PULPIT,SWAMP Arisaema triphyllum Perennial [2,3],4 FACW SEASONAL

JACOB'S LADDER Polemonium reptans Perennial [4,5],6 FACU NO 3-8

JACOB'S-LADDER,BOG Polemonium van-bruntiae Perennial [3,4],5 FAC+ SATURATED

LILY,CANADA Lilium canadense Perennial 2,[3,4] FAC+ YES

LILY,CAROLINA Lilium michauxii Perennial [3,4,5] FAC NO

LILY,GRAY'S Lilium grayi Perennial 3,[4,5],6 FACU NO

LILY,SOUTHERN RED Lilium catesbaei Perennial [2,3,4] FACW YES

LILY,TURK'S-CAP Lilium superbum Perennial [2,3,4] FACW+ YES

LIZARDS TAIL Saururus cemuus Perennial 2,3,4 OBL 0-1' 2-8

LOBELIA,BOYKIN'S Lobelia boykinii Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

LOBELIA,BROOK Lobelia kalmii Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

LOBELIA,DOWNY Lobelia puberula Perennial [2,3,4] FACW- SEASONAL

LOBELIA,ELONGATED Lobelia elongata Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

LOBELIA,GEORGIA Lobelia georgiana Perennial [2,3,4] FACW YES

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.42
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

LOBELIA,GREAT BLUE Lobelia siphilitica Perennial [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

LOBELIA,NUTTALL'S Lobelia nuttallii Perennial [2,3,4] FACW YES

LOBELIA,PALE-SPIKE Lobelia spicata Perennial [3,4,5] FAC- NO

LOBELIA,SOUTHERN Lobelia amoena Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

LOBELIA,WATER Lobelia dortmanna Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

LOTUS,AMERICAN Nelumbo lutea Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 1-5'

LOTUS,SACRED Nelumbo nucifera Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 1-5'

LOVEGRASS,MEADOW Eragrostis refracta Grass [2,3,]4 FACW YES

LOVEGRASS,PURPLE Eragrostis pectinacea Grass [4,5],6 FAC NO

MALLOW,VIRGINIA SEASHORE Kosteletzkya virginica Perennial [1,2],3 OBL SALT, EDGE

MARSH MARIGOLD Caltha palustris Perennial 3,4 OBL 6"SATURATE 3-8

MARSH SMARTWEED Polygonum hydropiperoides Perennial 2,3 OBL 0-1' 2-8

MARSH SMARTWEED Polygonum puntatum Perennial 2,3 OBL SATURATE 2-8

MARSH-MALLOW,COMMON Althaea officinalis Perennial [1,2,3] FACW+ YES

MEADOW-RUE,PIEDMONT Thalictrum macrostylum Perennial [2,3,4] FACW YES

MILKWORT,MARYLAND Polygala mariana Annual [2,3,4] FACW YES

MONKEY-FLOWER Mimulus ringens Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES 3-8

MONKEY-FLOWER,COMMON LARGE Mimulus guttatus Annual [1,2],3 OBL YES

MOUNTAIN-MINT,NARROW-LEAF Pycnanthemum flexuosum Perennial [2,3,4] FACW YES

MUHLY,MARSH Muhlenbergia glomerata Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

NIMBLE-WILL Muhlenbergia schreberi Grass [3,4,5] FAC NO

NUTRUSH Scleria flaccida Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.43
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

PANSY,FIELD Viola bicolor Annual [4,5,6] FACU NO

PARTRIDGE-BERRY Mitchella repens Groundcover [4,5],6 FACU NO

PENNSYLVANIA SMARTWEED Polygonum pensylvanicum Annual [2,3] FACW 0-6" 2-8

PENNY-WORT,MANY-FLOWER Hydrocotyle umbellata Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 0-1'

PHLOX,FALL Phlox paniculata Perennial [4,5],6 FACU NO

PHLOX,MEADOW Phlox maculata Perennial [2,3,4] FACW YES

PHLOX,WOODLAND Phlox divaricata Perennial [4,5,6] FACU NO

PICKERELWEED Pontederia cordata Perennial 2,3 OBL 0-1' 2-8

PLANTAIN,SEASIDE Plantago maritima Perennial 1,2,3,4 FACW YES

PLUMEGRASS,SUGARCANE Erianthus giganteus Grass [2,3] FACW+ YES

PONDWEED,CLASPING-LEAF Potamogeton perfoliatus Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 1' MIN-6'

PONDWEED,LONG-LEAF Potamogeton nodosus Perennial [1,2] OBL 1' MIN-6'

PONDWEED,SAGO Potamogeton pectinatus Perennial [1,2] OBL 1' MIN-24'

PRIMROSE,BIRDSEYE Primula laurentiana Perennial [4],5 FAC NO

REED, MEADOWGRASS Glyceria maxima Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

REEDGRASS,BLUE-JOINT Calamagrostis canadensis Grass [1,2],3 FACW+ 6"SATURATE

ROCKCRESS,ALPINE Arabis alpina Perennial [3,4,5] FAC+ SATURATE

ROSE-GENTIAN,NARROW-LEAF Sabatia brachiata Annual [4,5,6] FACU NO

RUSH,ARCTIC Juncus arcticus Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

RUSH,GRASS-LEAF Juncus marginatus Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

RUSH,NARROW-PANICLE Juncus brevicaudatus Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

RUSH,NEEDLEGRASS Juncus roemeranus Grass [1,2],3 OBL SALT, EDGE

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.44
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

RUSH,SALTMEADOW Juncus gerardii Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

RUSH,SLIM-POD Juncus diffusissimus Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

RUSH,SOFT Juncus effusus Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ 0-1' 4-8

RUSH,TURNFLOWER Juncus biflorus Grass [2,3],4 FACW YES

RYEGRASS,PERENNIAL Lolium perenne Groundcover [4,5,6] FACU- NO

SALTGRASS,SEASHORE Distichlis spicata Grass [2,3,]4 FACW+ SALT, EDGE

SAWGRASS,SMOOTH Cladium mariscoides Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

SAXIFRAGE,SWAMP Saxifraga pensylvanica Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

SAXIFRAGE,VIRGINIA Saxifraga virginiensis Perennial [4,5] FAC- NO

SEA-LAVENDER,CAROLINA Limonium carolinianum Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

SEA-LAVENDER,NORTHERN Limonium nashii Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

SEA-OATS Uniola paniculata Grass [4,5,6] FACU- NO

SEDGE,BEARDED Carex comosa Grass [1,2],3 OBL 6"SATURATE

SEDGE,BENT Carex styloflexa Grass 2,[3,4] FACW- YES 7-8

SEDGE,CAT-TAIL Carex typhina Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ YES 5-8

SEDGE,CRESTED Carex cristatella Grass [1,2],3,4 FACW YES

SEDGE,FESCUE Carex festucacea Grass [3,4,5] FAC NO 4-6

SEDGE,FOX Carex vulpinoidea Grass [1,2],3 OBL SAT. 0-6"

SEDGE,FRINGED Carex crinita Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

SEDGE,GRACEFUL Carex gracillima Grass [4,5],6 FACU NO 7

SEDGE,HOARY Carex canescens Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES

SEDGE,INLAND Carex interior Grass 1,[2,3] OBL YES 5-8

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.45
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

SEDGE,LAKEBANK Carex lacustris Grass [1,2],3 OBL SAT. 0-2'

SEDGE,LOOSE-FLOWERED Carex laxiflora Grass [4,5,6] FACU NO 5-8

SEDGE,RETRORSE Carex retrorsa Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ SAT. 0-6"

SEDGE,SHALLOW Carex lurida Grass [1,2],3 OBL YES 5-8

SEDGE,SWAN'S Carex swanii Grass [4,5,6] FACU NO 5-8

SEDGE,UPTIGHT Carex stricta Grass [1,2],3 OBL SAT.0-6"

SEDGE,WOOLY Carex lanuginosa Grass [1,2],3 OBL SAT.0-6"

SEDGE,YELLOW-FRUIT Carex annectens Grass [2,3,]4 FACW+ YES

SEEDBOX Ludwigia x lacustris Annual [1,2],3 OBL YES

SENNA,MARYLAND Cassia marilandica Groundcover 3,[4,5] FAC+ SATURATED

SKULLCAP Scutellaria churchilliana Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES

SOLOMON'S-SEAL,GREAT Polygonatum commutatum Perennial [4,5,6] FACU NO

SOLOMON'S-SEAL,SMALL Polygonatum biflorum Perennial [4,5,6] FACU NO

SPIKERUSH,BLUNT Eleocharis obtusa Grass [1,2],3 OBL 0-6"

SPIKERUSH,CREEPING Eleocharis palustris Grass [1,2],3 OBL SEASONAL

SPIKERUSH,ENGELMANN'S Eleocharis engelmannii Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ YES

SPIKERUSH,SQUARE-STEM Eleocharis quadrangulata Grass [1,2],3 OBL 0-1'

SPRING BLUE EYE, MARY Collinsia verna Perennial 4,5,6 FAC- NO 1-8

ST. JOHN'S-WORT,MARSH Triadenum fraseri Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

STARWORT,MARSH Stellaria palustris Perennial [5],6 FACU NO

STONECROP,ROCK Sedum pulchellum Perennial [4,5,6] FACU NO

STONECROP,ROSEROOT Sedum rosea Perennial 3,4,5,6 FACU NO

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.46
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

SWAMP MILKWEED Asclepias incarnata Perennial 2,3 OBL SATURATED 3-8

SWAMP ROSE MALLOW Hibiscus moscheutos Perennial 2,3 OBL 0-3" 4-8

SWAMP SMARTWEED Polygonum coccineum Perennial 2,3,4 OBL 0-3' 2-8

SWAMP-LOOSESTRIFE,HAIRY Decodon verticillatus Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

SWITCHGRASS Panicum virgatum Grass 2,[3,4],5 FAC SEASONAL

TREFOIL, BIRD'S-FOOT Lotus corniculatus Perennial 4,5,6 FACU- NO 2-8

TURTLEHEAD,RED Chelone obliqua Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

TURTLEHEAD,WHITE Chelone glabra Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

VALERIAN,EDIBLE Valeriana edulis Perennial [1,2],3 OBL YES

VERVAIN,BLUE Verbena hastata Perennial 2,3,4 FACW+ YES

VIOLET,APPALACHIAN BLUE Viola appalachiensis Perennial [4,5],6 FACU NO

VIOLET,COASTAL Viola brittoniana Perennial [3,4],5 FAC NO

VIOLET,COMMON BLUE Viola papilionacea Perennial [3,4,5] FAC NO

VIRGINIA WILD RYE Elymus virginicus Grass 2,[3,4] FACW- YES

WATER SMARTWEED Polygonum amphibium Perennial 2,3 OBL 6"-Sat 2-8

WATER-CRESS,TRUE Nasturtium officinale Annual [1,2],3 OBL 2"-1'

WATER-LILY,PYGMY Nymphaea tetragona Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 1-3'

WATER-LILY,WHITE Nymphaea odorata Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 1-3'

WATER-LILY,WHITE Nymphaea tuberosa Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 1-3'

WATER-LILY,YELLOW/ SPATTERDOCK Nuphar advena/luteum Perennial [1,2],3 OBL 1-3'

WHORLED COREOPSIS Coreopsis verticillata Perennial [2,3],4 FACW YES 3-8

WIDGEON-GRASS Ruppia maritima Grass [1,2],3 OBL 1' MIN

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.47
COMMON SCIENTIFIC FORM ZONE INDICATOR TOLERANCE HARDINESS
INUNDATION POLLUTION SALT

WILD-LILY-OF-THE-VALLEY Maianthemum canadense Perennial [4,5],6 FAC- NO

WITCHGRASS,HELLER'S Dichanthelium oligosanthes Grass [4,5,6] FACU NO

WITCHGRASS,NEEDLE-LEAF Dichanthelium aciculare Grass [4,5,6] FACU NO

WOOD-REEDGRASS,SLENDER Cinna latifolia Grass [2,3,4] FACW YES

WOODRUSH,COMMON Luzula multiflora Grass [4,5,6] FACU NO

WOOL-GRASS Scirpus cyperinus Grass [2,3],4 FACW+ SEASONAL

Stormwater Plant List - Herbaceous Vegetation

A.48
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs...........................................References

Section A.5 References

The following is a list of resources used in compiling these guidelines and the list of plant materials:

Art, Henry W. 1986. A Garden of Wildflowers, 101 Native Species and How to Grow Them.
Storey Communications, Inc. Pownal, VT.

Brown, Melvin L. and Brown, Russell G. 1984. Herbaceous Plants of Maryland. Port City Press.
Baltimore, MD.

Brown, Melvin L. and Brown, Russell G. 1992. Woody Plants of Maryland. Port City Press.
Baltimore, MD.

Clausen, Ruth Rogers and Ekstrom, Nicolas, H. 1989. Perennials for American Gardens. Random
House. New York, NY.

Dirr, Michael A. 1990. Manual of Woody Landscape Plants, Their Identification, Ornamental
Characteristics, Culture, Propagation, and Uses. 4th Edition. Stipes Publishing Company.
Champaign, IL.

Engineering Technology Associates Inc. and Biohabitats, Inc. (ETA&B). 1993. Design Manual for
Use of Bioretention in Stormwater Management. Prince Georges County Dept. of Environmental
Resources. Upper Marlboro, MD.

Greenlee, John. 1992. The Encyclopedia of Ornamental Grasses, How to Grow and Use Over 250
Beautiful and Versatile Plants. Rodale Press. Emmas, PA.

Hill, Steven R. and Duke, Peggy K. 1985-86. 100 Poisonous Plants of Maryland. Bulletin No. 314.
University of Maryland Cooperative Extension Services. Ellicott City, MD.

Longenecker, G. 1983. Woody Plant List for West Virginia. Landscape Architecture Department,
Division of Resource Management, West Virginia University. Morgantown, WV.

Maryland Department of the Environment. 1994. Water Management Administration and Maryland
Soil Conservation Service. 1994 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and
Sediment Control. Baltimore, MD.

Maryland Natural Heritage Program, Department of Natural Resources. 1994. Invasive and Exotic
Plants of Wetlands and Floodplains in Maryland. Maryland Natural Heritage Program, Department
of Natural Resources, Tawes State Office Building. Annapolis, MD.

A.49
Appendix A. Landscaping Guidance for Stormwater BMPs...........................................References
Maryland Natural Heritage Program, Department of Natural Resources. 1994. Rare Species of
Submerged Aquatic Vegetation in Maryland. Maryland Natural Heritage Program, Department of
Natural Resources, Tawes State Office Building. Annapolis, MD.

Miles, B. 1996. Wildflower Perennials for Your Garden, A Detailed Guide to Years of Bloom from
America's Native Heritage. Stackpole Books. Mechanicsburg, PA.

Newcomb, L. 1977. Newcomb's Wildflower Guide. Little Brown and Company. Boston, MA.

Reed, Porter B. Jr. 1998. National List of Plant Species that Occur in Wetlands: Northeast (Region
1), For National Wetlands Inventory. U.S. Fish and Wildlife Service, U.S. Department of the
Interior, Washington, D.C.

Schueler, Thomas R. 1987. Controlling Urban Runoff: A Practical Manual for Planning and
Designing Urban BMP's. Department of Environmental Programs Metropolitan Washington
Council of Governments, Metropolitan Information Center. Washington, D.C.

Schueler, Thomas R. 1996. Design of Stormwater Wetland Systems: Guidelines for Creating
Diverse and Effective Stormwater Wetland Systems in the Mid-Atlantic Region. Department of
Environmental Programs Metropolitan Washington Council of Governments, Metropolitan
Information Center. Washington, D.C.

Schueler, Thomas R. and Claytor, Richard A. 1997. Design of Stormwater Filtering Systems:
Appendix B and C. Chesapeake Bay Consortium. Silver Spring, MD.

The Pennsylvania State University, College of Agriculture, Cooperative Extension Service. Weed
Identification. File No. IVC9 10M386, U. Ed. 85-439 and File No. IVC9 10M587 U.Ed. 86-356.
The Pennsylvania State University, College of Agriculture, Cooperative Extension Service.
University Park, PA.

Thunhorst, Gwendolyn A. 1993. Wetland Planting Guide for the Northeastern United States: Plants
for Wetland Creation, Restoration, and Enhancement, Environmental Concern, Inc. St. Michael,
MD.

Tiner, Ralph W. Jr. 1988. Field Guide to Non-Tidal Wetland Identification. U.S. Fish and Wildlife
Service and Maryland Department of Natural Resources and Maryland Geological Survey.
Annapolis, MD.

A.50
NRCS-MD Code No. 378 Pond Standards/Specifications
B.1
Appendix
 Pond MD-378-1

supply, or temporary storage is justified and it is

USDA feasible and practicable to build a pond which
NATURAL RESOURCES will meet local and state law requirements.
CONSERVATION SERVICE
MARYLAND This standard establishes the minimum accept-
able quality for the design and construction of
CONSERVATION PRACTICE ponds if:
STANDARD
1. Failure of the dam will not result in loss of
POND life; in damage to homes, commercial or in-
dustrial buildings, main highways, or rail-
CODE 378 roads; or interruption of the use or service of
(Reported in No.) public utilities.

2. The product of the storage times the effective

height of the dam is less than 3,000. Storage
is the volume, in acre-feet, in the reservoir
DEFINITION below the elevation of the crest of the emer-
gency spillway.
A water impoundment made by constructing a
dam or an embankment or by excavating a pit or The effective height of the dam is the differ-
dugout. ence in elevation, in feet, between the emer-
gency spillway crest and the lowest point on
In this standard, ponds constructed by the first a profile taken along the centerline of the
method are referred to as embankment ponds, dam, excluding the cutoff trench. If there is
and those constructed by the second method are no emergency spillway, the top of the dam
referred to as excavated ponds. Ponds con- becomes the upper limit for determining the
structed by both excavation and the embankment storage and the effective height.
methods are classified as embankment ponds if
the depth of water impounded against the em- 3. For dams in rural areas, the effective height
bankment at the principal spillway storm design of the dam (as defined above) is 35 feet or
high water elevation is 3 feet or more (See Table less and the dam is hazard class ”a”. For
1). dams in urban areas, the effective height of
the dam is 20 feet or less and the dam is haz-
This 3 feet shall be measured from the low point ard class ”a”.
on the upstream toe of the embankment to the
design high water. Ponds exceeding any of the above conditions
shall be designed and constructed according to
PURPOSE the requirements of Technical Release 60.
To provide water for livestock, fish and wildlife, Exemptions - Soil Conservation District small
recreation, fire control, crop and orchard spray- pond approval is not required for small class “a”
ing, and other related uses, and to maintain or structures where the following exists:
improve water quality. This standard also ap-
plies to stormwater management ponds. 1. Ponds or other structures have less than four
(4) feet of embankment, or
CONDITIONS WHERE PRACTICE
APPLIES 2. The storage at emergency spillway design
high water elevation according to Table 1
General - This practice applies where it is de- does not exceed 40,000 cubic feet, and the
termined that stormwater management, water

Conservation practice standards are reviewed periodically, and updated if needed. To obtain the current version of this standard,
contact the Natural Resources Conservation Service

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-2

height of the embankment is 6 feet or less. Soils Investigation - A soils investigation is re-
quired on all ponds. As a minimum it shall in-
The height of the embankment shall be measured clude information along the centerline of the pro-
from the top of the dam to the lowest point of posed dam, in the emergency spillway location,
excavation, excluding the cutoff trench, along and the planned borrow area. The type of
the centerline of the dam. equipment used and the extent of the investiga-
tion will vary from site to site. All investigations
In addition, an embankment pond that meets the shall be logged using the Unified Soil Classifica-
criteria below shall be considered an excavated tion System.
pond and is also exempt from small pond ap-
proval. Road Embankments - Where road embankments
are being designed to impound a specific volume
1. The calculation of 10H+20=L, where of water, either as a permanent pool or tempo-
H=height from the pond bottom to the top of rary stormwater storage, special design and
the dam, is provided, and evaluation criteria may be required as deter-
mined by Appendix B.
2. The projection of L horizontally downstream
from the pond bottom is below the existing CONSIDERATIONS
or proposed ground, and
Water Quantity - The following items should be
3. The existing or proposed downstream ground considered for water quantity:
slope within the projection of L is less than
10% at any point. 1. Effects upon components of the water
budget, especially effects on volumes and
The review and design of such class “a” struc- rates of runoff, infiltration, evaporation, tran-
tures shall be based on sound engineering judg- spiration, deep percolation, and ground water
ment assuring a stable outfall for the ten (10) recharge.
year, 24-hour storm event.
2. Variability of effects caused by seasonal or
Site Conditions - Site Conditions shall be such climatic changes.
that runoff from the design storm can be safely
passed through (1) a natural or constructed emer- 3. Effects on the downstream flows or aquifers
gency spillway, (2) a combination of a principal that could affect other water uses or users.
spillway and an emergency spillway, or (3) a
principal spillway. 4. Potential for multiple use.

Drainage Area - The drainage area above the 5. Effects on the volume of downstream flow to
pond must be protected against erosion to the prohibit undesirable environmental, social or
extent that expected sedimentation will not economic effects.
shorten the planned effective life of the structure.
Water Quality - The following items should be
For ponds whose primary purpose is to trap considered for water quality:
sediment for water quality, adequate storage
should be provided to trap the projected sedi- 1. Effects on erosion and the movement of
ment delivery from the drainage area for the life sediment, pathogens, and soluble and sedi-
of the pond. ment attached substances that are carried by
runoff.
If the intent is to maintain a permanent pool, the
drainage area should be at least 4 acres for each 2. Effects on the visual quality of on-site and
acre-foot of permanent storage. These recom- downstream water resources.
mendations may be reduced if a dependable
source of ground water or diverted surface water 3. Short-term and construction-related effects of
contributes to the pond. The water quality shall this practice on the quality of downstream
be suitable for its intended use. water courses.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-3

4. Effects of water level control on the tempera- age non-inhabited buildings, agricultural
tures of downstream waters to prevent unde- land, floodplains or county roads.
sired effects on aquatic and wildlife commu-
nities. Class “b” - Structures located in rural, agri-
cultural, or urban areas where failure may
5. Effects on wetlands and water-related wild- damage isolated homes, main highways or
life habitats. minor railroads or cause interruption of use
or service of relatively important public utili-
6. Effects of water levels on soil nutrient proc- ties.
esses such as plant nitrogen use or denitrifi-
cation. Class “c” - Structures located where failure
may cause loss of life or serious damage to
7. Effects of soil water level control on the soil homes, industrial and commercial buildings,
chemistry, soil water, or downstream water. important public utilities, main highways, or
railroads.
8. Potential for earth moving to uncover or re-
distribute sulfidic bearing soils. “Rural areas” is defined as those areas in which
residents live on farms, in unincorporated set-
CRITERIA tlements, or in incorporated villages or small
towns. It is where agriculture, including wood-
Embankment Ponds land activities, and extractive industries, includ-
ing seafood harvesting, provides the primary
Structure Hazard Classification - Documenta- employment base for residents and where such
tion of the classification of dams is required. enterprises are dependent on local residents for
Documentation is to include but is not limited to labor.
location and description of dam, configuration of
the valley, description of existing development Non-rural areas shall be classified as urban.
(houses, utilities, highways, railroads, farm or
commercial buildings, and other pertinent im- Peak Breach Discharge Criteria - Breach rout-
provements), potential for future development, ings are used to help delineate the area poten-
and recommended classification. It is also to tially impacted by inundation should a dam fail
include results obtained from breach routings, if and can be used to aid dam classification. The
breach routings are used as part of the classifica- breach hydrograph is the outflow hydrograph
tion process. The class (“a”, “b”, and “c”) as attributed to the sudden release of water in reser-
contained in this document is related to the po- voir storage. This is due to a dam breach during
tential hazard to life and property that might re- non-storm conditions.
sult from a sudden major breach of the earth em-
bankment. Structure classification and land use Stream routings made of the breach hydrograph
for runoff determination must take into consid- are to be based upon topographic data and hy-
eration the anticipated changes in land use draulic methodologies mutually consistent in
throughout the expected life of the structure. their accuracy and commensurate with the risk
The classification of a dam is the responsibility being evaluated.
of the designer, and subject to review and con-
currence of the approving authority. The minimum peak discharge of the breach hy-
drograph, regardless of the techniques used to
The classification of a dam is determined only by analyze the downstream inundation area, is as
the potential hazard from failure, not by the cri- follows:
teria. Classification factors in the National En-
gineering Manual, as supplemented, are given Qmax = 3.2 Hw2.5 where,
below:
Qmax = the peak breach discharge, cfs.
Class “a” - Structures located in rural, agri-
cultural or urban areas dedicated to remain in Hw = depth of water at the dam at the time of
flood tolerant usage where failure may dam- failure, feet. This is measured to

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-4

the crest of the emergency spill- for infrequent vehicle crossings, the minimum
way or to design high water, if no top width shall be 10 feet. Guardrails or other
emergency spillway exists. Use safety measures are to be used where necessary
“nonstorm” conditions down- and are to meet the requirements of the responsi-
stream of the dam. ble road authority.

Where breach analysis has indicated that only Side Slopes - The combined upstream and down-
overtopping of downstream roads will occur, the stream side slopes of the settled embankment
following guidelines will be used: shall not be less than five horizontal to one verti-
cal (5:1) with neither slope steeper than 2:1. If
Class Depth of Flow the dam is used as a road crossing with a top
(d) ft. width greater than 26 feet, then the combined
side slopes of the settled embankment shall not
“a” d<1.5 be less than 4 horizontal to one vertical (4:1)
“b” & “c” d>1.5 with neither slope steeper than 2:1. Slopes must
be designed to be stable in all cases, even if flat-
Use and importance of the roadway shall be con- ter side slopes are required.
sidered when making a classification.
Earth Cuts - If cuts in an existing fill or in natu-
Hydrology - Principal and emergency spillways ral ground are required for the rehabilitation of
will be designed within the limitations shown on an existing pond spillway or the construction of
TABLE 1. The storm duration used shall be 24 a new pond, the slope of the bonding surfaces
hours except where TR-60 is specified. The between the existing material in place and the fill
pond shall be designed to safely pass the base to be placed shall not be steeper than a ratio of
flow along with volume and peak rates of runoff two horizontal to one vertical (2:1).
from design storms, specified in Table 1. All
storm water management ponds shall be de- Foundation Cutoff - A cutoff trench of rela-
signed using urban criteria. This can be done by tively impervious material shall be provided un-
using principal and emergency spillways. The der the entire length of the dam and shall be lo-
following shall be used to determine runoff rates cated at or upstream from the centerline of the
and volumes: dam. The cutoff trench shall have a bottom
width adequate to accommodate the equipment
1. NRCS “Engineering Field Handbook, Part used for excavation, backfill and compaction op-
650” or; erations, with the minimum width being 4 feet,
and shall have side slopes no steeper than one
2. NRCS, NEH, Section 4, Hydrology” or; horizontal to one vertical. Minimum depth shall
be 4 feet.
3. NRCS, TR-55, “Urban Hydrology for Small
Watersheds” or; Impervious Core - Any impervious core within
the embankment shall be located at or upstream
4. NRCS, TR-20, “Computer Program for Pro- from the centerline of the dam, and shall extend
ject Formulation” or, up the abutments to the 10-year water surface
elevation. The impervious core shall extend ver-
5. Computer programs using NRCS hydrology tically from the cutoff trench up to the 10-year
methods with identifiable inputs and outputs water surface elevation throughout the embank-
as approved by the reviewing agency. ment.

Earth Embankment Seepage Control - Seepage control is to be in-

cluded: (1) if pervious layers are not intercepted
Top Width - The minimum top width of the dam by the cutoff; (2) if seepage from the abutments
is shown in Table 2. When the embankment top may create a wet embankment; (3) if the phreatic
is to be used as a public road, the minimum line intersects the downstream slope; or (4) if
width is to be 16 feet for one-way and 26 feet for special conditions require drainage to insure a
two-way traffic. If the embankment is to be used stable dam. The phreatic line shall be drawn on

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-5

a 4:1 slope starting on the inside slope at the riser. The inlets and outlets shall be designed
normal pool elevation. For stormwater manage- and analyzed to function satisfactorily for the
ment ponds, normal pool shall be considered as full range of flow and hydraulic head anticipated.
the 10-year water surface elevation.
The riser shall be analyzed for flotation assum-
Seepage may be controlled by (1) foundation ing all orifices and pipes are plugged. The factor
abutment or embankment drains; (2) reservoir of safety against flotation shall be 1.2 or greater.
blanketing; or (3) a combination of these meas-
ures. Foundation drains may control seepage Pipe Conduits - Pipe conduits under or through
encountered in the cutoff trench during construc- the dam shall meet the following requirements:
tion. These drains must be located downstream
of the dam centerline and outside the limits of 1. All pipes shall be circular in cross section
the proposed cutoff trench. All drains must be except for cast-in-place reinforced concrete
designed according to the section Principal Spill- box culverts.
way, Conduit Piping and Seepage Control.
2. Pipe shall be capable of withstanding the ex-
Wave Erosion Protection - Where needed to ternal loading without yielding, buckling, or
protect the face of the dam, special wave protec- cracking.
tion measures such as a bench, rock riprap, sand-
gravel, soil cement or special vegetation shall be 3. Pipe strength shall be not less than those
provided. (Reference NRCS Technical Releases shown on Tables 3, 4 and 5 for corrugated
56 & 69) steel, aluminum, and plastic pipes and appli-
cable ASTM’s for other materials.
Freeboard - The top elevation of the settled em-
bankment shall be determined in accordance 4. Where inlet or outlet flared sections are used,
with minimum criteria established in Table 1 they shall be made from materials compatible
with the pipe.
Allowance for Settlement - The design height of
the dam shall be increased by the amount needed 5. All pipe joints shall be made watertight by
to insure that the design top of fill elevation will the use of flanges with gaskets, coupling
be maintained after all settlement has taken bands with gaskets, bell and spigot ends with
place. This increase shall not be less than 5 per- gaskets, or by welding. See Construction
cent, except where detailed soil testing and lab Specifications for details.
analyses indicate a lesser amount is adequate.
6. The joints between sections of pipe shall be
Principal Spillway designed to remain watertight after joint rota-
tion and elongation caused by foundation
Capacity - A conduit, with needed appurte- consolidation.
nances, shall be placed under or through the
dam, except where a weir type structure is used. The capacity of the pipe conduit shall be ade-
The minimum capacity of the principal spillway quate to discharge long duration, continuous or
shall be that required in Table 1. frequent flows without flow through the emer-
gency spillway. The diameter of the pipe shall
Crest Elevation of Inlet - The crest elevation of be not less than 6 inches.
the principal spillway shall be no less than 1.0
foot below the crest of the emergency spillway. For dams 20 feet or less in effective height, the
The crest elevation is the invert elevation of the following pipe materials are acceptable: cast-
lowest opening 6 inches or larger in any direc- iron, ductile iron, steel, corrugated steel or alu-
tion. minum, concrete with rubber gaskets, plastic,
and cast-in-place reinforced concrete box cul-
The inlet or riser size for the pipe drops shall be verts. Plastic pipe that will be exposed to direct
such that the flow through the structure goes sunlight should be made of ultraviolet resistant
from weir-flow control to pipe-flow control materials and protected by coating or shielding.
without going into orifice-flow control in the Connections of pipe to less flexible pipe or struc-

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-6

tures must be designed to avoid stress concentra- Anti-seep collars shall be installed around all
tions that could rupture the pipe. conduits through earth fills according to the fol-
lowing criteria:
For dams over 20 feet in effective height, con-
duits are to be reinforced concrete pipe, cast-in- 1. Sufficient collars shall be placed to increase
place reinforced concrete box culverts, corru- the seepage length along the conduit by a
gated steel, ductile iron, welded steel or alumi- minimum of 15 percent of the pipe length lo-
num pipe. The maximum height of fill over any cated within the saturation zone.
principal spillway steel, aluminum, or plastic
pipe must not exceed 25 feet. 2. The assumed normal saturation zone shall be
determined by projecting a line at a slope (4)
Concrete pipe shall have a concrete cradle ex- horizontal to (1) vertical from the point
tending up the sides of the pipe at least 50% of where the normal water elevation meets the
its outside diameter with minimum thickness of upstream slope to a point where this line in-
6 inches. Where a concrete cradle is not needed tersects the invert of the pipe conduit or bot-
for structural reasons, flowable fill may be used tom of the cradle, whichever is lower. For
as described in the CONSTRUCTION Stormwater Management ponds, the phreatic
SPECIFICATIONS section of this standard. line starting elevation shall be the 10-year
Gravel bedding is not permitted. Cantilever out- water elevation.
let sections, if used, shall be designed to with-
stand the cantilever load. Pipe supports shall be 3. Maximum collar spacing shall be 14 times
provided when needed. Other suitable devices the required projection above the pipe. The
such as plunge basin, stilling basin, impact basin, minimum collar spacing shall be 5 times the
or rock riprap spreader should be used to provide required minimum projection.
a safe outlet. Cathodic protection is to be pro-
vided for welded steel and corrugated steel pipe 4. Anti-seep collars should be placed within the
where the need and importance of the structure saturated zone. In cases where the spacing
warrant. Cathodic protection should normally be limit will not allow this, at least one collar
provided for corrugated steel pipe where the will be in the saturated zone.
saturated soil resistivity is less than 4,000 ohms-
cm or the pH is lower than 5. The National 5. All anti-seep collars and their connections to
Handbook of Conservation Practices, Irrigation the conduit shall be watertight and made of
Water Conveyance, Steel Pipeline Standard material compatible with the conduit.
(430-FF), provides criteria for cathodic protec-
tion of welded steel pipes. 6. Collar dimensions shall extend a minimum of
2 feet in all directions around the pipe.
Multiple Conduits - Where multiple conduits are
used, there shall be sufficient space between the 7. Anti-seep collars shall be placed a minimum
conduits and the installed anti-seep collars to al- of two feet from pipe joints except where
low for backfill material to be placed between flanged joints are used.
the conduits by the earth moving equipment and
for easy access by hand operated compaction 8. For pipes with concrete cradles, the projec-
equipment. This distance between conduits shall tion shall be measured from the cradle.
be equal to or greater than half the pipe diameter
but not less than 2 feet. Filter and drainage diaphragms are always rec-
ommended, but are required when the following
Conduit Piping and Seepage Control - Seepage conditions are encountered:
along pipe conduit spillways extending through
the embankment shall be controlled by use of (1) 1. The pond requires design according to TR-
anti-seep collars, or (2) filter and drainage dia- 60.
phragm. Seepage control will not be required on
pipes 6 inches in diameter or less. 2. Embankment soils with high piping potential
such as Unified Classes GM, SM, and ML.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-7

Filter and drainage diaphragms shall be designed toe cover such as riprap can be effective if pro-
in accordance with procedures from NRCS TR- tected with a properly designed filter between
60, Earth Dams and Reservoirs, Section 6, Prin- the sand drain material and the riprap cover.
cipal Spillways, as described below.
If pipe drain outlets are used, consideration must
The drainage diaphragm shall usually consist of be given to the structural design of the conduit in
sand, meeting the fine concrete aggregate re- resisting external loading and the design life of
quirements (ASTM C-33). A design analysis the pipe must be consistent with the design life
shall be made using Part 633 of the National En- of the dam and physical conditions of the site.
gineering Manual, Chapter 26, Gradation Design Also, the pipe must be designed for capacity and
of Sand and Gravel Filters. size of perforations as outlined in NEH Part 633,
Chapter 26 and Soil Mechanics Note 3. If the
The drainage diaphragm shall be a minimum of 3 pipe corrodes, is crushed by exterior loading, or
ft thick and extend vertically upward and hori- is otherwise damaged, the outlet of the filter dia-
zontally at least three times the conduit outside phragm is lost and a piping failure may occur.
diameter or the width of the cradle, whichever is
greater except that: The design quantity (Q) used to size the outlet
can be calculated by Darcy's Law, Q = kiA
1. The vertical extension need be no higher than where:
the maximum potential reservoir water level, and
k = permeability of the embankment or drain
2. The horizontal extension need be no further outlet material (ft/day)
than 5 feet beyond the sides and slopes of any
excavation made to install the conduit. i = hydraulic gradient where i = h/l

3. The minimum soil cover over any portion of h = head differential (ft)
the filter-drainage diaphragm measured normal
to the nearest embankment surface shall be at l = seepage path (ft)
least 2 feet.
A = area of flow (diaphragm or outlet) (ft2)
It shall extend vertically downward at least 2 ft
beneath the conduit outside diameter or bottom Anti-vortex Devices - Drop inlet spillways are to
of the cradle, whichever is greater. The drainage have adequate anti-vortex devices. Splitter type
diaphragm shall be located immediately down- anti-vortex devices shall be placed in line with
stream of the cutoff trench, approximately paral- the barrel. An anti-vortex device is not required
lel to the centerline of the dam but no further up- if weir control is maintained in the riser through
stream than the centerline of the dam. all flow stages.

The drainage diaphragm shall outlet at the em- Trash Racks - All pipe and inlet structures shall
bankment downstream toe, preferably using a have a trash rack. Openings for trash racks shall
drain backfill envelope continuously along the be no larger than 1/2 of the barrel conduit diame-
pipe to where it exits the embankment. Protect- ter, but in no case less than 6 inches.
ing drain fill from surface erosion will be neces-
sary. Flush grates for trash racks are not acceptable.
Inlet structures that have flow over the top shall
It is required that the outlet for the filter dia- have a non-clogging trash rack such as a hood-
phragm is sized to safely discharge the design type inlet extending a minimum of 8 inches be-
flow. Where a drain backfill envelope is used as low the weir openings, which allows passage of
the outlet, it is recommended that it be designed water from underneath the trash rack into the
so the hydraulic head does not exceed the depth riser.
of the drain outlet. The exposed area of the drain
outlet must also be protected from external at- For inlet structures with solid covered tops, the
tack such as surface erosion and slope instability bottom of the cover slab must be set at an eleva-
due to horizontal seepage pressures. A weighted

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-8

tion to prevent orifice flow control before pipe The emergency spillway shall (1) safely pass the
flow control governs. storm design peak or (2) the storm runoff shall
be routed through the reservoir. The routing
Low stage releases, where the opening is larger shall start with the water surface at the elevation
than 6 inches, shall have a non-clogging trash of the crest of the principal spillway, or at the
rack with openings no larger than half the low water surface after 10 days drawdown, which-
flow dimension. ever is higher. The 10-day drawdown shall be
computed from the crest of the emergency spill-
For all low stage releases 6 inches or smaller in way or from the elevation that would be attained
any direction, the emergency spillway design had the entire design storm been impounded,
storm shall be routed assuming the release has whichever is lower. Emergency spillways are to
failed, using storage and discharge only above provide for passage of the design flow at a non-
the elevation of the next opening larger than 6 erosive velocity to a point downstream where the
inches in all directions. This design storm rout- dam will not be endangered.
ing shall not overtop the dam.
Component Parts - Earth spillways are open
Drain Pipe - A pipe with a suitable valve shall channels and usually consist of an inlet channel,
be provided to drain the pool area, where needed level section, and an exit channel. The minimum
for proper pond management. The principal difference in elevation between the crest of the
spillway conduit may serve as a pond drain, emergency spillway and the settled top of dam
when so located, to accomplish this function. shall be 2.0 feet.

Water Supply Pipes or Utilities - All pipes Cross-Section - Earth spillways shall be trape-
through the dam shall have an inside diameter of zoidal and shall be located in undisturbed earth.
not less than 1 1/4 inches. Pipes / utilities not The side slopes shall be stable for the material in
parallel to the axis of the dam shall meet all prin- which the spillway is to be constructed, but not
cipal spillway requirements (i.e. filter dia- steeper than 2:1. The emergency spillway shall
phragm, embankment soils, etc.). Pipes / utilities have a bottom width of not less than 8 feet.
parallel to the axis of the dam shall be con-
structed with no granular bedding. The inlet channel may be curved to fit existing
topography; however, it should be flared to allow
Earth Emergency Spillways unrestricted flow to the level section. The level
section should be located as near the centerline
Emergency spillways are provided to convey of dam as possible. The level section shall be 25
large flood flows safely past earth embankments. feet in length, and shall be rectangular or square.
An emergency spillway must be provided for
each dam, unless the principal spillway is large Exit channel centerline shall be perpendicular to
enough to pass the routed design hydrograph the level section downstream edge and must be
peak discharge and any trash without overtop- straight for a distance beyond the downstream
ping the dam. The only design that may be util- toe, so that discharges will not reach the earth
ized without an emergency spillway is: a princi- embankment. The grade of the exit channel shall
pal spillway with a cross-sectional area of 3 fall within the range established by discharge
square feet or more and an inlet that will not requirement and permissible velocities.
clog, such as a hood-type inlet which allows pas-
sage of water from underneath the trash rack into The crest of any “token” spillway will be located
the riser. at or above the 100-year storm elevation in un-
disturbed earth and have a minimum depth of
Capacity - The minimum capacity of emergency one foot and bottom width of 8 feet.
spillways shall be that required to pass the peak
flow expected from a design storm of the fre- Permissible Velocities - Earth spillways shall be
quency and duration shown in Table 1 less any designed for non-erosive velocities through the
reduction creditable to conduit discharge and control section and to a point downstream where
detention storage. the dam will not be endangered. The maximum
permissible velocity for the grass and grass mix-

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-9

ture to be used shall be selected from Table 6. will not be allowed within the buffer zone (15
Velocities exceeding these values will require feet from the toe of the dam), and will not be al-
use of linings other than vegetation. lowed within a 25-foot radius around the inlet
structure.
Infiltration / Water Quality Basins – Ponds, ei-
ther excavated or embankment, that are designed Roadway Embankments - Trees and/or shrubs
solely for infiltration or as water quality basins will not be allowed on any embankment, except
will have an emergency spillway. The capacity for dry stormwater management structures that
of the spillway will be determined by the follow- will be utilized as a roadway under all the fol-
ing procedure: lowing conditions:

Pass the routed 100-Year Storm with 1 foot of 1. Plantings may only be on top of the dam
freeboard to the top of dam elevation. Routing along the roadway and/or sidewalks.
will begin at the emergency spillway crest.
2. The top of the dam shall have a minimum of
Structural Emergency Spillways 50-foot top width.

Chutes or drops, when used for principal spill- 3. Plantings will not be allowed on the side
ways or principal-emergency or emergency spill- slopes of the embankment.
ways, shall be designed in accordance with the
principals set forth in the National Engineering 4. Plantings will not be allowed within the
Handbook, Section 5 “Hydraulics”; Section 11 buffer zone (15 feet from the toe of the dam).
“Drop Spillways”; and Section 14 “Chute Spill-
ways”. The minimum capacity of a structural 5. Plantings will only be shallow rooted (roots
spillway shall be that required to pass the peak less than 3’ deep) trees or shrubs.
flow expected from a design storm of the fre-
quency and duration shown in Table 1 less any 6. The pond is a “dry” structure (normal pool
reduction creditable to conduit discharge and not exceeding 18 inches).
detention storage.
7. A landscape plan showing type and location
Visual Resource Design of planting must be prepared by a Landscape
Architect certifying shallow rooted plants
The visual design of ponds shall be carefully (roots less than 3’ deep) under mature condi-
considered in areas of high public visibility and tions.
those associated with recreation. The underlying
criterion for all visual design is appropriateness. 8. A minimum of 3 feet freeboard above the
The shape and form of ponds, excavated mate- 100-year water surface elevation must be
rial, and plantings are to relate visually to their maintained.
surroundings and to their functions.
9. The structure is a low hazard (Class “a”)
The embankment may be shaped to blend with pond.
the natural topography. The edge of the pond
should be shaped so that it is generally curvilin- Safety
ear rather than rectangular. Excavated material
shall be shaped so that the final form is smooth, Special considerations should be made for safety
flowing, and fitting to the adjacent landscape and access during the design of a pond. Meas-
rather than angular geometric mounds. If feasi- ures to be considered may include fencing, slope
ble, islands may be added for visual interest and benching, access roads, flattened side slopes, etc.
to attract wildlife. When fencing a structure, the fence will be lo-
cated so it will not interfere with the operation of
Trees and Shrubs the emergency spillway.

Non-Roadway Embankments - Trees and/or

shrubs will not be allowed on any embankment,

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-10

Excavated Ponds tance equal to the depth of the pond, but not
less than 12 feet from the edge of the pond;
General - Excavated ponds that create a failure
potential through a constructed or created em- 3. Shaped to a designed form that blends visu-
bankment will be designed as embankment ally with the landscape;
ponds. Excavated ponds that include a pipe or
weir outlet control system for urban stormwater 4. Used for low embankment and leveling; or
management shall be designed using the princi-
pal and emergency spillway hydrologic criteria 5. Hauled away.
for Embankment Ponds, Table 1.
Reservoir Area for Wet Ponds
Side Slopes - Side slopes of excavated ponds
shall be such that they will be stable and shall For most ponds, the topography of the site shall
not be steeper than 1 horizontal to 1 vertical. permit storage of water at a depth and volume
Flatter slopes are to be utilized where safety for that ensures a dependable supply, considering
children, livestock watering, etc. is a design fac- beneficial use, sedimentation, season of use, and
tor. evaporation and seepage losses. Soils in the res-
ervoir shall be impervious enough to minimize
Perimeter Form - Where the structures are used seepage losses or shall be of a type that sealing is
for recreation or are located in high public view, practical.
the perimeter or edge should be shaped to a cur- Excavation and shaping required to permit the
vilinear form. reservoir area to suitably serve the planned pur-
pose shall be included in the construction plans.
Inlet Protection - When the excavated pond is a
bypass type and water is being diverted from a Reservoirs designed specifically for fish produc-
stream, the minimum size inlet line shall be a 4- tion or wildlife management shall follow design
inch diameter pipe. All state laws concerning criteria in the standards and specifications for
water use and downstream rights shall be strictly Fish Pond Management (MD-399) and Wildlife
adhered to. Wetland Habitat Management (MD-644), as ap-
propriate.
Where surface water enters the pond in a natural
or excavated channel, the side slope of the pond
shall be protected against erosion.

Outlet Protection – An excavated pond with a

low embankment (combination excavation / em-
bankment pond) shall be designed to ensure a
stable outfall for the 10-year, 24-hour frequency
storm.

Placement of Excavated Material - The material

excavated from the pond shall be placed in one
of the following ways so that its weight will not
endanger the stability of the pond side slopes and
where it will not be washed back into the pond
by rainfall:

1. Uniformly spread to a height not exceeding 3

feet with the top graded to a continuous slope
away from the pond;

2. Uniformly placed or shaped reasonably well

with side slopes no steeper than 2 to 1. The
excavated material will be placed at a dis-

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-11

TABLE 1

HYDROLOGIC CRITERIA FOR PONDS

Height To Normal
Storage Spillway Capacity5
Watershed Emergency Surface
Height
Structure Area Spwy Crest Area Principal2 Emergency3, 4 Freeboard6
Product1
Class (Acres) (Feet) (Acres) Rural Urban Rural Urban Rural & Urban

“c” & “b” Any Any Any Any TR 60 TR 60 TR 60 TR 60 TR 60

“a” 3,000 or Any Any Any TR 60 TR 60 TR 60 TR 60 TR 60
more
320 >20 - 35 >12 25 YR TR 60 100 YR 100 YR
2.0’ above E.S.
Less and <20 >12 10 YR 25 YR 100 YR 100 YR
Design Storm
Larger <15 <12 5 YR 10 YR 50 YR 100 YR
100 >20 - 35 >12 10 YR TR 60 100 YR 100 YR 2.0’ above E.S.
Design Storm
“a” than to <20 >12 5 YR 10 YR 50 YR 100 YR 1.0’ above E.S.
Design Storm
320 <15 <12 2 YR 5 YR 25 YR 100 YR 1.0’ above E.S.
Design Storm
Less >20 - 35 >12 5 YR TR 60 50 YR 100 YR
3,000 Than <20 >12 2 YR 5 YR 25 YR 100 YR
1.0’ above E.S.
100 <15 <12 10% of 5 YR 25 YR 100 YR Design Storm
25 YR
Peak

NOTES

1) The storage is defined as the original capacity of the reservoir in acre-feet at the elevation of the crest of the emergency spill-
way. The effective height is the difference in elevation in feet between the emergency spillway crest and the lowest point on a
profile taken along the centerline of the dam, excluding the cutoff trench. If there is no emergency spillway, this height shall be to
the top of the dam.

2) Principal - minimum storm to be contained below the crest of the emergency spillway including any combination of temporary
storage and principal spillway discharge.

3) Emergency - minimum storm used to proportion the emergency spillway to meet the limitations for shape, size, velocity and
exit channel. This storm can be handled by any combination of principal spillway discharge, emergency spillway discharge and
storage.

4) For ponds without a separate emergency spillway, the principal spillway functions as the emergency spillway. In this situation,
the principal spillway must comply with the emergency spillway hydrologic criteria.

5) All ponds, which are being designed to meet local stormwater requirements, will be required to use the urban criteria. Storm
duration used shall be 24 hours except where TR-60 is specified.

6) For ponds without a functioning open channel emergency spillway, minimum freeboard will be 2 feet.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-12

TABLE 2

Total Minimum
Height Of Embank- Top Width
ment (Feet)
(Feet)
10 or less 6
11 - 14 8
15 - 19 10
20 - 24 12
25 - 34 14
35 or more 15

TABLE 31,2 TABLE 41,2

MINIMUM GAGES MINIMUM GAGES

CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE

2 - 2/3 inches x 1/2 inch Corrugations 2 - 2/3 inches x 1/2 inch Corrugations

Fill Height Pipe Diameter in Inches Fill Height Pipe Diameter in Inches
Over Pipe 24 & Over Pipe 21 &
(Feet) Less 30 36 42 48 (Feet) Less 24 30
1 - 15 16 16 14 10 10 1 - 15 16 14 10
15 - 20 16 12 10 * * 15 - 20 12 10 *
20 - 25 16 10 * * * 20 - 25 10 * *

CORRUGATED STEEL PIPE CORRUGATED ALUMINUM PIPE

3 inches x 1 inch or 5 inch x 1 inch Corrugations 3 inches x 1 inch Corrugations

Fill Height Pipe Diameter (Inches) Fill Height Pipe Diameter in Inches
Over Pipe Flowable Fill Over Pipe
3
(Feet) 36 42 48 54 603 663 723 (Feet) 30 36 42 48 543
1 - 15 16 16 16 14 14 14 14 1 - 15 16 16 14 10 14
15 - 20 16 16 12 14 14 14 14 15 - 20 16 12 * * *
20 - 25 14 14 10 14 14 14 14 20 - 25 12 * * * *

* Not Permitted. * Not Permitted.

1
Coatings for corrugated metal shall be as specified by the MD-378 Construction Specifications.
2
Tables 3 and 4 were developed using the modified Spangler equation. Sizes other than those shown
above are not permitted.
3
Must use flowable backfill as specified by the MD-378 Construction Specifications and the pipe must be
bituminous coated.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-13

TABLE 5 TABLE 6

ACCEPTABLE PLASTIC PIPE FOR USE IN Permissible Velocities (Ft/Sec)

EARTH DAM1, 2 For Emergency Spillways Lined with Vegetation

Slope Of Exit Channel

Nominal Pipe Schedule or Standard Maximum Type of Cover 0 - 5% 5 - 10%

Size (inches) Dimension Ratio Depth
Bermudagrass 6 5
(SDR) of Fill Over 3
6 - 24 PVC Schedule 40 10 Reed Canarygrass 5 4
6 - 24 PVC Schedule 80 15
Tall Fescue 5 4
6 – 24 PVC SDR 26 10
6 - 24 Corrugated HDPE 10 Kentucky Bluegrass 5 4
1
See Specifications, Plastic Pipe
2 Grass-legume mixture 4 3
All designs based on Technical Release 77, Refer-
ence 20. Other diameters and / or fill heights may be
used that meet all the requirements of TR-77.
3
larger fill heights may be permitted when using flow-
able fill.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-14

CONSTRUCTION SPECIFICATIONS Materials used in the outer shell of the em-

bankment must have the capability to support
These specifications are appropriate to all vegetation of the quality required to prevent
ponds within the scope of the Standard for erosion of the embankment.
practice MD-378. All references to ASTM
and AASHTO specifications apply to the Placement - Areas on which fill is to be
most recent version. placed shall be scarified prior to placement of
fill. Fill materials shall be placed in maxi-
Site Preparation mum 8 inch thick (before compaction) layers
which are to be continuous over the entire
Areas designated for borrow areas, embank- length of the fill. The most permeable bor-
ment, and structural works shall be cleared, row material shall be placed in the down-
grubbed and stripped of topsoil. All trees, stream portions of the embankment. The
vegetation, roots and other objectionable ma- principal spillway must be installed concur-
terial shall be removed. Channel banks and rently with fill placement and not excavated
sharp breaks shall be sloped to no steeper into the embankment.
than 1:1. All trees shall be cleared and
grubbed within 15 feet of the toe of the em- Compaction - The movement of the hauling
bankment. and spreading equipment over the fill shall be
controlled so that the entire surface of each
Areas to be covered by the reservoir will be lift shall be traversed by not less than one
cleared of all trees, brush, logs, fences, rub- tread track of heavy equipment or compaction
bish and other objectionable material unless shall be achieved by a minimum of four com-
otherwise designated on the plans. Trees, plete passes of a sheepsfoot, rubber tired or
brush, and stumps shall be cut approximately vibratory roller. Fill material shall contain
level with the ground surface. For dry sufficient moisture such that the required de-
stormwater management ponds, a minimum gree of compaction will be obtained with the
of a 25-foot radius around the inlet structure equipment used. The fill material shall con-
shall be cleared. tain sufficient moisture so that if formed into
a ball it will not crumble, yet not be so wet
All cleared and grubbed material shall be dis- that water can be squeezed out.
posed of outside and below the limits of the
dam and reservoir as directed by the owner or When required by the reviewing agency the
his representative. When specified, a suffi- minimum required density shall not be less
cient quantity of topsoil will be stockpiled in than 95% of maximum dry density with a
a suitable location for use on the embankment moisture content within ±2% of the optimum.
and other designated areas. Each layer of fill shall be compacted as nec-
essary to obtain that density, and is to be cer-
Earth Fill tified by the Engineer at the time of construc-
tion. All compaction is to be determined by
Material - The fill material shall be taken AASHTO Method T-99 (Standard Proctor).
from approved designated borrow areas. It
shall be free of roots, stumps, wood, rubbish, Cut Off Trench - The cutoff trench shall be
stones greater than 6”, frozen or other objec- excavated into impervious material along or
tionable materials. Fill material for the center parallel to the centerline of the embankment
of the embankment, and cut off trench shall as shown on the plans. The bottom width of
conform to Unified Soil Classification GC, the trench shall be governed by the equip-
SC, CH, or CL and must have at least 30% ment used for excavation, with the minimum
passing the #200 sieve. Consideration may width being four feet. The depth shall be at
be given to the use of other materials in the least four feet below existing grade or as
embankment if designed by a geotechnical shown on the plans. The side slopes of the
engineer. Such special designs must have trench shall be 1 to 1 or flatter. The backfill
construction supervised by a geotechnical shall be compacted with construction equip-
engineer. ment, rollers, or hand tampers to assure

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-15

maximum density and minimum permeabil- bags, etc.) to prevent floating the pipe. When
ity. using flowable fill, all metal pipe shall be bi-
tuminous coated. Any adjoining soil fill shall
Embankment Core - The core shall be paral- be placed in horizontal layers not to exceed
lel to the centerline of the embankment as four inches in thickness and compacted by
shown on the plans. The top width of the hand tampers or other manually directed
core shall be a minimum of four feet. The compaction equipment. The material shall
height shall extend up to at least the 10 year completely fill all voids adjacent to the flow-
water elevation or as shown on the plans. able fill zone. At no time during the backfill-
The side slopes shall be 1 to 1 or flatter. The ing operation shall driven equipment be al-
core shall be compacted with construction lowed to operate closer than four feet, meas-
equipment, rollers, or hand tampers to assure ured horizontally, to any part of a structure.
maximum density and minimum permeabil- Under no circumstances shall equipment be
ity. In addition, the core shall be placed con- driven over any part of a structure or pipe
currently with the outer shell of the embank- unless there is a compacted fill of 24” or
ment. greater over the structure or pipe. Backfill
material outside the structural backfill (flow-
Structure Backfill able fill) zone shall be of the type and quality
conforming to that specified for the core of
Backfill adjacent to pipes or structures shall the embankment or other embankment mate-
be of the type and quality conforming to that rials.
specified for the adjoining fill material. The
fill shall be placed in horizontal layers not to Pipe Conduits
exceed four inches in thickness and com-
pacted by hand tampers or other manually All pipes shall be circular in cross section.
directed compaction equipment. The material
needs to fill completely all spaces under and Corrugated Metal Pipe - All of the following
adjacent to the pipe. At no time during the criteria shall apply for corrugated metal pipe:
backfilling operation shall driven equipment
be allowed to operate closer than four feet, 1. Materials - (Polymer Coated steel pipe) -
measured horizontally, to any part of a struc- Steel pipes with polymeric coatings shall
ture. Under no circumstances shall equip- have a minimum coating thickness of
ment be driven over any part of a concrete 0.01 inch (10 mil) on both sides of the
structure or pipe, unless there is a compacted pipe. This pipe and its appurtenances
fill of 24” or greater over the structure or shall conform to the requirements of
pipe. AASHTO Specifications M-245 & M-246
with watertight coupling bands or flanges.
Structure backfill may be flowable fill meet-
ing the requirements of Maryland Department Materials - (Aluminum Coated Steel
of Transportation, State Highway Admini- Pipe) - This pipe and its appurtenances
stration Standard Specifications for Construc- shall conform to the requirements of
tion and Materials, Section 313 as modified. AASHTO Specification M-274 with wa-
The mixture shall have a 100-200 psi; 28 day tertight coupling bands or flanges. Alu-
unconfined compressive strength. The flow- minum Coated Steel Pipe, when used
able fill shall have a minimum pH of 4.0 and with flowable fill or when soil and/or wa-
a minimum resistivity of 2,000 ohm-cm. Ma- ter conditions warrant the need for in-
terial shall be placed such that a minimum of creased durability, shall be fully bitumi-
6” (measured perpendicular to the outside of nous coated per requirements of
the pipe) of flowable fill shall be under (bed- AASHTO Specification M-190 Type A.
ding), over and, on the sides of the pipe. It Any aluminum coating damaged or oth-
only needs to extend up to the spring line for erwise removed shall be replaced with
rigid conduits. Average slump of the fill cold applied bituminous coating com-
shall be 7” to assure flowability of the mate- pound. Aluminum surfaces that are to be
rial. Adequate measures shall be taken (sand in contact with concrete shall be painted

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-16

with one coat of zinc chromate primer or of 1/2 inch greater than the corrugation
two coats of asphalt. depth. Pipes 24 inches in diameter and
larger shall be connected by a 24 inch
Materials - (Aluminum Pipe) - This pipe long annular corrugated band using a
and its appurtenances shall conform to the minimum of 4 (four) rods and lugs, 2 on
requirements of AASHTO Specification each connecting pipe end. A 24-inch
M-196 or M-211 with watertight coupling wide by 3/8-inch thick closed cell circular
bands or flanges. Aluminum Pipe, when neoprene gasket will be installed with 12
used with flowable fill or when soil inches on the end of each pipe. Flanged
and/or water conditions warrant for in- joints with 3/8 inch closed cell gaskets the
creased durability, shall be fully bitumi- full width of the flange is also acceptable.
nous coated per requirements of
AASHTO Specification M-190 Type A. Helically corrugated pipe shall have ei-
Aluminum surfaces that are to be in con- ther continuously welded seams or have
tact with concrete shall be painted with lock seams with internal caulking or a
one coat of zinc chromate primer or two neoprene bead.
coats of asphalt. Hot dip galvanized bolts
may be used for connections. The pH of 4. Bedding - The pipe shall be firmly and
the surrounding soils shall be between 4 uniformly bedded throughout its entire
and 9. length. Where rock or soft, spongy or
other unstable soil is encountered, all
2. Coupling bands, anti-seep collars, end such material shall be removed and re-
sections, etc., must be composed of the placed with suitable earth compacted to
same material and coatings as the pipe. provide adequate support.
Metals must be insulated from dissimilar
materials with use of rubber or plastic in- 5. Backfilling shall conform to “Structure
sulating materials at least 24 mils in Backfill”.
thickness.
6. Other details (anti-seep collars, valves,
3. Connections - All connections with pipes etc.) shall be as shown on the drawings.
must be completely watertight. The drain
pipe or barrel connection to the riser shall Reinforced Concrete Pipe - All of the fol-
be welded all around when the pipe and lowing criteria shall apply for reinforced con-
riser are metal. Anti-seep collars shall be crete pipe:
connected to the pipe in such a manner as
to be completely watertight. Dimple 1. Materials - Reinforced concrete pipe shall
bands are not considered to be watertight. have bell and spigot joints with rubber
gaskets and shall equal or exceed ASTM
All connections shall use a rubber or neo- C-361.
prene gasket when joining pipe sections.
The end of each pipe shall be re-rolled an 2. Bedding - Reinforced concrete pipe con-
adequate number of corrugations to ac- duits shall be laid in a concrete bedding /
commodate the bandwidth. The follow- cradle for their entire length. This bed-
ing type connections are acceptable for ding / cradle shall consist of high slump
pipes less than 24 inches in diameter: concrete placed under the pipe and up the
flanges on both ends of the pipe with a sides of the pipe at least 50% of its out-
circular 3/8 inch closed cell neoprene side diameter with a minimum thickness
gasket, pre-punched to the flange bolt cir- of 6 inches. Where a concrete cradle is
cle, sandwiched between adjacent not needed for structural reasons, flow-
flanges; a 12-inch wide standard lap type able fill may be used as described in the
band with 12-inch wide by 3/8-inch thick “Structure Backfill” section of this stan-
closed cell circular neoprene gasket; and dard. Gravel bedding is not permitted.
a 12-inch wide hugger type band with o-
ring gaskets having a minimum diameter

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-17

3. Laying pipe - Bell and spigot pipe shall Concrete

be placed with the bell end upstream.
Joints shall be made in accordance with Concrete shall meet the requirements of
recommendations of the manufacturer of Maryland Department of Transportation,
the material. After the joints are sealed State Highway Administration Standard
for the entire line, the bedding shall be Specifications for Construction and Materi-
placed so that all spaces under the pipe als, Section 414, Mix No. 3.
are filled. Care shall be exercised to pre-
vent any deviation from the original line Rock Riprap
and grade of the pipe. The first joint must
be located within 4 feet from the riser. Rock riprap shall meet the requirements of
Maryland Department of Transportation,
4. Backfilling shall conform to “Structure State Highway Administration Standard
Backfill”. Specifications for Construction and Materi-
als, Section 311.
5. Other details (anti-seep collars, valves,
etc.) shall be as shown on the drawings. Geotextile shall be placed under all riprap
and shall meet the requirements of Maryland
Plastic Pipe - The following criteria shall ap- Department of Transportation, State Highway
ply for plastic pipe: Administration Standard Specifications for
Construction and Materials, Section 921.09,
1. Materials - PVC pipe shall be PVC-1120 Class C.
or PVC-1220 conforming to ASTM D-
1785 or ASTM D-2241. Corrugated High Care of Water during Construction
Density Polyethylene (HDPE) pipe, cou-
plings and fittings shall conform to the All work on permanent structures shall be
following: 4” – 10” inch pipe shall meet carried out in areas free from water. The
the requirements of AASHTO M252 Contractor shall construct and maintain all
Type S, and 12” through 24” inch shall temporary dikes, levees, cofferdams, drainage
meet the requirements of AASHTO M294 channels, and stream diversions necessary to
Type S. protect the areas to be occupied by the per-
manent works. The contractor shall also fur-
2. Joints and connections to anti-seep collars nish, install, operate, and maintain all neces-
shall be completely watertight. sary pumping and other equipment required
for removal of water from various parts of the
3. Bedding -The pipe shall be firmly and work and for maintaining the excavations,
uniformly bedded throughout its entire foundation, and other parts of the work free
length. Where rock or soft, spongy or from water as required or directed by the en-
other unstable soil is encountered, all gineer for constructing each part of the work.
such material shall be removed and re- After having served their purpose, all tempo-
placed with suitable earth compacted to rary protective works shall be removed or
provide adequate support. leveled and graded to the extent required to
prevent obstruction in any degree whatsoever
4. Backfilling shall conform to “Structure of the flow of water to the spillway or outlet
Backfill”. works and so as not to interfere in any way
with the operation or maintenance of the
5. Other details (anti-seep collars, valves, structure. Stream diversions shall be main-
etc.) shall be as shown on the drawings. tained until the full flow can be passed
through the permanent works. The removal
Drainage Diaphragms - When a drainage of water from the required excavation and the
diaphragm is used, a registered professional foundation shall be accomplished in a manner
engineer will supervise the design and con- and to the extent that will maintain stability
struction inspection. of the excavated slopes and bottom required
excavations and will allow satisfactory per-

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-18

formance of all construction operations. Dur-

ing the placing and compacting of material in
required excavations, the water level at the
locations being refilled shall be maintained
below the bottom of the excavation at such
locations which may require draining the wa-
ter sumps from which the water shall be
pumped.

Stabilization

All borrow areas shall be graded to provide

proper drainage and left in a sightly condi-
tion. All exposed surfaces of the embank-
ment, spillway, spoil and borrow areas, and
berms shall be stabilized by seeding, liming,
fertilizing and mulching in accordance with
the Natural Resources Conservation Service
Standards and Specifications for Critical Area
Planting (MD-342) or as shown on the ac-
companying drawings.

Erosion and Sediment Control

Construction operations will be carried out in

such a manner that erosion will be controlled
and water and air pollution minimized. State
and local laws concerning pollution abate-
ment will be followed. Construction plans
shall detail erosion and sediment control
measures.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-19

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

An operation and maintenance plan in accor-

dance with Local or State Regulations will be
prepared for all ponds. As a minimum, the
dam inspection checklist located in Appendix
A shall be included as part of the operation
and maintenance plan and performed at least
annually. Written records of maintenance and
major repairs needs to be retained in a file.
The issuance of a Maintenance and Repair
Permit for any repairs or maintenance that
involves the modification of the dam or spill-
way from its original design and specifica-
tions is required. A permit is also required
for any repairs or reconstruction that involve
a substantial portion of the structure. All in-
dicated repairs are to be made as soon as
practical.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-20

SUPPORTING DATA AND 7. Compute earth fill (if needed).

DOCUMENTATION
8. Special design feature details; watering,
Field Data and Survey Notes fire hydrants, fish management, irrigation,
outfall stabilization, etc.; structural details
The following is a list of the minimum data with design loadings, if applicable, should
needed: be shown on the drawings.

1. Profile along centerline of structure. 9. Complete data required on MD-ENG-14.

2. Profile along centerline of principal spill- 10. Record seeding plan on drawings or MD-
way. CONS-10.

3. Profile along centerline of emergency 11. A written Operation and Maintenance

spillway. Plan.

4. Survey of storage area to develop topog- Construction Check Data/As-built

raphy and storage volumes.
Record on survey note paper, SCS-ENG-28.
5. Soil investigation logs and notes. Survey data for ponds will be plotted in red.
All construction inspection visits shall be re-
Design Data corded on the CPA-6 or appropriate docu-
mentation paper. The documentation shall
Record on appropriate engineering paper. include the date, who performed the inspec-
The following is a list of the minimum re- tion, specifics as to what was inspected, all
quired design data: alternatives discussed, and decisions made
and by whom. The following is a list of the
1. Determine pond class and list appropriate minimum data needed for As-Builts:
spillway design criteria, including map.
1. A profile of the top of the dam.
2. Determine peak runoff from the contrib-
uting area for the design storms selected, 2. A cross-section of the emergency spill-
including topo map. way at the control section.

3. Develop a stage-storage/discharge curve 3. A profile along the centerline of the emer-

for the site. gency spillway.

4. Determine the pipe spillway by storm 4. A profile along the centerline of the prin-
routing using the procedure in the SWM cipal spillway extending at least 100 feet
Pond Design Manual; Chapter 11, EFH; downstream of the fill.
Chapter 6, TR-55; or TR-20.
5. The elevation of the principal spillway
5. Design emergency spillway using EFH crest.
11-61.
6. The elevation of the principal spillway
6. Drawings should show the following as a conduit invert (inlet and outlet).
minimum: profile along centerline of
dam; profile along centerline of emer- 7. The diameter, length, thickness and type
gency spillway; cross section through of material for the riser.
dam at principal spillway; cross section
through emergency spillway; plan view; 8. The diameter, length, and type of material
and construction details & notes and soil for the conduit.
logs.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-21

9. The size and type of anti-vortex and trash

rack device and its elevations in relation
to the principal spillway crest.

10. The number, size and location of the anti-

seep collars.

11. The diameter and size of any low stage

orifices or drain pipes.

12. Show the length, width, and depth of con-

tours of the pool area so that design vol-
ume can be verified.

13. Notes and measurements to show that any

special design features were met.

14. Statement on seeding and fencing.

15. Notes on site clean up and disposal.

16. Sign and date check notes to include

statement that practice meets or exceeds
plans and specifications.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-22

REFERENCES 12. National Handbook of Conservation

Practices, USDA, Natural Resources
1. AWWA Standards, American Water Conservation Service.
Works Association, Denver, Colo-
rado. 13. Standard Specifications for Materials
and Methods of Sampling and Test-
2. ASTM Standards, American Society ing, Nineteenth Edition, American
for Testing and Materials, Philadel- Association of State Highway and
phia, Pennsylvania. Transportation Officials, Washington
D.C., 1998.
3. Engineering Field Handbook, Part
650, USDA, Soil Conservation Ser- 14. Standard Specifications for Construc-
vice. tion and Materials, Maryland De-
partment of Transportation, State
4. Handbook of PVC Pipe Design and Highway Administration, Baltimore,
Construction, First Edition, Uni-Bell Maryland, October 1993.
Plastic Pipe Association, Dallas,
Texas, 1980. 15. Technical Release No. 20, Computer
Programs for Project Formulation
5. Handbook of Steel Drainage and Hydrology, USDA, Natural Resources
Highway Construction Products, Conservation Service, 1992.
Third Edition, American Iron and
Steel Institute, Washington, D.C., 16. Technical Release No. 55, Urban Hy-
1983. drology for Small Watersheds,
USDA, Natural Resources Conserva-
6. Maryland Dam Safety Manual, Mary- tion Service, 1986.
land Department of Natural Re-
sources, Water Resources Administra- 17. Technical Release No. 56, A Guide
tion, Annapolis, Maryland, June 1993. for Design and Layout of Vegetative
Wave Protection for Earth Dam Em-
7. Maryland Technical Guide, Section bankments, USDA, Natural Resources
IV, Standards and Specifications, Conservation Service, 1974.
USDA, Natural Resources Conserva-
tion Service. 18. Technical Release No. 60, Earth
Dams and Reservoirs, USDA, Natural
8. National Engineering Handbook, Sec- Resources Conservation Service,
tion 4, Hydrology, USDA, Natural 1985.
Resources Conservation Service,
March 1985. 19. Technical Release 69, Riprap for
Slope Protection Against Wave Ac-
9. National Engineering Handbook, Sec- tion, USDA, Natural Resources Con-
tion 5, Hydraulics, USDA, Natural servation Service, 1983.
Resources Conservation Service, Au-
gust 1956.

10. National Engineering Handbook, Sec-

tion 11, Drop Spillways, USDA,
Natural Resources Conservation Ser-
vice, April 1968.

11. National Engineering Handbook, Sec-

tion 14, Chute Spillways, USDA,
Natural Resources Conservation Ser-
vice, October 1977.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-23

20. Technical Release No. 77, Design and 21. National Engineering Handbook, Part
Installation of Flexible Conduits, 633, Chapter 26, Gradation Design of
USDA, Natural Resources Conserva- Sand and Gravel Filters, USDA,
tion Service, 1990. Natural Resources Conservation Ser-
vice, October 1994.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-24
APPENDIX A

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-25

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Pond MD-378-26

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

 Pond MD-378-27
APPENDIX B

ROADWAY EMBANKMENT
DESIGN CRITERIA

HW - TW > 10'* AND HW/D > 2, OR No

PERMANENT POOL > 3' OR NO SPECIAL DESIGN
PROPOSED RISER

Yes

MEETS SMALL POND CRITERIA, AND No

MDE DAM SAFETY
CLASS "A" REVIEW

Yes

8:1 PROJECTION LINE INTERSECTS No

SPECIAL
DOWNSTREAM SLOPE OF THE EMBANKMENT
EMBANKMENT DESIGN

Yes

MD 378 Use any nonorganic soils for the

Design embankment, elimination of the
cut-off trench and core based on
approval of geotechnical engineer
and acceptable to local jurisdic-
tions.

Filter diaphragm is required.

All other MD 378 criteria apply.

NRCS - MARYLAND JANUARY 2000

Supplemental Pond and Wetland Specifications (Non-378)
Appendix

B.1.1
Appendix B.1.1 Supplemental Specifications (Non-378)
Supplemental Stormwater Pond and Wetland Specifications (Non-378)

These notes and specifications are in addition to the MD-378 Specifications. If there is any question
as to their applicability, the MD-378 Specifications supercede.

1. It is preferred to use the same material in the embankment as is being installed for the core
trench. If this is not possible because the appropriate material is not available, a dam core
with a shell may be used. The cross-section of the stormwater facility should show the limits
of the dam core (up to the 10-year water surface elevation) as well as the acceptable
materials for the shell. The shape of the dam core and the material to be used in the shell
should be provided by the geotechnical engineer.

2. If the compaction tests for site improvements is using a Modified Proctor (AASHTO T-180),
then to maintain on-site consistency, the Modified Proctor may be used in lieu of a Standard
Proctor (AASHTO T-99). The minimum required density using the Modified Proctor test
method shall be at least 92% of maximum dry density with a moisture content of ±2% of the
optimum. The minimum required density using the Standard Proctor test method shall be at
least 95% of the maximum dry density with a moisture content of ±2% of the optimum.

3. For all stormwater management facilities, a geotechnical engineer or their representative

must be present to verify compaction in accordance with the selected test method. This
information needs to be provided in a report to the design engineer, so that certification of
the construction of the facility, in accordance with MD-378 specifications, can be made.

4. A 4-inch layer of topsoil shall be placed on all disturbed areas of the dam embankment.
Seeding, liming, fertilizing, mulching, etc. shall be in accordance with Maryland Soil
Conservation Service MD-342 or the 1994 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil
Erosion and Sediment Control “Permanent Seeding,” Section in Chapter 20. The purpose of
the topsoil is to establish a good growth of grass which is not always possible with some of
the materials that may be placed for the embankment fill.

5. Geotextile placed beneath rip-rap shall be Class “C” geotextile or better (see Section 24.0,
Material Specifications, 1994 Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment
Control (MDE, 1994). Some acceptable geotextiles that meet the Class “C” criteria include:

Amoco 4552 Carthage FX-70S

GEOLON N70 Mirafi 180-N
WEBTEC N07

B.1.1.1
Appendix B.1.1 Supplemental Specifications (Non-378)
This is only a partial listing of available geotextiles based on information provided by the
manufacturers to the 1997 Specifier's Guide dated December 1996. It is the responsibility of
the engineer to verify the adequacy of the material, as there are changes in the manufacturing
process and the type of fabric used, which may affect the continued acceptance.

6. A rule of thumb to determine when an excavated pond may need to be considered an

embankment pond is as follows:

• Provide calculation of 10H + 20 feet = L, where H equals height from pond bottom
to top of dam. If the projection of L, downstream in a horizontal line from the
upstream toe of slope is below existing ground, the pond can be considered an
excavated pond. In addition, the existing ground slope, downstream of the toe, must
be less than 10%.

7. The design engineer and geotechnical engineer should make the determination that the
settlement of the pond will not cause excessive joint extension. For further information on
joint extension analysis, see NRCS Publication TR-18.

8. Fill placement shall not exceed a maximum 8-inch. Each lift shall be continuous for the
entire length of the embankment.

9. The embankment fill shall not be placed higher than the centerline of the principal spillway
until after the principal spillway has been installed. If the embankment needs to be
excavated to install the principal spillway, the side slope shall be no less than 2:1.

10. The side slopes of a cut to repair a dam, install a principal spillway for an excavated pond, or
other repair work, shall be no less than 2:1.

B.1.1.2
 Appendix

B.1.2

MDE Dam Safety Division Small Pond Review Criteria

MDE Dam Safety Division Small Pond Review and Approval Criteria
Appendix B.1.2. Small Pond Approval Criteria

The following criteria are established for the MDE Dam Safety Division small pond review and
approval:

1) If any of the following apply, a permit is required from the MDE Dam Safety Division:
a) Drainage area of the pond is greater than 640 acres.
b) Dam embankment height is greater than 20 feet (top of dam to lowest point on the
upstream toe).
c) Pond is an intermediate or high hazard structure the failure of which is likely to cause
damage to homes, public transportation, loss of life or property (NRCS Class b & c).

2) If the pond is in a USE III watershed, a permit is required if the pond will be:
a) Capturing a flowing stream (stream with a base flow*),
b) Capturing any spring, or
c) A wet pond, or
d) Located within 100 feet of a flowing stream, or
e) Proposes extended detention for the one year storm longer than 12 hours.

3) If the pond is located within the drainage of the Gwynns Falls, Jones Falls, or Herring Run
streams situated in or adjacent to Baltimore City, approval is required in accordance with the
provisions of the Maryland Environment Article 5-503.

4) If the pond is to be constructed across a stream, excluding USE III waters, SCD may approve
the pond with verification that the 100 year pool based on ultimate development with current
zoning does not increase flooding on adjacent properties or is in a floodplain easement. The
in-stream closure period must be noted on the plans.

5) If the pond is in the floodplain, an MDE Nontidal Wetlands and Waterways Permit may be
required. The pond will be evaluated for potential impacts in the floodplain and to nontidal
wetlands. However, the pond construction plans may be approved by the SCD.

* “Base Flow” or “Dry Weather Flow” - Stream flows originating from groundwater or spring
contributions that are not influenced by storm events. Base flow measurements should not be
made within two days of a storm event.

B.1.2.1
Appendix B.1.2. Small Pond Approval Criteria

Figure B.1.2.1 Small Pond Review Flow Chart

This flow chart is intended to determine whether MDE or the local SCD will review construction plans.
SCD pond approval does not relieve the applicant from obtaining other necessary approvals associated
with pond construction such as impacts to nontidal wetlands.

B.1.2.2
Construction Specifications for Infiltration Practices
B.2
Appendix
Appendix B.2. Construction Specifications for Infiltration Practices

B.2.A Infiltration Trench General Notes and Specifications

An infiltration trench may not receive run-off until the entire contributing drainage area to the
infiltration trench has received final stabilization.

1. Heavy equipment and traffic shall be restricted from traveling over the proposed location of
the infiltration trench to minimize compaction of the soil.

2. Excavate the infiltration trench to the design dimensions. Excavated materials shall be
placed away from the trench sides to enhance trench wall stability. Large tree roots must be
trimmed flush with the trench sides in order to prevent fabric puncturing or tearing of the
filter fabric during subsequent installation procedures. The side walls of the trench shall be
roughened where sheared and sealed by heavy equipment.

3. A Class “C” geotextile or better (see Section 24.0, Material Specifications, 1994
Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and Sediment Control, MDE, 1994) shall
interface between the trench side walls and between the stone reservoir and gravel filter
layers. A partial list of non-woven filter fabrics that meet the Class “C” criteria follows.
Any alternative filter fabric must be approved by the plan approval authority.

Amoco 4552 Carthage FX-80S

GEOLON N70 Mirafi 180-N
WEBTEC N07

The width of the geotextile must include sufficient material to conform to trench perimeter
irregularities and for a 6-inch minimum top overlap. The filter fabric shall be tucked under
the sand layer on the bottom of the infiltration trench for a distance of 6 to 12 inches. Stones
or other anchoring objects should be placed on the fabric at the edge of the trench to keep the
trench open during windy periods. When overlaps are required between rolls, the uphill roll
should lap a minimum of 2 feet over the downhill roll in order to provide a shingled effect.

4. If a 6 inch sand filter layer is placed on the bottom of the infiltration trench, the sand for the
infiltration trench shall be washed and meet AASHTO-M-43, Size No. 9 or No. 10. Any
alternative sand gradation must be approved by the plan approval authority.

5. The stone aggregate should be placed in a maximum loose lift thickness of 12 inches. The
gravel (rounded “bank run” gravel is preferred) for the infiltration trench shall be washed
and meet one of the following AASHTO-M-43, Size No. 2 or No. 3.

6. Following the stone aggregate placement, the filter fabric shall be folded over the stone
aggregate to form a 6-inch minimum longitudinal lap. The desired fill soil or stone
aggregate shall be placed over the lap at sufficient intervals to maintain the lap during
subsequent backfilling.

B.2.1
Appendix B.2. Construction Specifications for Infiltration Practices

7. Care shall be exercised to prevent natural or fill soils from intermixing with the stone
aggregate. All contaminated stone aggregate shall be removed and replaced with
uncontaminated stone aggregate.

8. Voids may occur between the fabric and the excavation sides shall be avoided. Removing
boulders or other obstacles from the trench walls is one source of such voids. Therefore,
natural soils should be placed in these voids at the most convenient time during construction
to ensure fabric conformity to the excavation sides.

9. Vertically excavated walls may be difficult to maintain in areas where soil moisture is high
or where soft cohesive or cohesionless soils are dominant. These conditions may require
laying back of the side slopes to maintain stability.

10. PVC distribution pipes shall be Schedule 40 and meet ASTM-D-1785. All fittings shall
meet ASTM-D-2729. Perforations shall be 3/8 inch in diameter. A perforated pipe shall be
provided only within the infiltration trench and shall terminate 1 foot short of the infiltration
trench wall. The end of the PVC pipe shall be capped. Note: PVC pipe with a wall
thickness classification of SDR-35 meeting ASTM-D-3034 is an acceptable substitute for the
Schedule 40 pipe.

11. The observation well is to consist of 6-inch diameter perforated PVC Schedule 40 pipe (M
278 OR F758, Type PS 28) with a cap set 6 inches above ground level and is to be located
near the longitudinal center of the infiltration trench. The pipe shall have a plastic collar
with ribs to prevent rotation when removing the cap. The screw top lid shall be a cleanout
with a locking mechanism or special bolt to discourage vandalism. The depth to the invert
shall be marked on the lid. The pipe shall be placed vertically within the gravel portion of
the infiltration trench and a cap provided at the bottom of the pipe. The bottom of the cap
shall rest on the infiltration trench bottom.

12. Corrugated metal distribution pipes shall conform to AASHTO-M-36, and shall be
aluminized in accordance with AASHTO-M-274. Aluminized pipe in contact with concrete
shall be coated with an inert compound capable of preventing the deleterious effect of the
aluminum on the concrete. Perforated distribution pipes shall conform to AASHTO-M-36,
Class 2 and shall be provided only within the infiltration trench and shall terminate 1 foot
short of the infiltration trench wall. An aluminized metal plate shall be welded to the end of
the pipe.

13. If a distribution structure with a wet well is used, a 4-inch drain pipe shall be provided at
opposite ends of the infiltration trench distribution structure. Two (2) cubic feet of porous
backfill meeting AASHTO-M-43, Size No. 57 shall be provided at each drain.

B.2.2
Appendix B.2. Construction Specifications for Infiltration Practices

14. If a distribution structure is used, the manhole cover shall be bolted to the frame.

B.2.B Infiltration Basins Notes and Specifications

An infiltration basin may not receive run-off until the entire contributing drainage area to the basin
has received final stabilization.

1. The sequence of various phases of basin construction shall be coordinated with the overall
project construction schedule. A program should schedule rough excavation of the basin
with the rough grading phase of the project to permit use of the material as fill in earthwork
areas. The partially excavated basin, however, cannot serve as a sedimentation basin.

Specifications for basin construction should state: (1) the earliest point in progress when
storm drainage may be directed to the basin, and (2) the means by which this delay in use is
to be accomplished. Due to the wide variety of conditions encountered among projects, each
should be separately evaluated in order to postpone use as long as is reasonably possible.

2. Initial basin excavation should be carried to within 2 feet of the final elevation of the basin
floor. Final excavation to the finished grade should be deferred until all disturbed areas on
the watershed have been stabilized or protected. The final phase excavation should remove
all accumulated sediment. Relatively light tracked equipment is recommended for this
operation to avoid compaction of the basin floor. After the final grading is completed, the
basin should provide a well-aerated, highly porous surface texture.

3. Infiltration basins may be lined with a 6- to 12-inch layer of filter material such as coarse
sand (AASHTO-M-43, Sizes 9 or 10) to help prevent the buildup of impervious deposits on
the soil surface. The filter layer can be replaced or cleaned when it becomes clogged. When
a 6-inch layer of coarse organic material is specified for discing (such as hulls, leaves, stems,
etc.) or spading into the basin floor to increase the permeability of the soils, the basin floor
should be soaked or inundated for a brief period, then allowed to dry subsequent to this
operation. This induces the organic material to decay rapidly, loosening the upper soil layer.

4. Establishing dense vegetation on the basin side slopes and floor is recommended. A dense
vegetative stand will not only prevent erosion and sloughing, but will also provide a natural
means of maintaining relatively high infiltration rates. Erosion protection of inflow points to
the basin shall also be provided.

5. Selection of suitable vegetative materials for the side slope and all other areas to be
stabilized with vegetation and application of soil amendments (e.g., lime, fertilizer, etc.)
shall be done in accordance with the NRCS Standards and Specifications for Critical Area

B.2.3
Appendix B.2. Construction Specifications for Infiltration Practices
Planting (MD-342) or the 1994 Maryland Standards and Specifications for Soil Erosion and
Sediment Control.

6. Grasses of the fescue family are recommended for seeding primarily due to their adaptability
to dry sandy soils, drought resistance, hardiness, and ability to withstand brief inundations.
The use of fescues will also permit long intervals between mowings. This is important due
to the relatively steep slopes which make mowing difficult. Mowing twice a year, once in
June and again in September, is generally satisfactory. Refertilization with 10-6-4 ratio
fertilizer at a rate of 500 lb per acre (11 lb per 1000 sq ft) may be required the second year
after seeding.

B.2.4
 Construction Specifications for
Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels
B.3
Appendix
Appendix B.3. Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels

B.3.A Sand Filter Specifications

1. Material Specifications for Sand Filters

The allowable materials for sand filter construction are detailed in Table B.3.1.

2. Sand Filter Testing Specifications

Underground sand filters, facilities within sensitive groundwater aquifers, and filters designed to
serve urban hot spots are to be tested for water tightness prior to placement of filter media. Entrances
and exits should be plugged and the system completely filled with water to demonstrate water
tightness. Water tightness means no leakage for a period of 8 hours.

All overflow weirs, multiple orifices and flow distribution slots are to be field-tested to verify
adequate distribution of flows.

3. Sand Filter Construction Specifications

Provide sufficient maintenance access (i.e., 12-foot-wide road with legally recorded easement).
Vegetated access slopes are to be a maximum of 10%; gravel slopes to 15%; paved slopes to 25%.

Absolutely no runoff is to enter the filter until all contributing drainage areas have been stabilized.

Surface of filter bed is to be level.

All underground sand filters should be clearly delineated with signs so that they may be located
when maintenance is due.

Surface sand filters may be planted with appropriate grasses; see Appendix A.

“Pocket” sand filters (and residential bioretention facilities treating areas larger than an acre) shall
be sized with a stone “window” that covers approximately 10% of the filter area. This “window”
shall be filled pea gravel (3/4 inch stone).

B.3.1
Appendix B.3. Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels

4. Specifications Pertaining to Underground Sand Filters (F-2)

Provide manhole and/or grates to all underground and below grade structures. Manholes shall be in
compliance with standard specifications for each county but diameters should be 30” minimum (to
comply with OSHA confined space requirements). Aluminum and steel louvered doors are also
acceptable. Ten inch wide (minimum) manhole steps (12” o.c.) shall be cast in place or drilled and
mortared into the wall below each manhole. A 5’ minimum height clearance (from the top of the
sand layer to the bottom of the upper/surface slab) is required for all permanent underground
structures. Lift rings are to be supplied to remove/replace top slabs on pre-fabricated structures.
Manhole covers should allow for proper ventilation.

Underground sand filters should be constructed with a gate valve located just above the top of the
filter bed for dewatering in the event that clogging occurs.

Underground sand beds shall be protected from trash accumulation by a wide mesh geotextile screen
to be placed on the surface of the sand bed; screen is to be rolled up, removed, cleaned and re-
installed during maintenance operations.

B.3.2
 Table B.3.1 Material Specifications for Sand Filters

Appendix B.3. .. ............Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels
Material Specification/Test Method Size Notes
sand clean AASHTO-M-6 or ASTM-C-33 0.02” to 0.04” Sand substitutions such as Diabase and Graystone #10 are not acceptable.
concrete sand No calcium carbonated or dolomitic sand substitutions are acceptable. No
“rock dust” can be used for sand.

peat ash content: < 15% n/a The material must be reed-sedge hemic peat, shredded, uncompacted,
pH range: 5.2 to 4.9 uniform, and clean.
loose bulk density 0.12 to 0.15 g/cc
leaf compost n/a
underdrain gravel AASHTO-M-43 0.375” to 0.75”
geotextile fabric (if required) ASTM-D-4833 (puncture strength - 0.08” thick Must maintain 125 gpm per sq. ft. flow rate. Note: a 4” pea gravel layer
125 lb.) equivalent opening may be substituted for geotextiles meant to “separate” sand filter layers.
ASTM-D-4632 (Tensile Strength - size of #80 sieve
300 lb.)
impermeable liner ASTM-D-4833 (thickness) 30 mil thickness Liner to be ultraviolet resistant. A geotextile fabric should be used to
(if required) ASTM-D-412 (tensile strength 1,100 protect the liner from puncture.
lb., elongation 200%)
ASTM-D-624 (Tear resistance - 150
B.3.3

lb./in)
ASTM-D-471 (water adsorption: +8
to -2% mass)
underdrain piping F 758, Type PS 28 or AASHTO-M- 4” - 6” rigid 3/8” perf. @ 6” on center, 4 holes per row; minimum of 3” of gravel over
278 schedule 40 PVC pipes; not necessary underneath pipes
or SDR35
concrete (cast-in-place) MSHA Standards and Specs. Section n/a on-site testing of poured-in-place concrete required:
902, Mix No. 3, f’c = 3500 psi, 28 day strength and slump test; all concrete design (cast-in-place or pre-
normal weight, air-entrained; re- cast) not using previously approved State or local standards requires
inforcing to meet ASTM-615-60 design drawings sealed and approved by a professional structural
engineer licensed in the State of Maryland
concrete (pre-cast) per pre-cast manufacturer n/a SEE ABOVE NOTE
non-rebar steel ASTM A-36 n/a structural steel to be hot-dipped galvanized ASTM-A-123
Appendix B.3. Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels

B.3.B Specifications for Bioretention

1. Material Specifications

The allowable materials to be used in bioretention area are detailed in Table B.3.2.

2. Planting Soil

The soil shall be a uniform mix, free of stones, stumps, roots or other similar objects larger than two
inches. No other materials or substances shall be mixed or dumped within the bioretention area that
may be harmful to plant growth, or prove a hindrance to the planting or maintenance operations. The
planting soil shall be free of Bermuda grass, Quackgrass, Johnson grass, or other noxious weeds as
specified under COMAR 15.08.01.05.

The planting soil shall be tested and shall meet the following criteria:

pH range 5.2 - 7.0

organic matter 1.5 - 4% (by weight)
magnesium 35 lb./ac
phosphorus (phosphate - P2O5) 75 lb./ac
potassium (potash - K2O) 85 lb./ac
soluble salts not to exceed 500 ppm

All bioretention areas shall have a minimum of one test. Each test shall consist of both the standard
soil test for pH, phosphorus, and potassium and additional tests of organic matter, and soluble salts.
A textural analysis is required from the site stockpiled topsoil. If topsoil is imported, then a texture
analysis shall be performed for each location where the top soil was excavated.

Since different labs calibrate their testing equipment differently, all testing results shall come from
the same testing facility.

Should the pH fall out of the acceptable range, it may be modified (higher) with lime or (lower) with
iron sulfate plus sulfur.

3. Compaction

It is very important to minimize compaction of both the base of the bioretention area and the
required backfill. When possible, use excavation hoes to remove original soil. If bioretention
areas are excavated using a loader, the contractor should use wide track or marsh track equipment, or
light equipment with turf type tires. Use of equipment with narrow tracks or narrow tires, rubber
tires with large lugs, or high pressure tires will cause excessive compaction resulting in reduced

B.3.4
Appendix B.3. Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels
infiltration rates and is not acceptable. Compaction will significantly contribute to design failure.

Compaction can be alleviated at the base of the bioretention facility by using a primary tilling
operation such as a chisel plow, ripper, or subsoiler. These tilling operations are to refracture the soil
profile through the 12 inch compaction zone. Substitute methods must be approved by the engineer.
Rototillers typically do not till deep enough to reduce the effects of compaction from heavy
equipment.

Rototill 2 to 3 inches of sand into the base of the bioretention facility before backfilling the optional
sand layer. Pump any ponded water before preparing (rototilling) base.

When backfilling the topsoil over the sand layer, first place 3 to 4 inches of topsoil over the sand,
then rototill the sand/topsoil to create a gradation zone. Backfill the remainder of the topsoil to final
grade.

When backfilling the bioretention facility, place soil in lifts 12” to 18”. Do not use heavy equipment
within the bioretention basin. Heavy equipment can be used around the perimeter of the basin to
supply soils and sand. Grade bioretention materials with light equipment such as a compact loader
or a dozer/loader with marsh tracks.

4. Plant Material

Recommended plant material for bioretention areas can be found in Appendix A, Section A.2.3.

5. Plant Installation

Mulch should be placed to a uniform thickness of 2” to 3”. Shredded hardwood mulch is the only
accepted mulch. Pine mulch and wood chips will float and move to the perimeter of the bioretention
area during a storm event and are not acceptable. Shredded mulch must be well aged (6 to 12
months) for acceptance.

Root stock of the plant material shall be kept moist during transport and on-site storage. The plant
root ball should be planted so 1/8th of the ball is above final grade surface. The diameter of the
planting pit shall be at least six inches larger than the diameter of the planting ball. Set and maintain
the plant straight during the entire planting process. Thoroughly water ground bed cover after
installation.

Trees shall be braced using 2” by 2” stakes only as necessary and for the first growing season only.
Stakes are to be equally spaced on the outside of the tree ball.

Grasses and legume seed should be drilled into the soil to a depth of at least one inch. Grass and
legume plugs shall be planted following the non-grass ground cover planting specifications.

The topsoil specifications provide enough organic material to adequately supply nutrients from
natural cycling. The primary function of the bioretention structure is to improve water quality.

B.3.5
Appendix B.3. Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels
Adding fertilizers defeats, or at a minimum, impedes this goal. Only add fertilizer if wood chips or
mulch are used to amend the soil. Rototill urea fertilizer at a rate of 2 pounds per 1000 square feet.

6. Underdrains

Underdrains are to be placed on a 3’-0” wide section of filter cloth. Pipe is placed next, followed by
the gravel bedding. The ends of underdrain pipes not terminating in an observation well shall be
capped.

The main collector pipe for underdrain systems shall be constructed at a minimum slope of 0.5%.
Observation wells and/or clean-out pipes must be provided (one minimum per every 1000 square
feet of surface area).

7. Miscellaneous

The bioretention facility may not be constructed until all contributing drainage area has been
stabilized.

B.3.6
 Table B.3.2 Materials Specifications for Bioretention

Appendix B.3. Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels
Material Specification Size Notes
Plantings see Appendix A, Table A.4 n/a plantings are site-specific
planting soil sand 35 - 60% n/a USDA soil types loamy sand, sandy loam or loam
[2.5’ to 4’ deep] silt 30 - 55%
clay 10 - 25%

mulch shredded hardwood aged 6 months, minimum

pea gravel diaphragm and pea gravel: ASTM-D-448 pea gravel: No. 6
curtain drain stone: 2” to 5”
ornamental stone: washed
cobbles
geotextile Class “C” - apparent opening n/a for use as necessary beneath underdrains only
size (ASTM-D-4751), grab
tensile strength (ASTM-D-
4632), puncture resistance
(ASTM-D-4833)
B.3.7

underdrain gravel AASHTO M-43 0.375” to 0.75”

underdrain piping F 758, Type PS 28 or AASHTO 4” to 6” rigid schedule 40 3/8” perf. @ 6” on center, 4 holes per row; minimum of 3” of
M-278 PVC or SDR35 gravel over pipes; not necessary underneath pipes
poured in place concrete (if MSHA Mix No. 3; f’c = 3500 n/a on-site testing of poured-in-place concrete required:
required) psi @ 28 days, normal weight, 28 day strength and slump test; all concrete design (cast-in-place
air-entrained; reinforcing to or pre-cast) not using previously approved State or local
meet ASTM-615-60 standards requires design drawings sealed and approved by a
professional structural engineer licensed in the State of Maryland -
design to include meeting ACI Code 350.R/89; vertical loading
[H-10 or H-20]; allowable horizontal loading (based on soil
pressures); and analysis of potential cracking
sand AASHTO-M-6 or ASTM-C-33 0.02” to 0.04” Sand substitutions such as Diabase and Graystone #10 are not
[1’ deep] acceptable. No calcium carbonated or dolomitic sand substitutions
are acceptable. No “rock dust” can be used for sand.
Appendix B.3. Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels

B.3.C Specifications for Open Channels and Filter Strips

1. Material Specifications

The recommended construction materials for open channels and filter strips are detailed in Table
B.3.3.

2. Dry Swales

Permeable soil mixture (20” to 30” deep) should meet the bioretention “planting” soil specifications.

Check dams, if required, shall be placed as specified.

System to have 6” of freeboard, minimum above 2 year water surface elevation.

Side slopes to be 3:1 maximum; (4:1 or flatter is preferred).

No gravel or perforated pipe is to be placed under driveways.

Bottom of facility to be above the seasonally high water table per Table 2 of Appendix D.1.

Seed with flood/drought resistant grasses; see Appendix A, Section 2.4.

Longitudinal slope to be 4%, maximum.

Bottom width to be 8’ maximum to avoid braiding; larger widths may be used if proper berming is
supplied. Width to be 2’ minimum.

3. Wet Swales

Follow above information for dry swales, with the following exceptions: the seasonally high water
table may inundate the swale; but not above the design bottom of the channel [NOTE: if the water
table is stable within the channel, the WQv storage may start at this point – see Figure 3.19]

Excavate into undisturbed soils; do not use an underdrain system.

4. Filter Strips

Construct pea gravel diaphragms 12” wide, minimum, and 24” deep minimum.

B.3.8
Appendix B.3. Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels

Pervious berms to be a sand/gravel mix [sand (35-60%), silt (30-55%), and gravel (10-25%)].
Berms to have overflow weirs with 6 inch minimum head.

Slope range to be 2% minimum to 6% maximum.

5. Plant Selection

Recommended grass species for use in establishing permanent ground cover are provided in Section
2.4 of Appendix A.

B.3.9
 Table B.3.3 Open Channel Systems and Filter Strip Materials Specifications

Appendix B.3. .. ............Construction Specifications for Sand Filters, Bioretention and Open Channels
Material Specification Size Notes
dry swale soil USCS; ML, SM, SC n/a soil with a higher percent organic content is preferred
dry swale sand ASTM C-33 fine 0.02” to 0.04”
aggregate concrete sand
check dam (pressure treated) AWPA Standard C6 6” by 6” or 8” by 8” do not coat with creosote; embed at least 3’ into side slopes
check dam (natural wood) Black Locust, Red 6” to 12” diameter; do not use the following, as these species have a predisposition towards rot:
Mulberry, Cedars, notch as necessary Ash, Beech, Birch, Elm, Hackberry, hemlock, Hickories, Maples, Red and
Catalpa, White Oak, Black Oak, Pines, Poplar, Spruce, Sweetgum, Willow
Chestnut Oak, Black
Walnut
filter strip sand/gravel pervious sand: per dry swale sand sand: 0.02” to 0.04” mix with approximately 25% loam soil to support grass cover crop;
berm gravel; AASHTO M-43 gravel: ½” to 1” sand (35-60%), silt (30-55%), and gravel (10-25%)
see Bioretention planting soil notes for more detail.
pea gravel diaphragm and curtain ASTM D 448 varies (No. 6) or (1/8” use clean bank-run gravel
drain to 3/8”)
underdrain gravel AASHTO M-43 0.25” to 0.75”
B.3.10

underdrain F 758 Type PS 28 or 4” to 6” rigid schedule 3/8” perf. @ 6” on center, 4 holes per row; minimum of 3” of gravel over
AASHTO M-278 40 PVC or SDR35 pipes; not necessary underneath pipes
geotextile Class “C” - apparent n/a
opening size (ASTM-D-
4751), grab tensile
strength (ASTM-D-
4632), puncture
resistance (ASTM-D-
4833)
rip rap per county criteria; if size per county DOT
none given, use MSHA requirements based on
Standards and Specs 10-year design flows
Section 905
Construction Specifications for ESD Practices
B.4
Appendix
Appendix B.4. Construction Specifications for Environmental Site Design Practices

B.4.A Green Roof Specifications

1. Material Specifications

Because there is significant variation in green roof assemblies and methods, providing
comprehensive specifications is not feasible. Material specifications for green roofs will vary
based on each roofing system and specific information should be obtained from the appropriate
manufacturer or retailer. The following information and specifications, which include acceptable
materials for generic applications, is not exclusive or limiting.

2. Planting Media

Planting media should be a soil-like mixture with an organic content of 15% or less. The grain
size distribution is necessary for to attain proper moisture content, permeability, nutrient
management and non-capillary porosity, and soil structure. Grain size guidelines vary for single
and dual media green roof assemblies.

The planting media shall be tested and meet the following criteria:

• Non-Capillary Pore Space at Field Capacity, 0.333 bar ≥ 15% (volume)

(TMECC 03.01, A)
• Moisture Content at Field Capacity ≥ 12% (volume)
(TMECC 03.01, A)
• Maximum Media Water Retention (FLL) ≥ 30% (volume)
• Alkalinity, CaCO3 equivalents (MSA) ≤ 2.5%
• Total Organic Matter by Wet Combustion (MSA) ≤ 3–15% (dry wt.)
• pH (RCSTP) 6.5 – 8.0
• Soluble Salts (DTPA saturated media extraction – ≤ 6 mmhos/cm
RCSTP)
• Cation Exchange Capacity (MSA) ≥ 10 meq/100 g
• Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity (FLL):
o Single Media Assemblies ≥ 0.05 in/min
o Dual Media Assemblies ≥ 0.30 in/min

• Mineral Fraction Grain Size Distribution (ASTM D422):

Single Media Dual Media

o Clay Fraction (2 micron) 0 0
o % Passing #200 Sieve ≤ 5% 5 – 15%
o % Passing # 60 Sieve ≤ 10% 10 – 25%
o % Passing #18 Sieve 5 – 50% 20 – 50%
o % Passing ⅛ inch Sieve 20 – 70% 55 – 90%
o % Passing ⅜ inch Sieve 75 – 100% 90 – 100%

B.4.1 Supp. 1
Appendix B.4. Construction Specifications for Environmental Site Design Practices

3. Green Roof Layers

Root Barriers – should be thermoplastic membranes with minimum thickness of 30 mils.

Membranes certified for use as root barriers are recommended. However, only FLL currently
offers a recognized certification test. Many FLL-certified materials are locally available.

Granular Drainage Media – should be a non-carbonate mineral aggregate meeting the following
specifications:

• Saturated Hydraulic Conductivity ≥ 25 inches/minute

• Total Organic Matter (by wet combustion) ≤ 1%
• Abrasion Resistance (ASTM C131-96) ≤ 25% loss
• Soundness (ASTM C88 or T103 or T103-91) ≤ 5% loss
• Porosity (ASTM C29) ≥ 25%
• Alkalinity, CaCO3 equivalents (MSA) ≤ 1%
• Grain Size Distribution (ASTM C136)
o Percent Passing #18 Sieve ≤1%
o Percent Passing ¼ inch Sieve ≤ 30%
o Percent Passing 3/8 inch Sieve ≤ 80%

Separation Fabric – should be a lightweight, non-woven geotextile that is easily penetrated by

roots while providing a durable separation between drainage and growth media layers.
Separation fabrics should meet the following:

• Unit Weight (ASTM D3776) ≤ 4.25 ounces per square yard

• Grab Tensile Strength (ASTM D4632) ≤ 90 lbs.
• Mullen Burst Strength (ASTM D4632) ≥ 135 lbs/inch
• Permittivity (ASTM D4491) ≥ 2 sec-1

Supp. 1 B.4.2
Appendix B.4. Construction Specifications for Environmental Site Design Practices

B.4.B Specifications for Permeable Pavements & Reinforced Turf

These specifications include information on acceptable materials for typical applications and are
not exclusive or limiting. The designer is responsible for developing detailed specifications for
individual projects and specific conditions.

1. Pervious Concrete Specifications

Design Thickness - Pervious concrete applications shall be designed so that the thickness of the
concrete slab shall support the traffic and vehicle types that will be carried. Applications may be
designed using either standard pavement procedures (e.g., AASHTO, ACI 325.9R, ACI 330R) or
using structural values derived from flexible pavement design procedures.

Mix & Installation – Traditional Portland cements (ASTM C 150, C 1157) may be used in
pervious concrete applications. Phosphorus admixtures may also be used. Materials should be
tested (e.g., trial batching) prior to construction so that critical properties (e.g., settling time, rate
of strength development, porosity, permeability) can be determined.

Aggregate – Pervious concrete contains a limited fine aggregate content. Commonly used
gradations include ASTM C 33 No. 67 (¾ in. to No. 4), No. 8 (⅜ in. to No. 16) and No. 89 (⅜ in.
to No. 50) sieves. Single-sized aggregate (up to 1 inch) may also be used.

Water Content – Water-to-cement ratios between 0.27 and 0.30 are used routinely with proper
inclusion of chemical admixtures. Water quality should meet ACI 30a. As a general rule,
potable water should be used although recycled concrete production water meetingASTM C 94
or AASHTO M 157 may also be used.

Admixtures – Chemical admixtures (e.g., retarders or hydration-stabilizers) are used to obtain

special properties in pervious concrete. Use of admixtures should meet ASTM C 494 (chemical
admixtures) and ASTM C 260 (air entraining admixtures) and closely follow manufacturer’s
recommendations.

Base Course – The base course shall be AASHTO No. 3 or 4 course aggregate with an assumed
open pore space of 30% (n = 0.30).

2. Permeable Interlocking Concrete Pavements (PICP)

Paver Blocks – Blocks should be either 3⅛ in. or 4 in. thick, and meet ASTM C 936 or CSA
A231.2 requirements. Applications should have 20% or more (40% preferred) of the surface
area open. Installation should follow manufacturer’s instructions, except that infill and base
course materials and dimensions specified in this Appendix shall be followed.

Infill Materials and Leveling Course – Openings shall be filled with ASTM C-33 graded sand or
sandy loam. PICP blocks shall be placed on a one-inch thick leveling course of ASTM C-33
sand.

B.4.3 Supp. 1
Appendix B.4. Construction Specifications for Environmental Site Design Practices

Base Course - The base course shall be AASHTO No. 3 or 4 course aggregate with an assumed
open pore space of 30% (n = 0.30).

3. Reinforced Turf

Reinforced Grass Pavement (RGP) – Whether used with grass or gravel, the RGP thickness shall
be at least 1¾” thick with a load capacity capable of supporting the traffic and vehicle types that
will be carried.

B.4.C Specifications for Micro-Bioretention. Rain Gardens, Landscape Infiltration &

Infiltration Berms

1. Material Specifications

The allowable materials to be used in these practices are detailed in Table B.4.1.

2. Filtering Media or Planting Soil

The soil shall be a uniform mix, free of stones, stumps, roots or other similar objects larger than
two inches. No other materials or substances shall be mixed or dumped within the micro-
bioretention practice that may be harmful to plant growth, or prove a hindrance to the planting or
maintenance operations. The planting soil shall be free of Bermuda grass, Quackgrass, Johnson
grass, or other noxious weeds as specified under COMAR 15.08.01.05.

The planting soil shall be tested and shall meet the following criteria:

• Soil Component - Loamy Sand or Sandy Loam (USDA Soil Textural Classification)
• Organic Content - Minimum 10% by dry weight (ASTM D 2974). In general, this can be
met with a mixture of loamy sand (60%-65%) and compost (35% to 40%) or sandy loam
(30%), coarse sand (30%), and compost (40%).
• Clay Content - Media shall have a clay content of less than 5%.
• pH Range – Should be between 5.5 - 7.0. Amendments (e.g., lime, iron sulfate plus sulfur)
may be mixed into the soil to increase or decrease pH.

There shall be at least one soil test per project. Each test shall consist of both the standard soil
test for pH, and additional tests of organic matter, and soluble salts. A textural analysis is
required from the site stockpiled topsoil. If topsoil is imported, then a texture analysis shall be
performed for each location where the topsoil was excavated.

3. Compaction

It is very important to minimize compaction of both the base of bioretention practices and the
required backfill. When possible, use excavation hoes to remove original soil. If practices are

Supp. 1 B.4.4
Appendix B.4. Construction Specifications for Environmental Site Design Practices

excavated using a loader, the contractor should use wide track or marsh track equipment, or light
equipment with turf type tires. Use of equipment with narrow tracks or narrow tires, rubber tires
with large lugs, or high-pressure tires will cause excessive compaction resulting in reduced
infiltration rates and is not acceptable. Compaction will significantly contribute to design
failure.

Compaction can be alleviated at the base of the bioretention facility by using a primary tilling
operation such as a chisel plow, ripper, or subsoiler. These tilling operations are to refracture the
soil profile through the 12 inch compaction zone. Substitute methods must be approved by the
engineer. Rototillers typically do not till deep enough to reduce the effects of compaction from
heavy equipment.

Rototill 2 to 3 inches of sand into the base of the bioretention facility before backfilling the
optional sand layer. Pump any ponded water before preparing (rototilling) base.

When backfilling the topsoil over the sand layer, first place 3 to 4 inches of topsoil over the sand,
then rototill the sand/topsoil to create a gradation zone. Backfill the remainder of the topsoil to
final grade.

When backfilling the bioretention facility, place soil in lifts 12” to 18”. Do not use heavy
equipment within the bioretention basin. Heavy equipment can be used around the perimeter of
the basin to supply soils and sand. Grade bioretention materials with light equipment such as a
compact loader or a dozer/loader with marsh tracks.

4. Plant Material

Recommended plant material for micro-bioretention practices can be found in Appendix A,

Section A.2.3.

5. Plant Installation

Compost is a better organic material source, is less likely to float, and should be placed in the
invert and other low areas. Mulch should be placed in surrounding to a uniform thickness of 2”
to 3”. Shredded or chipped hardwood mulch is the only accepted mulch. Pine mulch and wood
chips will float and move to the perimeter of the bioretention area during a storm event and are
not acceptable. Shredded mulch must be well aged (6 to 12 months) for acceptance.

Rootstock of the plant material shall be kept moist during transport and on-site storage. The plant
root ball should be planted so 1/8th of the ball is above final grade surface. The diameter of the
planting pit shall be at least six inches larger than the diameter of the planting ball. Set and
maintain the plant straight during the entire planting process. Thoroughly water ground bed
cover after installation.

B.4.5 Supp. 1
Appendix B.4. Construction Specifications for Environmental Site Design Practices

Trees shall be braced using 2” by 2” stakes only as necessary and for the first growing season only.
Stakes are to be equally spaced on the outside of the tree ball.

Grasses and legume seed should be drilled into the soil to a depth of at least one inch. Grass and
legume plugs shall be planted following the non-grass ground cover planting specifications.

The topsoil specifications provide enough organic material to adequately supply nutrients from natural
cycling. The primary function of the bioretention structure is to improve water quality. Adding
fertilizers defeats, or at a minimum, impedes this goal. Only add fertilizer if wood chips or mulch are
used to amend the soil. Rototill urea fertilizer at a rate of 2 pounds per 1000 square feet.

6. Underdrains

Underdrains should meet the following criteria:

• Pipe- Should be 4” to 6” diameter, slotted or perforated rigid plastic pipe (ASTMF 758, Type PS
28, or AASHTO-M-278) in a gravel layer. The preferred material is slotted, 4” rigid pipe (e.g.,
PVC or HDPE).
• Perforations - If perforated pipe is used, perforations should be ⅜” diameter located 6” on center
with a minimum of four holes per row. Pipe shall be wrapped with a ¼” (No. 4 or 4x4) galvanized
hardware cloth.
• Gravel – The gravel layer (No. 57 stone preferred) shall be at least 3” thick above and below the
underdrain.
• The main collector pipe shall be at a minimum 0.5% slope.
• A rigid, non-perforated observation well must be provided (one per every 1,0000 square feet) to
provide a clean-out port and monitor performance of the filter.
• A 4” layer of pea gravel (⅛” to ⅜” stone) shall be located between the filter media and underdrain
to prevent migration of fines into the underdrain. This layer may be considered part of the filter
bed when bed thickness exceeds 24”.

The main collector pipe for underdrain systems shall be constructed at a minimum slope of 0.5%.
Observation wells and/or clean-out pipes must be provided (one minimum per every 1000 square feet
of surface area).

7. Miscellaneous

These practices may not be constructed until all contributing drainage area has been stabilized

Supp. 1 B.4.6
Appendix B.4. Construction Specifications for Environmental Site Design Practices

Table B.4.1 Materials Specifications for Micro-Bioretention, Rain Gardens & Landscape Infiltration-
Material Specification Size Notes
Plantings see Appendix A, Table A.4 n/a plantings are site-specific
Planting soil loamy sand (60 - 65%) & n/a USDA soil types loamy sand or sandy loam; clay content < 5%
[2’ to 4’ deep] compost (35 – 40%)
or
sandy loam (30%),
coarse sand (30%) &
compost (40%)

Min. 10% by dry weight

Organic content
(ASTM D 2974)
Mulch shredded hardwood aged 6 months, minimum; no pine or wood chips
Pea gravel diaphragm pea gravel: ASTM-D-448 NO. 8 OR NO. 9
(1/8" TO 3/8”)

Curtain drain ornamental stone: washed stone: 2” to 5”

cobbles
Geotextile n/a PE Type 1 nonwoven
Gravel (underdrains and AASHTO M-43 NO. 57 OR NO. 6
infiltration berms) AGGREGATE
(3/8" to 3/4")
Underdrain piping F 758, Type PS 28 or AASHTO 4” to 6” rigid schedule 40 Slotted or perforated pipe; 3/8” perf. @ 6” on center, 4 holes per
M-278 PVC or SDR35 row; minimum of 3” of gravel over pipes; not necessary
underneath pipes. Perforated pipe shall be wrapped with ¼-inch
galvanized hardware cloth
Poured in place concrete (if MSHA Mix No. 3; f’c = 3500 n/a on-site testing of poured-in-place concrete required:
required) psi @ 28 days, normal weight, 28 day strength and slump test; all concrete design (cast-in-place
air-entrained; reinforcing to or pre-cast) not using previously approved State or local
meet ASTM-615-60 standards requires design drawings sealed and approved by a
professional structural engineer licensed in the State of Maryland
- design to include meeting ACI Code 350.R/89; vertical loading
[H-10 or H-20]; allowable horizontal loading (based on soil
pressures); and analysis of potential cracking
Sand AASHTO-M-6 or ASTM-C-33 0.02” to 0.04” Sand substitutions such as Diabase and Graystone (AASHTO)
#10 are not acceptable. No calcium carbonated or dolomitic sand
substitutions are acceptable. No “rock dust” can be used for sand.

B.4.7 Supp. 1
Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)
C.1
Appendix
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

The following example demonstrates the process for the design of a shallow wetland (W-1)
BMP.

Site Specific Data

Clevenger Community Center is a recreational center located in Charles County, Maryland. The
site area and drainage area to the proposed stormwater management facility is 5.3 acres. The
project consists of constructing the community center and parking for a total impervious area of
1.94 acres. Existing ground at the outlet of the facility is 44.5’ above mean sea level (MSL).
Soil borings indicate that the seasonally high water table is at elevation 41’. The underlying soils
are loams. TR-55 calculations for the existing and developed hydrologic conditions are shown in
Figures C.1.2 and C.1.3.

Confirm Design Criteria

The site is within the Eastern Rainfall Zone and located on the Western Shore of the Chesapeake
Bay (see Volume I, Chapter 2, Figures 2.1 and 2.4). Additionally, the site is located within a
USE I watershed. Therefore, the following criteria apply:

1. WQv treatment is required. In the Eastern Rainfall Zone, P = 1”.

2. Rev treatment is required.
3. Cpv treatment is required.
4. Qp10 may be required by the local jurisdiction. For this example, Qp10 will be
required.
5. Qf may be required by the local jurisdiction. For this example, Qf will not be
required. However, safe conveyance of the 100-year design storm is required through
the proposed stormwater management facility.

Preliminary Design

Step 1. Compute WQv

Step 1a. Compute Volumetric Runoff Coefficient (Rv)

Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 1.94 acres / 5.3 acres = 0.366 or 36.6%

= 0.05 + (0.009)(36.6) = 0.379

Step 1b. Compute WQv

WQv = [(P)(Rv)(A)]!12
= [(1”)(0.379)(5.3 ac)]!12
= 0.167 ac-ft (7,292 cf.)

C.1.1
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)
Figure C.1.1 Clevenger Community Center Site Plan

C.1.2
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Figure C.1.2 Clevenger Community Center – Existing Conditions

(source: TR-55 computer printouts)
RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.00
Project : CLEVENGER COMMUNITY CENTER User: SRC Date: 06-18-99
County : CHARLES State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: EXISTING
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
OTHER AGRICULTURAL LANDS
Meadow -cont. grass (non grazed) ---- - 5.0(58) - -
Woods good - 0.3(55) - -
Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) 5.3
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: 5.3 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 58*
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method

TIME OF CONCENTRATION AND TRAVEL TIME Version 2.00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow Type 2 year Length Slope Surface n Area Wp Velocity Time
rain (ft) (ft/ft) code (sq/ft) (ft) (ft/sec) (hr)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sheet 3.3 75 0.013 F 0.221
Shallow Concent'd 550 0.016 U 0.075
Open Channel 250 4.0 0.017
Time of Concentration = 0.31*
--- Sheet Flow Surface Codes ---
A Smooth Surface F Grass, Dense --- Shallow Concentrated ---
B Fallow (No Res.) G Grass, Burmuda --- Surface Codes ---
C Cultivated < 20 % Res. H Woods, Light P Paved
D Cultivated > 20 % Res. I Woods, Dense U Unpaved
E Grass-Range, Short J Range, Natural
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.00

Data: Drainage Area : 5.3 * Acres
Runoff Curve Number : 58 *
Time of Concentration: 0.31 * Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE
=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.7 | 3.3 | 4.4 | 5.3 | 6 | 6.6 | 7.5 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.54 | 0.44 | 0.33 | 0.27 | 0.24 | 0.22 | 0.19 |
| Used | 0.50 | 0.44 | 0.33 | 0.27 | 0.24 | 0.22 | 0.19 |
| Runoff (in) | 0.18 | 0.38 | 0.85 | 1.34 | 1.76 | 2.14 | 2.76 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |0.460 |0.615 |0.835 |0.904 |0.929 |0.946 |0.967 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 0 | 1 | 4 | 6 | 9 | 11 | 14 |
=========================================================================
* - Value(s) provided from TR-55 system routines

C.1.3
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Figure C.1.3 Clevenger Community Center – Developed Conditions

(source: TR-55 computer printouts)
RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.00
Project : CLEVENGER COMMUNITY CENTER User: SRC Date: 06-18-99
County : CHARLES State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: DEVELOPED
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FULLY DEVELOPED URBAN AREAS (Veg Estab.)
Open space (Lawns,parks etc.)
Good condition; grass cover > 75% - 3.06(61) - -
Impervious Areas
Paved parking lots, roofs, driveways - 1.94(98) - -
OTHER AGRICULTURAL LANDS
Woods good - 0.3(55) - -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) 5.3

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: 5.3 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 74*
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method

TIME OF CONCENTRATION AND TRAVEL TIME Version 2.00

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Flow Type 2 year Length Slope Surface n Area Wp Velocity Time
rain (ft) (ft/ft) code (sq/ft) (ft) (ft/sec) (hr)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Sheet 3.3 70 0.013 F 0.209
Shallow Concent'd 310 0.013 P 0.037
Open Channel 5.0 0.007
Time of Concentration = 0.26*
--- Sheet Flow Surface Codes ---
A Smooth Surface F Grass, Dense --- Shallow Concentrated ---
B Fallow (No Res.) G Grass, Burmuda --- Surface Codes ---
C Cultivated < 20 % Res. H Woods, Light P Paved
D Cultivated > 20 % Res. I Woods, Dense U Unpaved
E Grass-Range, Short J Range, Natural
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method
GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.00
Data: Drainage Area : 5.3 * Acres
Runoff Curve Number : 74 *
Time of Concentration: 0.26 * Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE
=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.7 | 3.3 | 4.4 | 5.3 | 6 | 6.6 | 7.5 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.26 | 0.21 | 0.16 | 0.13 | 0.12 | 0.11 | 0.09 |
| Used | 0.26 | 0.21 | 0.16 | 0.13 | 0.12 | 0.11 | 0.10 |
| Runoff (in) | 0.72 | 1.10 | 1.90 | 2.61 | 3.18 | 3.70 | 4.48 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |0.995 |1.033 |1.076 |1.098 |1.110 |1.119 |1.124 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 4 | 6 | 11 | 15 | 19 | 22 | 27 |
=========================================================================
* - Value(s) provided from TR-55 system routines

C.1.4
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Step 2. Compute Rev

Step 2a. Determine Soil Specific Recharge Factor (S) Based on Hydrologic Soil Group

Soils found throughout the site are loams and silt loams therefore S = 0.26

Step 2b. Compute Rev Using Percent Volume Method

Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)]!12
= [(0.26)(0.379)(5.3)]!12
= 0.0456 ac-ft. (1,986 cf)

Step 2c. Compute Rev Using Percent Area Method

Rev = (S)(Ai)
= (0.26)(1.94 ac.)
= 0.50 acres

The Rev requirement may be met by: a) treating 1,986 cf using structural methods, b) treating
0.50 acres using non-structural methods, or c) a combination of both (e.g. 994 cf structurally and
0.25 acres non-structurally).

Step 3. Compute Cpv

The proposed community center is located within a USE I watershed, therefore an extended
detention time (T) of 24 hours for the one-year storm event. The time of concentration (tc) and
one-year runoff (Qa) are 0.26 hours and 0.72” respectively (see Fig. C.1.3).

Use the MDE Method to Compute Storage Volume (Appendix D.11):

Initial abstraction (Ia) for CN of 74 is 0.703: (TR-55) [Ia = (200/CN)-2]

Ia/P = (0.703)!2.7” = 0.26

tc = 0.26 hours

qu = 625 csm/in. (Figure D.11.1, Appendix D.11)

qi = quAQa where A is the drainage area in square miles

= (625 csm)(0.0083 square miles)(0.72”)
= 3.7 cfs; qi > 2.0 cfs ∴ Cpv is required.

Knowing qu and T (extended detention time), find qo/qi from Figure D.11.2, “Detention Time
Versus Discharge Ratios.”

Peak outflow discharge / peak inflow discharge (qo/qi) = 0.030

C.1.5
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

With qo/qi, compute Vs!Vr for a Type II rainfall distribution,

Vs!Vr = 0.683 - 1.43(qo/qi) + 1.64(qo/qi)2 – 0.804(qo/qi)3 ; (Appendix D.11)

Vs!Vr = 0.64

Therefore, Vs = [(Vs!Vr)(Qa)(A)] ! 12
= [(0.64)(0.72”)(5.3 ac.)] ! 12
= 0.204 ac-ft (8,886 cf.)

With qo/qi, compute the Cpv release rate,

qo = (qo/qi)(qi); qi = 4.0 cfs

= (0.030)(4.0 cfs)
= 0.12 cfs

With qo, determine the required orifice area (Ao) for extended detention design:

qo qo
Ao = =
C 2 gho 4. 81 ho

“ho” is the maximum storage depth associated with Vs. For this example, assume ho to be
no more than 3.0 ft.

∴ Ao = (0.12 cfs) ! (4.81√3.0 ft)

= (0.12 cfs) ! (8.33 ft)
= 0.014 sf.

With Ao, determine the required orifice diameter (do):

= 4 × 0. 014 sf
4 Ao
do =
π π = 0. 134 ft (1.6”) USE 1.5”
“do’s” of less than 3” are subject to local jurisdictional approval, and are not recommended
unless an internal control for orifice protection is used. For this example, use a do of 3”.

Step 4. Compute Qp10 Storage Volume

Per TR-55, Figure 6-1 (Page 6-2 of TR-55) for an inflow (Qin) of 15 cfs and an allowable
outflow (Qout) of 6 cfs, the volume of storage (Vs) necessary for control is 0.37 ac-ft, with a
developed CN of 74 (see TR-55 Worksheet 6a, Page 6-5 of TR-55). Note that there is 5.3 inches
of rainfall during this event with 2.6 inches of runoff.

Step 5. Compute Qf

For this example, management of Qf is not required. However, the 100-year storm event must be

C.1.6
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)
conveyed safely through the stormwater management practice.

Table C.1.1 Summary of General Storage Requirements for Clevenger Community Center

Step Requirement Volume Required Notes

(acre-feet)
1. WQv 0.167
2. Rev 0.0456 volume is included within the WQv
(or 0.50 acres) storage
3. Cpv 0.204 Cpv release rate is 0.10 cfs
4. Qp10 0.36 10-year release rate is 6.0 cfs
5. Qf N/A provide safe passage for the 100-year
event in final design

Final Design

Step 1. BMP Selection Process

While the stormwater management BMP’s listed in Chapter 2.7 (Volume I) are
equivalent in meeting the established pollutant removal goals, site characteristics are an
important consideration in selecting the most appropriate BMP for a specific design. The
process outlined in Chapter 4 (Volume I) provides guidance for screening BMP’s as part of the
selection process.

∂ Watershed Factors: Is the project located in a watershed that has special design
objectives or constraints that must be met? This project is located in a USE I watershed
and there are no other special objectives or constraints that must be considered.

• Terrain Factors: Is the project located in a portion of the State that has particular
design constraints imposed by local terrain and or underlying geology? The project is
located in a region of the State that has no constraints imposed by local terrain or underlying
geology

÷ Stormwater Treatment Suitability: Can the BMP meet all five stormwater criteria at
the site or are a combination of BMPs needed? For this project, a single BMP will not
satisfy all of the required criteria (see Table 4.3 BMP Selection Matrix No. 3). Therefore,
one BMP will treat WQv, Cpv, and Qp10 while a separate BMP will treat Rev.

C.1.7
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)
≠ Physical Feasibility Factors: Are there any physical constraints at the project site that
may restrict or preclude the use of a particular BMP? Although the soils encountered are
infiltratable, the depth to the existing water table is less than 4.0’. Therefore infiltration is
not feasible for treating WQv. Additionally, the soils indicate that wet pond designs may
require a liner. Sand filters will require substantial pretreatment as the proposed
imperviousness is near 37%. The drainage area, 5.3 acres, is marginally low to support either
ponds or wetlands. However, the groundwater table may be sufficient to support a shallow
wetland.

≡ Community and Environmental Factors: Do the remaining BMPs have any important
community or environmental benefits or drawbacks that might influence the selection
process? The projected use of the site as a community center may require that BMPs
possess a greater acceptance by the community. Additionally, habitat quality is important if
environmental education is provided at the center. Finally, ease of maintenance and costs
relative to drainage area are important considerations as the sources of future funding may be
limited.

≈ Location and Permitting Factors: What environmental features must be avoided or

considered when locating the BMP system at a site to fully comply with local, State and
federal regulations? There are no wetlands, stream buffers, floodplains or forest
conservation areas located on the site although the area of existing woods should be
preserved if possible.

After considering all factors and the site layout, use a shallow wetland (W-1) for treating WQv.
Cpv and Qp10 will be treated by providing sufficient storage above the shallow wetland. Finally,
Rev will be treated prior to the wetland by providing storage around the inlet, I-1.

Step 2. Shallow Wetland (W-1) Design

Using the information developed in Preliminary Design Steps 1 and 2, design a shallow wetland
to treat WQv (see Figure C.1.4).

A. Calculate Design Volume

Because Rev will be treated prior to the shallow wetland, Rev may be subtracted from the
WQv for the design of this BMP:

WQv9 = WQv - Rev

= 7,292 cf. – 1,986 cf.
= 5,306 cf.

C.1.8
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)
B. Calculate Pretreatment (Forebay) Volume

Forebays shall be sized to capture 10% of the design runoff volume (in this case WQv9) at
each inflow point; assume that inflow is divided equally between the two inflow points for
this design.

forebay volume = (10%)(5,306 cf.! 2)

= 265.3 cf. at each inflow point

forebay volume provided = 800 cf. and 700 cf. respectively

B. Determine Shallow Wetland Size Criteria

Using the design criteria set forth in Chapter 3 for the design of shallow wetland systems, the
configuration shown in Figure C.1.4, and the information in Table C.1.2, design a shallow
wetland to treat WQv9. Specific criteria that govern the configuration of the shallow wetland
design are as follows.

1. Surface area 〈 1.5% 3 drainage area

〈 1.5% 3 5.3 acres
〈 0.0795 acres (3,463 sf.)

Surface area of shallow wetland at elevation 44.0 = 0.1366 acres (5,950 sf.) -OKAY

2. Deepwater (depth 〈 4’) zones 〈 25% 3 WQv9

〈 25% 3 5,306 cf.
〈 1,326.5 cf.

Deepwater zones provided = 1,950 cf. (forebays and micropool)

3. High marsh (depth [ 6”) zones 〈 35% 3 total surface area
〈 35% 3 3,463 sf.
〈 1,212.1 sf.

High marsh area provided = 2,160 sf.

4. Total marsh area (depth [ 18”) zones 〈 65% 3 total surface area
〈 65% 3 3,463 sf.
〈 2,251 sf.

Total marsh area provided = 4,200 sf.

5. Check for water balance (see Appendix D.3) for maintenance of wet pool:

a. Calculate maximum drawdown:

C.1.9
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Inflow Runoff Volume = P x E where P = Precipitation & E = Runoff Efficiency

- for a CN of 74, Volume of runoff (2 year storm) = 1.10”
- for Charles County, P (2 year rainfall) = 3.3” (0.275’)
- E = 1.1”!3.3” = 0.33
∴ Inflow = P x E = 0.275’ x 0.33 x 5.3 acres = 0.48 ac-ft

Outflow = surface area x evaporation losses

= 0.137 acres x 0.54 ft (see Table D.3.2)
= 0.074 ac-ft

Inflow (0.48 ac-ft) is greater than Outflow (0.074 ac-ft) –OKAY

b. Check for drawdown over an extended period without rainfall:

Using 45 day “worst case” drought conditions

- highest evaporation occurs in July – 0.54 ft per month
- average evaporation per day = 0.54/31 days = 0.017 ft/day
- over 45 day interval, evaporation loss = 45 x 0.017 ft/day = 0.78 ft.
- assume surface of wetland may drop up to 0.78 ft. over this interval -OKAY

C.1.10
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Table C.1.2 Stage – Storage Data for Stormwater Management Design

Stage - Storage Data

Elevation Δ Storage Storage Storage Storage Above WQv
(cubic feet) (acre-feet) (acre-feet)
40.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
41.0 372.0 372.0 0.0085
42.0 665.0 1,037.0 0.0238
43.0 1,428.0 2,465.0 0.0566
44.0 3,990.0 6,455.0 0.1482 0.0
45.0 11,200.0 17,665.0 0.4055 0.2573
45.5 8,478.0 26,133.0 0.5999 0.4517
46.0 8,987.0 35,120.0 0.8062 0.6581
47.0 19,530.0 54,650.0 1.2546 1.1064
48.0 21,646.0 76,296.0 1.7515 1.6033

Figure C.1.4 Plan View of Shallow Wetland Design

C.1.11
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Step 3. Cpv Design

Using the information from Preliminary Design Step 3, the stage–storage data from
Table C.1.2, and the stage-discharge data for the 3” orifice in Table C.1.3, design an extended-
detention basin to treat Cpv.

Table C.1.3 Stage – Discharge Data for Clevenger Community Center

Stage - Discharge Data
1
Elevation 3” Orifice 5.2’ Weir2 10.0’ Weir3 Total
centerline – 44.125’ crest @ 45.00’ crest @ 45.50’ Discharge
Head (h) Discharge Head (h) Discharge Head (h) Discharge

44.00 0.0 0.00 0.00

44.25 0.1 0.085 0.085
44.50 0.4 0.150 0.150
44.75 0.6 0.194 0.194
45.00 0.9 0.229 0.0 0.0 0.229
45.50 1.4 0.287 0.5 5.70 0.0 0.0 5.70
46.00 1.9 0.335 1.0 16.12 0.5 10.96 27.08
47.00 2.9 0.415 2.0 45.59 1.5 56.95 102.54
48.00 3.9 0.482 3.0 83.76 2.5 122.53 206.29
1. Using orifice equation Q = ca 2 gh where c=0.61, a=0.05 sf., and g= 32.2 ft/sec2
2. Using weir equation Q = clh 3 2 where c= 3.1 & l =5.2’
3. Using weir equation Q = clh 3 2 where c= 3.1 & l =10.0’

From Preliminary Step 3, the storage volume (Vs) for Cpv is 0.204 ac-ft and the required orifice
diameter (do) is 3”. Using Table C.1.2 and starting at elevation 44.0, the storage volume of the
proposed stormwater management structure is 0.2573 ac-ft at elevation 45.0’. Therefore, Cpv
treatment will be provided between elevations 44.0’ and 45.0’.

Step 4. Qp10 Treatment

From Preliminary Step 5, the estimated storage volume (Vs) for treating Qp10 is 0.36 ac-ft and the
allowable discharge rate is 6.0 cfs. Using Table C.1.2 and starting at elevation 44.0’, the storage
volume of the proposed stormwater management structure is 0.4517 ac-ft at elevation 45.5’.
Therefore, design a control structure that will produce a discharge rate of 6.0 cfs at storage
elevation 45.5’. This will be a conservative design since the volume provided (0.4517 ac-ft) is
greater than the 0.36 ac-ft required. Using a weir with crest at elevation 45.0’ and including flow
from the 3” orifice, the ten-year discharge (q10) may be computed as follows:

q10 = cw lhw3 2 + co a 2 gho

where: q10 = 10 yr. discharge = 6.0 cfs

C.1.12
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)
cw = weir coefficient = 3.1
l = length of weir
hw = head on weir; at elevation 45.5, hw = 0.5’
co = orifice coefficient = 0.61
a = area of 3” orifice = 0.05
g = gravitational acceleration = 32 ft/sec2
ho = head on orifice; at elevation 45.5, ho = 1.375

therefore: q10 = (3.1)(l)(0.5)3/2 + (0.61)(0.05)[(2)(32.2)(1.375)]1/2

6.0 cfs = 1.1l cfs + 0.29 cfs
by rearranging this equation and solving for l; l = 5.2’

use a 5.2’ weir with crest at elevation 45.0 –OKAY

Step 5. Qf Treatment

From Preliminary Step 5, the 100-year storm event must be conveyed safely through the
stormwater management facility. From Figure C.1.3, 100-year discharge rate (q100) is 27 cfs and
from Figure C.1.4, the top of the proposed stormwater management facility is at elevation 48.0’.
Allowing for 2.0’ of freeboard, design a control structure that will discharge 27 cfs at elevation
46.0’. Using a weir with crest at elevation 45.5’, including flow from the 5.5’ weir and assuming
that the 3” orifice is clogged, q100 may be computed as follows:

q100 = cl100 h100

32
+ cl10 h103 2

where: q100 = 100 yr. discharge = 27 cfs.

c = weir coefficient = 3.1
l100 = length of 100 yr. weir
h100 = head on 100 yr. weir; at elev. 46.0’, h100 = 0.5’
l10 = length of 10 yr. weir = 5.2’
h10= head on 10 yr. weir; at elev. 46.0’, h10 = 1.0’

therefore: q100 = (3.1)(l100)(0.5)3/2 + (3.1)(5.2’)(1.0)3/2

27 cfs = 1.1l100 cfs + 16.1 cfs
by rearranging this equation and solving for l100; l100 = 9.89’

use a 10.0’ weir with crest at elevation 45.5’ –OKAY

See Figure C.1.5 for a schematic of the control structure and Figure C.1.6 for a profile through
the centerline of the dam and control structure. See Figures C.1.7 and C.1.8 for the TR-20 input
and summary tables.

C.1.13
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Figure C.1.5 Schematic of Control Structure

Step 6. Investigate Potential Pond Hazard Classification

Using NRCS-MD Code No. 378 Pond Standards/Specifications (Appendix B.1), review
downstream conditions and compute a preliminary Breach Peak Discharge (Qmax) to determine
pond hazard classification.

Qmax = (3. 2 )( H w5 2 )

where: Qmax = Breach Peak Discharge

Hw = depth of water at the dam at time of failure, in feet, and is measured
from the design high water to the lowest point in the original cross section
at the centerline of the dam; Hw = 46.0’ – 44.0’ = 2.0’

Qmax = (3.2)(2.0)5/2 = 18.1 cfs

Qmax will not overtop downstream roads or infrastructure, therefore the stormwater management
facility may be considered as a Class “a” low hazard structure per the NRCS-MD 378 standards.

C.1.14
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Figure C.1.6 Profile of Principle Spillway

C.1.15
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Figure C.1.7 TR-20 Computer Program Input File

JOB TR-20 EXAMPLE1 ECON FULLPRINT PASS=001 SUMMARY GRAPHICS

TITLE DESIGN EXAMPLE 1 CLEVENGER COMMUNITY CENTER
3 STRUCT 01
8 44.0 0.0 0.0
8 44.25 0.12 0.060
8 44.5 0.17 0.128
8 44.75 0.21 0.180
8 45.0 0.24 0.2573
8 45.5 5.70 0.4517
8 46.0 27.08 0.6581
8 47.0 102.54 1.1064
8 48.0 206.29 1.6033
9 ENDTBL
6 RUNOFF 1 001 1 .00828 74. 0.26 1 1 1 1 1
6 RESVOR 2 01 1 2 44.0 1 1 1 1 1 1
6 RUNOFF 1 003 3 .00828 58. 0.31 1 1 1 1 1
ENDATA
7 INCREM 6 0.10
7 COMPUT 7 001 003 0.0 2.7 1.0 2 2 01 01
ENDCMP 1
7 INCREM 6 0.10
7 COMPUT 7 001 003 0.0 3.3 1.0 2 2 01 02
ENDCMP 1
7 INCREM 6 0.10
7 COMPUT 7 001 003 0.0 5.3 1.0 2 2 01 10
ENDCMP 1
7 INCREM 6 0.10
7 COMPUT 7 001 003 0.0 7.5 1.0 2 2 01 99
ENDCMP 1
ENDJOB 2

C.1.16
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Figure C.1.8 TR-20 Computer Program Output Summary Table

SUMMARY TABLE 1
---------------
SELECTED RESULTS OF STANDARD AND EXECUTIVE CONTROL IN ORDER PERFORMED.
A CHARACTER FOLLOWING THE PEAK DISCHARGE TIME AND RATE (CFS) INDICATES:
F-FLAT TOP HYDROGRAPH T-TRUNCATED HYDROGRAPH R-RISING TRUNCATED HYDROGRAPH

XSECTION/ STANDARD PEAK DISCHARGE

STRUCTURE CONTROL DRAINAGE RUNOFF ------------------------------------
ID OPERATION AREA AMOUNT ELEVATION TIME RATE RATE
(SQ MI) (IN) (FT) (HR) (CFS) (CSM)

RAINFALL OF 2.70 inches AND 24.00 hr DURATION, BEGINS AT .0 hrs.

RAINTABLE NUMBER 2, ARC 2
MAIN TIME INCREMENT .100 HOURS

ALTERNATE 1 STORM 1
---------------------------
XSECTION 1 RUNOFF .01 .72 --- 12.07T 4T 400.0
STRUCTURE 1 RESVOR .01 .71 --- .00 0 .0
XSECTION 3 RUNOFF .01 .71 --- .00 0 .0
XSECTION 3 RUNOFF .01 .71 --- .00 0 .0

RAINFALL OF 3.30 inches AND 24.00 hr DURATION, BEGINS AT .0 hrs.

ALTERNATE 1 STORM 2
---------------------------
XSECTION 1 RUNOFF .01 1.10 --- 12.06 7 700.0
STRUCTURE 1 RESVOR .01 1.09 --- .00 0 .0
XSECTION 3 RUNOFF .01 .38 --- 12.14T 1T 100.0

RAINFALL OF 5.30 inches AND 24.00 hr DURATION, BEGINS AT .0 hrs.

MAIN TIME INCREMENT .100 HOURS

ALTERNATE 1 STORM 10
---------------------------
XSECTION 1 RUNOFF .01 2.60 --- 12.05 16 1600.0
STRUCTURE 1 RESVOR .01 2.59 45.50 12.32 6 600.0
XSECTION 3 RUNOFF .01 1.34 --- 12.10 7 700.0

RAINFALL OF 7.50 inches AND 24.00 hr DURATION, BEGINS AT .0 hrs.

ALTERNATE 1 STORM 99
---------------------------
XSECTION 1 RUNOFF .01 4.48 --- 12.04 28 2800.0
STRUCTURE 1 RESVOR .01 4.43 45.84 12.18 20 2000.0
XSECTION 3 RUNOFF .01 2.75 --- 12.09 16 1600.0

C.1.17
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Step 7. Rev Treatment

Using the information developed n Preliminary Step 2, design a structural practice to treat Rev.
Non-structural practices will not be utilized therefore the entire Rev (1,986 cf) must be treated.
For this example, design an infiltration area around inlet I-1 (see Figure C.1.9) that will treat the
entire Rev. Because of its high visibility and the communal nature of the project, this infiltration
area will be designed and planted similar to a bioretention area.

The surface area around I-1 that is available for this practice has an area (A) of 2,250 sf. Using a
porosity (n) of 0.30* for the sand and planting soil mixture, the required depth (d) to treat the
entire Rev is equal to: [(Rev)!(A)] ! n
= [(1,986 cf.)!(2,250 sf.)] ! 0.30
= 0.883 ! 0.30
= 2.94 ft. Use d = 3.0 ft.

*Note: The porosity of mixed-grained sand varies from 0.30 (dense) to 0.40 (loose). Using the
minimum value, 0.30, results in a more conservative design.

Using a depth of 3.0’, a surface area of 2,250 sf. and a n of 0.3, storage for Rev treatment is equal
to: (A3 d)3 n
= (2,250 sf. 3 3.0 ft.) 3 0.3
= 2,025 cf. -OKAY

Using the dimensions above, a cross section of the infiltration area is shown in Figure C.1.10.

Step 8. Landscaping

The BMP’s for both WQv and Rev treatment have specific landscaping requirements for proper
implementation. Therefore, landscaping plans developed in accordance with Chapter 3 and
using the guidelines provided in Appendix A will be required with submittal of the final design.

C.1.18
Appendix C.1. Design Example 1 – Shallow Wetland (W-1)

Figure C.1.9 Location of Rev Treatment

Figure C.1.10 Cross Section “A-A”

C.1.19
Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
C.2
Appendix
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

The following example demonstrates the design of several different BMPs for WQv and Rev
treatment including filtering, infiltration, and open channel practices.

Figure C.2.1 Comstock Commercial Center Site Plan

Site Specifc Data

Comstock Commercial Center is a 0.77 acre retail store located in Howard County, Maryland.
The developed area of the site may be divided into two drainage areas of 0.20 and 0.22 acres
respectively with a remaining drainage area of 0.35 acres. Total impervious area for the
development is 0.36 acres; 0.16 acres in DA-1 and 0.20 acres in DA-2. Existing and proposed
topography are not given for this exercise; it may be assumed that these conditions are amenable
for each specific design. Likewise, the seasonally high water table will not be a factor in
infiltration designs. The underlying soils are loams (HSG B). TR-55 calculations for the
developed hydrologic conditions are shown in Figures C.2.2, C.2.3 and C.2.4.

C.2.1
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
C.2.1 Design Criteria

The site is within the Eastern Rainfall Zone and located on the Western Shore of the Chesapeake
Bay (see Volume I, Chapter 2, Figures 2.1 and 2.4). Additionally, the site is located within a
USE I watershed. Therefore, the following criteria apply:

1. WQv treatment is required. In the Eastern Rainfall Zone, P = 1”.

2. Rev treatment is required.
3. Cpv treatment is required.
4. Qp10 may be required by the local jurisdiction. For this example, Qp10 will not be
required.
5. Qf may be required by the local jurisdiction. For this example, Qf will not be
required. However, safe conveyance of the 100-year design storm is required through
the proposed stormwater management facility.

C.2.2 Preliminary Design

Step 1. Compute WQv

Step 1a. Compute Volumetric Runoff Coefficient (Rv)

Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = (0.36 acres / 0.77 acres) = 0.468or 46.8%

= 0.05 + (0.009)(46.8) = 0.471

Step 1b. Compute WQv

WQv = [(P)(Rv)(A)]!12
= [(1”)(0.471)(0.77 ac)]!12
= 0.0302 ac-ft (1,316.5 cf.)

C.2.2
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
Figure C.2.2 Comstock Commercial Center – Developed Conditions
(source: TR-55 computer printouts)

RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.10

Project : COMSTOCK COMMERCIAL User: SRC Date: 09-17-1999
County : HOWARD State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: DEVELOPED CONDITIONS
------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FULLY DEVELOPED URBAN AREAS (Veg Estab.)
Open space (Lawns,parks etc.)
Good condition; grass cover > 75% - 0.41(61) - -
Impervious Areas
Paved parking lots, roofs, driveways - 0.36(98) - -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) .77

-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: .77 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 78*

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.10

Project : COMSTOCK COMMERCIAL CENTER User: SRC Date: 12-07-1999

County : HOWARD State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: DEVELOPED CONDITIONS

Data: Drainage Area : .77 Acres

Runoff Curve Number : 78
Time of Concentration: 0.10 Hours (MINIMUM VALUE)
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE

=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.6 | 3.2 | 4.2 | 5.1 | 5.6 | 6.3 | 7.2 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.22 | 0.18 | 0.13 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.09 | 0.08 |
| Used | 0.22 | 0.18 | 0.13 | 0.11 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 |
| Runoff (in) | 0.85 | 1.27 | 2.05 | 2.80 | 3.23 | 3.85 | 4.66 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |1.511 |1.534 |1.558 |1.572 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 1 | 2 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 |
=========================================================================

* - Value(s) provided from TR-55 system routines

C.2.3
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
Figure C.2.3 Comstock Commercial Center – Drainage Area (DA) 1
(source: TR-55 computer printouts)
RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.10
Project : COMSTOCK COMMERCIAL User: SRC Date: 09-27-1999
County : HOWARD State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: DRAINAGE AREA DA-1
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FULLY DEVELOPED URBAN AREAS (Veg Estab.)
Open space (Lawns,parks etc.)
Good condition; grass cover > 75% - .04 (61) - -

Impervious Areas
Paved parking lots, roofs, driveways - 0.16(98) - -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) .20

====
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: .20 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 91*
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.10

Project : COMSTOCK COMMERCIAL CENTER User: SRC Date: 12-07-1999

County : HOWARD State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: DEVELOPED CONDITIONS DA-1

Data: Drainage Area : .2 Acres

Runoff Curve Number : 91
Time of Concentration: 0.10 Hours
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE

=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.6 | 3.2 | 4.2 | 5.1 | 5.6 | 6.3 | 7.2 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.08 | 0.06 | 0.05 | 0.04 | 0.04 | 0.03 | 0.03 |
| Used | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 |
| Runoff (in) | 1.70 | 2.26 | 3.21 | 4.08 | 4.57 | 5.25 | 6.14 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 2 |
=========================================================================

C.2.4
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
Figure C.2.4 Comstock Commercial Center – Drainage Area (DA) 2
(source: TR-55 computer printouts)
RUNOFF CURVE NUMBER COMPUTATION Version 2.10
Project : COMSTOCK COMMERCIAL CENTER User: SRC Date: 09-21-1999
County : HOWARD State: MD Checked: ____ Date: ________
Subtitle: DRAINAGE AREA DA-2 DEVELOPED
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Hydrologic Soil Group
COVER DESCRIPTION A B C D
Acres (CN)
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
FULLY DEVELOPED URBAN AREAS (Veg Estab.)
Open space (Lawns,parks etc.)
Good condition; grass cover > 75% - 0.02(61) - -

Impervious Areas
Paved parking lots, roofs, driveways - 0.20(98) - -

Total Area (by Hydrologic Soil Group) .22

====
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
TOTAL DRAINAGE AREA: .22 Acres WEIGHTED CURVE NUMBER: 95*
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------
* - Generated for use by GRAPHIC method

GRAPHICAL PEAK DISCHARGE METHOD Version 2.10

Data: Drainage Area : .22 * Acres
Runoff Curve Number : 95 *
Time of Concentration: 0.10 Hours (MINIMUM VALUE)
Rainfall Type : II
Pond and Swamp Area : NONE

=========================================================================
| Storm Number | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Frequency (yrs) | 1 | 2 | 5 | 10 | 25 | 50 | 100 |
| 24-Hr Rainfall (in) | 2.6 | 3.2 | 4.2 | 5.1 | 5.6 | 6.3 | 7.2 |
| Ia/P Ratio | 0.04 | 0.03 | 0.03 | 0.02 | 0.02 | 0.02 | 0.01 |
| Used | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 | 0.10 |
| Runoff (in) | 2.06 | 2.64 | 3.63 | 4.52 | 5.01 | 5.71 | 6.60 |
| Unit Peak Discharge |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |1.578 |
| (cfs/acre/in) | | | | | | | |
| Pond and Swamp Factor| 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 | 1.00 |
| 0.0% Ponds Used | | | | | | | |
|----------------------|------|------|------|------|------|------|------|
| Peak Discharge (cfs) | 1 | 1 | 1 | 2 | 2 | 2 | 2 |
=========================================================================

* - Value(s) provided from TR-55 system routines

C.2.5
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Step 2. Compute Rev

Step 2a. Determine Soil Specific Recharge Factor (S) Based on Hydrologic Soil Group

Soils found throughout the site are loams (HSG B) therefore S = 0.26

Step 2b. Compute ReV Using Percent Volume Method

Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)]!12
= [(0.26)(0.471)(0.77)]!12
= 0.0078 ac-ft. (342.3 cf)

Step 2c. Compute Rev Using Percent Area Method

Rev = (S)(Ai)
= (0.26)(0.36 ac.)
= 0.094 acres (4,095 sf.)

The Rev requirement may be met by: a) treating 342.3 cubic feet using structural methods, b)
treating 4,095 square feet using non-structural methods, or c) a combination of both.

Step 3. Compute Cpv

The proposed community center is located within a USE I watershed, therefore use an extended
detention time (T) of 24 hours for the one-year storm event. The time of concentration (tc) and
one-year runoff (Qa) are 0.10 hours and 0.85” respectively.

Use the MDE Method to Compute Storage Volume (Appendix D.11):

Initial abstraction (Ia) for CN of 78 is 0.564: (TR-55) [Ia = (200/CN)-2]

Ia/P = (0.564)!2.6” = 0.22

tc = 0.10 hours

qu = 975 csm/in. (Figure D.11.1, Appendix D.11)

qi = quAQa where A is the drainage area in square miles

= (975 csm)(0.0012 square miles)(0.85”)
= 1.0 cfs; qi < 2.0 cfs ∴ Cpv is not required.

C.2.6
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Step 4. Compute Requirements for Sub-Drainage Areas DA-1, DA-2 and DA-3

DA-1: Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 0.16 acres / 0.20 acres = 0.80 or 80%

= 0.05 + (0.009)(80.0) = 0.77

WQv = [(P)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(1”)(0.77)(0.20 ac)]/12
= 0.0128 ac-ft (557.5 cf.)

Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(0.26)(0.77)(0.20 ac)]/12
= 0.0033 ac-ft (145 cf.)

DA-2: Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 0.20 acres / 0.22 acres = 0.91 or 91%

= 0.05 + (0.009)(91) = 0.87

WQv = [(P)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(1”)(0.87)(0.22 ac.)]/12
= 0.0160 ac-ft (694.8 cf.)

Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(0.26)(0.87)(0.22 ac.)]/12
= 0.0041 ac-ft (180.6 cf.)

DA-3: Rv = 0.05 + (0.009)(I); I = 0.0 acres / 0.35 acres = 0.0 or 0%

= 0.05 + (0.009)(0.0) = 0.05

Because I < 15%, WQv = 0.2”/acre

WQv = [(0.2”)(0.35 ac.)]/12
= 0.0058 ac-ft (254.1 cf.)

Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(0.26)(0.05)(0.35 ac.)]/12
= 0.0004 ac-ft (16.5 cf.)

NOTE: Although DA-3 has no proposed impervious surfaces, portions of DA-3 will be
disturbed to construct structural BMPs for DA-1 and DA-2. As a result, WQv and Rev
must be addressed for DA-3. For this example, the portion of DA-3 not disturbed for
BMP construction shall be treated by promoting sheet flow into the adjacent forested
buffer (see Chapter 5.4, “Sheetflow to Buffer Credit”).

C.2.7
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Table C.2.1 Summary of General Storage Requirements for Comstock Commercial Center

Requirement Drainage Volume Required Notes

Area (cubic feet)
WQv* Total 1,316.5 The sum of treatment volumes
DA-1 557.5 for DA-1, DA-2 and DA-3 is
DA-2 694.8 greater than that calculated for
DA-3 254.1 the entire site.

Rev* Total 342.3 (or 4,095 sf.) volume is included within the
DA-1 145.6 (or 1,812 sf.) WQv storage
DA-2 180.6 (or 2,265 sf.)
DA-3 16.1
Cpv N/A Cpv inflow rate is < 2.0 cfs
Qp10 N/A not required
Qf N/A provide safe passage for the
100-year event in final design

C.2.8
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

C.2.3 BMP Design Option 1

The first option consists of the design of a perimeter sand filter (F-3) for DA-1 and a pocket sand
filter (F-5) for DA-2. In both designs, Rev storage will be provided below the filter’s underdrain
system. As a result, the entire WQv must be considered in the design of each filter system. A
plan view for Option 1 is shown in Figure C.2.5

C.2.3.1 Perimeter Sand Filter (F-3) for DA-1

Pretreatment

The pretreatment requirements for a perimeter sand filter are as follows:

The pretreatment volume (Vp) for the perimeter sand filter shall be at least 25% of the
computed WQv:
Vp = (0.25)(WQv)
= (0.25)(557.5 cf.)
= 139.4 cf.

The minimum required surface area as computed by the Camp-Hazen equation:

Qo
As = × E′ (see Section 3.4.3 for terms)
W

For imperviousness (I)> 75%, this equation reduces to:

Asp = (0.0081)(WQv)
= (0.0081)(557.5 cf.)
= 4.52 sf.

Using a width (w) =1.5 ft. and length (l) = 45 ft., the required depth for the sedimentation
chamber = 139.4 cf. ! (1.5 ft.)(45 ft.) = 2.06 ft.; Use a sedimentation chamber 1.5 ft. by
45 ft. by 2.1 ft.

C.2.9
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
Figure C.2.5 Design Option 1 - Plan View

Treatment

The treatment requirements for the perimeter sand filter are as follows:

The entire treatment system (including pretreatment) shall temporarily hold at least 75%
of the WQv prior to filtration:

Vtemp = (0.75)(WQv)
= (0.75)(557.5 cf.)
= 418.1 cf.
The required filter bed area (Af) is computed using the following equation:
(WQv )( d f )
Af = (see Section 3.4.4)
[ k × ( h f + d f ) × t f )]

C.2.10
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
Minimum filter bed depth (df) = 12”; for this design use df = 12” (1.0 ft)

The coefficient of permeability (k) for sand filters = 3.5 ft./day

The average height of water above the filter bed (hf) = (0.5)(design ponding depth). For
this design, the ponding depth =1.0 ft. ∴ hf = 0.5 ft.

The design filter bed drain time (tf) = 1.67 days

(557. 5 cf .)(1. 0 ft.)

Therefore: A f = = 63.6 sf.
[(3. 5 day )( 0. 5 ft. + 1. 0 ft.)(1. 67 days )]
ft .

Setting the filter chamber width (w) to 1.5 ft., the length (l) of the filter chamber
= 63.6 sf.!1.5 ft. = 42.4 ft; Use a filter chamber 1.5 ft. by 45 ft.

Check Vtemp: Vtemp = V p + Vtreatment

= 139.4 + [(1.0)(1.5)(45) + (1.0)(1.5)(45)(0.4)] = 236.5 cf.
note: 0.4 is the porosity of the filter media

Approximately 182 cf. of additional storage is needed to meet this requirement. Either
increase the storage in one or both chambers or design parking area to provide additional
storage. For this design, the pretreatment chamber width will be increased to 3.5 ft.

Vtemp = V p + Vtreatment
= (3.5)(45.0)(2.1) + [(1.0)(1.5)(45) + (1.0)(1.5)(45)(0.4)] = 425.25 cf.

Groundwater Recharge (Rev)

Rev storage will be provided within a stone-filled trench adjacent to the perimeter sand
filter. Setting the trench length (l) = 45 ft., and the width (w) = 2.0 ft, the trench depth (d)
needed to store the Rev volume (V =145.6 cf.) is:
V
where d = n is the porosity of stone; use n = 0.4
l×w×n

Therefore, d = 145.6 cf.!(45.0 ft.32.0 ft.30.4) = 4.04 ft.; use a stone-filled trench 45.0 ft.
by 2.0 ft. by 4.1 ft.

Overflow

Flow splitters and overflow devices may be designed using volume or flow rate. For this
example, a weir discharging from the sedimentation chamber into the clear well will
provide volume overflow for the ten-year storm. For DA-1, the ten-year flow (Q10) = 1.0
cfs. Using a weir length of 1.5 ft., the head required to safely convey Q10 may be
calculated using the weir equation: Q=Clh3/2 where C = 3.1, l = weir length (1.5 ft.), and

C.2.11
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
h = head. By rearranging the weir equation and solving for h; h=[Q!(C3l)]2/3 = 0.40 ft.
Design perimeter sand filter with at least 0.4 ft. freeboard to safely convey Q10.

Design details for the perimeter sand filter are shown in Figures C.2.6.

C.2.3.2 Pocket Sand Filter (F-5) for DA-2

Pretreatment

The pretreatment requirements for a pocket sand filter are as follows:

Vp for the pocket sand filter shall be at least 25% of the computed WQv:
Vp = (0.25)(WQv)
= (0.25)(694.8 cf.)
= 173.7 cf.

The minimum required surface area as computed by the Camp-Hazen equation:

Qo
As = × E′
W
For I > 75%, this equation reduces to:
Asp = (0.0081)(WQv)
= (0.0081)(694.8 cf.)
= 5.62 sf.

Maintaining at least a 2:1 ratio (l:w); set w = 6.5 ft. and l = 13.0 ft. The required d for the
sedimentation area = 173.7 cf. !(6.5 ft.)(13.0 ft.)= 2.0 ft.; Use a sedimentation chamber
6.5 ft. by 13.0 ft. by 2.0 ft.

C.2.12
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Figure C.2.6 Perimeter Sand Filter Design Details

C.2.13
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Treatment

The treatment requirements for the pocket sand filter are as follows:

The entire treatment system (including pretreatment) shall temporarily hold at least 75%
of the WQv prior to filtration:

Vtemp = (0.75(WQv)
= (0.75)(694.8 cf.)
= 521.1 cf.

The required filter bed area is computed using the following equation:

The minimum df for a pocket sand filter = 18”; for this design use df = 18” (1.5’).

(WQv )( d f )
Af =
[ k × ( h f + d f ) × t f )]

The coefficient of permeability (k) for sand filters = 3.5 ft/day

The average height of water (hf) above the filter bed for this design = 0.5 ft.

The design filter bed drain time (tf) = 1.67 days.

(694. 8 cf .)(1. 5 ft.)

Therefore: A f = = 89. 2 sf .
[(3. 5 day )( 0. 5 ft. + 1. 5 ft.)(1. 67 days )]
ft .

Setting the filter chamber width (w) to 6.5 ft. l = 89.2 ft.!6.5 ft. =13.7 ft.; Use a filter
chamber 6.5 ft. by 13.7 ft.

Check Vtemp: Vtemp = V p + Vtreatment

= 173.7 + [(1.0)(6.5)(13.7) + (1.5)(6.5)(13.7)(0.4)] = 316.1 cf.
note: 0.4 is the porosity of the filter media

Approximately 205 cf. of additional storage is needed to meet this requirement. Either
increase the storage in one or both chambers or design parking area to provide additional
storage. For this design, the pretreatment chamber width will be increased to 9.0 ft. and
the depth increased to 3.0 ft.

Vtemp = V p + Vtreatment
= (9.0)(13.0)(3.0) + [(1.5)(6.5)(13.7) + (1.5)(6.5)(13.7)(0.4)] = 538.0 cf

C.2.14
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
Groundwater Recharge (Rev)

Rev storage will be provided within a stone-filled reservoir directly below the filter
chamber’s underdrain system. Using w = 6.5 ft. and l = 13.7 ft., the depth needed to store
the Rev volume (V = 180.6 cf.) is:
V
d= where n is the porosity of stone; use n = 0.4
l×w×n
Therefore, d = 180.6!(13.7 ft.36.5 ft.30.4)=5.1 ft.; Use a stone-filled reservoir 6.5 ft. by
13.7 ft. by 5.1 ft.

Overflow/Bypass

As the pocket sand filter will be located “off-line” from the main conveyance system, a
flow splitter will be required to divert the WQv into the filter. Flow splitters may be
designed using volume or flow rate. For this example, use a concrete flume with a
bottom width of 4.0 ft designed to divert the flow associated with the WQv. The head
required to divert the WQv flow may be calculated using the weir equation: Q=Clh3/2
where Q is flow associated with WQv (using Appendix D.10, Q= 0.3 cfs), C = 3.1, l = 4.0
ft., and h=head. By rearranging the equation and solving for h; h=[Q!(C3l)]2/3=0.084 ft.
Design flow splitter with a 1 inch high diversion. NOTE: With this type of flow
splitter, runoff in excess of the WQv may continue to flow into the sand filter.

Design details for the pocket sand filter are shown in Figures C.2.7 and C.2.8.

C.2.15
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Figure C.2.7 Pocket Sand Filter – Plan View

C.2.16
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Figure C.2.8 Pocket Sand Filter Design Details

C.2.17
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
C.2.4 BMP Design Option 2.

The second option consists of the design of a bioretention area (F-6) for DA-1 and an infiltration
trench (I-1) for DA-2. For the bioretention system, Rev storage will be provided below the
underdrain system, and as a result, the entire WQv will be used as the design. The infiltration
trench automatically meets the Rev requirement. A plan view of Option 2 is shown in Figure
C.2.9.

Figure C.2.9 Design Option 2 – Plan View

C.2.18
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

C.2.4.1 Bioretention System (F-6) for DA-1

Pretreatment

Adequate pretreatment for a bioretention system is provided when all of the following are
provided:
1. 20 ft. grass filter strip below a level spreader or an optional sand filter layer;
2. gravel diaphragm; and
3. 2” to 3” mulch layer.

Treatment

The treatment requirements for the bioretention system are as follows (Section 3.4.3 & 4):

The entire treatment system (including pretreatment) shall temporarily hold at least 75%
of the WQv prior to filtration:
Vtemp = (0.75)(WQv)
= (0.75)(557.5 cf.)
= 418.1 cf.

The required filter bed area (Af) is computed using the following equation:
(WQv )( d f )
Af =
[ k × ( h f + d f ) × t f )]

Recommended filter bed depth (df) for a bioretention system is 2.5 to 4.0 ft. For this
design, use df = 3.0 ft.

The coefficient of permeability (k) for bioretention systems = 0.5 ft./day

The average height of water above the filter bed (hf) = 0.5 ft. (Note: The maximum
ponding depth for a bioretention system is 1.0 ft.)

The design filter bed drain time (tf) = 2.0 days

(557. 5 cf .)( 3. 0 ft.)

Therefore: A f = = 477. 9 sf .
[( 0. 5 day )( 0. 5 ft. + 3. 0 ft.)( 2. 00 days )]
ft .

Use a bioretention system with minimum surface area =478 sf.

Check Vtemp: Vtemp = Vtreatment = (1.0)(478 sf ) + (3.0)(478 sf )(0.4) = 1051.6 cf.

note: 0.4 is the porosity of the filter media

C.2.19
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Groundwater Recharge (Rev)

Rev storage will be provided in a stone-filled reservoir directly below the underdrain
system. Setting the reservoir area (Ar) = 478 sf., the depth (d) needed to store the Rev
volume (V=145.6 cf.) is:
V
d= where n is the porosity of stone; use n = 0.4
Ar × n
Therefore; d =145.6 cf.!(478.0ft.30.4)=0.76 ft.; Use a stone-filled reservoir 478 sf. by
0.76 ft.

Overflow

Overflow for the ten-year storm shall be provided to a non-erosive outlet. For this
design, a standard inlet will be used to bypass the volume in excess of the WQv by setting
the inlet invert at the elevation corresponding to the WQv treatment volume (1.0 ft. above
the bioretention system filter bed).

Design details and a planting plan for the bioretention system are shown in Figures C.2.10 and
C.2.11.

C.2.20
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
Figure C.2.10 Bioretention System Details

Figure C.2.11 Bioretention Planting Plan

C.2.21
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

C.2.4.2 Infiltration Trench (I-1) for DA-2

Pretreatment

The pretreatment requirements for an infiltration trench are as follows:

The pretreatment volume (Vp) for the infiltration trench shall be at least 25% of the
computed WQv:
Vp = (0.25)(WQv)
= (0.25)(694.8 cf.)
= 173.7 cf.

Using a width (w) of 8.0 ft. and a length (l) of 11.0 ft., the required depth for the
sedimentation chamber = 173.7 cf. !(8.0 ft.)(11.0 ft.) = 1.97 ft.; Use a sedimentation
chamber 8.0 ft by 11.0 ft. by 2.0 ft.

Additionally, each infiltration trench shall have at least three of the following measures to
prevent clogging and maintain the long-term integrity of the trench:
1. grass channel;
2. grass filter strip (minimum 20 ft.);
3. bottom sand layer
4. upper sand layer (minimum 6”) with filter fabric at sand/gravel interface; and

C.2.22
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
5. use washed bank run gravel as aggregate.

This design will use a bottom sand layer, upper sand layer, and washed bank run gravel.

Treatment

The treatment requirements for an infiltration trench are as follows:

The practice shall be designed to exfiltrate the entire WQv less the pretreatment volume
through the floor of the practice. The design volume (Vw) = WQv-Vp = 521.1 cf.

Infiltration practices are designed using the methodology in Appendix D.13.

The maximum allowable depth (dmax) of an infiltration trench is

Ts
d max = f ×
n
where:
f is the infiltration rate, for this design f =0.52 inches/hour
Ts is the maximum allowable storage of 48 hours
n is the porosity of the stone reservoir, use 0.4

Therefore, dmax = 0.52inches/hour 3(48 hours!0.4)=62.4 inches (5.2 ft). Use a trench depth
(dt) = 5.0 ft.

Using equation D.13.3, the area of the infiltration trench (At) is:
Vw
At = where the time to fill the trench (T) is 2.0 hours.
nd t + fT

Use an infiltration trench 7.5 ft. by 35.0 ft. by 5.0 ft.

521.1 cf .
At = = 249.7 sf .
(0.4 × 5.0) + (0.52 hour × 2.0 hours × 1 ft
inches
)
12 in

C.2.23
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Groundwater Recharge (Rev)

Infiltration trenches automatically meet the Rev storage requirement; no additional storage is
required.

Overflow

As the infiltration trench will be located “off-line” from the main conveyance system, a flow
splitter will be required to divert the WQv into the filter. Use the flow splitter design from the
pocket sand filter above.

Design details for the infiltration trench are shown in Figures C.2.12.

C.2.5 BMP Design Option 3

The third option consists of the bioretention area (F-6) previously designed for DA-1 and a dry
swale (O-1) for DA-2. In the dry swale design, Rev storage will be provided below the swale’s
underdrain system. As a result, the entire WQv must be considered in the design of the dry
swale. A plan view of Option 3 is shown in Figure C.2.13.

C.2.5.1 Dry Swale (O-1) for DA-2

Pretreatment

The pretreatment requirements for a dry swale are as follows:

Pretreatment storage of 0.1 inch of runoff from impervious area shall be provided. This
is equivalent to 10% of WQv. Therefore, Vp =(10%)(WQv)= 69.5 cf. Use a forebay or
sedimentation chamber sized to store 62.5 cf.

C.2.24
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Figure C.2.12 Infiltration Trench Details

C.2.25
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

Figure C.2.13 Design Option 3 – Plan View

Treatment

The treatment requirements for the dry swale are as follows:

Dry swales shall be designed to temporarily store the WQv for a maximum 48-hour
period. An underdrain system shall provided to ensure the maximum ponding time is not
exceeded.

Dry swales shall have a maximum longitudinal slope (s) of 4.0%. For this design, s=
3.0%.

Channel side slopes (z:1) should be no steeper than 2:1. For this design, side slopes
shall be 4:1 (z=4).

Dry swales shall have a bottom width (wb) no narrower than 2.0 ft. and no wider than 8.0

C.2.26
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs
ft. (if wider than 8.0 ft., a meandering drainage pattern shall be established).

Maximum ponding depths (dmid,dend ) of 1.0 ft. at the channel mid-point and 1.5 ft. at the
downstream end shall be maintained. Use dmid = 0.75 ft. and dmax = 1.5 ft.

Due to the length (100 ft.) and grade (3.0%) of the channel, the channel will be divided
into two contiguous channels separated by a check dam to achieve dmid and dend
requirements. Use three check dams located at the entrance, mid-point and end of the
swale.

With three check dams, there will be two ponding areas of equal storage. Using
dmid=0.75’, and setting the total length of the swale to 100 ft., the treatment volume of the
swale is:
WQv − V p = w × l × d mid

By rearranging this equation and solving for the width of storage surface (w):

WQv − V p 694. 8 cf . − 69. 5 cf .

w= = = 8. 3 ft.
l × d mid 100 ft. × 0. 75 ft.

Using w =8.3 ft. and 4:1 side slopes, wb = w-(23z3dmid)= 8.3-(23430.75)=2.3 ft. Use a
dry swale with bottom dimensions of 2.3 ft. by 100 ft. with 4:1 side slopes.

Groundwater Recharge (Rev)

Rev storage will be provided within a stone-filled reservoir below the dry swale
underdrain system. Using the swale dimensions (2.3 ft by 100 ft.), the reservoir depth (d)
needed to store the Rev volume (V=180.6 cf.) is:
V
d= where n is the porosity of stone; use n=0.4
l×w×n
Therefore, d=180.6 cf.!(100 ft.32.3 ft.30.4)=1.96 ft. Use a stone-filled reservoir 2.3 ft.
by 100.0 ft. by 2.0 ft.

Overflow (Q10 Conveyance)

A dry swale is required to safely convey the 10-year design storm with minimum
freeboard of 3 inches. Check the design to ensure that the 10-year storm is conveyed
non-erosively and that the minimum freeboard is provided. For DA-2, the 10-year peak
flow (Q10) =2.0 cfs. At dmax, the width (wmax)=w+(23z3dmid)=14.3 ft. Using a trapezoidal
channel with a bottom width =14.3 ft., 4:1 side slopes, and a longitudinal slope (s)
=3.0%, the depth (d) and velocity (v) of flow can be calculated using the Manning
equation:
1. 49 2 3 1 2
v= r s
n

C.2.27
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

where: n is the roughness coefficient of the channel lining, use 0.025

r is the hydraulic radius of the channel; at d = 0.10 ft.,
r is very nearly 0.10

Therefore, at d=0.1 ft.:

1. 49
v= ( 0. 10) 3 ( 0. 03) 2 = 2. 2 fps
2 1

0. 025
The cross-sectional area of the channel (A) needed to safely pass Q10 can be calculated
using A=Q10!v =2.0 cfs ! 2.2 fps =0.91 sf. At d = 0.1 ft., A =1.4 sf. The proposed design
will safely convey the 10-year storm.

The minimum depth of the channel (dc) may be determined by adding the required
depths:
dc = dmax + d10 yr. storm + dfreeboard
= 1.5 ft. + 0.1 ft. + 0.25 ft.
= 1.85 ft. Use channel depth (dc) = 2.0 ft.

Design details for the dry swale are shown in Figures C.2.14.

C.2.28
Appendix C.2. Design Example 2 – Water Quality BMPs

C.2.14 Dry Swale Design Details

C.2.29
Testing Requirements for Infiltration,
D.1

Bioretention and Sand Filter Subsoils

Appendix
Appendix D.1 Testing Requirements for Infiltration Bioretention and Sand Filter Subsoils

General Notes Pertinent to All Testing

1. For infiltration trench (I-1) and basin (I-2) practices, a minimum field infiltration rate (fc) of
0.52 inches per hour is required; lower rates preclude the use of these practices. For surface
sand filter (F-1) and bioretention (F-6) practices, no minimum infiltration rate is required if
these facilities are designed with a “day-lighting” underdrain system; otherwise these
facilities require a 0.52 inch per hour rate.

2. Number of required borings is based on the size of the proposed facility. Testing is done in
two phases, (1) Initial Feasibility, and (2) Concept Design.

3. Testing is to be conducted by a qualified professional. This professional shall either be a

registered professional engineer, soils scientist or geologist and must be licensed in the State
of Maryland.

Initial Feasibility Testing

Feasibility testing is conducted to determine whether full-scale testing is necessary, screen

unsuitable sites, and reduce testing costs. A soil boring is not required at this stage. However, a
designer or landowner may opt to engage Concept Design Borings per Table D.1.1 at his or her
discretion, without feasibility testing.

Initial testing involves either one field test per facility, regardless of type or size, or previous
testing data, such as the following:

* on-site septic percolation testing, within 200 feet of the proposed BMP location, and on the
same contour which can establish initial rate, water table and/or depth to bedrock,
* geotechnical report on the site prepared by a qualified geotechnical consultant, or
* Natural Resources Conservation Service (NRCS) County Soil Mapping showing an
unsuitable soil group such as a hydrologic group “D” soil in a low-lying area or a Marlboro
Clay.

If the results of initial feasibility testing as determined by a qualified professional show that an
infiltration rate of greater than 0.52 inches per hour is probable, then the number of concept
design test pits shall be per the following table. An encased soil boring may be substituted for a
test pit, if desired.

D.1.1
Appendix D.1 Testing Requirements for Infiltration Bioretention and Sand Filter Subsoils

Table D.1.1 Infiltration Testing Summary Table

Type of Facility Initial Feasibility Concept Design Testing Concept Design

Testing (initial testing yields a Testing (initial testing
rate greater than yields a rate lower
0.52”/hr) than 0.52”/hr)
I-1 (trench) 1 field percolation 1infiltration test and 1 not acceptable practice
test, test pit not test pit per 50’ of trench
required
I-2 (basin) 1 field percolation 1 infiltration test and 1 not acceptable practice
test, test pit not test pit per 200 square
required feet of basin area
F-1 (surface sand 1 field percolation 1 infiltration test and 1 underdrains required
filter) test, test pit not test pit per 200 square
required feet of filter area (no
underdrains required*)
F-6 (bioretention) 1 field percolation 1 infiltration test and 1 underdrains required
test, test pit not test pit per 200 square
required feet of filter area (no
underdrains required*)
* underdrain installation is still strongly recommended

Documentation

Infiltration testing data shall be documented, and include a description of the infiltration testing
method. This is to ensure that the tester understands the procedure.

Test Pit/Boring Requirements

a. Excavate a test pit or dig a standard soil boring to a depth of 4 feet below the
proposed facility bottom;

b. Determine depth to groundwater table (if within 4 feet of proposed bottom) upon
initial digging or drilling, and again 24 hours later;

c. Conduct Standard Penetration Testing (SPT) every 2’ to a depth of 4 feet below

the facility bottom;

D.1.2
Appendix D.1 Testing Requirements for Infiltration Bioretention and Sand Filter Subsoils
d. Determine United States Department of Agriculture (USDA) or Unified Soil
Classification (USC) System textures at the proposed bottom and 4 feet below the
bottom of the best management practice (BMP);

e. Determine depth to bedrock (if within 4 feet of proposed bottom);

f. The soil description should include all soil horizons; and

g. The location of the test pit or boring shall correspond to the BMP location; test
pit/soil boring stakes are to be left in the field for inspection purposes and shall be
clearly labeled as such.

Infiltration Testing Requirements (field testing required)

a. Install casing (solid 5 inch diameter, 30” length) to 24” below proposed BMP
bottom (see Figure D.1.1).

b. Remove any smeared soiled surfaces and provide a natural soil interface into
which water may percolate. Remove all loose material from the casing. Upon the
tester’s discretion, a two (2) inch layer of coarse sand or fine gravel may be
placed to protect the bottom from scouring and sediment. Fill casing with clean
water to a depth of 24” and allow to pre-soak for twenty-four hours.

c. Twenty-four hours later, refill casing with another 24” of clean water and monitor
water level (measured drop from the top of the casing) for 1 hour. Repeat this
procedure (filling the casing each time) three additional times, for a total of four
observations. Upon the tester’s discretion, the final field rate may either be the
average of the four observations, or the value of the last observation. The final
rate shall be reported in inches per hour.

d. May be done through a boring or open excavation.

e. The location of the test shall correspond to the BMP location.

f. Upon completion of the testing, the casings shall be immediately pulled, and the
test pit shall be back-filled.

D.1.3
Appendix D.1 Testing Requirements for Infiltration Bioretention and Sand Filter Subsoils

Figure D.1.1 Infiltration Testing Requirements

Laboratory Testing

Use grain-size sieve analysis and hydrometer tests (where appropriate) to determine
USDA soils classification and textural analysis. Visual field inspection by a qualified
professional may also be used, provided it is documented. The use of lab testing to
establish infiltration rates is prohibited.

Bioretention Testing

All areas tested for application of F-6 facilities shall be back-filled with a suitable sandy
loam planting media. The borrow source of this media, which may be the same or
different from the bioretention area location itself, must be tested as follows:

If the borrow area is undisturbed soil one test is required per 200 square feet of borrow
area. The test consists of “grab” samples at one foot depth intervals to the bottom of the
borrow area. All samples at the testing location are then mixed, and the resulting sample
is then lab-tested to meet the following criteria:

D.1.4
Appendix D.1 Testing Requirements for Infiltration Bioretention and Sand Filter Subsoils
a) USDA minimum textural analysis requirements: A textural analysis is
required from the site stockpiled topsoil. If topsoil is imported, then a
texture analysis shall be performed for each location where the topsoil was
excavated.

Minimum requirements:
sand 35 - 60%
silt 30 - 55%
clay 10 - 25%

b) The soil shall be a uniform mix, free of stones, stumps, roots or other
similar objects larger than one inch.

c) Consult the bioretention construction specifications (Appendix B.3.8) for

further guidance on preparing the soil for a bioretention area.

Table D.1.2 Minimum Depth to Seasonably High Water Table

Depth to water table for encased or lined

Region Depth to water table facilities such as an underground concrete
for infiltration sand filter
Lower Eastern Shore 2 0*
Remainder of State 4 0*
*may need professional structural design

D.1.5
 Appendix

D.2

Geotechnical Methods for Karst Feasibility

Testing

The following information on BMP design and SWM geotechnical testing

in Karst areas has been adapted from the Carroll County Water Resource
Appendix D.2. Geotechnical Methods for Karst Feasibility Testing
Management Manual and Ordinance (CCWRM) dated July 2, 1996. For a complete discussion
of these items, please refer to the Carroll County document.

Section 1: Stormwater Management in Karst Areas

In general, stormwater runoff should not be concentrated and should be conveyed through
vegetated areas; in addition, the facilities should be designed in accordance with the following
standards:

(1) Detention/retention ponds should be designed and constructed with a synthetic or clay liner
approved by the local plan approval authority.

(2) Discharges from SWM facilities or directly from impervious surfaces should not be routed
within 1000 feet of the edge of any existing unremediated sinkhole. The flow should then be
directed to an area not underlain by carbonate rock. Alternatively, these discharges may be
routed to a stable watercourse via a pipe or lined channel.

(3) Sinkholes occurring within stormwater management structures should be repaired within 72
hours of first observation of occurrence.

(4) Liners: Where natural soil permeabilities are greater than 10-6 cm/sec or 1.4 x 10-3 inches per
hour for the two-foot interval below the depth of the proposed facility, a stable, low
permeability liner shall be installed as follows:
-7
(a) One foot of clay with a permeability less than 10 cm/sec, or;

(b) Two feet of clay with a permeability less than 10-6 cm/sec, or;

(c) Two feet of compacted soil with a permeability less than 10-5 cm/sec with a 30 mil
thick artificial liner with a permeability less than 10-7 cm/sec, or;

(d) A very low permeability base constructed of concrete.

Section 2: Soils Investigation for Karst Areas

The purpose of a karst investigation is to identify subsurface voids, cavities, fractures, or other
discontinuities which could pose an environmental concern or a construction hazard to an

existing or proposed SWM facility. By definition, karst investigations are required only in areas
suspected of containing carbonate rocks. The requirements outlined below should not be
interpreted as all-inclusive. The design of any subsurface investigation should reflect the size
and complexity of the proposed project.

D.2.1
Appendix D.2. Geotechnical Methods for Karst Feasibility Testing

The investigation should determine the nature and thickness of subsurface materials, including
depth to bedrock and to the water table. Subsurface data may be acquired by backhoe
excavation and/or soil boring. These field data should be supplemented by geophysical
investigation techniques, deemed appropriate by a qualified professional. The data listed herein
should be acquired under the direct supervision of a qualified geologist, geotechnical engineer,
or soil scientist who is experienced in conducting such studies. Pertinent site information shall
be collected which should include the following:

1. Bedrock characteristics (type, geologic contacts, faults, geologic structure, rock surface
configuration).

2. Soil characteristics (type, thickness, mapped unit).

3. Photogeologic fracture traces.

4. Bedrock outcrop areas.

5. Sinkholes and/or other closed depressions.

6. Perennial and/or intermittent streams.

Section 3: Location of Borings

Borings should be located to provide representative area coverage of the proposed facilities. The
exact location of borings will be based on the following conditions or features:

1. In each geologic unit present, as mapped by the Maryland and U.S. Geological Surveys
(USGS) and local county records.

2. Placed near on-site geologic or geomorphic indications of the presence of carbonate rock.

3. On photogeologic fracture traces.

4. Next to bedrock outcrop areas (i.e., ten feet from).

5. As near to identified sinkholes and/or closed depressions as possible.

6. Near the edges and center of the proposed facility, and spaced at equal distances from one
another.

D.2.2
Appendix D.2. Geotechnical Methods for Karst Feasibility Testing
7. Near any areas identified as anomalies from any geophysical studies.

Section 4: Number of Borings

The density shall be dependent upon the type and size of the proposed facility such that a
representative sampling is obtained, as follows:

1. Ponds/wetlands - a minimum of three per facility, or three per acre, whichever is greater
with at least one along the centerline of the proposed embankment and the remainder
within the proposed impoundment area.

2. Infiltration trenches - a minimum of 2 per facility.

3. Additional borings - to define lateral extent of limiting horizons, or site specific

conditions, where applicable.

Section 5: Depth of Borings

Borings shall be extended to depths dependent upon bedrock type as follows:

1. Non-carbonate rocks - a minimum depth of 5 feet below the lowest proposed grade,
within the facility unless auger/backhoe refusal is encountered.

2. Carbonate rocks - a minimum of 20 feet below ground surface or proposed grade; where
refusal is encountered the boring may either be extended by rock coring or moving to an
adjacent location within 10 linear feet of the original site, in order that the 20-foot
minimum depth be reached.

Section 6: Identification of Material

All material penetrated by the boring shall be identified, as follows:

1. Description, logging, and sampling for the entire depth of the boring.

2. Any stains, odors, or other indications of environmental degradation.

3. A minimum laboratory analysis of two soil samples, representative of the material

penetrated including potential limiting horizons, with the results compared to the field
descriptions.

4. Identified characteristics shall include, as a minimum: color; mineral composition; grain

D.2.3
Appendix D.2. Geotechnical Methods for Karst Feasibility Testing
size, shape, and sorting; and saturation.

5. Any indications of water saturation shall be carefully logged, to include both perched and
groundwater table levels, and descriptions of soils that are mottled or gleyed should be
provided. Water levels in all borings shall be taken at the time of completion and again
24 hours after completion. The boring must remain fully open to total depth of these
measurements.

6. When conducting a standard penetration test (SPT), estimation of soil engineering

characteristics, including “N” or estimated unconfined compressive strength.

Section 7: Geophysical Investigation

An electromagnetic terrain conductivity survey may be conducted over the entire area of the
facility and extending outward to 200 feet beyond the boundaries of the proposed facility. This
survey may be performed to provide a qualitative evaluation of the area to be utilized. The
survey results may be used to identify “suspect areas” which will be further evaluated using
borings. The use of this technique may reduce the total number of borings for a site by better
defining “suspect areas.” This survey shall include appropriate techniques such that
representative data are collected from a minimum depth of 20 feet below ground surface or the
final proposed grade, whichever is deeper. These data shall then be correlated with boring data
in the site area.

Section 8: Evaluation

At least one subsurface cross section shall be provided. It should extend through a central
portion of the proposed facility, using the actual or projected boring data and the
geophysical data. In addition, an iso-conductivity map should be constructed. Finally, a bedrock
contour map should be developed to include all of the geophysical and boring data. A sketch
map or formal construction plan indicating the location and dimension of the proposed facility
and line of cross section should be included for reference, or as a base map for presentation of
subsurface data.

Section 9: Sinkhole Remediation

Proper sinkhole remediation involves investigation, stabilization and final grading. For more
information, please see the CCWRM, Section 4.2.

Section 10: Sinkhole Stabilization

Sinkholes should be repaired by (1) reverse-graded backfilling, (2) concrete plugging, or (3) an

D.2.4
Appendix D.2. Geotechnical Methods for Karst Feasibility Testing
engineered subsurface structure. For more information on these methodologies, see the
CCWRM, Section 4.2.2.

Section 11: Monitoring of BMPs in Karst Regions

A water quality monitoring system installed, operated and maintained by the owner/operator may
be required in a karst region. For areas requiring monitoring, at least one monitoring well shall
be placed at a point hydraulically up gradient from the BMP and two (2) down gradient
monitoring wells shall be provided within 200' of the facility. The wells shall be fitted with
locking caps. Bi-annual sampling should take place, and an annual report should be filed with
the plan approval authority.

D.2.5
Short Cut Method for Wetland
D.3

Drawdown Assessment
Appendix
Appendix D.3. Short Cut for Wetland Drawdown Assessment

This section presents a simple method for calculating whether a stormwater pond or wetland has an
appropriate water balance to maintain a wet pool over a 30-day period without rainfall. When
conducting this analysis, the following should be considered:

1. Calculate maximum drawdown during periods of high evaporation and during an extended
period of no appreciable rainfall.
2. The change in storage within a pond (ΔV) = Inflows - Outflows
3. Potential inflows: runoff, baseflow and rainfall
4. Potential outflows: infiltration, surface overflow and evaporation (and evapotranspiration)
5. Assume no inflow from baseflow, no losses for infiltration and because only the permanent
pool volume is being evaluated, no losses for surface overflows.
6. Therefore, ΔV = runoff - evaporation

Using Design Example No. 1 - Reker Meadows (see Chapter 2.6) as an example and given the
conditions in Table D.3.1 and table D.3.2, a wetland drawdown assessment may be determined as
follows:

Table D.3.1 Site Data from Design Example 1 for Sample Water Balance Analysis

Drainage Area 38.0 ac

Post Developed Conditions CN 78
2-yr. Design Rainfall Event 3.1"
2-yr. Design Storm Runoff 1.2"
Water Quality Volume (WQv) 1.08 ac-ft
Groundwater Recharge Volume (Rev) 0.25 ac-ft
Surface Area of Wetland 0.58 acres
(minimum 1.5% of drainage area to BMP)

A shallow wetland (W-1) will be designed to treat the water quality volume (WQv) minus the
groundwater recharge volume (Rev). Therefore, the permanent pool volume = 0.83 ac-ft.

Table D.3.2 Evaporation Rates for Maryland Ponds

(from Ferguson and Debo, “On-Site Stormwater Management”, 1990)

April May June July August September

Precipitation (ft.) 0.30 0.35 0.32 0.36 0.38 0.31
Evaporation (ft.) 0.36 0.44 0.52 0.54 0.46 0.35

D.3.1
Appendix D.3. Short Cut for Wetland Drawdown Assessment

Calculate maximum drawdown during periods of high evaporation:

• Period of greatest evaporation occurs during the month of July (see Table D.3.2)
• Runoff Volume = P x E

where P = Precipitation
E = Runoff Efficiency (ratio of NRCS 2 year storm runoff to rainfall depths)
• For CN = 78, Volume of Runoff (2 year storm) = 1.2"
• For Frederick County, 2 year storm rainfall = 3.1”
• E = 1.2”/3.1” = 0.39
• Inflow = P × E
= .36 ft ×.39 = 0.14 ft
over entire site area: (0.14 ft) (38 acres) = 5.32 ac-ft
• Outflow = surface area × evaporation losses
= 0.58 ac × 0.54 ft (see Table D.3.2)
= 0.31 ac-ft
• Inflow (5.32 ac-ft) is greater than Outflow (0.31 ac-ft) therefore, drainage area is adequate to
support wet pond during normal conditions.

Check for drawdown over an extended period without rainfall:

• Use a 45 day interval using worst case conditions
• Highest evaporation occurs during July – 0.54 ft per month (see Table D.3.2)
• Calculate average evaporation per day = 0.54 ft / 31 days = 0.017 ft/day
• Over 45 day interval, evaporation loss = 45 × .017 ft/day = 0.78 ft
• Assume surface of the permanent pool may drop up to 0.78 ft (9.4”) over this interval.
Therefore, to be safe, specify vegetation for the aquatic shelves (to 10") that can tolerate
periods of drawdowns.

Reference

Ferguson, B. and T.N. Debo. 1990. On-Site Stormwater Management - Applications for Landscape
and Engineering. Van Nodstrandt, Reinhold, New York.

D.3.2
Stormwater Criteria for Maryland
D.4

Critical Area IDA Zone

Appendix
Appendix D.4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone ...................... Background
This Appendix has been adapted from the document

Urban Stormwater Quality Guidance for the

Maryland Chesapeake Bay Critical Area
in Intensely Developed Areas

Prepared by:
Peter Kumble
Lorraine Herson-Jones
Thomas Schueler

Additional Information on the 10% Rate, including an applicants guide, can be obtained from
the:

Chesapeake Bay Critical Area Commission

45 Calvert Street
Annapolis, MD 21401
(410) 974-2426

D.4.1
Appendix D.4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone ...................... Background

Background

What is the Critical Area?

The Chesapeake Bay Critical Area Act, passed by the Maryland General Assembly in 1984, is
designed to help protect the Chesapeake Bay and its tributaries from resource degradation primarily
resulting from development activity. In 1986, the more specific and comprehensive Critical Area
Criteria were adopted to implement the law. The “Critical Area” is defined as all water and
submerged lands of the Chesapeake Bay to the head of tide, and all land and water within 1000
feet of Mean High Water or from the edge of tidal wetlands. The Criteria mandate certain
restrictions on the use of land within this area. However, the responsibility for implementing the
Criteria is delegated to local governments, where zoning and other land use controls have
traditionally been carried out.

What is an IDA?
In writing the Criteria, the Chesapeake Bay Critical Area Commission was cognizant of the fact
that development already existed within the Critical Area. The Criteria also written with an implicit
acceptance of a limited and controlled level of additional development or redevelopment. One
particular class of land use, termed “Intensely Developed Areas,” or IDAs, was identified as areas
where continued growth could be accommodated through redevelopment and/or new development.
Local governments desiring to permit or promote such projects within the Critical Area have been
encouraged to direct such efforts within the IDA.

What does the 10% Rule mean?

IDAs are designated to each local jurisdiction and are characterized as intensely developed areas
that are predominately commercial, residential or industrial in nature. The Critical Area Criteria
require that any development within the IDA be accompanied by urban “best management
practices (BMPs)” to help mitigate potential water quality impacts associated with stormwater
runoff. The Criteria further specify that these practices should be capable of removing pollutant
loads generated from the development site to a level at least 10% below the load generated at the site
prior to development. This requirement is commonly referred to as the “10% Rule.”

D.4.2
 Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

Introduction

The requirements set forth in this document relate only to the requirements of the Chesapeake
Bay Critical Area Act passed by the Maryland General Assembly in 1984 as well as the associated
criteria passed in 1986. Under this act, development and redevelopment activities shall be required
to use stormwater management practices appropriate to site development which achieves a ten (10%)
percent reduction of pre-development pollutant loadings.

This section details a step-by-step approach for

10% Rule Application Process compliance with the 10% Rule. It is important to note that
A
Is the proposed development in the these requirements are designed to provide water quality
IDA of the Critical Area? treatment of urban runoff and that other site environmental
features cannot be substituted towards compliance. For
If yes, then go to Step B. example, environment requirements for waste water
If not, the 10% process does not treatment plants cannot be substituted for urban runoff
apply. BMPs— the Six Step Standard Application process or
Standard Procedure.
B
Is the impervious surface proposed
for the entire project greater than
250 square feet? If not, the 10%
Two application processes have been developed for
process does not apply. 10% Rule compliance in recognition of the broad scale of
development that occurs within the Critical Area.
If yes, then go to Step C.
z In the Standard Procedure, computations of pre-

C
Is the proposed development for a and post-development pollutant loadings and pollutant
single lot – single family home? removal efficiencies of BMPs are used to determine
compliance with the 10% Rule.
If yes, go to Step D.
If not, use the Standard Application z The second procedure provides a streamlined
Process and go to Part II of the process for individual, residential lot development. If
Applicant’s Guide. the proposed development is eligible, the applicant
must submit a Residential Water Quality Management
D
Use the Residential Water Quality Plan for approval.
Management Process.

E
Go to Part III of the Applicant’s
Guide.

The 10% Rule provides three different approaches for

compliance:

1) A reduction in impervious surface may lower post-development levels; therefore, Ipost is

lower, and hence, Ipost (post-development load) is lower;

D.4.3
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

2) A stormwater management BMP may remove pollutants from the Critical Area portion of
the site equal to the 10% reduction;
3) A stormwater management BMP may remove pollutants from the Critical Area portion of
the site and portions outside of the Critical Area equal to the 10% reduction.

Who must comply?

An individual planning development or re-development of land in the Critical Area District

zoned as an Intensely Developed Area (IDA) must comply with the 10% Rule. As mentioned above,
IDA refers to the land-use management classification as determined by the Chesapeake Bay Critical
Area Commission and incorporated into a local government’s Critical Area program. IDAs are
areas where residential, commercial, institutional, and/or industrial developed land uses
predominate, and where relatively little natural habitat occurs. IDAs also have at least one of the
following characteristics:

z A density of development equal to or greater than four dwellings per acre;

z Presence of public water and sewer systems with a density of greater than three units per
acre; or,
z Concentration of industrial, commercial, or institutional uses. In addition, these features are
concentrated in an area of at least 30 adjacent acres.

What must be submitted?

For persons proposing development or re-development in areas designated as an IDA on a local

Critical Area map, the specific submittal requirements vary from jurisdiction to jurisdiction.
Applicants should refer to their local Critical Area Program guidelines for preliminary and final site
plan or subdivision plan submittal requirements. As mentioned earlier, this Applicant’s Guide
contains the minimum recommended submittal requirements for two separate 10% Rule application
processes. Schedules for submittal of either document may vary among Critical Area jurisdictions.

What if my project is small?

Check to see if the project meets the criteria for the Residential Water Quality Management Plan.
This program is designed to ease the application process for individual lot residential development
or improvements that involve disturbances of 250 square feet or greater. Projects smaller than 250
square feet of disturbance are exempted from the requirements of 10% Rule.
What if my project will be completed in phases?

Applicants anticipating that their development will occur in phases are required to submit a
conceptual plan indicating the entire scope of work for preliminary review and approval. This will
ensure that the impacts of the project are evaluated in their entirety.

D.4.4
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

Who do I submit it to?

Before commencement of construction, all plans indicating proposed development, (e.g. site
plans, building permits, subdivision plans), shall be submitted to the county or municipality
department which is generally responsible for the administration and enforcement of Chesapeake
Bay Critical Area Program regulations. In most jurisdictions, there is a zoning department that
handles Critical Area projects.

How does this program relate to other stormwater management programs?

Other local or state stormwater regulations may require additional stormwater requirements or
submittal information. For example, the state stormwater requirements require that stormwater
designs be assessed according to the state priorities, (for example: infiltration of runoff as top
priority, followed by wet ponds, etc.). State or local stormwater requirements may also specify
control of larger storms for quantity or flood safety control purposes. It is possible to meet various
design requirements within one facility, but local and state programs must be addressed in addition
to the requirements outlined within this document.

When must the application be submitted?

Any application process for the 10% Rule should parallel the plan review process, for example: a
conceptual 10% Rule Application should be submitted as part of the preliminary review followed by
a final 10% application at the final plan review stage. Upon receipt of the site plan, the local
reviewing agency may conduct a review soliciting technical comments from other departments,
agencies, and officials. Although the process varies between jurisdictions, the site plan shall be
preliminarily approved, subject to final approval, assuming it meets all requirements.

The Standard Application Process provides a six-step method for comparing pollutant loads
before and after development, and assessing the appropriate BMP for a given site. The pollutant
loading methodology is based on relationships between surface imperviousness and concentrations
of pollutants found in urban runoff (Schueler 1987).

D.4.5
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

Table D.4.1 Six Step Method of the Standard Application Process

Worksheet A

STEP #1 Calculate Site Imperviousness

STEP #2 Calculate Pre-Development Pollutant Load
STEP #3 Calculate Post-Development Pollutant Load
STEP #4 Calculate Pollutant Removal Requirement
STEP #5 Identify Feasible Urban BMP

Worksheet B

STEP #6 Define Off-Site Compliance

then.. Submit Application to Critical Area Plan Reviewer

STEP 1: Calculate Site Imperviousness

In this step, the applicant will describe imperviousness of pre- and post- development site
conditions. In general, impervious surfaces are human-made surfaces that are devoid of vegetation.
Refer to Table D.4.2 for detailed definitions of imperviousness.

Impervious Measurement

z Imperviousness must be measured directly from the most recent site plan.
z A table of measured values (planimeter, preferred) listed specifically for each impervious
surface type (roads, rooftops, etc.) must be submitted.
z Estimates of imperviousness based on land use types by computer generated surface runoff
programs (e.g. TR-55), are not appropriate for submission.
z If land is subdivided prior to construction, it is recommended that a 10% Application is
submitted at the time of initial subdivision, with imperviousness calculated using maximum
building envelopes and proposed road layouts. This submittal process is recommended so
that the entire project may be assessed as a whole.

Define Development Category

Using existing site imperviousness data, the proposed development must be categorized as 1) new
development, 2) redevelopment, or 3) single lot residential.

1) New Development: pre-development imperviousness < 15%

2) Re-development: pre-development imperviousness > 15%

D.4.6
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

3) Single Lot Residential: projects involving an individual lot of residential development

which exceed 250 square feet in site disturbance.
Table D.4.2 Definition of Imperviousness

Impervious Surfaces are those that:

1) impede the natural infiltration of rainfall into underlying soils; and,

2) result in an increased volume of surface runoff to adjacent soils. As a simple rule, human-
made surfaces that are not vegetated will be considered impervious (BMPs will be
exempted from this definition).

Surface Impervious Design Suggestions

Roads
paved/concrete yes • minimize road width
gravel yes • avoid curb and gutters; use grassed
dirt yes swales

Driveways
paved/concrete yes • minimize surface area
gravel yes • use gridded pavers or porous
dirt yes pavement in areas of low usage
grid pavers no
porous pavement yes

Sidewalks/paths
paved yes • minimize surface area
gravel yes • disconnect imperviousness; combine
grid pavers no with vegetation
porous pavement no
wood chip no

Rooftops yes • use sheet-flow spouting, dry wells or

french drains

Decks yes • treat runoff under deck area

Swimming pools/ponds yes

D.4.7
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

STEP 2: Calculate Pre-Development Pollutant Load

In this step the applicant calculates the storm loadings of phosphorous from the site prior to
development (see Technical Guide “Simple Method for Calculating Phosphorous Export”). The
equation shown in Table D.4.3 is a simplification of the equations presented in the 1987 10%
Document. Two loading formulas are used based on the development category (redevelopment or
new development) and site imperviousness. The information needed for these calculations include:

• the area of the site within the IDA of the Critical Area
• pre-development site imperviousness.

Table D.4.3 Method for Calculating Pre-Development Phosphorous Loading

Pre-development Phosphorous Loading: Lpre = (Rv)(C)(A) 8.16

Rv = 0.05 + 0.009(I)

where:

Lpre = average annual load of total phosphorous exported from the site in pounds per year
Rv = runoff coefficient, which expresses the fraction of rainfall which is converted into runoff
C = flow-weighted mean concentration of phosphorous in urban runoff (mg/l)
C = 0.26 if pre-development I < 20%
C = 1.08 if pre-development I ≥ 20%
A = area of the site within the IDA Critical Area (acres)
8.16 = includes regional constants and unit conversion factors
I = site imperviousness (I = 75 if site is 75% impervious)

New Development Phosphorous Loading: Lpre = 0.5 (A)

where:

Lpre = average annual load of total phosphorous exported from the site in pounds per year
A = area of the site within the IDA Critical Area (acres)

D.4.8
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

STEP 3: Calculate Post-Development Pollutant Load

The next step involves computing the post-development pollutant load from the site. Again, an
abbreviated version of the Simple Method (Schueler, 1987), described in Step 2 is used for the
calculations. The equations to be used to determined post-development pollutant loads follows
below.

Table D.4.4 Method for Computing Post-Development Pollutant Loadings

Post-Development Pollutant Loading: Lpost = (Rv)(C)(A)(8.16)

Rv = 0.05 + 0.009(I)
where:

Lpost = average annual load of total phosphorous exported from the site through
storm runoff in pounds per year
Rv = runoff coefficient, which expresses the fraction of rainfall which is
converted into runoff
I = site imperviousness (I = 75 if site is 75% impervious)
C = flow-weighted mean concentration of the pollutant in urban runoff (mg/l)
C = 0.26 if new development activity
C = 1.08 if redevelopment activity
A = area of the development site (acres)
8.16 = includes regional constants and unit conversion factors

STEP 4: Calculate the Pollutant Removal Requirement

Phosphorous pollutant loads generated from the site must be reduced so that they are 90% or less
of the load that is generated prior to development. The amount of phosphorous that must be
removed though the use of stormwater BMPs is called the Pollutant Removal Requirement. The
equation in Table D.4.5 expresses this term numerically.

Table D.4.5 Computing Pollutant Removal Requirements

Removal Requirement = Post-development phosphorous load - (0.9) Pre-

development phosphorous load

RR = Lpost - 0.9 (Lpre)

D.4.9
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

STEP 5: Identify Feasible Urban Best Management Practices (BMP)

Urban BMP options must be shown to be feasible for the site both in terms of physical suitability
and pollutant removal capabilities (see Volume 1, Chapter 4). It should be noted that the BMPs
which survive the screening procedure still need to undergo more detailed design checks and field
tests to confirm that they are actually feasible. Evidence of site feasibility will be required as part of
the final submittal package.

Table D.4.6 Estimate of Pollutant Load Removed by Each BMP

Load Removed = (Post-development Load)(Removal Rate)

LR = Lpost (RR)(% Drainage Area Served)

If the Load Removed is equal to or greater than the Pollutant Removal Requirement computed in
STEP 4, then the on-site BMP complies with the 10% Rule. If not, the designer must evaluate
alternative BMP designs to achieve higher removal efficiencies.

Tables D.4.7 and D.4.8 provide updated phosphorous removal rates for stormwater BMPs used
in this manual, based on a comprehensive national survey of pollutant removal performance
monitoring data (Brown and Schueler, 1997).

D.4.10
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

Table D.4.7 Updated Critical Area Keystone Phosphorous Removal Rates

CODE BMP LIST TP%

P-1 Micropool ED 40
P-2 Wet Pond 50
P-3 Wet ED Pond 60
P-4 Multiple Pond 65
P-5 Pocket Pond 50
W-1 Shallow Wetland 40
W-2 ED Wetland 40
W-3 Pond/Wetland 55
W-4 Pocket Wetland 40
I-1 Infiltration Trench 65
I-2 Infiltration Basin 65
F-1 Surface Sand Filter 50
F-2 Underground Sand Filter 50
F-3 Perimeter Sand Filter 50
F-4 Organic Filter 50
F-5 Pocket Sand Filter 40
F-6 Bioretention 50
O-1 Dry Swale 65
O-2 Wet Swale 40

D.4.11
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

Table D.4.8 TP Removal Rates for BMPs Not on the List

BMP LIST TP%

Detention Facility - 2 10
Dry ED Pond - 7 20
Open Channels - 7 -15
Biofilter - 2 25
Dry Well Nd
Catchbasin - 1 5
Filterstrip - 1 7
Water Quality Inlets - 1 0

Source: Brown and Schueler, 1997, National Pollutant Removal Database for Stormwater BMPs

STEP 6: Define Off-Site Compliance

In the event that on-site BMPs cannot fully meet the pollutant removal requirement and on-
site design cannot be changed, an option exists for off-site mediation, otherwise known as an
Offset Project. Of primary concern is that the project be associated with pollutant removal or
water quality protection for water bodies within the same sub-watershed as the development
project. Similarly, off-site projects should be designed to minimize maintenance requirements.
In such cases where this is not feasilbe, a maintenance agreement should be established so as to
insure long-term water quality protection. Table D.4.9 provides a prioritized list of potential
offset projects.

D.4.12
Appendix D-4. Stormwater Criteria of the MD Critical Area IDA Zone....... Standard Application

Table D.4.9 Prioritized List of Potential Offsite Projects

Having shown that on-site compliance is not feasible, the applicant may choose from the
following Offset options in order of preference.

1. Construction and operation of an off-site BMP, sized to meet the removal

requirements.

2. Retrofit an existing BMP or pond structure.

3. Retrofit an existing storm drain system to encourage infiltration.

4. Reduce the imperviousness of an existing property through reforestation.

5. Implement a riparian reforestation project (0.5 acres of tree planting per lb of

removal requirement). Planting plan must meet local Critical Area reforestation
standards, or Maryland Forest Conservation Manual, if no local standards exist.

6. In rural jurisdictions where retrofit options are limited, finance the installation of
a structural agricultural BMP for a farm with a NRCS approved conservation
plan.

7. Other innovative options: restore a degraded tidal or non-tidal wetland that has
been disturbed by previous urban or agricultural drainage activity. This may be
accomplished through removal of fill, restoration of original water circulation
patterns, and wetland plantings.

D.4.13
Documentation of BMP Ability to Meet
D.5

the 80% TSS Removal Requirement

Appendix
Appendix D.5. Documentation of BMP Ability to Meet the 80% TSS Removal Requirement

BMPs employed at new development in the State of Maryland are now required to meet a
performance standard under the recently issued CZARA Coastal Zone 6217(g) management
measures guidance (US EPA, 1993). The specific management measures read “After construction is
completed and the site is permanently stabilized, reduce the average annual total suspended solid
(TSS) loadings by 80% percent...on an average annual basis.”

Based on the 90% capture sizing criteria and published pollutant removal performance data, it may
be presumed that the BMPs contained on the Acceptable BMP List outlined in Chapter 2 can meet
the 80% TSS removal performance standard, if they are designed in accordance with the BMP
performance criteria outlined in Chapter 3. The Acceptable BMP List will be periodically updated as
new monitoring research is conducted and new stormwater treatment technologies are tested.

Table 1 shows the median sediment removal rate measured or projected for the nineteen stormwater
BMPs currently on the approved list. The Table was developed as part of a national assessment of
stormwater BMP monitoring research by the Center for Watershed Protection (Brown and Schueler,
1997).

It should be clearly noted that the median values were obtained from a range of research studies that
varied widely in respect to geography, climate, design, treatment volume, sampling intensity, and
removal efficiency calculation method. In particular, the averages for some pond and wetland
designs reflect facilities that were under-sized or poorly designed, which tends to skew averages
lower than they would otherwise be. Consequently, the numbers in Table 1 should be considered
only as an indicator of expected pollutant removal performance in the State of Maryland.

As can be seen from Table 1, many BMPs on the list are capable of meeting the 80% TSS removal
requirement. Nine of the BMPs, however, had median removal rates that ranged from 60% and
79%. As noted earlier, these slightly lower removal rates may have been caused by the fact that
datasets include some under-sized or poorly designed practices that reduce the overall median.

In addition, performance monitoring data was not available to assess five practices, and their
sediment removal rate had to be projected based on the performance of similar systems. They are:
P-5 Pocket Pond (presumed to be similar to P-2)
I -2 Infiltration Basin (published rate based on land application studies [Schueler, 1987])
F-2 Underground Sand Filter (presumed to be similar to F-1)
F-5 Pocket Sand Filter (presumed to be similar to F-1)
F-6 Bioretention (presumed to be similar to O-1)

Table D.5.1 TSS Removal Performance List

D.5.1
Appendix D.5. Documentation of BMP Ability to Meet the 80% TSS Removal Requirement

ACCEPTABLE BMPs N TSS 80% ?

P-1 Micropool ED 6 (a) 61 yes (b)

P-2 Wet Pond 30 77 yes

P-3 Wet ED Pond 6 60 yes (b)
P-4 Multiple Pond pr- W-3 72 yes
P-5 Pocket Pond pr- W-4 nd yes
W-1 Shallow Wetland 14 84 yes
W-2 ED Wetland 5 62 yes (b)
W-3 Pond/Wetland 11 72 yes (b)
W-4 Pocket Wetland 1 76 yes (b)
I-1 Infiltration Trench 2 89 yes
I-2 Infiltration Basin 0 nd yes
F-1 Surface Sand Filter 6 83 yes
F-2 Underground Sand Filter see F-1 nd yes
F-3 Perimeter Sand Filter 3 79 yes
F-4 Organic Filter 2 81 yes
F-5 Pocket Sand Filter 0 nd yes
F-6 Bioretention 0 nd yes (pr)
O-1 Dry Swale 4 93 yes
O-2 Wet Swale 5 74 yes
Notes:
N = number of BMPs sampled
nd = No data
pr = projected removal , based on similar facilities
(a) data from dry ED ponds without micropools
(b) 80% removal can be achieved under proposed design criteria, current
database is biased by under-sized or poorly designed facilities

D.5.2
Appendix D.5. Documentation of BMP Ability to Meet the 80% TSS Removal Requirement

References

Brown, W. and T. Schueler. 1997. National Pollutant Removal Performance Database for
Stormwater BMPs. Center for Watershed Protection. Chesapeake Research Consortium. 220 pp.

U.S. EPA. 1993. Guidance Specifying Management Measures for Sources of Nonpoint Pollution in
Coastal Waters. Issued under authority of Section 6217(g) of the Coastal Zone Act Reauthorization
Amendments of 1990. No. 840-B-92-002. EPA Office of Water. Washington, D.C.

D.5.3
 Appendix

D.6

Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit

Requirements

Section D.6.1 Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) Code

Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

Identified by EPA in 40 CFR 122.26(b)(14)(i through xi):

(i) Facilities subject to stormwater effluent limitations...

No specific SIC codes cited. [Contact MDE/WMA for SIC number if not identified
previously on another NPDES permit; 410-631-3543 or 410-631-3323.]

(ii) 24 (except 2434) Lumber and Wood Products, Except Furniture

2434 - Wood Kitchen Cabinets
26 (except 265 and 267) Paper and Allied Products
265 - Paperboard Containers and Boxes
267 - Converted Paper and Paperboard Products, Except Containers and Boxes
28 (except 283) Chemicals and Allied Products
283 - Drugs
29 Petroleum Refining and Related Industries
31 Leather and Leather Products
32 (except 323) Stone, Clay, Glass, and Concrete Products
323 - Glass Products made of Purchased Glass
33 Primary Metal Industries
344 Fabricated Structural Metal Products
373 Ship and Boat Building and Repairing

(iii) 10 Metal Mining

12 Coal Mining
13 Oil and Gas Extraction (including facilities where stormwater comes into contact
with overburden or raw materials)
14 Mining and Quarrying of Nonmetallic Minerals, Except Fuels

(iv) Hazardous waste treatment, storage or disposal facilities.

No specific SIC codes cited. [Contact MDE/WMA for SIC number if not identified
previously on another NPDES permit; 410-631-3543 or 410-631-3323.]

(v) Landfills, land application sites, and open dumps...

No specific SIC codes cited. [Contact MDE/WMA for SIC number if not identified
previously on another NPDES permit; 410-631-3543 or 410-631-3323.]

(vi) Facilities involved in the recycling of materials...

including, but not limited to;
5015 Motor Vehicle Parts, Used
5093 Scrap and Waste Materials

D.6.1
Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

(vii) Steam electric power general facilities...

No specific SIC codes cited. [Contact MDE/WMA for SIC number if not identified
previously on another NPDES permit; 410-631-3543 or 410-631-3323.]

(viii) Transportation facilities classified as:

40 Railroad Transportation
41 Local and Suburban Transit and Interurban Highway Passenger Transportation
42 (except 4221-4225) Motor Freight Transportation and Warehousing
4221 - Farm Product Warehousing and Storage
4222 - Refrigerated Warehousing and Storage
4225 - General Warehousing and Storage
43 United States Postal Service
44 Water Transportation
45 Transportation by Air
5171 Petroleum Bulk Stations and Terminals

(ix) Treatment works treating domestic sewage...

No specific SIC codes cited. [Contact MDE/WMA for SIC number if not identified
previously on another NPDES permit; 410-631-3543 or 410-631-3323.]

(x) Construction Activity

See attached SIC code list for construction activity [Major Group Number 15].

(xi) 20 Food and Kindred Products

21 Tobacco Products
22 Textile Mill Products
23 Apparel and other Finished Products made from Fabrics and Similar Materials
2434 Wood Kitchen Cabinets
25 Furniture and Fixtures
265 Paperboard Containers and Boxes
267 Converted Paper and Paperboard Products, Except Containers and Boxes
27 Printing, Publishing, and Allied Industries
283 Drugs
285 Paints, Varnishes, Lacquers, Enamels, and Allied Products
30 Rubber and Miscellaneous Plastics Products
31 (except 311) Leather and Leather Products
311 - Leather Tanning and Finishing
323 Glass Products, made of Purchased Glass
34 (except 3441) Fabricated Metal Products, Except Machinery and Transportation
Equipment
3441 - Fabricated Structural Metal
35 Industrial and Commercial Machinery and Computer Equipment
36 Electronic and other Electrical Equipment and Components, Except Computer
Equipment

D.6.2
Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

37 (except 373) Transportation Equipment

373 - Ship and Boat Building and Repairing
38 Measuring, Analyzing, and Controlling Instruments; Photographic, Medical and
Optical Goods; Watches and Clocks
39 Miscellaneous Manufacturing Industries
4221 Farm Product Warehousing and Storage
4222 Refrigerated Warehousing and Storage
4225 General Warehousing and Storage

D.6.3
Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

Section D.6.2 General Discharge Permit - Sample

GENERAL DISCHARGE PERMIT FOR STORM WATER ASSOCIATED WITH

INDUSTRIAL ACTIVITIES

GENERAL DISCHARGE PERMIT NO. 97-SW-

GENERAL NPDES PERMIT NO. MDR______

Effective Date:________________________________

Expiration Date:________________________________

Part I. APPLICABILITY.

A. Geographic Coverage. This permit covers all areas of the State of Maryland.

B. Eligible Discharges. This permit may cover all storm water discharges associated with
industrial activity, as defined in 40 CFR 122.26, that discharge to surface waters of the State.
Such discharges may be commingled with wastewater or water discharges not regulated by this
permit. This permit also covers storm water discharges not included in 40 CFR 122.26 that the
Department determines would, if not regulated by a permit, be likely to contribute to a violation
of a water quality standard or be a significant contributor of pollutants to waters of the State,
either surface or ground.

C. Ineligible Discharges. The following discharges are not covered under this general permit.

1. Storm water discharges from any construction activity, as defined in 40 CFR

122.26, except for construction activity associated with an industrial facility that is or
will be covered by this permit;

2. Storm water discharges that are regulated by effluent limitation guidelines.

All or part of the storm water from the following industries are covered by effluent
limitation guidelines: cement manufacturing (40 CFR 411), feedlots (40 CFR 412),
fertilizer manufacturing (40 CFR 418), petroleum refining (40 CFR 419), phosphate
manufacturing (40 CFR 422), steam electric generating (40 CFR 423), coal mining
(40 CFR 434), mineral mining and processing (40 CFR 436), ore mining and dressing
(40 CFR 440), and asphalt emulsion (40 CFR 443);

3. Storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from inactive

mining or inactive oil and gas operations occurring on federal lands; and

4. Storm water discharges whose NPDES permit has been terminated (other than
at the request of the permittee) or denied, or those for which the Department requires
an individual permit or an alternative general permit.

D.6.4
Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

D. Individual Permit or Another General Permit Required.

1. Any person who conducts activities which are covered by this General Permit
and does not have a valid individual discharge permit is required to apply for
coverage under this General Permit within 60 days of the issuance of the permit.

2. The Department may require any person authorized by this permit to apply for
and obtain an individual State or State/NPDES discharge permit or to obtain coverage
under another general permit. If an owner or operator fails to submit, in a timely
manner, an application for an individual State or State/NPDES discharge permit or a
Notice of Intent (NOI) for another general permit as required by the Department
under this condition, the applicability of this permit to the owner or operator is
automatically terminated at the end of the day specified by the Department for the
application or NOI submittal.

3. Any person authorized by this permit may request to be excluded from

coverage under this permit by applying for an individual State or State/NPDES
discharge permit or requesting coverage under another general permit. The
Department may grant this request by issuing an individual State or a State/NPDES
discharge permit or by granting coverage under another general permit, if the reasons
cited by the owner or operator are adequate to support the request.

4. When an individual State or State/NPDES discharge permit is issued to a

person otherwise subject to this permit, the applicability of this permit to the
permittee is automatically terminated on the effective date of the individual State or
State/NPDES discharge permit.

5. If there is evidence indicating potential or realized impacts on water quality

due to any activity covered by this permit, the owner or operator of such discharge
may be required to obtain an individual State or a State/NPDES discharge permit or
coverage under another general permit.

6. If a person otherwise covered under this permit is denied coverage under an

individual State or a State/NPDES discharge permit, or another general permit, the
denial automatically terminates, on the date of the denial, the person's coverage under
this general permit, unless otherwise specified by the Department.

7. The Department may terminate coverage under this general permit for an
existing permittee if the Department finds that:

a. The NOI contained false or inaccurate information;

b. Conditions or requirements of the discharge permit have been or are

D.6.5
Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

about to be violated;

c. Substantial deviation from plans, specifications, or requirements has

occurred;

d. The Department has been refused entry to the premises for the purpose
of inspecting to insure compliance with the conditions of the discharge
permit;

e. A change in conditions exists that requires temporary or permanent

reduction or elimination of the permitted discharge;

f. Any State or federal water quality stream standard or effluent standard

has been or is likely to be violated; or

g. Any other good cause exists for denying coverage under this permit.

E. Authorization. To be authorized to discharge under this general permit, a person is required

to submit an NOI in accordance with the requirements of Part III of this permit, to pay the
required fee, and to comply with the terms and conditions of this permit. Coverage under this
permit is effective on the date that the NOI is acknowledged by the Department and the NOI fee
is paid to the Department in accordance with the terms stipulated in Part III below. A person
who submits such an NOI is notified of its acceptance by the Department, complies with the
terms and conditions of this permit, and pays the required fee is authorized to discharge under
the terms and conditions of this permit.

If the NOI fee is paid by a check which does not clear for any reason, the person will be given
30 calendar days to make proper payment including any interest and other charges that are due.
If payment is not made within this time, coverage under this permit shall be considered void
from the outset. The permittee should save the cancelled check, a copy of the completed NOI,
and related documents. These documents shall be provided to the Department upon request.

F. Transfer of Authorization.

1. The authorization under this permit is not transferable to any person except in
accordance with this section.

D.6.6
Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

2. Authorization to discharge under this permit may be transferred to another person if:

a. The current permittee notifies the Department (Industrial Discharge Permits

Division with copy sent to Inspection and Compliance Program) in writing of the proposed
transfer;

b. A written agreement, indicating the specific date of the proposed transfer of

permit coverage and acknowledging the responsibilities of the current and new permittee for
compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit, is submitted to the Department;

c. The new permittee either confirms in writing that the type of discharge,
number of outfalls, and other information given on the original NOI remain correct or updates
this information;

d. The new permittee confirms in writing that either they will follow the existing
storm water pollution prevention plan or that they have developed a new plan; and

e. Neither the current permittee nor the new permittee receives notification from
the Department, within 30 days of receipt of items I.F.2.a through d above, of intent to terminate
coverage under this permit.

3. The Department may continue coverage for the new permittee under this permit or
may require the new permittee to apply for and obtain an individual State or State/NPDES
discharge permit or obtain coverage under another general permit.

4. A new owner of a facility is responsible for any fees unpaid by the former owner.

G. Continuation of an Expired General Permit. An expired general permit continues in force

and effect until a new general permit is issued; for the next 60 days provided the permittee
submits a new NOI and fee within that period; or until the general permit is revoked or
withdrawn. Only those permittees authorized to discharge prior to the expiration of the general
permit are covered by the continued permit.

Part II. Definitions.

A. "Best management practices (BMP)" means schedules of activities, prohibitions of

practices, maintenance procedures, and other management practices to prevent or reduce the
pollution of waters of this State. BMP also include treatment requirements, operating
procedures, and practices to control plant site runoff, spillage or leaks, sludge or waste disposal,
or drainage from raw materials storage.

B. "CFR" means Code of Federal Regulations.

C. "COMAR" means Code of Maryland Regulations.

D.6.7
Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

D. "Construction activity" means clearing, grading, and excavation activities except:

operations that result in the disturbance of less than five acres (or whatever threshold is
currently specified in 40 CFR 122.26) of total land area which are not a part of a larger common
plan of development or sale.

E. "Department" means the Maryland Department of the Environment. Unless stated

otherwise, all submissions to the Department shall be directed to the attention of the Industrial
Discharge Permits Division.

F. "Federal Clean Water Act" means the federal Water Pollution Control Act Amendments of
1972, its amendments and all rules and regulations adopted thereunder.

G. "General permit" means a discharge permit issued for a class of dischargers.

H. "Ground water" means underground water in a zone of saturation.

I. "Includes" or "including" means includes or including by way of illustration and not by

way of limitation.

J. "NPDES permit" means a National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System permit issued
under the federal Clean Water Act.

K. "NOI" means Notice of Intent to be covered by this permit (see Part III of this permit).

L. "Operator" means that person or those persons with responsibility for the management and
performance of each facility.

M. "Permittee" means the person holding a permit issued by the Department.

N. "Person" means an individual, receiver, trustee, guardian, personal representative, fiduciary,

or representative of any kind, and any partnership, firm, association, corporation, or other entity.
Person includes the federal government, this State, any county, municipal corporation or other
political subdivision of this State or any of their units.

O. "Project" means the total area upon which construction activity will occur through stages or
phases over time.

P. "Section 313 water priority chemical" means a chemical or chemical categories which: 1)
are listed at 40 CFR 372.65 pursuant to Section 313 of Title III of the Superfund Amendments
and Reauthorization Act (SARA) of 1986, also titled the Emergency Planning and Community
Right-to-Know Act of 1986; 2) are present at or above threshold levels at a facility subject to
SARA Title III, Section 313 reporting requirements; and 3) that meet at least one of the
following criteria: (i) are listed in Appendix D of 40 CFR 122 on either Table II (organic
priority pollutants), Table III (certain metals, cyanides, and phenols) or Table V (certain toxic

D.6.8
Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

pollutants and hazardous substances); (ii) are listed as a hazardous substance pursuant to
Section 311(b)(2)(A) of the Clean Water Act at 40 CFR 116.4; or (iii) are pollutants for which
EPA has published acute or chronic water quality criteria.

Q. "Significant materials" includes, but is not limited to: raw materials; fuels; materials such
as solvents, detergents, and plastic pellets; finished materials, such as metallic products; raw
materials used in food processing or production; hazardous substances designated under Section
101(14) of CERCLA; any chemical the facility is required to report pursuant to Section 313 of
Title III of SARA; fertilizers; pesticides; and waste products, such as ashes, slag and sludge that
have the potential to be released with storm water discharges.

R. "Significant spills" includes, but is not limited to: releases of oil or hazardous substances in
excess of reportable quantities under Section 311 of the Clean Water Act (40 CFR 110.10 and
40 CFR 117.21) or Section 102 of CERCLA (40 CFR 302.4).

S. "State discharge permit" means a discharge permit issued pursuant to the Environment
Article, Title 9, Subtitle 3, Annotated Code of Maryland.

T. "Storm water associated with construction activity" means the discharge from any
conveyance which is used for collecting and conveying storm water and which is directly
related to clearing, grading, and excavation activities. For this permit, groundwater that seeps
into construction excavations shall be considered and regulated as storm water.

U. "Storm water associated with industrial activity" means storm water as defined in 40 CFR
122.26(b)(14).

V. "Surface waters" means all waters of this State which are not ground waters.

W. "Wastewater" means any:

1. Liquid waste substance derived from industrial, commercial, municipal, residential,

agricultural, recreational, or other operations or establishments; and

2. Other liquid waste substance containing liquid, gaseous or solid matter and having
characteristics which will pollute any waters of this State.

X. "Waters of this State" includes:

1. Both surface and underground waters within the boundaries of this State subject to its
jurisdiction, including that part of the Atlantic Ocean within the boundaries of this State, the
Chesapeake Bay and its tributaries, and all ponds, lakes, rivers, streams, tidal and nontidal
wetlands, public ditches, tax ditches, and public drainage systems within this State, other than
those designed and used to collect, convey, or dispose of sanitary sewage; and

D.6.9
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

2. The flood plain of free-flowing waters determined by the Department of the

Environment on the basis of the 100-year flood frequency.

PART III. Notice of Intent Requirements.

A. Deadlines for Notification. Any person who has an existing individual State or State/NPDES
discharge permit for activities covered under this general permit is not obligated to obtain
coverage under this general permit until the individual State or State/NPDES discharge permit
expires. At least 180 days prior to the expiration date of the individual State or State/NPDES
discharge permit for activities covered under this general permit, a person shall submit an NOI
requesting coverage under this general permit. However, a person currently covered under an
individual State or State/NPDES discharge permit may choose to request coverage under this
general permit by submitting an NOI and a fee in accordance with the requirements of this Part
following issuance of this general permit. At least 30 days prior to the commencement of any
new storm water discharge covered under this general permit, a person shall request coverage
by submitting an NOI in accordance with the requirements of this Part. Any person who is
covered under 92-GP-0001 shall submit a new NOI and fee within 60 days of issuance to
continue coverage. A person planning construction activity (disturbing five or more acres) at an
industrial facility must submit an NOI or updated NOI at least 48 hours prior to any land
disturbing activities. The Department may bring an enforcement action for failure to submit an
NOI in a timely manner, or for any unauthorized discharges that occurred prior to obtaining
coverage under this permit.

B. Notice of Intent. A person shall obtain the appropriate NOI form from the Department, and
shall provide the following information:

1. County, name and address (location) of the facility;

2. Name and telephone number of the facility contact;
3. Written description of industrial activity taking place;
4. One four-digit SIC code that best represent the principal products or activities provided by the
facility;
5. Watershed basin code;
6. The latitude and longitude of the approximate center of the facility to the nearest 15 seconds;
7. The name of the receiving water(s), or if the discharge is to a municipal separate storm sewer,
the name of the municipal operator of the storm sewer and the ultimate receiving water(s);
8. Permit number of any other NPDES permit issued for the facility;
9. Area of industrial activity at facility in acres;
10. Status of owner/operator (private, Federal, etc);
11. Federal tax ID number;
12. Name and mailing address of applicant (company that operates the permitted facility;
13.Name and telephone number of operator contact;
14. A summary of all existing quantitative data, if any, describing the concentration of pollutants
in storm water discharges;
15. Where construction is involved, a brief project description, including existing and proposed

D.6.10
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

land uses;
16. Where construction is involved, the total site area, the total proposed disturbed area, the
type(s) of storm water management best management practice(s) (BMP) proposed, and the total
drainage area to be controlled by each type of BMP; and
17. Signiture of applicant.

If a person operates multiple facilities, an NOI is required for each noncontiguous site.

C. Discharge Permit Fee

Persons who intend to obtain coverage under this general permit shall submit to the Department a
fee of $550 with the NOI application. Local and state governments are not required to pay a fee.

As an alternative to a single fee, a person may submit five annual $120 payments beginning with
the submission of the NOI application and every July 1 thereafter.

For facilities which did not begin operating until after September 29, 1995 and which were
previously registered under permit 92-GP-0001, the total fee shall be discounted by 100 dollars for
each full calendar year between January 1, 1993 and the month which operations began.

The discharge fee for new facilities that have commenced operating after July 1 of any year shall
be prorated on a monthly basis.

D. Required Signatures.

1. Certification. Any person signing an NOI shall make the following certification as part
of the NOI.

"I certify under penalty of law that this document and all attachments were prepared under
my direction or supervision in accordance with a system designed to assure that qualified personnel
properly gather and evaluate the information submitted. Based on my inquiry of the person or
persons who manage the system, or those persons directly responsible for gathering the
information, the information submitted is, to the best of my knowledge and belief, true, accurate,
and complete. I am aware that there are significant penalties for submitting false information,
including the possibility of fine and imprisonment for knowing violations."

2. Signatories. The NOI shall be signed as follows:

a. For a corporation: by a responsible corporate officer. For the purpose of this

section, a responsible corporate officer means:

(i) A president, secretary, treasurer, or vice-president of the corporation in

charge of a principal business function, or any other person who performs similar policy or
decision-making functions for the corporation; or

D.6.11
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

(ii) The manager of one or more manufacturing, production, or operating

facilities employing more than 250 persons or having gross annual sales or expenditures exceeding
$25 million (in second-quarter 1980 dollars), if authority to sign documents has been assigned or
delegated to the manager in accordance with corporate procedures.

b. For a partnership or sole proprietorship: by a general partner or the proprietor,

respectively; or

c. For a municipal, State, federal, or other public agency: by either a principal

executive officer or ranking elected official. For purposes of this section, a principal executive
officer of a federal agency includes:

(i) The chief executive officer of the agency; or

(ii) A senior executive officer having responsibility for the overall

operations of a principal geographic unit of the agency (e.g., Regional Administrators of EPA).

3. Report Submission.

a. All reports required by permits, and other information requested by the

Department shall be signed by a person described in Part III E.2 or by a duly authorized
representative of that person. A person is a duly authorized representative only if:

(i) The authorization is made in writing by a person described in Part III

E.2;

(ii) The authorization specifies either an individual or a position having

responsibility for the overall operation of the regulated facility or activity such as the position of
plant manager, operator of a well or a well field, superintendent, position of equivalent
responsibility or an individual or position having overall responsibility for environmental matters
for the company; and

D.6.12
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

(iii) The written authorization is submitted to the Department.

b. If an authorization under this subsection is no longer accurate because a

different individual or position has responsibility for the overall operation of the facility, a new
authorization satisfying the requirements of Part III E.3(a) must be submitted to the Department
prior to or together with any reports, information or applications to be signed by the new authorized
representative.

E. Where to Submit. A person shall submit a signed copy of the NOI and the required fee, made
payable to the Maryland Department of the Environment, to the following address:

Maryland Department of the Environment

P.O. Box 2057
Baltimore MD 21203-2057

F. Failure to Notify. Persons who discharge storm water associated with industrial activity, who
fail to notify the Department of their intent to be covered under this permit, and who discharge to
waters of this State without an individual State or State/NPDES discharge permit, are in violation
of the federal Clean Water Act and the Environment Article, Annotated Code of Maryland, and
may be subject to penalties.

G. Additional Notification.

Facilities which discharge storm water associated with industrial activity to the municipal
separate storm sewer system of Anne Arundel County, Baltimore (City), Baltimore County, Carroll
County, Charles County, Frederick County, Harford County, Howard County, Montgomery
County, Prince George's County, or the State Highways Administration shall, in addition to filing
copies of the NOI in accordance with condition III.B., submit, concurrently, signed copies of the
NOI to the operator of the municipal separate storm sewer to which they discharge (see NOI form
for addresses).

H. Permit Expiration and Renewal. Within 60 days after the reissuance of this general permit
with new effective and expiration dates, the permittee is required to submit to the Department
either:

1. A notice that the discharge or industrial activity (including the exposure of residual
pollutants from concluded industrial activity) will cease by the expiration date of this permit; or

2. A new NOI and any fee in accordance with the requirements of the reissued general
permit in order to be covered under the reissued general permit.

Part IV. Special Conditions.

D.6.13
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

A. Releases In Excess Of Reportable Quantities

1. The discharge of hazardous substances or oil in the storm water discharge(s) from a facility
shall be prevented or minimized in accordance with the applicable storm water pollution prevention
plan for the facility. This permit does not relieve the permittee of the reporting requirements of 40
CFR part 117 and 40 CFR part 302. Except as provided in condition IV.A.2 (multiple anticipated
discharges) of this permit, where a release containing a hazardous substance in an amount equal to
or in excess of a reporting quantity established under either 40 CFR 117 or 40 CFR 302, occurs
during a 24-hour period:

a. The discharger is required to notify the Department of any oil spill or discharge of oil
by calling its Emergency Response Division at (410) 974-3551 and notify the National Response
Center (NRC) at (800) 424-8802 or, in the Washington, DC metropolitan area, at (202) 426-2675
in accordance with the requirements of COMAR 26.10.01.03, 40 CFR 117 and 40 CFR 302
respectively as soon as he or she has knowledge of the discharge;

b. The permittee shall submit to the Department within 10 working days of knowledge of
the release a written description of: the release (including the type and estimate of the amount of
material released), the date that such release occurred, the circumstances leading to the release, and
steps to be taken in accordance with condition IV.A.1.c (below) of this permit, and any other
information as required by COMAR 26.10.01.03; and

c. The storm water pollution prevention plan required under condition IV.B (storm water
pollution prevention plans) of this permit must be modified within 14 calendar days of knowledge
of the release to: provide a description of the release, the circumstances leading to the release, and
the date of the release. In addition, the plan must be reviewed to identify measures to prevent the
reoccurrence of such releases and to respond to such releases, and the plan must be modified where
appropriate.

2. Multiple Anticipated Discharges - Facilities which have more than one anticipated discharge
per year containing the same hazardous substance in an amount equal to or in excess of a reportable
quantity established under either 40 CFR 117 or 40 CFR 302, which occurs during a 24-hour
period, where the discharge is caused by events occurring within the scope of the relevant
operating system shall comply with conditions IV.A.1.a,b, and c above, but must submit
notifications only for the first such release that occurs during a calendar year (or for the first year of
this permit, after submittal of an NOI).

3. Spills. This permit does not authorize the discharge of hazardous substances or oil resulting
from an on-site spill.

D.6.14
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

B. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plans - General

The permittee shall develop a storm water pollution prevention plan for each facility covered by
this permit. The storm water pollution prevention plan shall be prepared in accordance with sound
engineering practices. The plan shall identify potential sources of pollution which may reasonably
be expected to affect the quality of storm water discharges associated with industrial activity from
the facility. In addition, the plan shall describe and ensure the implementation of practices which
are to be used to reduce the pollutants in storm water discharges associated with industrial activity
at the facility and to assure compliance with the terms and conditions of this permit.

1. In developing this plan, the permittee shall use as a reference "Storm Water Management
for Industrial Activities: Developing Pollution Prevention Plans and Best Management Practices"
(EPA Document #EPA832-R-92-006) or, when it is available, an EPA-published summary
document on the same subject. These documents can be obtained from the National Technical
Information Service, 5285 Port Royal Road, Springfield, Virginia 22161 (phone: 703-487-4600).

2. The plan shall be signed in accordance with Part III, Section E.2 of this permit, and be
retained on site in accordance with Part VI, Section A.2 of this permit. Plans for facilities in
existence at the time of the issuance of this permit shall be completed within one year of obtaining
coverage under this general permit or within one year of notification by the Department of the need
for obtaining a storm water discharge permit, whichever occurs first. Plans shall provide for
compliance with the terms of the plan within 18 months of obtaining coverage under this general
permit or within 18 months of notification by the Department of the need for obtaining a storm
water discharge permit, whichever occurs first. In the case of new facilities, the plan shall be
completed and implemented prior to submitting an NOI to be covered under this permit. The
permittee shall make plans available upon request to the Department, and in the case of a storm
water discharge associated with industrial activity which discharges to a municipal separate storm
sewer system with an NPDES permit, to the municipal operator of the system (those systems are
listed in Condition III. G, addresses are on NOI).

3. If the plan is reviewed by the Department, the Department may notify the permittee, at
any time, that the plan does not meet one or more of the minimum requirements of this Part. After
such notification from the Department, the permittee shall make changes to the plan to meet the
objections of the Department and shall submit to the Department a written certification that the
requested changes have been made and implemented. Unless otherwise provided by the
Department, the permittee shall have 90 days after such notification to make the necessary changes.

4. The permittee shall amend the plan whenever there is a change in design, construction,
operation, or maintenance which has a significant effect on the potential for the discharge of
pollutants to the waters of the State or if the storm water pollution prevention plan proves to be
ineffective in achieving the general objectives of controlling pollutants in storm water discharges
associated with industrial activity. Amendments to the plan may be reviewed by the Department as
described above.

D.6.15
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

C. Storm Water Pollution Prevention Plan - Contents

The plan shall include, at a minimum, the following items:

1. Description of Potential Pollutant Sources

Each plan shall provide a description of potential sources which may be reasonably
expected to add significant amounts of pollutants to storm water discharges. Each plan shall
identify all activities and significant materials which may potentially be significant pollutant
sources. Each plan shall include:

a. A site map indicating an outline of the drainage area of each storm water outfall;
each existing structural control measure to reduce pollutants in storm water runoff; and surface
water bodies, including drainage ditches and wetlands.

b. A topographic map (or other map, if a topographic map is unavailable), extending

one-quarter of a mile beyond the property boundaries of the facility. The requirements of this
condition may be included in the site map required under Part IV, Section C.1.a. above, if
appropriate.

c. A narrative description of significant materials that have been treated, stored, or

disposed in a manner which allowed exposure to storm water at anytime from three years prior to
obtaining coverage under this permit until the time the present method of on-site storage or
disposal was initiated; materials management practices employed to minimize contact of these
materials with storm water runoff; materials loading and access areas; the location and a
description of existing structural and non-structural control measures to reduce pollutants in storm
water runoff; and a description of any treatment the storm water receives.

d. For each area of the facility that generates storm water discharges associated with
industrial activity with a reasonable potential for containing significant amounts of pollutants, a
prediction of the direction of flow, and an estimate of the types of pollutants which are likely to be
present in storm water discharges associated with industrial activity; and

e. A summary of all existing sampling data describing pollutants in storm water

discharges.

D.6.16
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

2. Storm Water Management Controls

Each facility covered by this permit shall develop a description of storm water
management controls appropriate for the facility, and implement such controls. The
appropriateness and priorities of controls in a plan shall reflect identified potential sources of
pollutants at the facility. The description of storm water management controls shall address the
following minimum components, including a schedule for implementing such controls:
a. Preventive Maintenance. A preventive maintenance program that involves
timely inspection and maintenance of storm water management devices (cleaning oil/water
separators, catch basins) as well as inspecting and testing plant equipment and systems to uncover
conditions that could cause breakdowns or failures resulting in discharges of pollutants to surface
waters.

b. Good Housekeeping. Good housekeeping that requires the maintenance of a

clean, orderly facility.

c. Spill Prevention and Response Procedures. If spills have a potential to occur,

procedures for cleaning up spills shall be identified in the plan and made known to the appropriate
personnel. The necessary equipment to implement a cleanup shall be available to the appropriate
personnel.

d. Sediment and Erosion Prevention. The plan shall identify areas which, due to
topography, activities, or other factors, have a high potential for significant soil erosion, and
identify measures to limit erosion.

e. Management of Runoff. The plan shall contain a narrative consideration of the

appropriateness of traditional storm water management practices (practices other than those which
control the generation or source(s) of pollutants) used to divert, infiltrate, reuse, or otherwise
manage storm water runoff in a manner that reduces pollutants in storm water discharges from the
site. The plan shall provide that measures determined to be reasonable and appropriate shall be
implemented and maintained. The potential of various sources at the facility to contribute
pollutants to storm water discharges associated with industrial activity (see Part IV, Section C.1. -
description of potential pollutant sources) shall be considered when determining reasonable and
appropriate measures. Appropriate measures may include: vegetative swales and practices, reuse
of collected storm water (such as for a process or as an irrigation source), inlet controls (such as
oil/water separators), snow management activities, infiltration devices, and wet detention/retention
devices.

f. Visual Inspections. Qualified plant personnel shall be identified to inspect

designated equipment and plant areas. A site inspection shall be conducted annually by such
personnel to verify that the description of potential pollutant sources required under Part IV,
Section C.1. is accurate, the drainage map has been updated to reflect current conditions, and the
controls to reduce pollutants identified in the storm water pollution prevention plan are being
implemented and are adequate. In particular, material handling areas shall be inspected for

D.6.17
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

evidence of, or the potential for, pollutants entering the drainage system. A tracking or follow-up
procedure shall be used to ensure that each inspection results in an appropriate response.

g. Recordkeeping and Internal Reporting Procedures. Spills or other discharge

incidents, and information describing the quality and quantity of storm water discharges shall be in
the facility records. Maintenance activities shall be documented and recorded with inspection and
discharge records. All records shall be maintained at the facility, for a minimum of three years.
This period shall be automatically extended during the course of litigation, or when requested by
the Department.

3. Consistency with Other Plans

Storm water management programs may include requirements for Spill Prevention
Control and Countermeasure (SPCC) plans under Section 311 of the Clean Water Act or Best
Management Practices (BMPs) programs otherwise required by an NPDES permit and may
incorporate any part of such plans into the storm water pollution prevention plan by reference.

4. Special Requirements for Storm Water Discharges Associated with Industrial

Activity to Municipal Separate Storm Sewer Systems Serving a Population of 100,000 or
More

Facilities covered by this permit shall comply with applicable requirements in municipal
storm water management programs developed under State/NPDES permits issued for the discharge
of the municipal separate storm sewer system that receives the facility's discharge, provided the
municipal operator has notified the discharger of such conditions. These facilities shall make storm
water pollution prevention plans available to the municipal operator of the system upon request.

5. Salt Storage

Storage piles of salt used for deicing or other commercial or industrial purposes shall be
enclosed or covered to prevent exposure to precipitation.

6. Pollution Prevention Committee

The description of the storm water Pollution Prevention Committee shall identify specific
individuals within the plant organization who are responsible for developing the storm water
pollution prevention plan and assisting the plant manager in its implementation, maintenance, and
revision. The activities and responsibilities of the committee should address all aspects of the
facility's storm water pollution prevention plan.

D.6.18
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

7. Employee Training

Employee training programs shall inform personnel at all levels of responsibility of the
components and goals of the storm water pollution prevention plan. Training should address
topics, such as spill response, good housekeeping and material management practices. A pollution
prevention plan shall identify periodic dates for such training.

D.6.19
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

D. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

FOR FACILITIES SUBJECT TO SARA TITLE III, Section 313 REQUIREMENTS

Storm water pollution prevention plans for facilities subject to reporting requirements under
SARA Title III, Section 313 (42 U.S.C.§11023) are required to include, in addition to the
information listed in Part IV, Section C., a discussion of the facility's conformance with the
following (appropriate) guidelines:

1. In areas where Section 313 water priority chemicals are stored, processed or otherwise
handled, appropriate containment, drainage control and/or diversionary structures shall be
provided. At a minimum, one of the following preventive systems or its equivalent shall be used:

a. Curbing, culverting, gutters, sewers or other forms of drainage control to prevent

or minimize the potential for storm water runoff to come into contact with significant sources of
pollutants; or

b. Roofs, covers, liners, or other forms of appropriate protection to prevent storage

piles from leaching or exposure to storm water and wind.

2. The storm water pollution prevention plan shall include a complete discussion of
measures taken to conform with the following applicable guidelines, other effective storm water
pollution prevention procedures, and applicable State rules, regulations and guidelines.

a. Liquid storage areas where storm water comes into contact with any
equipment, tank, container, or other vessel used for Section 313 water priority chemicals. No
tank or container shall be used for the storage of a Section 313 water priority chemical unless its
material and construction are compatible with the material stored and conditions of storage, such as
pressure and temperature, etc. Liquid storage areas for Section 313 water priority chemicals shall
be operated to minimize discharges of Section 313 chemicals by means such as secondary
containment for at least the entire contents of the largest single tank plus sufficient freeboard to
allow for precipitation, a strong spill contingency and integrity testing plan, and/or other equivalent
measures.

b. Truck and rail car loading and unloading areas for liquid Section 313 water
priority chemicals. These areas shall be operated to minimize discharges of Section 313 water
priority chemicals by means such as the placement and maintenance of drip pans (including the
proper disposal of materials collected in the drip pans) where spillage may occur (such as hose
connections, hose reels and filler nozzles) for use when making and breaking hose connections; a
strong spill contingency and integrity testing plan; and/or other equivalent measures.

c. In plant areas where Section 313 water priority chemicals are transferred,
processed or otherwise handled. Piping, processing equipment and materials handling equipment
shall be designed and operated so as to prevent discharges of Section 313 chemicals, and be
composed of materials that are compatible with the substances handled. Additional protection,

D.6.20
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

such as covers or guards to prevent wind blowing, spraying or releases from pressure relief vents
from causing a discharge of Section 313 water priority chemicals to the drainage system shall be
provided, as appropriate, to control the releases.

d. Discharges from secondary containment areas.

(1) Drainage from secondary containment shall be restrained by valves or other positive
means to prevent a spill or other excessive leakage of Section 313 water priority chemicals into the
drainage system. After a visual inspection of the storm water and determination that no product is
present, containment areas may be emptied by pumps or ejectors; however, these shall be manually
activated.

(2) Flapper-type drain valves shall not be used to drain containment areas. Valves
used for the drainage of containment areas shall be of manual, open-and-close design.

(3) Records of the frequency and estimated volume (in gallons) of discharges from
containment areas shall be kept at the facility for a minimum of three years.

(4) In lieu of facility drainage engineered as described above, the final discharge of
all in-facility storm sewers shall be equipped with a diversion system that could, in the event of an
uncontrolled spill of Section 313 water priority chemicals, return the spilled material to the facility.

(5) Facility site runoff other than from areas covered by (a), (b), (c) or (d).
Other areas of the facility [those not addressed in paragraphs (a), (b), (c) or (d)], from which runoff
which may contain Section 313 water priority chemicals or spills of Section 313 water priority
chemicals and which could cause a discharge shall incorporate the necessary drainage or other
control features to prevent discharge of spilled or improperly disposed material and ensure the
mitigation of pollutants in runoff or leachate.

3. Facility Security

Facilities shall have the necessary security systems to prevent accidental or intentional entry
which could cause a discharge. Security systems shall be described in the plan and address
fencing, lighting, vehicular traffic control, and securing of equipment and buildings.

4. Risk Identification and Assessment/Material Inventory

The storm water pollution prevention plan shall assess the potential of various sources at the
plant to contribute pollutants to storm water discharges associated with industrial activity. The
plan shall include an inventory of the types of materials handled. Facilities shall include in the plan
a description of releases to land or water of SARA Title III water priority chemicals that have
occurred at any time after July 1, 1989. Each of the following shall be evaluated for the reasonable
potential for contributing pollutants to runoff: loading and unloading operations; outdoor storage
activities; outdoor manufacturing or processing activities; significant dust or particulate generating

D.6.21
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

processes; and on-site waste disposal practices. Factors to consider include the toxicity of
chemicals; quantity of chemicals used, produced, or discharged: the likelihood of contact with
storm water; and history of significant leaks or spills of toxic or hazardous pollutants.

E. STORM WATER POLLUTION PREVENTION PLAN - ADDITIONAL REQUIREMENTS

FOR CONSTRUCTION ACTIVITY

1. Plans and Approvals

Prior to commencing construction, the permittee shall obtain approved erosion and
sediment control plans in accordance with the requirements established in Title 4, Subtitle 1 of the
Environment Article, Annotated Code of Maryland (Sediment Control); and in Code of Maryland
Regulations (COMAR) 26.09.01 (Erosion and Sediment Control); and shall obtain approved storm
water management plans in accordance with the requirements established in Title 4, Subtitle 2 of
the Environment Article, Annotated Code of Maryland (Storm Water Management); and in
COMAR 26.09.02 (Storm Water Management).

2. Monitoring and Records

For the purposes of monitoring, permittees must do all of the following:

a. During construction, maintain at the site the approved erosion and sediment control plan.

b. Conduct the following inspections:

(1) weekly inspections of implemented erosion and sediment controls; and

(2) inspections of erosion and sediment controls the next business day after a
rainfall event resulting in runoff.

c. During construction, maintain at the site written reports of all inspections conducted by
the permittee that include:

(1) the date and time of the inspection;

(2) the name(s) of the individual(s) who performed the inspection;
(3) an assessment of the condition of erosion and sediment controls;
(4) a description of any erosion and sediment control implementation and maintenance
performed; and
(5) a description of the site's present phase of construction.
d. Maintain all inspection reports and enforcement actions issued to the permittee by the
appropriate enforcement authority.

e. Permittees must retain the records described in Part IV. E. 2. a., c., and d. and records of
all data used to complete the NOI to be covered by this permit for a period of three (3) years from
the date that the site is finally stabilized.

D.6.22
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

3. Duty to Comply With Plans

It is a condition of this permit that the permittee comply with erosion and sediment control
and storm water management plans approved in accordance with the laws and regulations cited in
Part IV. E. 1 above, and with all conditions of this general permit

4. Continuation of Coverage Under This Permit

Once construction has commenced, it is a condition of this permit that erosion and sediment
control and storm water management plan approvals be kept in effect. Construction activity may
not continue if these plans have expired, but may resume once plans are renewed without payment
of an additional fee.

V. Violation of Permit Conditions.

A. Compliance With This General Permit and Water Pollution Abatement Statutes. The
permittee shall comply at all times with the terms and conditions of this permit, the provisions of
the Title 7, Subtitle 2, Title 9, Subtitles 2 and 3 of the Environment Article, Annotated Code of
Maryland, and the Federal Act.

B. Civil and Criminal Liability. In issuing or reissuing this permit, the Department does not
waive or surrender any right to proceed in an administrative, civil, or criminal action for any
violations of State law or regulations occurring before the issuance or reissuance of this permit.
Nothing in this permit shall be construed to preclude the institution of any legal action or relieve
the permittee from any civil or criminal responsibilities, liabilities, or penalties for noncompliance
with Title 9 of the Environment Article, Annotated Code of Maryland or any federal, local or other
state law or regulation.

C. Civil Penalties for Violations of Permit Conditions. In addition to civil penalties for
violations of State water pollution control laws set forth in Section 9-342 of the Environment
Article, Annotated Code of Maryland, the Federal Act provides that any person who violates
Section 301, 302, 306, 307, 308, 318, or 405 of the Act, or any permit condition or limitation
implementing any of such sections in a permit issued under Section 402 of the Act or in a permit
issued under Section 404 of the Act, is subject to a civil penalty not to exceed $25,000 per day for
each violation.

D. Criminal Penalties for Violations of Permit Conditions. In addition to criminal penalties for
violations of State water pollution control laws set forth in Section 9-343 of the Environment
Article, Annotated Code of Maryland, the Federal Act provides that:

1. Any person who negligently violates Section 301, 302, 306, 307, 308, 318, or 405 of the
Act, or any permit condition or limitation implementing any of such sections in a permit issued
under Section 402 of the Act, or in a permit issued under Section 404 of the Act, is subject to a fine

D.6.23
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

of not less than $2,500 nor more than $25,000 per day of violation, or by imprisonment for not
more than one (1) year, or by both.

2. Any person who knowingly violates Section 301, 302, 306, 307, 308, 318, or 405 of the
Act, or any permit condition or limitation implementing any of such sections in a permit issued
under Section 402 of the Act, or in a permit issued under Section 404 of the Act, is subject to a fine
of not less than $5,000 nor more than $50,000 per day of violation, or by imprisonment for not
more than three (3) years, or by both.

3. Any person who knowingly violates Section 301, 302, 306, 307, 308, 318, or 405 of the
Act, or any permit condition or limitation implementing any of such sections in a permit issued
under Section 402 of the Act, or in a permit issued under Section 404 of the Act, and who knows at
that time that he thereby places another person in imminent danger of death or serious bodily
injury, is subject to a fine of not more than $250,000 or imprisonment of not more than fifteen (15)
years, or both. A person which is a corporation, shall, upon conviction, be subject to a penalty of
not more than $1,000,000.

E. Penalties for Falsification and Tampering. The Environment Article, §9-343, Annotated
Code of Maryland provides that any person who knowingly makes any false material statement,
representation, or certification in any application, record, report, plan, or other document filed or
required to be maintained under this permit, including monitoring reports or reports of compliance
or noncompliance, or who knowingly falsifies, tampers with or renders inaccurate any monitoring
device or method required to be maintained under this permit shall, upon conviction, be punished
by a fine of not more than $10,000 per violation, or by imprisonment for not more than 6 months
per violation, or by both. The federal Clean Water Act provides that any person who knowingly
falsifies, tampers with, or renders inaccurate any monitoring device or method required to be
maintained under the Act, or who knowingly makes any false statement, representation, or
certification in any records or other documents submitted or required to be maintained under this
permit, including monitoring reports or reports of compliance or noncompliance shall, upon
conviction, be punished by a fine of not more than $10,000, or by imprisonment for not more than
two years, or by both.

D.6.24
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

Part VI. General Conditions.

A. Right of Entry. The permittee shall permit the Secretary of the Department, the Regional
Administrator for the EPA, or their authorized representatives, upon the presentation of credentials:

1. To enter upon the permittee's premises where an effluent source is located or where any
records are required to be kept under the terms and conditions of this permit;

2. To access and copy, at reasonable times, any records required to be kept under the terms
and conditions of this permit;

3. To inspect, at reasonable times, any monitoring equipment or monitoring method

required in this permit;

4. To inspect, at reasonable times, any collection, treatment, pollution management, or

discharge facilities required under this permit;

5. To sample, at reasonable times, any discharge of pollutants;

6. To install ground water monitoring wells; and

7. To take photographs.

B. Property Rights/Compliance with Other Requirements. The issuance of this permit does not
convey any property rights in either real or personal property, or any exclusive privileges, nor does
it authorize any injury to private property or any invasion of personal rights, nor does it authorize
any infringement of federal, State or local laws or regulations.

C. Duty to Provide Information. The permittee shall furnish to the Department, within the time
frame stipulated by the Department, any information which the Department may request to
determine compliance with this permit. The permittee shall also furnish to the Department, upon
request, copies of records required to be kept by this permit.

D. Other Information. If the permittee becomes aware that incorrect information has been
included in the NOI or any other report submitted to the Department, or relevant facts have been
omitted from the NOI or any other report to the Department, the permittee shall submit the correct
information or facts to the Department with 30 calendar days of becoming aware.

E. Availability of Reports. Except for data determined to be confidential under the Maryland
Public Information Act, and Section 308 of the federal Clean Water Act, all submitted data shall be
available for public inspection at the Department.

F. Toxic Pollutants. The permittee shall comply with effluent standards or prohibitions for toxic
pollutants established under the federal Clean Water Act, or under Section 9-314 and Sections 9-

D.6.25
 Appendix D.6. Industrial Stormwater NPDES Permit Requirements

322 through 9-328 of the Environment Article, Annotated Code of Maryland. Compliance shall be
achieved within the time provided in the regulations that establish these standards or prohibitions,
even if this permit has not yet been modified to incorporate the requirement.

G. Oil and Hazardous Substances Prohibited. Nothing in this permit shall be construed to
preclude the institution of any legal action or relieve the permittee from any responsibility, liability,
or penalties to which the permittee may be subject under the federal Clean Water Act or under the
Annotated Code of Maryland.

H. Water Construction and Obstruction. This permit does not authorize the construction or
placing of physical structures, facilities, or debris or the undertaking of related activities in any
waters of the State.

I. Severability. The provisions of this permit are severable. If any provisions of this permit shall
be held invalid for any reason, the remaining provisions shall remain in full force and effect. If the
application of any provision of this permit to any circumstances is held invalid, its application to
other circumstances shall not be affected.

Part VII. Authority to Issue General NPDES Permits.

On September 5, 1974, the Administrator of the EPA approved the proposal submitted by
the State of Maryland for the operation of a permit program for discharges into navigable waters
under Section 402 of the federal Clean Water Act, 33 U.S.C. Section 1342.

On September 30, 1990, the Administrator of the EPA approved the proposal submitted by
the State of Maryland for the operation of a general permit program.

Under the approvals described above, this general discharge permit is both a State of
Maryland general discharge permit and an NPDES general discharge permit.

J. L. Hearn, Director
Water Management Administration

D.6.26
MDE/WMA Overview of the NPDES
D.7

Stormwater Program
Appendix
Appendix D.7. MDE/WMA Overview of the NPDES Stormwater Program
Background

The United States Environmental Protection Agency (EPA) issued final regulations in November
1990 that require National Pollutant Discharge Elimination System (NPDES) Permits for stormwater
discharges associated with industrial activity. These regulations require permits for stormwater
discharges associated with eleven categories of industrial activities and municipal separate storm
sewer systems. Within the Maryland Department of the Environment (MDE), these permits are
being administered by the Water Management Administration (WMA). Ten of these industrial
activities are being permitted by one general permit, the General Industrial Discharge Permit,
implemented by WMA’s Wastewater Discharge Permit Program. However, industry-specific
general permits are currently being drafted.

Examples of these activities are hazardous waste treatment facilities; landfills; open dumps
receiving industrial waste; steam electric power generating facilities; mass transit, school bus, and
trucking facilities; hazardous waste storage facilities; land application sites; recycling facilities (junk
yards, etc.); vehicle maintenance facilities; and treatment works for domestic sewage. The eleventh
industrial activity subject to the stormwater discharge permit requirements is construction activity
with a planned total disturbance of five acres* or more. Construction activity, along with municipal
separate storm sewer systems, are permitted by MDE/WMA’s Compliance Program. Construction
activity is being permitted by a general permit that covers only construction, the General Permit for
Construction Activity. * Area of disturbance subject to NPDES regulatory changes.

Regulatory Requirements for Construction Activity in Maryland

EPA’s regulations [40 CFR (Code of Federal Regulations) 122.26] provide for three types of
applications for industrial stormwater discharge permits: an individual application, a group
application, and a Notice of Intent (NOI) to comply with a general permit. 40 CFR 122.26(b)(14)
identifies construction activity, including clearing, grading, and excavating, as one of the categories
of “industrial activity.” 40 CFR 122.26(c)(1)(ii) requires that the following information be provided
on the NPDES permit application for construction activity:

(A) The location and the nature of the construction;

(B) The total area of the site;
(C) Proposed measures, including best management practices, to control pollutants in
stormwater discharges during construction;
(D) Proposed measures to control pollutants in stormwater discharges that will occur after
construction has been completed;
(E) An estimate of the runoff coefficient of the site and the increase in impervious area after
construction; and
(F) The name of the receiving water.

Because Maryland presently has programs in place to control erosion, sediment and stormwater
for new development activities, MDE/WMA has composed its NPDES General Permit in such a way

D.7.1
Appendix D.7. MDE/WMA Overview of the NPDES Stormwater Program
so as not to change current erosion and sediment control and stormwater management requirements.
Through the review and approval and subsequent inspection and enforcement processes for erosion
and sediment control and stormwater management, the majority of information required to be
submitted under 40 CFR 122.26(c)(1)(ii) will have already been supplied to agencies responsible for
construction site evaluation according to Maryland’s current laws and regulations (Environment
Article Title 4. Subtitle 1; Subtitle 2; COMAR 26.17.01; and COMAR 26.17.02). For this reason,
MDE/WMA Simply, operators of construction activity will be complying with 40 CFR 122.26 if
they comply with current Maryland law.

The General Permit

Construction activity in Maryland with a planned total disturbance of five acres* or more will be
required to be covered by the General Permit for Construction Activity. Coverage under this Permit
mandates that the permittee be held accountable for complying with the terms of the General Permit.
Compliance with the terms of the General Permit shall be in compliance with EPA’s stormwater
regulations.

While Maryland law requires erosion and sediment control and stormwater management plan
approval prior to the commencement of construction for any earth disturbance of 5,000 square feet
or more, General Permit coverage will be required only for construction activity with a planned total
disturbance of five acres* or more. Plans must still be approved and remain active during the
construction phase, as per existing Maryland law.

Permittees are encouraged to submit only one NOI for the entire project, even if plans are not
approved for subsequent phases/stages of development. The completed NOI form is considered an
application for coverage under the General Permit. The NOI is to be completed by the permittee and
will require that general information describing the construction activity be provided. The
completed NOI form must be submitted at least 48 hours prior to any earth disturbing activity and
the appropriate application fee must accompany the submitted NOI.

Who Is Covered by the General Permit?

It is intended that the General Permit cover construction activity in Maryland with a planned
total disturbance of five acres* or more. This includes phased/staged construction projects, even if
individual phases will disturb less than five acres. Current Maryland law requiring approved erosion
and sediment control and stormwater management plans for earth disturbances exceeding 5,000
square feet remains unchanged.

The permittee who applies for coverage under the terms of the General Permit shall be held
accountable for complying with all of the terms of the General Permit. A person who has submitted

a Notice of Intent (NOI) and does not intend to be responsible for controlling the permitted
activities on site must transfer authorization under the General Permit to a duly authorized person.

D.7.2
Appendix D.7. MDE/WMA Overview of the NPDES Stormwater Program
Upon transfer, this duly authorized person shall be held accountable for compliance under the terms
stated in the General Permit.

How is Coverage Obtained?

Coverage under the General Permit is obtained by filing a completed Notice of Intent (NOI)
form with the Maryland Department of the Environment, Water Management Administration
(MDE/WMA). The completed NOI form is considered a formal application for coverage and intent
to comply with the terms of the General Permit.

What is the Procedure for Application?

For construction activity with a planned total disturbance of five acres* or more, General Permit
coverage is required. NOI forms are available at local plan review offices and at MDE. NOI forms
must be complete and include the signature of the permittee in order to be processed. Completed
NOI forms must be submitted with the appropriate application fee (see below) to the Maryland
Department of the Environment, Water Management Administration, P.O. Box 1417, Baltimore,
Maryland 21203-1417. Receipt by MDE/WMA of the completed NOI form will authorize coverage
under the terms of the General Permit. Upon receipt of the completed NOI form. MDE will mail a
verification letter and a copy of the General Permit to the permittee. Once the construction activity
is completed, including final stabilization and the elimination of all stormwater discharges
authorized by the General Permit, the permittee must submit a Notice of Termination form to
MDE/WMA. Forms are available at local plan review offices and at MDE.

The application fee schedule for stormwater discharges associated with construction activity is as
follows:

Total Disturbed Area (acres) NOI Fee (dollars)

less than 5 Exempt
5 to less than 10 $100
10 to less than 15 $500
15 to less than 20 $1,500
20 and up $2,500

D.7.3
Appendix D.7. MDE/WMA Overview of the NPDES Stormwater Program

What Information is Required on the NOI Form?

Information required on the NOI Form is general information describing the construction
activity. Much of this information can be provided directly by the permittee from prepared site plans
and any other necessary information should be available at the local plan review offices. The
omponent parts of the NOI form are outlined below:

I. Site Name and Location including name and general location of the site; MD Grid
Coordinates; latitude and longitude; watershed basin code;

II. Project Description including stormwater management BMPs to be implemented and

drainage area for each type of BMP; brief project description; total site area/disturbed area;
runoff curve numbers; estimate of total impervious surface area; the project types, as a
county/municipal or private entity and its eventual use as residential, commercial or
industrial; Standard Industrial Classification (SIC) code; any other NPDES permit number;
name of eventual receiving waters/ storm sewer system receiving the site’s runoff;

III. Permittee Identification including name/company and address of permittee and name and phone
number of the principal contact person for the site;

IV. Certification including a certification statement to be signed by the permittee;

V. Fees including the fee amount to be paid with the NOI submission.

MDE issued a new Notices of Intent form for use beginning in 1994. This form is a scanner
compatible “bubble” form, replacing the original single page handwritten form. This form is the one
currently being accepted by MDE and it is available at local plan review offices and at MDE.

Additionally, MDE has developed a new State and Federal NOI form, to be used for all state and
federal construction projects. This is a separate NOI form, labeled “For State and Federal
Government Project Only,” but it is not significantly different from the standard NOI form.

When Must the NOI Form be Submitted?

The completed NOI must be submitted to the Water Management Administration at least 48
hours prior to the commencement of construction activities. This is applicable to all construction
activity with a planned total disturbance of five acres* or more that is active as of October 1, 1992
and any such construction activity beginning on or after October 1, 1992. Such construction will
need to be permitted under the General Permit. The application fee is due at the time of NOI
submission. Checks and money orders only will be accepted and should be made payable to MDE.

D.7.4
Appendix D.7. MDE/WMA Overview of the NPDES Stormwater Program
MDE has supplied local plan review offices with NOI forms. Forms and information may also
be obtained at MDE. It is the responsibility of the permittee to accurately complete the form and
submit it to MDE/WMA.

Miscellaneous

Coverage under the General Permit is effective until MDE is notified by the permittee that
construction is complete. Submission of a Notice of Termination form to MDE will indicate that
construction activity is complete, areas are stabilized, and authorized stormwater discharges have
been eliminated (the address is given at the end of the Appendix).

No effluent limitations have been established for stormwater discharges from construction sites.
However, the General Permit requires Permittees to visually inspect erosion and sediment controls
on a weekly basis and the next work day after a storm event. Permittees are required to maintain, on
site during construction, written documentation of the findings and any subsequent maintenance that
is performed. These records must be kept for a period of three years following final stabilization of
the site and must be made available upon request.

The permittee shall be held accountable for compliance under the term of the General Permit. A
person who has submitted an NOI and does not intend to control the permitted activities on the site
must transfer authorization under the General Permit to a duly authorized person. Upon transfer, the
duly authorized person shall be held accountable for compliance under the terms stated in the
General Permit.

Although coverage under the General Permit does not involve additional regulations, it should be
noted that because construction activity now falls under the Clean Water Act (CWA), federal
penalties will apply to violations. Both state and federal civil and criminal penalties will apply to
violations occurring under General Permit coverage.

Further information regarding the General Permit and the NOI form can be obtained by
contacting:

The Maryland Department of the Environment

Water Management Administration
Compliance Program
2500 Broening Highway
Baltimore, Maryland 21224
(410) 631-3510

D.7.5
Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with
D.8

Performance Criteria
Appendix
Appendix D.8 ............Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria
Detail 1: Trash Rack for Low Flow Orifice
Detail 2: Expanded Trash Rack Protection for Low Flow Orifice
Detail 3: Internal Control for Orifice Protection
Detail 4: Observation Well for Infiltration Practices
Detail 5: Off-line Versus On-line Schematic
Detail 6: Isolation/Diversion Structure
Detail 7: Half Round CMP Hood
Detail 8: Half Round CMP Weir
Detail 9: Concrete Level Spreader

D.8.2
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 1 Trash Rack Protection for Low Flow Orifice

D.8.3
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 2 Expanded Trash Rack Protection for Low Flow Orifice

D.8.4
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 3 Internal Control for Orifice Protection

D.8.5
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 4 Observation Well for Infiltration Practices

D.8.6
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 5 Off-Line Versus On-Line Schematic

D.8.7
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 6 Isolation Diversion Structure

D.8.8
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 7 Half Round CMP Hood

D.8.9
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 8 Half Round CMP Weir

D.8.10
Appendix D.8. Miscellaneous Details for Compliance with Performance Criteria

Detail 9 Concrete Level Spreader

D.8.11
MD Stream Use Designations
D.9
Appendix
Introduction

This Appendix, adapted from the Code of Maryland Regulations (COMAR) 26.08.02.08 “Stream
Segment Designations”, is reprinted here for informational purposes only. Please use the Code of
Maryland Regulations for the Official Version and for any updates to these designations.

The stream segments are listed in tabular form according to Use designations as follows:
• Water Contact Recreation, and Protection of Aquatic Life (Use I and Use I-P waters)
• Shell Fish Harvesting Waters (Use II waters);
• Natural Trout Waters (Use III and Use III-P waters);
• Recreational Trout Waters (Use IV and Use IV-P waters); and
• Public Water Supply (Use I-P, III-P, and IV-P waters).

For each sub-basin, information is arranged under the following headings:

1) Use – Refers to water classification;
2) Waters – Exact name of stream segment or segments;
3) MCGS – Most downstream point or line for each stream segment using the Maryland
Coordinate Grid System (East/North);
4) Limits – Written description of boundary of stream segment established by MCGS; and
5) Any stream segment not listed may be considered Use I waters.

D.9.1
 Figure D.9.1 Maryland 6 Digit Sub-Basins

02-05-03 CONEWAGO CREEK AREA

02-12-02 LOWER SUSQUEHANNA RIVER AREA
02-13-01 COASTAL AREA
02-13-02 POCOMOKE RIVER AREA
02-13-03 NANTICOKE RIVER AREA
02-13-04 CHOPTANK RIVER AREA
02-13-05 CHESTER RIVER AREA
02-13-06 ELK RIVER AREA
02-13-07 BUSH RIVER AREA
02-13-08 GUNPOWDER RIVER AREA
02-13-09 PATAPSCO RIVER AREA
02-13-10 WEST CHESAPEAKE BAY AREA
02-13-11 PATUXENT RIVER AREA
02-13-99 CHESAPEAKE BAY
02-14-01 LOWER POTOMAC RIVER AREA
02-14-02 WASHINGTON METROPOLITAN AREA
02-14-03 MIDDLE POTOMAC RIVER AREA
02-14-05 UPPER POTOMAC RIVER AREA
02-14-10 NORTH BRANCH POTOMAC RIVER AREA
05-02-02 YOUGHIOGHENY RIVER AREA

D.9.2
 Stream Segment Designations

Use Waters MCGS ∗ Limits

A. SUB-BASIN 02-12-02: LOWER SUSQUEHANNA RIVER AREA

(1) Use I-P: Susquehanna River and all tributaries except those From 1068.8/625.5 Mainstem from mouth to MD/PA line
designated below as Use III-P or Use-IV-P to1056.8/621.3
(2) Use II: None
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use-III-P:
(a) Deer Creek and all tributaries 956/671 Above Eden Mill Dam
(b) Basin Run and all tributaries 1040/667
(c) Kellogg Branch and all tributaries 966/655.5
(d) North Stirrup Run and all tributaries 969/650.2
(e) South Stirrup Run and all tributaries 968.3/649
(f) Deep Run and all tributaries 1008.2/677.8
(g) Gladden Branch and all tributaries 967/658
(h) Rock Hollow branch and all tributaries 958/663
D.9.3

(i) Love Run and all tributaries 1046/678

(j) Stone Run and all tributaries 1050.5/682.5
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P:
(a) Deer Creek and all tributaries 1040/649.3 From mouth to Eden Mill Dam
(b) Octoraro Creek 1036.7/665 Mainstem only
B. SUB-BASIN 02-13-01: COASTAL AREA
(1) Use I-P: None
(2) Use II: All portions of the territorial seas and estuarine
portions of bays and tributaries except:
(a) Bishopville Prong and tributaries 1321.7/216.4 Above confluence with St. Martins River
(b) Shingle Landing Prong and its tributaries 1323/214 Above confluence with St. Martins River at Piney Island
(c) Herring Creek and its tributaries 1336.4/189.9 Above Rt. 50
(d) Ocean City Harbor 1345/185.5 Above entrance to West Ocean City Harbor
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use IIII-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: None
C. SUB-BASIN 02-13-02: POCOMOKE RIVER AREA

∗ Most downstream point or line for the segment using the Maryland Coordinate Grid System (MCGS) (East/North)
 (1) Use I-P: None
(2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except:
(a) Manokin River and tributaries 1165/125.3 Above confluence of Manokin River & Kings Creek
(b) Big Annemessex River and tributaries 1160.8/95.2 Above River Road
(c) Jenkins Creek From 1127/48 to 1127.3/45.7 Above mouth
(d) Fair Island Canal From1177.6/51 to 1187.7/50.1
(e) Pocomoke River 1196/62 Above MD/VA line
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: None
D. SUB-BASIN 02-13-03: NANTICOKE RIVER AREA
(1) Use I-P: None
(2) Use II; All estuarine portions of tributaries except:
(a) Blackwater River and tributaries From 1083.1/92 to 1084.2/191.6 Above mouth
From 1085.2/196.3 to 1088/197
(b) Transquaking River and tributaries From 1126/194 to 1128.2/191.2 Above mouth
1147.9/160.5
D.9.4

(c) Nanticoke River and tributaries 1138.7/146.7 Above line from Runaway Pt. to Long Pt.

(d) Wicomico River and tributaries Above ferry crossing at White Haven
(e) Monie Creek Above mouth
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: None
E. SUB-BASIN 02-13-04: CHOPTANK RIVER AREA
(1) Use I-P: None
(2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except:
(a) Choptank River and tributaries From 1099.3/308 to 1101/306.5 Above line from Bow Knee Pt. to Wright Wharf
1057.6/341.6
(b) Tred Avon River and tributaries Above Easton Pt.
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: None

F. SUB-BASIN 02-13-05: CHESTER RIVER AREA

(1) Use I-P: None
 (2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except:
(a) Chester River and tributaries 1066.5/502 Above Rt. 213
(b) Corsica River 1060.4/448.4 Above Earl Cove
(c) Piney Creek From 1010.7/419.9 to Above Rt. 50
1012/418.8
(d) Winchester Creek 1026.5/416.1 Above mouth
(e) St. Michaels Harbor 1023/348.7
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: None
G. SUB-BASIN 02-13-06: ELK RIVER
(1) Use I-P:
(a) Big Elk Creek and all tributaries 1129.3/647.5 Above Md Rt. 213
(b) Northeast Creek and all tributaries 1096.6/643.1 Above confluence with Stoney Run
(c) Mill Creek and all tributaries 1065.9/636 Above US Rt. 40
(2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except
(a) Elk River and tributaries From 1112.8/617 to Above line from Bull Minnow Pt. to Courthouse Pt.
D.9.5

1114.8/613.9
(b) Bohemia River and tributaries From 1108/603.7 to 1109/600 Above line from Rich Pt. to Baltery Pt.
(c) Sassafras River and tributaries 1088.6/561.5 Above Ordinary Pt.
(d) Stillpond Creek and tributaries (Still Pond) 1044/547 Above Kinnaird Pt.
(e) Worton Creek From 1031.4/532 to Above mouth
1032.5/534.7
(f) Fairlee Creek From 1023.6/524 to 1026/527.5 Above mouth
From 1081.3/623.3 to
(g) Northeast River 1087.6/619.1
(3) Use III: Principio Creek and all tributaries 1073/634.5
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: None

H. SUB-BASIN 02-13-07: BUSH RIVER AREA

(1) Use I-P: Winters Run and all tributaries, including Atkisson 995.5/585.5 From Otter Point Creek to upstream boundary of Atkisson
Reservoir Reservoir
(2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except:
 (a) Bush River and tributaries From 1010.5/576 to Above line from Fairview Pt. to Chillbury Pt.
1014.1/574.1
(b) Romney Creek 1022.3/567.5 Above Briar Pt.
(c) Swan Creek and tributaries From 1050/603.5 to Above mouth
1047.5/604.2
(3) Use III: Bynum Run and all tributaries 1008.9/597.4
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: Winters Run and all tributaries 982.2/604.8 Above Atkisson Reservoir
I. SUB-BASIN 02-13-08: GUNPOWDER RIVER AREA
(1) Use I-P: None
(2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except:
(a) Gunpowder River and all tributaries From 987/561.5 to 991.2/555.5 Above line from Oliver Pt. to Maxwell Pt.
From 972/536.1 to 970/532.5
(b) Middle River Above line from Log Pt. to Turkey Pt.
(3) Use III:
(a) Little Gunpowder Falls and all tributaries 976.8/5788.8 Above B&O railroad bridge ¾ mile south of Rt. 7
(Old Philadelphia Road)
D.9.6

(b) Long Green Run and all tributaries 950/584

(c) Sweathouse Branch and all tributaries 950/584
(4) Use III-P: Gunpowder Falls and all tributaries 930.8/578.9 Above Loch Raven
(5) Use IV: Whitemarsh Run and all tributaries 964/564
(6) Use IV-P: None
J. SUB-BASIN 02-13-09: PATAPSCO RIVER AREA
(1) Use I-P:
(a) Liberty Reservoir 830.9/562.1 Above Liberty Dam
(b) All tributaries to West Branch Patapsco River 828.8/621.4
(c) All tributaries to North Branch Patapsco River except 835.8/604.8 Above Liberty Reservoir
those designated below as Use III-P or Use IV-P
(2) Use II: None
(3) Use III:
(a) Brice Run and all tributaries 850/540
(b) Piney Run and all tributaries From 828/554 to 815.8/563.6 From mouth to Slacks Road
(on Springfield State Hospital Grounds)
(c) Jones Falls and all tributaries 897.7/567.6 Above Lake Roland
(d) Red Run and all tributaries 863/572.4
(e) Gwynns Falls and all tributaries 861.5/578.5 Above Reistertown Road
(f) Gillis Falls and all tributaries 782/557
(g) South Branch Patapsco River and all tributaries 782/557 Above confluence with Gillis Falls tributaries
 (h) Unnamed tributary to the South Branch Patapsco River 823.9/552.9
at Henryton and all tributaries to this unnamed tributary
(4) Use III-P: Above Slacks Road (on Springfield State Hospital Grounds)
(a) Piney Run and all tributaries 815.8/563.6
(b) Morgan Run and all tributaries 813.8/589.6
(c) Norris Run and all tributaries 835.1/592.6
(d) Cooks Branch and all tributaries 836.2/584.4
(e) Keysers Run and all tributaries 833.8/596.8
(f) Beaver Run and all tributaries 828.3/602.1
(g) Snowdens Run and all tributaries 825/572
(h) Stillwater Creek and all tributaries 824.8/570.9
(i) Carroll Highlands Run and all tributaries 825.5/567.4
(j) Autumn Run and all tributaries 825.7/567
(k) Locst Run and all tributaries 839.1/572.9
(l) Glen Falls Run and all tributaries 837.4/605.1
(m) East Branch Patapsco River and all tributaries 830.1/620.4
(5) Use IV:
(a) South Branch Patapsco River 833.4/552.5 Mainstem only
(b) Jones Falls From 908/538.5 to 901/563 From North Ave. to Lake Roland Dam
D.9.7

(c) Herring Run and all tributaries 929.5/537 Above I-95

(d) Stony Run and all tributaries 905/541
(e) Dead Run and all tributaries 888/536.5
(f) Stemmers Run and all tributaries 941.4/553.8 Above I-95
(6) Use IV-P:
(a) North Branch Patapsco River 833.4/552.2 Mainstem only above Liberty Reservoir
(b) West Branch Patapsco River 830.1/620.3 Mainstem only
(c) Cranberry Branch and all tributaries 888.1/637.3 Above Md Rt. 852 (Old Manchester Rd)
K. SUB-BASIN 02-13-10: WEST CHESAPEAKE BAY AREA
(1) Use I-P: None
(2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except:
(a) Magothy River and tributaries 936.9/455 Above Henderson Pt
(b) Severn River and tributaries 920.6/451 Above mouth of Forked Creek
(c) South River and tributaries 918.8/410.1 Above Porter Pt.
(d) Rockhold Creek and tributaries 925.7/315.8 Above Mason Beach Road
(e) Tracys Creek 924.5/344.2
(3) Use III: Jabez Branch and all tributaries 905/455
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: Severn Run and all tributaries 907.3/454.1 Above Rt.3
(6) Use IV-P: None
L. SUB-BASIN 02-13-11: PATUXENT RIVER AREA
 (1) Use I-P:
(a) Little Patuxent River and all tributaries 866.5/453.8 Above Old Forge Bridge (1 mile south of MD Route 198)
(b) Patuxent River and all tributaries except those 845.8/467.4 Above Rocky Gorge Dam
designated below aas Use III-P or IV-P
(2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except Patuxent 886.8/316.3 Above Ferry Landing
River and tributaries
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: Patuxent River and tributaries 787.2/510.7 Above Triadelphia Reservoir
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: Patuxent River and tributaries 813.2/476.8 Between Rocky Gorge Reservoir and Triadelphia Reservoir,
and including Triadelphia Reservoir
M. SUB-BASIN 02-14-01: LOWER POTOMAC RIVER AREA
(1) Use I-P: Tilghman Lake Reservoir 817/260
(2) Use II: All estuarine portions of tributaries except Potomac From 723.8/211.8 to Above line from Smith Pt. to Simms Pt.
River and tributaries 710.9/205.3
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
D.9.8

(6) Use IV-P: None

N. SUB-BASIN 02-14-02: WASHINGTON METROPOLITAN AREA
(1) Use I-P: Potomac River and all tributaries except those 766/401 From MD/DC line to Frederick/Montgomery County line
designated below as Use III, Use III-P, Use IV or Use IV-P
(2) Use II: None
(3) Use III:
(a) Paint Branch and all tributaries 815.2/433.2 Above Capital Beltway (I-495)
(b) Rock Creek and all tributaries 764/475 Above Muncaster Mill Road
(c) North Branch Rock Creek and all tributaries 771.5/468 Above Muncaster Mill Road
(4) Use III-P:
(a) Little Seneca Creek and all tributaries From 704/477.4 to 716/491.3 From the stream’s confluence with Bucklodge Branch to the
Baltimore and Ohio railroad bridge (see Regulation
26.08.02.03-3E(1) of this chapter)
(b) Wildcat Branch and all tributaries 740.5/504
(5) Use IV:
(a) Rock Creek and all tributaries From 766.7/459.3 to 763.5/475 From Rt. 28 to Muncaster Mill Road
809/413
(b) Northwest Branch and all tributaries Above east-West Highway (Rt. 410)
(6) Use IV-P: Little Seneca Creek and all tributaries 719.2/497.4
O. SUB-BASIN 02-14-03: MIDDLE POTOMAC RIVER AREA
 (1) Use I-P: Potomac River and all tributaries except those 671/505.9 From Frederick/Montgomery County Line to confluence
designated below as Use III-P or Use IV-P with Shenandoah River
(2) Use II: None
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P:
(a) Tuscarora Creek and all tributaries 694/592
(b) Carroll Creek and all tributaries 678.5/579.5 Above U.S. Rt. 15
(c) Rocky Fountain Run and all tributaries 681/546
(d) Fishing Creek and all tributaries 689.2/609.2
(e) Hunting Creek and all tributaries 698.5/625.5
(f) Owens Creek and all tributaries 705.9/635.9
(g) Friends Creek and all tributaries 697.2/689.1
(h) Catoctin Creek and all tributaries 640.6/589.8 Above Alternate U.S. Rt. 40
(i) Little Bennett Creek and all tributaries 711/527 Above Md. Rt. 355
(j) Furnace Branch and all tributaries 675/514
(k) Ballenger Creek and all tributaries 557/683
(l) Bear Branch and all tributaries 685.2/531.9 From confluence with Bennett Creek
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P:
D.9.9

(a) Monacacy River and all tributaries except those 696/570 Above U.S. Rt. 40
designated above as Use III-P
(b) Catoctin Creek 640.6/538 Mainstem only, below Alternate U.S. Route 40
(c) Israel Creek and all tributaries 607/545
P. SUB-BASIN 02-14-05: UPPER POTOMAC RIVER AREA
(1) Use I-P: Potomac River and all Maryland tributaries except 543.3/594.4 From confluence of Shenandoah River to the confluence of
those designated below as Use III-P or Use IV-P the North and South Branches of the Potomac River
(2) Use II: None
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P:
(a) Town Creek tributaries 365/618.8
(b) Beaver Creek and all tributaries 599.9/620.3 In Antietam Creek Watershed
(c) Marsh Run and all tributaries 605.7/662.1 In Antietam Creek Watershed
(d) Little Antietam Creek and all tributaries 620/674
(e) Camp Spring Run and all tributaries 536/653
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P:
(a) Town Creek 365/618.8
(b) Fifteen Mile Creek and all tributaries 410.1/655
(c) Sideling Hill Creek and all tributaries 424.5/660
(d) Tonoloway Creek and all tributaries 474.8/679.8
 (e) Licking Creek and all tributaries 504/663.5
(f) Conococheague Creek and all tributaries 566.3/645.4
(g) Antietam Creek and all tributaries except those 58901/577.8
designated above as Use III-P
Q. SUB-BASIN 02-14-10: NORTH BRANCH POTOMAC RIVER AREA
(1) Use I-P:
(a) North Branch Potomac River mainstem 352.3/621.1 From the confluence of the North and South Branches of the
Potomac River to the MD/WVA State line
(b) Georges Creek mainstem 222.8/607.4 From the confluence with N. Branch
(c) Mill Run and its tributaries in Allegany County 272.2/625.8 From the confluence with N. Branch (near Rawlings and
Rawlings Heights)
(d) an unnamed tributary near Pinto 281.7/636.5 Confluence of the unnamed tributary with the North Branch
of the Potomac River
(2) Use II: None
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: All Maryland tributaries to the North Branch From 352.3/621.1 to MD/WVA From confluence of North and South Branches of the
Potomac River except for: State line Potomac River to MD/WVA State line
(a) Those designated below as Use IV-P waters
D.9.10

(b) Those designated above as Use I-P waters

(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P:
(a) Wills Creek 303.3/655.5 Mainstem only
(b) Evitts Creek 310.2/656.8 Mainstem only
R. SUB-BASIN 05-02-02: YOUGHIOGHENY RIVER AREA
(1) Use I-P:
(a) Broad Ford Run and all tributaries 130/579 Above Dam
(b) Piney Creek and all tributaries in Maryland 232/687 Upstream from confluence with Church Creek
(2) Use II: None
(3) Use III:
(a) South Branch, Casselman River 187.7/674.0 Confluence of North and South Branches
(b) Piney Creek and all tributaries in Maryland, including 223.9/693.9 From MD/PA State line to confluence of Church Creek
Church Creek
(4) Use III-P: Youghiogheny River and all tributaries 126.8/696.2 Upstream of MD/PA State line joining mainstem of the
Youghiogheny River in Maryland
(5) Use-IV: Casselman River 205.5/694.8 Mainstem only, confluence of South Branch & North Branch
to PA line
(6) Use IV-P: None
S. SUB-BASIN 02-05-03: CONEWAGO CREEK
(1) Use I-P: None
 (2) Use II: None
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: None
(5) Use IV: None
(6) Use IV-P: None

T. SUB-BASIN 02-13-99: CHESAPEAKE BAY (PROPER)

(1) Use I-P: None
(2) Use II: All waters of the Chesapeake Bay Proper From the Susquehanna River mouth to the Virginia State
line, including the tidal waters of the Chesapeake Bay
bounded generally by the shoreline of the Bay and by “zero
river mile” lines of estuaries and tributaries to the Bay, as
designated by the Department of the Environment, and any
peripheral waters designated as part of the Chesapeake Bay
Proper by the Department of the Environment after
consultation with the Tidewater Administration and the
Forest, Park and Wildlife Service
(3) Use III: None
(4) Use III-P: None
D.9.11

(5) Use IV: None

(6) Use IV-P: None
 Designator Sub-Basin

02-12-02 Lower Susquehanna River Area

02-13-01 Coastal Area
02-13-02 Pocomoke River Area
02-13-03 Nanticoke River Area
02-13-04 Choptank River Area
02-13-05 Chester River Area
02-13-06 Elk River Area
02-13-07 Bush River Area
02-13-08 Gunpowder River Area
02-13-09 Patapsco River Area
02-13-10 West Chesapeake Bay Area
02-13-11 Patuxent River Area
02-14-01 Lower Potomac River Area
02-14-02 Washington Metropolitan Area
02-14-03 Middle Potomac River Area
02-14-05 Upper Potomac River Area
D.9.12

02-14-10 North Branch Potomac River Area

05-02-02 Youghiogheny River Area
02-05-03 Conewago Creek Area
02-13-99 Chesapeake Bay
Method for Computing Peak Discharge
D.10
Appendix

for Water Quality Storm

Appendix D.10. Method for Computing Peak Discharge for Water Quality Storm
METHOD FOR COMPUTING PEAK DISCHARGE FOR WATER QUALITY STORM
(Adapted from Claytor and Schueler, 1996)

The peak rate of discharge is needed for the sizing of off-line diversion structures and to design grass
channels. Conventional SCS methods underestimate the volume and rate of runoff for rainfall
events less than 2". This discrepancy in estimating runoff and discharge rates can lead to situations
where a significant amount of runoff by-passes the filtering treatment practice due to an
inadequately sized diversion structure or leads to the design of undersized grass channels.

The following procedure can be used to estimate peak discharges for small storm events. It relies on
the volume of runoff computed using the Small Storm Hydrology Method (Pitt, 1994) and utilizes
the NRCS, TR-55 Graphical Peak Discharge Method (USDA, 1986).

¾ Using the WQV methodology, a corresponding Curve Number (CN) is computed utilizing the
following equation:
1000
CN =
[10 + 5P + 10Qa − 10 Qa2 + 1. 25Qa P ]

where: P = rainfall, in inches (use 1.0" or 0.9" for the Water Quality Storm)
Qa = runoff volume, in inches (equal to P3Rv)

Note: The above equation is derived from the SCS Runoff Curve Number method described in
detail in NEH-4, Hydrology (SCS 1985) and SCS TR-55 Chapter 2: Estimating Runoff. The
CN can also be obtained graphically using Figure D.10.1 or from TR-55.

¾ Once a CN is computed, the time of concentration (tc) is computed (based on the methods
identified in TR-55, Chapter 3: "Time Of Concentration And Travel Time").

¾ Using the computed CN, tc and drainage area (A), in acres; the peak discharge (Qp ) for the
Water Quality Storm is computed (based on the procedures identified in TR-55, Chapter 4:
"Graphical Peak Discharge Method"). Use Rainfall distribution type II.

- Read initial abstraction (Ia), compute Ia/P

- Read the unit peak discharge (qu) from Exhibit 4-II for appropriate tc
- Using the runoff volume (Qa), compute the peak discharge (Qp); Qp = qu3A3Qa
where: Qp = the peak discharge, in cfs
qu = the unit peak discharge, in cfs/mi²/inch
A = drainage area, in square miles
Qa = runoff volume, in watershed inches

Example Calculation of Peak Discharge for Water Quality Storm

D.10.1
Appendix D.10. Method for Computing Peak Discharge for Water Quality Storm
Using a 3.0 acre small shopping center having a 1.0 acre flat roof, 1.6 acres of parking, and 0.4 acres
of open space, and using P = 1.0"; the weighted volumetric runoff coefficient (Rv) is:

Rv = 0.05+0.009(I); I = 2.6 acres!3.0 acres = 0.867 (86.7%)

= 0.05+0.009(86.7%)
= 0.83

The runoff volume, Qa is:

Qa = P3Rv
= 1.0"30.83
= 0.83 watershed inches

and WQv is:

[(1. 0" )( 0. 83)(3. 0 acres )] 43, 560 ft 2

WQv = × = 9, 039 ft 3
12 acre

Using Qa = 0.83 watershed inches and P = 1.0"; CN for the water quality storm is:

1000
CN = = 98
[10 + (5)(1. 0" ) + (10)( 0. 83) − 10 ( 0. 83) 2 + 1. 25( 0. 83)(1. 0" ) ]

Using: tc = 10 minutes (0.17 hour);

Ia=(200!CN)-2=0.041;
Ia !P= (0.041!1.0") = 0.041;
qu = 950 csm/in. (from TR-55 Exhibit 4-II); and
A = 3.0 acres 31!640 mi2 per acre = 0.0047 mi2

Qp = (950 csm/in.)(0.0047 mi2)(0.83") = 3.7 cfs

For computing runoff volume and peak rate for storms larger than the Water Quality Storm (i.e., 2,
10 and 100 year storms), use the published CN’s from TR-55 and follow the prescribed procedure in
TR-55.

In some cases the Rational Formula may be used to compute peak discharges associated with the
Water Quality Storm. The designer must have available reliable intensity, duration, frequency (IDF)
tables or curves for the storm and region of interest. This information may not be available for many
locations and therefore the TR-55 method described above is recommended.

D.10.2
 Figure D-10.1 Curve Number (CN) for Water Quality Storm
- Rainfall (P) =1.0" & 0.9"

Appendix D.10. Method for Computing Peak Discharge for Water Quality Storm
100

98

96

94
P=0.9"
92
P=1.0"
Curve Number (CN)

90
D.10.3

88

86

84

82

80

78

76
0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 55 60 65 70 75 80 85 90 95 100
Percent Imperviousness (I )
Appendix D-10. Method for Computing Peak Discharge for Water Quality Storm
References

Pitt, R., 1994, Small Storm Hydrology. University of Alabama - Birmingham. Unpublished
manuscript. Presented at design of stormwater quality management practices. Madison, WI, May
17-19 1994.

Schueler, T.R. and R.A. Claytor, 1996, Design of Stormwater Filter Systems. Center for Watershed
Protection, Silver Spring, MD.

United States Department of Agriculture (USDA), 1986. Urban Hydrology for Small Watersheds.
Soil Conservation Service, Engineering Division. Technical Release 55 (TR-55).

D.10.4
Method for Computing the Channel Protection
Storage Volume (Cpv)
D.11
Appendix
Appendix D.11................... Method for Computing the Channel Protection Storage Volume (Cpv)

The following procedure shall be used to design the channel protection storage volume (Cpv). The
method is based on the Design Procedures for Stormwater Management Extended Detention Structures
(MDE, 1987) and utilizes the NRCS, TR-55 Graphical Peak Discharge Method (USDA, 1986).

" Compute the time of concentration (tc) and the one-year post-development runoff depth (Qa) in
inches.

Ia
" Compute the initial abstraction (Ia) [ I a = 200 − 2 ] and the ratio where P is the one-year
CN P
rainfall depth (see Table 2-2).

" With tc and Ia/P, find the unit peak factor (qu) from Figure D.11.1 and compute the one year post-
development peak discharge qi = quAQa where A is the drainage in square miles.

" If qi [ 2.0 cfs, Cpv is not required. Provide for water quality (WQv) and groundwater recharge (Rev)
as necessary.

" With qu, find the ratio of outflow to inflow (qo/qi) for T = 24 hours from Figure D.11.2 (use T=12
hours in USE III/IV waters).

qo
" Compute the peak outflow discharge qo = × qi
qi

" With qo/qi, compute the ratio of storage to runoff volume (Vs/Vr).

Vs = 0.683 − 1.43( qo ) + 1.64( qo ) 2 − 0.804( qo ) 3

Vr qi qi qi

" Compute the extended detention storage volume Vs = (Vs ) × Vr (note: Vr = Qa);
Vr
Vs
Convert Vs to acre-feet by × A , where Vs is in inches and A is in acres.
12

" Compute the required orifice area (Ao) for extended detention design:

qo qo
Ao = =
C 2 gho 4.81 ho
where ho is the maximum storage depth associated with Vs.

" Determine the required maximum orifice diameter (do) do = 4 Ao

π .
A do of less than 3.0” is subject to local jurisdictional approval, and is not recommended
unless an internal control for orifice protection is used (App. D.8).

D.11.1
 Appendix D-11….Method for Computing the Channel Protection Storage Volume (Cpv)
Figure D.11.1 SCS Graphical Method of Determining Peak Discharge (qu) in csm/in
for 24-Hour Type II Storm Distribution

1000

900

800
Unit Peak Discharge (qu), csm/in

700

Ia/P = 0.10
600
D.11.2

0.30
500
0.40
0.45 0.35
400
0.50

300

200

100
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1
Time of Concentration (tc) in Hours
 qo

Appendix D-11….Method for Computing the Channel Protection Storage Volume (Cpv)
Figure D.11.2 Detention Time Versus Discharge Ratios ( )
qi

0.500

0.450

0.400

0.350
Ratio of Outflow to Inflow (qo/qI)

0.300
D.11.3

0.250

0.200

0.150

T =12 hr
0.100

0.050 T =24 hr

0.000
50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400 450 500 550 600 650 700 750 800 850 900 950 1000

Unit Peak Discharge (qu), csm/in

Critical Erosive Velocity for Grass and Soil
D.12
Appendix
Appendix D.12. Critical Erosive Velocity for Grass and Soil

Velocity

Maximum permissible velocities of flow shall not exceed the values shown on the following table:

Table D.12.1 Permissible Velocities for Channels Lined with Vegetation

Channel Slope Lining Permissible

Velocity1 (ft/sec)

0-5% Reed canarygrass

Tall fescue 5
Kentucky bluegrass

Grass-legume mixture 4

Red fescue
Redtop 2.5
Sericea lespedeza
Annual lespedeza
Small grains
5-10% Reed canarygrass
Tall fescue 4
Kentucky bluegrass

Grass-legume mixture 3
Greater than Reed canarygrass
Tall fescue 3
10% Kentucky bluegrass

1
For highly erodible soils, permissible velocities should be decreased 25%. An erodibility factor
(K) greater than 0.35 would indicate a highly erodible soil. Erodibility factors (K-factors) for
Maryland soils are listed either in the Soil Survey or on the Soils-5 forms available in each Soil
Conservation District or local NRCS office.

Source: Soil and Water Conservation Engineering, Schwab, et al.

D.12.1
Method for Designing Infiltration Structures
D.13
Appendix
Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures

Introduction

The following procedures shall be used for designing infiltration trenches (I-1) and basins (I-2)
to meet the water quality (WQv), the channel protection (Cpv), and the overbank flood protection
(Qp) volume requirements. These methods are based on the 1984 Maryland Standards and
Specifications for Infiltration Practices (MDE, 1984) and Modelling Infiltration Practices Using
TR-20 (MDE, 1983).

The use of infiltration practices depends on careful site investigation. The feasibility conditions
listed in Chapter 3.3 and in Appendix D.1 are to be investigated and are equally important in
ensuring the proper function of an infiltration practice. Should a site investigation reveal that
any one of the feasibility tests is not adequate, the implementation of infiltration practices should
not be pursued. Alternate feasibility criteria may be permitted only in those conditions where the
local jurisdictions can justify and ensure proper application.

D.13.1 Soil Textures

The hydrologic design methods presented in this appendix are based on the utilization of two
hydrologic soil properties, the effective water capacity (Cw) and the minimum infiltration rate (f)
of the specific soil textural groups, as shown in Table D.13.1. The effective water capacity of a
soil is the fraction of the void spaces available for water storage, measured in inches per inch.
The minimum infiltration rate is the final rate that water passes through the soil profile during
saturated conditions, measured in terms of inches per hour. The hydrologic soil properties are
obtained by identifying the soil textures by a gradation test for each change in soil profile. The
soil textures presented in Table D.13.1 correspond to the soil textures of the U.S. Department of
Agriculture (USDA) Textural Triangle presented in Figure D.13.1.

The data presented in Table D.13.1 are based on the analysis of over 5,000 soil samples by the
USDA under carefully controlled procedures. The use of the soil properties established in Table
D.13.1 for design and review procedures will offer two advantages. First, it provides for
consistency of results in the design procedures. Second, it eliminates the need for the laborious
and costly process of conducting field and laboratory infiltration and permeability tests.

D.13.1
Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures

Table D.13.1 Hydrologic Soil Properties Classified by Soil Texture*

Texture Class Effective Water Minimum Hydrologic Soil

Capacity (Cw) Infiltration Rate (f) Grouping
(inch per inch) (inches per hour)
Sand 0.35 8.27 A
Loamy Sand 0.31 2.41 A
Sandy Loam 0.25 1.02 A
Loam 0.19 0.52 B
Silt Loam 0.17 0.27 B
Sandy Clay Loam 0.14 0.17 C
Clay Loam 0.14 0.09 D
Silty Clay Loam 0.11 0.06 D
Sandy Clay 0.09 0.05 D
Silty Clay 0.09 0.04 D
Clay 0.08 0.02 D
*
Source: Rawls, Brakensiek and Saxton, 1982

Based on the soil textural classes and the corresponding minimum infiltration rates, a restriction
is established to eliminate unsuitable soil conditions. Soil textures with minimum infiltration
rates less than 0.52 inches per hour are not suitable for usage of infiltration practices. These
include soils that have a 30 percent clay content, making these soils susceptible to frost heaving
and structurally unstable, in addition to having a poor capacity to percolate runoff. Soil textures
that are recommended for infiltration systems include those soils with infiltration rates of 0.52
inches per hour or greater, which include loam, sandy loam, loamy sand, and sand.

D.13.2
Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures

Figure D.13.1 USDA Soils Textural Triangle

D.13.3
Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures

D.13.2 Hydrologic Design Methods

D.13.2.1 General Design Situations

There are two general types of situations where infiltration practices may be used. First , one
may be interested in the dimensions of an infiltration device that is required to provide storage of
the WQv, and/or the Cpv or Qp. Second, site conditions may dictate the layout and capacity of
infiltration measures and one might be interested in determining the level of control provided by
such a layout. In the latter case, control may not be sufficient and additional control, possibly
using other acceptable Best Management Practices (BMPs), may be required. It is important to
emphasize that the same principles of design apply to both cases.

Design methodologies are presented for two infiltration practices: infiltration trenches (I-1) and
infiltration basins (I-2). The design procedures are based on either intercepting the WQv from
the area contributing runoff or using the truncated hydrograph method for control of the runoff
from an area for either Cpv or Qp. The design equations may be defined for either case of
stormwater quality or quantity control because the volume of water (Vw) stored in the individual
infiltration practice may be determined from the methods described in Chapter 2 (for WQv) and
in Appendix D.13.3 for Cpv and/or Qp.

D.13.2.2 Design of Infiltration Trenches (I-1)

The design of an infiltration trench is based on the textural class of the soils underlying the
trench such that a feasible design is possible. The design of an infiltration trench is also based
on the maximum allowable depth of the trench (dmax). The maximum allowable depth should
meet the following criteria:
fT
d max = s
n
Where f is the final infiltration rate of the trench area in inches per hour, Ts is the maximum
allowable storage time in hours, and n is the porosity (Vv/Vt) of the stone reservoir.

An infiltration trench is sized to accept the design volume that enters the trench (Vw) plus the
volume of rain that falls on the surface of the trench (PAt) minus the exfiltration volume (fTAt)
out of the bottom of the trench. Based on the SCS hydrograph analysis, the effective filling time
for most infiltration trenches (T) will generally be less than two hours. The volume of water that
must be stored in the trench (V) is defined as:
where P is the design rainfall event (ft), and At is the trench surface area (ft2). For most design
V = Vw + PAt − fTAt (Equation D - 13.1)

D.13.4
Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures
storm events, the volume of water due to rainfall on the surface area of the trench (PAt) is small
when compared to the design volume (Vw) of the trench and may be ignored with little loss in
accuracy to the final design.

The volume of rainfall and runoff entering the trench can be defined in terms of trench geometry.
The gross volume of the trench (Vt) is equal to the ratio of the volume of water that must be
stored (V) to the porosity (n) of the stone reservoir in the trench; Vt is also equal to the product of
the depth (dt) and the surface area (At):

Vt = V = d t At n ( Equation D - 13.2)
n

Combining equations D.13.1 and D.13.2 yields the following relationship:

d t At n = Vw − fTAt ( Equation D - 13.3)

Because both dimensions of the trench are unknown, this equation may be rearranged to
determine the area of the trench (At) if the value of dt were set based on either the location of the
water table or the maximum allowable depth of the trench (dmax):

Vw
At =
nd t + fT
Procedures for Infiltration Trench Design

1. Determine the volume of water for storage using the methods for WQv, Cpv, or Qp found in
Chapter 2 and/or Appendix D.13.3.

2. Compute the maximum allowable trench depth (dmax) from the feasibility equation, d max = fTs n
Select the trench design depth (dt) based on the depth that is the required depth above the
seasonal groundwater table, or a depth less than or equal to dmax, whichever results in the
smaller depth.

3. Compute the trench surface area (At) for the particular soil type using Equation D.13.3.

D.13.5
Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures

In the event that the sidewalls of the trench must be sloped for stability during construction, the
surface dimensions of the trench should be based on the following equation:

At = ( L − Zd t )(W − Zd t )
where L and W are the top length an( A
t + Ab )d b
d width, and Z:1 is the trench side slope ratio. The design
V =
procedure would begin by selecting a top width (W (Equation
) that is gD than 23Zdt for a specified
- 13.5)
reater
2
slope (Z). The side slope ratio value will depend on the soil type and the depth of the trench.
At
L = Zd t +
W − Zd t
The top length (L) may then be determined as:

D.13.2.3 Design of Infiltration Basins (I-2)

The design of an infiltration basin is based on the same soil textural properties and maximum
allowable depth as the infiltration trench such that a feasible design is possible. However,
because the infiltration basin uses an open area or shallow depression for storage, the maximum
allowable depth (dmax) should meet the following criteria:
d max = f × T p
where f is the final infiltration rate of the trench area in inches per hour and Tp is the maximum
allowable ponding time in hours.

An infiltration basin is sized to accept the design volume that enters the basin (Vw) plus the
volume of rain that falls on the surface of the basin (PAb) minus the exfiltration volume (fTAb)
out of the bottom of the basin. Based on the SCS hydrograph analysis, the effective filling time
for most infiltration basins will generally be less than two hours therefore use T = 2 hours. The
volume of water that must be stored in the trench (V) is defined as

V = Vw + PAb − fTAb ( Equation D - 13.4)

where P is the design rainfall event (ft), and Ab is the basin surface area (ft2). For most design
storm events, the volume of water due to rainfall on the surface area of the basin (PAb) is small
when compared to the design volume (Vw) of the basin and may be ignored with little loss in
accuracy to the final design.

The volume of rainfall and runoff entering the basin can be defined in terms of basin geometry.
The geometry of a basin will generally be in the shape of an excavated trapezoid with specified
side slopes. The volume of a trapezoidal shaped basin may be approximated by:

where At is the top surface area of the basin (ft2), Ab is the bottom surface area of the basin (ft2),

D.13.6

2Vw − At d b
Ab = (Equation D - 13.6)
( d b − 2 P + 2 fT )
Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures
and db is the basin depth (ft). By setting Equations D.13.4 and D.13.5 equal the following
equation may be used to define the bottom area (Ab):

If a rectilinear shape is used, the bottom length and width of the basin may be defined in terms of
the top length and width as:
Lb = Lt − 2 Zd b
Wb = Wt − 2 Zd b

where Z is a specified side slope ratio (Z:1). By substituting the above relationships for Lb and
Wb, into Equation D.13.6, the following equation is derived for the basin top length:

Vw + Zd b (Wt − 2 Zd b )
Lt = (Equation D - 13.7)
Wt (d b − P ) − Zd b2

Procedures for Infiltration Basin Design

1. Determine the volume of water for storage using the methods for WQv, Cpv, or Qp found in
Chapter 2 and/or Appendix D.13.3.

2. Compute the maximum allowable basin depth (dmax) from the feasibility equation, dmax = fTp.
Select the basin design depth (db) based on the depth that is the required depth above the
seasonal groundwater table, or a depth less than or equal to dmax, whichever results in the
smaller depth.

3. Compute the basin surface area dimensions for the particular soil type using Equation
D.13.6.

Note: If a rectilinear shape is used, the basin top length (Lt) and width (Wt) must be greater
than 2Zdb for a feasible solution. If Lt and Wt are not greater than 2Zdb the bottom
dimensions would be less than or equal to zero. In this case, the basin depth (db) shall be
reduced for a feasible solution.

D.13.3 The Truncated Hydrograph Method for Stormwater Quantity Management

Most stormwater polices require that the peak discharge from the post-developed hydrograph for a
selected return period(s) not exceed the peak discharge from the pre-developed hydrograph after
development for stream channel erosion control and/or flood control purposes. In previous
stormwater quantity management infiltration design methods, the difference between the pre-
development and post-development runoff volumes was stored in the proposed infiltration structure.
In most cases, this volume of runoff occurs prior to the actual hydrograph peak (see Figure D.13.2)
and therefore actual peak discharge control is not provided. Therefore, when considering infiltration

D.13.7
Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures
practices for peak discharge or stormwater quantity control, the truncated hydrograph method should
be used to determine the necessary infiltration storage volumes.

The pre-development and post-development peak discharges can be computed using standard SCS
methodology (TR-55 Tabular or TR-20). The time (T2) at which the allowable discharge occurs on
the receding limb of the post-development hydrography, as shown in Figure D.13.1 is determined
from the SCS methods. The volume of runoff under the post-development hydrograph and to the left
of the allowable discharge at T2 is the design storage volume (V).

The computed infiltration storage volume, V, may be adjusted to account for the volume of water
which exfiltrates from the infiltration structure during the period of time required to fill the structure.
The exfiltration volume (Ve) is the product of the minimum soil infiltration rate (ft/hr), the filling
time (hrs), and the surface area of the infiltration practice. The filling time (Tf) of the infiltration
practice may be determined directly from the post-development hydrograph as shown in Figure
D.13.1. Tf is the difference between T2, where the allowable discharge occurs on the recession limb
and the time T1 where the discharge value on the rising of the hydrograph is equal to the minimum
infiltration discharge. The minimum discharge is equal to the minimum soil infiltration rate (ft/sec)
times the surface area (ft2) of the infiltration practice.

D.13.8
 Appendix D.13...............................................Method for Designing Infiltration Structures
Figure D.13.2 Truncated Hydrograph Method
D.13.9
Eastern Shore (Delmarva) Dimensionless
Hydrograph
D.14
Appendix
 Figure D.14.1 SCS Graphical Method of Determining Peak Discharge (qu) in csm/in
For Delmarva Peninsula

Appendix D.14 ...................... Eastern Shore (Delmarva) Dimensionless Hydrograph

800

700

600
Unit Peak Discharge (qu), csm/in

500
D-14.1

400

300

200

100

0
0.10 0.20 0.30 0.40 0.50 0.60 0.70 0.80 0.90 1.00

Time of Concentration (tc) in Hours

 Figure D.14.2 Dimensionless Unit Hydrographs
SCS (484) and Delmarva (284)
1.2

Appendix D.14 ...................... Eastern Shore (Delmarva) Dimensionless Hydrograph

Delmarva D.U.H. (284)

0.8
Dimensionless Time Increment

SCS Standard D.U.H. (484)

D-14.2

0.6

0.4

0.2

0
0 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.4 0.5 0.6 0.7 0.8 0.9 1

Dimensionless Rate of Flow

Appendix D.14................................Eastern Shore (Delmarva) Dimensionless Hydrograph

Table D.14.1 Standard 24-Hour Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph

Dimensionless Time Increment = 0.02
Δt x.x0 x.x2 x.x4 x.x6 x.x8
0.0 0.0 0.0300 0.100 0.1900 0.31
0.1 0.47 0.66 0.82 0.93 0.99
0.2 1.00 0.99 0.93 0.86 0.78
0.3 0.68 0.56 0.46 0.39 0.33
0.4 0.28 0.241 0.207 0.174 0.147
0.5 0.126 0.107 0.091 0.077 0.066
0.6 0.055 0.047 0.04 0.034 0.029
0.7 0.025 0.021 0.018 0.015 0.013
0.8 0.011 0.009 0.008 0.007 0.006
0.9 0.005 0.004 0.003 0.002 0.001
1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Computed Peak Rate Factor = 484.00

Table D.14.2 24-Hour Dimensionless Unit Hydrograph for Use in the Delmarva Peninsula
Dimensionless Time Increment = 0.02
Δt x.x0 x.x2 x.x4 x.x6 x.x8
0.0 0.0 0.111 0.356 0.655 0.896
0.1 1.000 0.929 0.828 0.737 0.656
0.2 0.584 0.521 0.465 0.415 0.371
0.3 0.331 0.296 0.265 0.237 0.212
0.4 0.190 0.170 0.153 0.138 0.123
0.5 0.109 0.097 0.086 0.076 0.066
0.6 0.057 0.049 0.041 0.033 0.027
0.7 0.024 0.021 0.018 0.015 0.013
0.8 0.012 0.011 0.009 0.008 0.008
0.9 0.006 0.006 0.005 0.005 0.0
1.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0 0.0
Computed Peak Rate Factor = 284.00

D.14.3
Miscellaneous MD SHA Design Charts
for Determining Pipe Inlet Control
D.15
Appendix
Appendix D.15....................................................... Miscellaneous MD SHA Design Charts

D.15.1
Appendix D.15....................................................... Miscellaneous MD SHA Design Charts

D.15.2
Appendix D.15....................................................... Miscellaneous MD SHA Design Charts

D.15.3
Appendix D.15....................................................... Miscellaneous MD SHA Design Charts

D.15.4
Stormwater Credits for Innovative Site Planning
E.1
Appendix
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits .......................................................... Introduction

E.1.0 Stormwater Credits

In Maryland, there are many programs at both the State and local level that seek to minimize
the impact of land development. Critical Areas, forest conservation, and local stream buffer
requirements are designed to reduce nonpoint source pollution. Non-structural practices can
play a significant role in reducing water quality impacts and are increasingly recognized as a
critical feature of every stormwater BMP plan, particularly with respect to site design. In most
cases, non-structural practices must be combined with structural practices to meet stormwater
requirements. The key benefit of non-structural practices is that they can reduce the generation
of stormwater from the site; thereby reducing the size and cost of stormwater storage. In
addition, they can provide partial removal of many pollutants. Non-structural practices have
been classified into six broad groups and are designed to mesh with existing state and local
programs (e.g., forest conservation, stream buffers etc.). To promote greater use, a series of
six stormwater credits are provided for designers that use these site planning techniques.

Credit 1. Natural Area Conservation

Credit 2. Disconnection of Rooftop Runoff
Credit 3. Disconnection of Non Rooftop Runoff
Credit 4. Sheet Flow to Buffers
Credit 5. Open Channel Use
Credit 6. Environmentally Sensitive Development

This chapter describes each of the credits for the six groups of non-structural practices,
specifies minimum criteria to be eligible for the credit, and provides an example of how the
credit is calculated. Designers should check with the appropriate approval authority to ensure
that the credit is applicable to their jurisdiction. Clearly both of the site designs used to
illustrate the credits could be more creative to provide more non-structural opportunities.

In general, the stormwater sizing criteria provide a strong incentive to reduce impervious cover
at development sites (e.g., Rev, WQv, Cpv or Qp and Qf). Storage requirements for all five
stormwater sizing criteria are directly related to impervious cover. Thus, significant
reductions in impervious cover result in smaller required storage volumes and, consequently,
lower BMP construction costs.

These and other site design techniques can help to reduce impervious cover, and consequently,
the stormwater treatment volume needed at a site. The techniques presented in this chapter are
considered options to be used by the designer to help reduce the need for stormwater BMP
storage capacity. Due to local safety codes, soil conditions, and topography, some of these site
design features will be restricted. Designers are encouraged to consult with the appropriate
approval authority to determine restrictions on non-structural strategies.

NOTE: This chapter contains archived material and is presented here for historical
purposes only.

E.1.1 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits ...............................................................................Introduction
These credits are an integral part of a project’s overall stormwater management plan and BMP
storage volume calculation. Therefore, use of these credits shall be documented at the initial
(concept) design stage, documented with submission of final grading plans, and verified with
“as-built” certifications. If a planned credit is not implemented, then BMP volumes shall be
increased appropriately to meet Rev, WQv, Cpv, and Qp where applicable.

Table E.1.1 Summary of Stormwater Credits

Stormwater Credit WQv Rev Cpv or Qp

No credit. Use as
Natural Area receiving area Forest/meadow CN for
Reduce Site Area
Conservation w/Percent Area natural areas
Method.
No credit. Use with Longer tc
Disconnection of
Reduced Rv Percent Area (increased flow path).
Rooftop Runoff
Method. CN credit.
Disconnection of No credit. Use with Longer tc (increased
Non-Rooftop Reduced Rv Percent Area flow path)
Runoff Method. CN credit
Sheet Flow to Subtract
Buffers contributing site Reduced Rev CN credit
area to BMP
Longer tc
Open Channel Use May meet WQv Meets Rev (increased flow path)
No CN credit
Environmentally
No CN credit
Sensitive Meets WQv Meets Rev
tc may increase
Development

Supp. 1 E.1.2
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits for Innovative Site Planning .......Natural Area Conservation

Section E.1.1 Natural Area Conservation Credit

Natural Area Conservation Credit

A stormwater credit is given when natural areas are conserved at development sites,
thereby retaining pre development hydrologic and water quality characteristics. A simple
WQv credit is granted for all conservation areas permanently protected under conservation
easements or other locally acceptable means. Examples of natural area conservation
include:

¾ forest retention areas

¾ non-tidal wetlands and associated buffers
¾ other lands in protective easement (floodplains, open space, steep slopes)
¾ stream systems

Under the credit, a designer can subtract conservation areas from total site area when
computing the water quality volume. The volumetric runoff coefficient, Rv, is still
calculated based on the percent impervious cover for the entire site.

As an additional incentive, the post development curve number (CN) used to compute the
Cpv or Qp2, and Qp10 for all natural areas protected by conservation easements can be
assumed to be woods in good condition when calculating the total site CN.

As an example, the required WQv for a ten acre site with three acres of impervious area and
three acres of protected conservation area before the credit would be:

WQv = [(P)(Rv)(A)]/12; where P= 1”, Rv= 0.05+0.009(30%)

WQv = [(1”) (0.32)(10 acres)]/12 = 0.266 acre-feet.

Under the credit, three acres of conservation are subtracted from total site area, which yields a
smaller storage volume:

WQv =[(P)(Rv)(A)]/12; where P=1”, Rv=0.05+0.009(30%)

WQv =[(1”)(0.32)(10-3 acres)]/12 = 0.187 acre-feet.

The recharge requirement (Rev) is not reduced using this credit.

E.1.3 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits ....................................................... Natural Area Conservation

Criteria for Natural Area Credit

To receive the credit, the proposed conservation area:

• Shall not be disturbed during project construction (e.g., cleared or graded) except for
temporary impacts associated with incidental utility construction or mitigation and
afforestation projects,

• Shall be protected by having the limits of disturbance clearly shown on all construction
drawings and delimited in the field except as provided for above,

• Shall be located within an acceptable conservation easement or other enforceable

instrument that ensures perpetual protection of the proposed area. The easement must
clearly specify how the natural area vegetation shall be managed and boundaries will be
marked [Note: managed turf (e.g., playgrounds, regularly maintained open areas) is not an
acceptable form of vegetation management], and
• Shall be located on the development project.

Supp. 1 E.1.4
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits for Innovative Site Planning .......Natural Area Conservation

Example of Calculating Natural Area Credit

Site Data - 51 Single Family
Lots
Area = 38 ac.
Conservation Area = 7.0 ac
Impervious Area = 13.8 ac
Rv = .38, P= 0.9”
Post dev. CN = 78
Original WQv = 1.08 ac-ft.
Original Rev = .25 ac-ft.
Original Cpv = 1.65 ac-ft.
Original Qp10 = 2.83 ac-ft.

Computation of Stormwater Credits

WQv = [(P)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(0.9)(.38)(38.0 - 7.0 ac.)]/12
= 0.89 ac-ft

Rev = Same as original

(However, area draining to Natural Area may used with the Percent Area Method)

Cpv and Qp10 (total site): CN reduced from 78 to 75

E.1.5 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits ................................................. Rooftop Runoff Disconnection

Section E.1.2 Disconnection of Rooftop Runoff Credit

Disconnection of Rooftop Runoff Credit

A credit is given when rooftop runoff is disconnected and then directed to a pervious area
where it can either infiltrate into the soil or filter over it. The credit is typically obtained
by grading the site to promote overland filtering or by providing bioretention areas on
single family residential lots.

If a rooftop is adequately disconnected, the disconnected impervious area may be deducted

from total impervious cover (therefore reducing WQv). In addition, disconnected rooftops
can be used to meet the Rev requirement as a non-structural practice using the percent area
method (see Chapter 2).

Post development CN’s for disconnected rooftop areas used to compute Cpv and Qp can be
assumed to be woods in good condition.

Criteria for Disconnection of Rooftop Runoff Credit

The credit is subject to the following restrictions:

• Rooftop cannot be within a designated hotspot,

• Disconnection shall cause no basement seepage,
• The contributing area of rooftop to each disconnected discharge shall be 500 square feet or
less,
• The length of the "disconnection" shall be 75’ or greater, or compensated using Table
E.1.2,
• Dry wells, french drains, rain gardens, or other similar storage devices may be utilized to
compensate for areas with disconnection lengths less than 75 feet. (See Table E.1.2 and
Figure E.1.1, dry wells are prohibited in “D” soils),
• In residential development applications, disconnections will only be credited for lot sizes
greater than 6000 sq. ft.,
• The entire vegetative "disconnection" shall be on an average slope of 5% or less,
• The disconnection must drain continuously through a vegetated channel, swale, or through
a filter strip to the property line or BMP,
• Downspouts must be at least 10 feet away from the nearest impervious surface to
discourage "re-connections”, and
• For those rooftops draining directly to a buffer, only the rooftop disconnection credit or the
buffer credit may be used, not both.

Supp. 1 E.1.6
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits ..................................... Rooftop Runoff Disconnection

Figure E.1.1 Schematic of Dry Well

Table E.1.2 Rooftop Disconnection Compensation Storage Volume Requirements

(Per Disconnection Using Drywells, Raingardens, etc.)
Disconnection 0 - 14 ft. 15 - 29 ft. 30 - 44 ft. 45 - 59 ft. 60 - 74 ft. ≥ 75 ft.
Length Provided
% WQv Treated 0% 20% 40% 60% 80% 100%
by Disconnect
% WQv Treated 100% 80% 60% 40% 20% 0%
by Storage
Max. Storage 40 cu-ft. 32 cu-ft. 24 cu-ft. 16 cu-ft. 8 cu-ft. 0 cu-ft.
Volume*
(Eastern Rainfall
Zone)
Max. Storage 36 cu-ft. 28.8 cu-ft. 21.6 cu-ft. 14.4 cu-ft. 7.2 cu-ft. 0 cu-ft.
Volume*
(Western Rainfall
Zone)

*Assuming 500 square feet roof area to each downspout.

E.1.7 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits ................................................. Rooftop Runoff Disconnection

Example of Using the Rooftop Disconnection Credit

Site Data - 51 Single Family Lots
Area = 38 ac., ½ acre lots
Original Impervious Area = 13.80
ac.
Original Rv = .38
Post dev. CN = 78
# of Disconnected Rooftops = 22
Original WQv = 1.08 ac-ft
Original Rev = 0.25 ac-ft
Original Cpv = 1.65 ac-ft
Original Qpv = 2.83 ac-ft

60% B Soils
40% C Soils
Composite S=0.208 (20.8%)

22 Lots Disconnected w/5

Downspouts each.
∴ 2500 sq. ft. each lot

Net impervious area reduction =

(22)(2500)/43560 = 1.3 ac

Net Impervious Area =

13.8 - 1.3 = 12.5 acres
Computation of Stormwater Credit:

New Rv= 0.05+.009 (12.5 ac/38 ac) = .35

∴ WQv= [(0.9)(.35)(38 ac)]!12 = 1.00 ac-ft.

Required Rev (Percent Area Method)

Rev = 20.8%× 13.8 ac. =2.87 acres
Rev treated by disconnection =1.3 acres
Rev remaining for treatment = 1.57 acres non structurally or 0.14 acre-feet structurally

Cpv and Qp (total site): CN reduced from 78 to 76

Supp. 1 E.1.8
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits ............................... Non Rooftop Runoff Disconnection

Section E.1.3 Disconnection of Non Rooftop Runoff Credit

Disconnection of Non Rooftop Runoff Credit

Credit is given for practices that disconnect surface impervious cover runoff by directing it
to pervious areas where it is either infiltrated into the soil or filtered (by overland flow).
This credit can be obtained by grading the site to promote overland vegetative filtering or
providing bioretention areas on single family residential lots.

These "disconnected" areas can be subtracted from the impervious area when computing
WQv. In addition, disconnected surface impervious cover can be used to meet the Rev
requirement as a non-structural practice using the percent area method (See Chapter 2).

Criteria for Disconnection of Non Rooftop Runoff Credit

The credit is subject to the following restrictions:

• Runoff cannot come from a designated hotspot,

• The maximum contributing impervious flow path length shall be 75 feet,
• The disconnection shall drain continuously through a vegetated channel, swale, or filter
strip to the property line or BMP,
• The length of the "disconnection" must be equal to or greater than the contributing length,
• The entire vegetative "disconnection" shall be on an average slope of 5% or less,
• The surface impervious area to any one discharge location cannot exceed 1,000 ft2.
• Disconnections are encouraged on relatively permeable soils (HSG’s A and B),
• If the site cannot meet the required disconnect length, a spreading device, such as a french
drain, rain garden, gravel trench or other storage device may be needed for compensation,
and
• For those areas draining directly to a buffer, only the non rooftop disconnection credit or
the stream buffer credit can be used, not both.

E.1.9 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits ......................................... Non Rooftop Runoff Disconnection

Example of Calculating the Non Rooftop Disconnection Credit

Site Data -Community Center
Area = 3.0 ac
Original Impervious Area =
1.9 ac. = 63.3%
Original Rv = .62
Post dev. CN = 83
B Soils, S = 0.26
Original WQv = 6752 ft3
Original Rev = 1688 ft3
Original Cpv = N/A
Original Qp2 = 10,630 ft3

0.33 ac of surface
imperviousness disconnected

Net impervious area

reduction
1.9 - 0.33 = 1.57 ac.
Computation of Stormwater Credit:

New Rv = 0.05+.009 (1.57 ac/3.0 ac)= .52

∴WQv = [(1.0)(0.52)(3.0 ac)]/12 = 0.13 ac-ft (5662.8 cf)

Required Rev (Percent area method)

Rev = (S)(Ai) = (0.26)(1.9 ac.) = 0.49 acres
Rev treated by disconnection = 0.33 acres
Rev remaining for treatment = 0.16 acres non structurally or 551.2 cf structurally

Cpv and Qp Post developed CN may be reduced

Supp. 1 E.1.10
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits ..................................................Sheetflow to Buffers

Section E.1.4 Sheetflow to Buffer Credit

Sheetflow to Buffer Credit

This credit is given when stormwater runoff is effectively treated by a natural buffer to a
stream or forested area. Effective treatment is achieved when pervious and impervious area
runoff is discharged to a grass or forested buffer through overland flow. The use of a filter
strip is also recommended to treat overland flow in the green space of a development site.
The credits include:

1. The area draining by sheet flow to a buffer is subtracted from the total site area in
the WQv calculation.
2. The area draining to the buffer contributes to the recharge requirement, Rev.
3. A wooded CN can be used for the contributing area if it drains to a forested buffer.

Criteria for Sheetflow to Buffer Credit

The credit is subject to the following conditions:

• The minimum buffer width shall be 50 feet as measured from bankfull elevation or
centerline of the buffer,
• The maximum contributing length shall be 150 feet for pervious surfaces and 75 feet for
impervious surfaces,
• Runoff shall enter the buffer as sheet flow. Either the average contributing overland slope
shall be 5.0% or less, or a level spreading device shall be used where sheet flow can no
longer be maintained (see Detail No. 9 in Appendix D.8),
• Not applicable if rooftop or non rooftop disconnection is already provided (see Credits 2 &
3),
• Buffers shall remain unmanaged other than routine debris removal, and
• Shall be protected by an acceptable conservation easement or other enforceable instrument
that ensures perpetual protection of the proposed area. The easement must clearly specify
how the natural area vegetation shall be managed and boundaries will be marked [Note:
managed turf (e.g., playgrounds, regularly maintained open areas) is not an acceptable
form of vegetation management].

Figure E.1.2 illustrates how a buffer or filter strip can be used to treat stormwater from
adjacent pervious and impervious areas.

E.1.11 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits ................................................................. Sheetflow to Buffers

Figure E.1.2 Example of Sheetflow to Buffer Credit

Supp. 1 E.1.12
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits ..................................................Sheetflow to Buffers

Example of Using the Sheetflow to Buffer Credit

Site Data - 51 Single Family
Area = 38.0 ac
Original Impervious Area =
13.8 ac = 36.3%
Original Rv = .38
Post-dev. CN = 78

Original WQv = 1.08 ac-ft

Original Rev = 0.24 ac-ft
Original Cpv = 1.65 ac-ft
Original Qpv = 2.83 ac-ft

Credit
5.0 ac draining to
buffer/filter strip
Rooftops represent 3% of
site imperviousness = 0.41
acres

Computation of Stormwater Credits

New drainage area = 38 ac.– 5 ac.= 33.0 acres

Rv remains unchanged to BMP; Rv=0.05+0.009(36.3)=0.38

WQv =[(P)(Rv)(A)/!12
=[(0.9)(0.38)(33.0 ac.)]/12
= 0.94 ac-ft

Required Rev (Percent Area Method)

Rev = 20.8%×13.8 ac. = 2.87 acres
Rev treated by disconnection = 0.41 acres
Rev remaining for treatment = 2.46 acres non structurally or 0.214 ac-ft structurally

Cpv and Qp (total site): CN is reduced slightly.

E.1.13 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits .......................................................................... Grass Channel

Section E.1.5 Grass Channel Credit

Grass Channel Credit (in lieu of Curb and Gutter):

Credit may be given when open grass channels are used to reduce the volume of runoff and
pollutants during smaller storms (e.g., < 1 inch). The schematic of the grass channel is
provided in Figure 5.3.

Use of a grass channel will automatically meet the Rev for impervious areas draining into
the channel. However, Rev for impervious areas not draining to grass channels must still be
addressed. If designed according to the following criteria, the grass channel will meet the
WQv as well.

CNs for channel protection or peak flow control (Cpv or Qp) will not change.

Criteria for the Grass Channel Credit

The WQv credit is obtained if a grass channel meets the following criteria:

• The maximum flow velocity for runoff from the one-inch rainfall shall be less than or equal
to 1.0 fps (see Appendix D.10 for methodology to compute flowrate),
• The maximum flow velocity for runoff from the ten-year design event shall be non erosive,
• The bottom width shall be 2 feet minimum and 8 feet maximum,
• The side slopes shall be 3:1 or flatter,
• The channel slope shall be less than or equal to 4.0%, and
• Not applicable if rooftop disconnection is already provided (see Credit 2).

An example of a grass channel is provided in Figure E.1.3.

Supp. 1 E.1.14
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits ......................................................... Grass Channel

Figure E.1.3 Example of Grass Channel

E.1.15 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits .......................................................................... Grass Channel

Example of Grass Channel Credit

Site Data - 51 Single Family
Residences
Area = 38.0 ac
Original Impervious Area =
13.8 = 36.3%
Rv = .38
CN = 78

Original WQv = 1.08 ac-ft

Original Rev = 0.25 ac-ft
Original Cpv = 1.65 ac-ft
Original Qpv = 2.83 ac-ft

Credit
12.5 acres meet grass
channel criteria

Computation of Stormwater Credits

New WQv Area = 38 ac - 12.5 ac = 25.5 ac

WQv = [(0.9)(0.38)(25.5 ac.)]/12
= 0.74 ac-ft

Required Rev (Percent Area Method)

Rev =20.8%×13.8 ac. =2.87 acres
4.5 acres of imperviousness lie within area drained by grass channels, and
4.5 acres > 2.87 acres
∴ Rev requirement is met.
Cpv and Qp: No change

Supp. 1 E.1.16
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits ...............................................Sensitive Development

Section E.1.6 Environmentally Sensitive Development Credit

Environmentally Sensitive Development

Credit is given when a group of environmental site design techniques are applied to low
density or residential development. The credit eliminates the need for structural practices to
treat both the Rev and WQv and is intended for use on large lots.

Criteria for Environmentally Sensitive Development Credit

These criteria can be met without the use of structural practices in certain low density
residential developments when the following conditions are met:

For Single Lot Development:

• total site impervious cover is less than 15%,
• lot size shall be at least two acres,
• rooftop runoff is disconnected in accordance with the criteria outlined in Section E.1.2, and
• grass channels are used to convey runoff versus curb and gutter.

For Multiple Lot Development:

• total site impervious cover is less than 15%,
• lot size shall be at least two acres if clustering techniques are not used,
• if clustering techniques are used, the average lot size shall not be greater than 50% of the
minimum lot size as identified in the appropriate local zoning ordinance and shall be at
least one half acre,
• rooftop runoff is disconnected in accordance with the criteria outlined in Section E.1.2,
• grass channels are used to convey runoff versus curb and gutter,
• a minimum of 25% of the site is protected in natural conservation areas (by permanent
easement or other similar measure), and
• the design shall address stormwater (Rev, WQv, Cpv, and/or Qp10) for all roadway and
connected impervious surfaces.

E.1.17 Supp. 1
Appendix E.1. Stormwater Credits ............................................................ Sensitive Development

Example of Environmentally Sensitive Development

Site Data - 1 Single Family Lot
Area = 2.5 ac
Conservation Area = 0.6 ac
Impervious Area = .35 ac (includes
adjacent road surface) = 14%
B soils
Eastern Rainfall Zone for WQv
Rv = 0.05+0.009(14) = .18
CN = 65

WQv : Use P=0.2 as I<15%

WQv = [(0.2)(A)]/12
= [(0.2)(2.5)]/12×(43560 ft/ac.)
= 1,815 ft3
Rev = [(S)(Rv)(A)]/12
= [(0.26)(0.18)(2.5)]/12×(43,560ft/ac.)
= 424.7 ft3

Computation of Stormwater Credits:

WQv is met by site design

Rev is met by site design
Cpv and Qp: No change in CN, tc may be longer which would reduce Qp requirements

Supp. 1 E.1.18
Chapter E.1. Stormwater Credits ....................................................... Other Strategies

Section E.1.7 Dealing with Multiple Credits

Site designers are encouraged to utilize as many credits as they can on a site. Greater
reductions in stormwater storage volumes can be achieved when many credits are combined
(e.g., disconnecting rooftops and protecting natural conservation areas). However, credits
cannot be claimed twice for an identical area of the site (e.g. claiming credit for stream buffers
and disconnecting rooftops over the same site area).

Section E.1. 8 Other Strategies to Reduce Impervious Cover

Definition: Site planning practices that reduce the creation of impervious area in new
residential and commercial development and therefore reduce the WQv for the site.

Examples of progressive site design practices that minimize the creation of impervious cover
include:
• Narrower residential road sections • Angled one way parking
• Shorter road lengths • Subdivisions with open space
• Smaller turnarounds and cul-de-sac radii • Smaller front yard setbacks
• Permeable spill-over parking areas • Shared parking and driveways
• Smaller parking demand ratios • Narrower sidewalks
• Smaller parking stalls

It should be noted that most site designers may have little ability to control these requirements,
which are typically enshrined in local subdivision, parking and/or street codes.

Where these techniques are employed, it may be possible to reduce stormwater storage
volumes. For example, because the WQv is directly based on impervious cover, a reduction in
impervious cover reduces WQv. For Cpv and Qp, the designer can compute curve numbers
(CN) based on the actual measured impervious area at a site using:

(98)I + ∑ (CN )(P )

CN =
A
where:
CN = curve number for the appropriate pervious cover
I = impervious area at the site
P = pervious area at the site
A = total site area

E.1.19 Supp. 1